WL200 Series Inverter Instruction Manual
WL200 Series Inverter
Instruction Manual
 Single-phase Input 200V class
 Three-phase Input
Manual Number: NT353X
November 2015
400V class
After read this manual,
Keep it handy for future reference.
Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
i
Safety Messages
For the best results with the WL200 Series inverter, carefully read this manual and all of the
warning labels attached to the inverter before installing and operating it, and follow the
instructions exactly. Keep this manual handy for quick reference.
Definitions and Symbols
A safety instruction (message) includes a “Safety Alert Symbol” and a signal word or phrase
such as WARNING or CAUTION. Each signal word has the following meaning:
HIGH VOLTAGE: This symbol indicates high voltage. It calls your attention to items or
operations that could be dangerous to you and other persons operating this equipment.
Read the message and follow the instructions carefully.
WARNING: indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, can result in
serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, can result in
minor to moderate injury or serious damage to the product. The situation described in the
CAUTION may, if not avoided, lead to serious results. Important safety measures are
described in CAUTION (as well as WARNING), so be sure to observe them.
Step 1: Indicates a step in a series of action steps required to accomplish a goal. The
number of the step will be contained in the step symbol.
NOTE: Notes indicates an area or subject of special merit, emphasizing either the product’s
capability or common errors in operation or maintenance.
TIP: Tips give a special instruction that can save time or provide other benefits while
installing or using the product. The tip calls attention to an idea that may not be obvious to
first-time users of the product.
Hazardous High Voltage
HIGH VOLTAGE: Motor control equipment and electronic controllers are connected to
hazardous line voltages. When servicing drives and electronic controllers, there may be
exposed components with housing or protrusions at or above line potential. Extreme care
should be taken to protect against shock.
Stand on an insulating pad and make it a habit to use only one hand when checking
components. Always work with another person in case an emergency occurs. Disconnect
power before checking controllers or performing maintenance. Be sure equipment is
properly grounded. Wear safety glasses whenever working on electronic controllers or
rotating machinery.
ii
Caution when using Safe Stop Function
When using Safe Stop function, make sure to check whether the safe stop function
properly works when installation (before starting operation). Please carefully refer
to Appendix E (Certification in progress)
General Precautions – Read These First!
WARNING: This equipment should be installed, adjusted, and serviced by qualified
electrical maintenance personnel familiar with the construction and operation of the
equipment and the hazards involved. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
bodily injury.
WARNING: The user is responsible for ensuring that all driven machinery, drive train
mechanism not supplied by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd., and process line
material are capable of safe operation at an applied frequency of 150% of the maximum
selected frequency range to the AC motor. Failure to do so can result in destruction of
equipment and injury to personnel should a single-point failure occur.
WARNING: For equipment protection, install a ground leakage type breaker with a fast
response circuit capable of handling large currents. The ground fault protection circuit is
not designed to protect against personal injury.
WARNING: HAZARDOUS OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK. DISCONNECT INCOMING POWER
BEFORE WORKING ON THIS CONTROL.
WARNING: Wait at least ten (10) minutes after turning OFF the input power supply before
performing maintenance or an inspection. Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.
CAUTION: These instructions should be read and clearly understood before working on
WL200 series equipment.
CAUTION: Proper grounds, disconnecting devices and other safety devices and their
location are the responsibility of the user and are not provided by Hitachi Industrial
Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
CAUTION: Be sure to connect a motor thermal disconnect switch or overload device to the
WL200 series controller to assure that the inverter will shut down in the event of an
overload or an overheated motor.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Dangerous voltage exists until power light is OFF. Wait at least ten (10)
minutes after input power is disconnected before performing maintenance.
WARNING: This equipment has high leakage current and must be permanently (fixed)
hard-wire to earth ground via two independent cables.
iii
WARNING: Rotating shafts and above-ground electrical potentials can be hazardous.
Therefore, it is strongly recommended that all electrical work conform to the National
Electrical Codes and local regulations. Installation, alignment and maintenance should be
performed only by qualified personnel.
CAUTION:
a) Class I motor must be connected to earth ground via low resistive path (<0.1)
b) Any motor used must be of a suitable rating.
c) Motors may have hazardous moving path. In this event suitable protection must be
provided.
CAUTION: Alarm connection may contain hazardous live voltage even when inverter is
disconnected. When removing the front cover for maintenance or inspection, confirm that
incoming power for alarm connection is completely disconnected.
CAUTION: Hazardous (main) terminals for any interconnection (motor, contact breaker,
filter, etc.) must be inaccessible in the final installation.
CAUTION: This equipment should be installed in IP54 or equivalent (see EN60529)
enclosure. The end application must be in accordance with BS EN60204-1. Refer to the
section “Choosing a Mounting Location” on page 2–7. The diagram dimensions are to be
suitably amended for your application.
CAUTION: Connection to field wiring terminals must be reliably fixed having two
independent means of mechanical support. Use a termination with cable support (figure
below), or strain relief, cable clamp, etc.
CAUTION: A double-pole disconnection device must be fitted to the incoming main power
supply close to the inverter. Additionally, a protection device meet IEC947-1/ IEC947-3
must be fitted at this point (protection device data shown in “Determining Wire and Fuse
Sizes” on page 2–15).
NOTE: The above instructions, together with any other requirements highlighted in this
manual, must be followed for continue LVD (European Low Voltage Directive) compliance.
iv
Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual
Cautions and Warnings for Orientation and Mounting Procedures
HIGH VOLTAGE: Hazard of electrical shock. Disconnect incoming power before working
on this control. Wait ten (10) minutes before removing the front cover.
…2–3
HIGH VOLTAGE: Hazard of electrical shock. Never touch the naked PCB (printed circuit
board) portions while the unit is powered up. Even for switch portion, the inverter must
be powered OFF before you change.
…2–3
WARNING: In the following examples involving a general-purpose inverter, a large peak
current flow on the main power supply side, and is able to destroy the converter
module. Where such situations are foreseen or the connected equipment must be
highly reliable, install an AC reactor between the power supply and the inverter. Also,
where influence of indirect lightning strike is possible, install a lightning conductor:
…2–5
1. The unbalance factor of the power supply is 3% or higher.
2. The power supply capacity is at least 10 times greater than the inverter capacity (or
the power supply capacity is 500kVA or more).
3. Abrupt power supply changes are expected, due to the conditions such as:
a. Several inverters are interconnected with a short bus.
b. A thyristor converter and an inverter are interconnected with a short bus.
c. An installed phase advance capacitor opens and closes.
WARNING: An inverter run by a private power generator may overheat the generator
or suffer from a deformed output voltage waveform of the generator. Generally, the
generator capacity should be five times that of the inverter (kVA) in a PWM control
system or six times greater in a PAM control system.
…2–5
CAUTION: In the case of important equipment, to shorten the non-operational time of
inverter failure, please provide a backup circuit by commercial power supply or spare
inverter.
…2–5
CAUTION: Be sure to install the unit on flame-resistant material such as a steel plate.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
…2–7
CAUTION: Be sure not to place any flammable materials near the inverter. Otherwise,
there is the danger of fire.
…2–7
CAUTION: Be sure not to let the foreign matter enter vent openings in the inverter
housing, such as wire clippings, spatter from welding, metal shavings, dust, etc.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
…2–7
CAUTION: Be sure to install the inverter in a place that can bear the weight according
to the specifications in the text (Chapter 1, Specifications Tables). Otherwise, it may fall
and cause injury to personnel.
…2–7
CAUTION: Be sure to install the unit on a perpendicular wall that is not subject to
vibration. Otherwise, it may fall and cause injury to personnel.
…2–7
CAUTION: Be sure not to install or operate an inverter that is damaged or has missing
parts. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
…2–7
CAUTION: Be sure to install the inverter in a well-ventilated room that does not have
direct exposure to sunlight, a tendency for high temperature, high humidity or dew
condensation, high levels of dust, corrosive gas, explosive gas, inflammable gas,
grinding-fluid mist, salt damage, etc. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
…2–7
CAUTION: Be sure to maintain the specified clearance area around the inverter and to
provide adequate ventilation. Otherwise, the inverter may overheat and cause
equipment damage or fire.
…2–8
v
Wiring – Warnings for Electrical Practice and Wire Specifications
WARNING: “USE 60/75C Cu wire only” or equivalent. For models WL200-022S, 004H,
-007H, -015H, -022H and -030H.
…2–14
WARNING: “USE 75C Cu wire only” or equivalent. For models WL200-002S, -004S,
-007S, -015S, -055H, -075H, -110H, 150H and -185H.
…2–14
WARNING: “Open Type Equipment.”
…2–14
WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100k rms
symmetrical amperes, 240V maximum when protected by Class CC, G, J or R fuses or
circuit breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100,000 rms symmetrical
amperes, 240 volts maximum.” For models with suffix S.
…2–14
WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100k rms
symmetrical amperes, 480V maximum when protected by Class CC, G, J or R fuses or
circuit breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100,000 rms symmetrical
amperes, 480 volts maximum.” For models with suffix H.
…2–14
HIGH VOLTAGE: Be sure to ground the unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric
shock and/or fire.
…2–14
HIGH VOLTAGE: Wiring work shall be carried out only by qualified personnel.
Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or fire.
…2–14
HIGH VOLTAGE: Implement wiring after checking that the power supply is OFF.
Otherwise, you may incur electric shock and/or fire.
…2–14
HIGH VOLTAGE: Do not connect wiring to an inverter operate an inverter that is not
mounted according to the instructions given in this manual.
Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or injury to personnel.
…2–14
WARNING: Make sure the input power to the inverter is OFF. If the drive has been
powered, leave it OFF for ten (10) minutes before continuing.
…2–22
vi
Wiring – Cautions for Electrical Practice
CAUTION: Fasten the screws with the specified fastening torque in the table below.
Check for any loosening of screws. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
…2–16
CAUTION: Be sure that the input voltage matches the inverter specifications;
 Single phase 200V to 240V 50/60Hz (up to 2.2kW) for SFE model
 Three phase 380V to 480V 50/60Hz (up to 18.5kW) for HFE model
…2–20
CAUTION: Be sure not to power a three-phase-only inverter with single phase power.
Otherwise, there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of fire.
…2–20
CAUTION: Be sure not to connect an AC power supply to the output terminals.
Otherwise, there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of injury
and/or fire.
…2–20
WL200 Inverter
Output to Motor
Power Input
CAUTION: Remarks for using ground fault interrupter breakers in the main power
supply: Adjustable frequency inverter with integrated CE-filters and shielded (screened)
motor cables have a higher leakage current toward earth GND. Especially at the
moment of switching ON this can cause an inadvertent trip of ground fault interrupters.
Because of the rectifier on the input side of the inverter there is the possibility to stall
the switch-off function through small amounts of DC current.
Please observe the following:
 Use only short time-invariant and pulse current-sensitive ground fault interrupters
with higher trigger current.
 Other components should be secured with separate ground fault interrupters.
 Ground fault interrupters in the power input wiring of an inverter are not an absolute
protection against electric shock.
…2–20
CAUTION: Be sure to install a fuse in each phase of the main power supply to the
inverter. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
…2–20
CAUTION: For motor leads, ground fault interrupter breakers and electromagnetic
contactors, be sure to size these components properly (each must have the capacity for
rated current and voltage). Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
…2–20
CAUTION: Power terminal assignment is different compared to old models such as
L100, L200, X200 series, etc,. Pay attention when wiring the power cable.
…2–21
vii
Powerup Test Caution Messages
CAUTION: The heat sink fins will have a high temperature. Be careful not to touch
them. Otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
…2–23
CAUTION: The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high
speed. Be sure to check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before
operating the inverter. Otherwise, there is the danger of injury.
…2–23
CAUTION: If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard
default setting (50Hz/60Hz), be sure to check the motor and machine specifications
with the respective manufacturer. Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after
getting their approval. Otherwise, there is the danger of equipment damage and/or
injury.
…2–23
CAUTION: Check the following before and during the Powerup test. Otherwise, there is
the danger of equipment damage.
 Is the shorting bar between the [+1] and [+] terminals installed? DO NOT power or
operate the inverter if the jumper is removed.
 Is the direction of the motor rotation correct?
 Did the inverter trip during acceleration or deceleration?
 Were the rpm and frequency meter readings as expected?
 Were there any abnormal motor vibration or noise?
…2–23
Warnings for Configuring Drive Parameters
WARNING: When parameter b012, level of electronic thermal setting, is set to motor
FLA rating (Full Load Ampere nameplate rating), the inverter provides solid state motor
overload protection at 115% of motor FLA or equivalent. If parameter b012 exceeds the
motor FLA rating, the motor may overheat and damaged. Parameter b012, level of
electronic thermal setting, is a variable parameter.
…3–46
Cautions for Configuring Drive Parameters
CAUTION: Be careful to avoid specifying a braking time that is long enough to cause
motor overheating. If you use DC braking, we recommend using a motor with a built-in
thermistor, and wiring it to the inverter’s thermistor input (see “Thermistor Thermal
Protection” on page 4–30). Also refer to the motor manufacturer’s specifications for
duty-cycle recommendations during DC braking.
…3–26
CAUTION: Be careful to avoid specifying a braking carrier frequency that is high
enough to cause inverter and motor overheating. If you use DC braking, we recommend
using a motor with a built-in thermistor, and wiring it to the inverter’s thermistor input
(see “Thermistor Thermal Protection” on page 4–30). Also refer to the motor
manufacturer’s specifications for duty-cycle recommendations during DC braking.
…3–26
CAUTION: Do not change Debug mode for safety reasons. Otherwise unexpected
performances may occur.
…3–95
viii
Warnings for Operations and Monitoring
WARNING: Be sure to turn ON the input power supply only after closing the front case.
While the inverter is energized, be sure not to open the front case. Otherwise, there is
the danger of electric shock.
…4–3
WARNING: Be sure not to operate electrical equipment with wet hands. Otherwise,
there is the danger of electric shock.
…4–3
WARNING: While the inverter is energized, be sure not to touch the inverter terminals
even when the motor is stopped. Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.
…4–3
WARNING: If the retry mode is selected, the motor may suddenly restart after a trip
stop. Be sure to stop the inverter before approaching the machine (be sure to design
the machine so that safety for personnel is secure even if it restarts.) Otherwise, it may
cause injury to personnel.
…4–3
WARNING: If the power supply is cut OFF for a short period of time, the inverter may
restart operating after the power supply recovers if the Run command is active. If a
restart may pose danger to personnel, so be sure to use a lock-out circuit so that it will
not restart after power recovery. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
…4–3
WARNING: The Stop Key is effective only when the stop function is enabled. Be sure to
enable the Stop Key separately from the emergency stop. Otherwise, it may cause injury
to personnel.
…4–3
WARNING: During a trip event, if the alarm reset is applied and the Run command is
present, the inverter will automatically restart. Be sure to apply the alarm reset only after
verifying the Run command is OFF. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
…4–3
WARNING: Be sure not to touch the inside of the energized inverter or to put any
conductive object into it. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or fire.
…4–3
WARNING: If power is turned ON when the Run command is already active, the motor
will automatically start and injury may result. Before turning ON the power, confirm that
the RUN command is not present.
…4–3
WARNING: When the Stop key function is disabled, pressing the Stop key does not
stop the inverter, nor will it reset a trip alarm.
…4–3
WARNING: Be sure to provide a separate, hard-wired emergency stop switch when the
application warrants it.
…4–3
WARNING: If the power is turned ON and the Run command is already active, the
motor starts rotation and is dangerous! Before turning power ON, confirm that the Run
command is not active.
…4–16
WARNING: After the Reset command is given and the alarm reset occurs, the motor
will restart suddenly if the Run command is already active. Be sure to set the alarm reset
after verifying that the Run command is OFF to prevent injury to personnel.
…4–29
ix
Cautions for Operations and Monitoring
CAUTION: The heat sink fins will have a high temperature. Be careful not to touch
them. Otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
…4–2
CAUTION: The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high
speed. Be sure to check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before
operating the inverter. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
…4–2
CAUTION: If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard
default setting (50Hz/60Hz), be sure to check the motor and machine specifications
with the respective manufacturer. Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after
getting their approval. Otherwise, there is the danger of equipment damage.
…4–2
CAUTION: There is a possibility to damage the inverter or other devices if your
application exceeds the maximum current or voltage characteristics of a connection
point.
…4–4
CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF power to the inverter before changing the jumper wire
position. Otherwise, damage to the inverter circuitry may occur.
…4–12
CAUTION: Be careful not to turn PID clear ON and reset the integrator sum when the
inverter is in Run mode (output to motor is ON). Otherwise, this could cause the motor
to decelerate rapidly, resulting in a trip.
…4–32
HIGH VOLTAGE: Dangerous voltage exists even after the Safe Stop is activated. It does
NOT mean that the main power has been removed.
…4–43
CAUTION: The digital outputs (relay and/or open collector) available on the drive must
not be considered as safety related signals. The outputs of the external safety relay
must be used for integration into a safety related control/command circuit.
…4–45
x
Warnings and Cautions for Troubleshooting and Maintenance
WARNING: Wait at least ten (10) minutes after turning OFF the input power supply
before performing maintenance or an inspection. Otherwise, there is the danger of
electric shock.
…6–2
WARNING: Make sure that only qualified personnel will perform maintenance,
inspection, and part replacement. Before starting to work, remove any metallic objects
from your person (wristwatch, bracelet, etc.). Be sure to use tools with insulated handles.
Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or injury to personnel.
…6–2
WARNING: Never remove connectors by pulling on its wire leads (wires for cooling fan
and logic P.C.board). Otherwise, there is a danger of fire due to wire breakage and/or
injury to personnel.
…6–2
CAUTION: Do not connect the megger to any control terminals such as intelligent I/O,
analog terminals, etc. Doing so could cause damage to the inverter.
…6–16
CAUTION: Never test the withstand voltage (HIPOT) on the inverter. The inverter has a
surge protector between the main circuit terminals above and the chassis ground.
…6–16
CAUTION: Power terminal assignment is different compared to old models such as
L100, L200, X200 series, etc,. Pay attention when wiring the power cable.
…6–16
HIGH VOLTAGE: Be careful not to touch wiring or connector terminals when working
with the inverters and taking measurements. Be sure to place the measurement circuitry
components above in an insulated housing before using them.
…6–20
xi
General Warnings and Cautions
WARNING: Never modify the unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or injury.
CAUTION: Withstand voltage test and insulation resistance tests (HIPOT) are executed before the
units are shipped, so there is no need to conduct these tests before operation.
CAUTION: Do not attach or remove wiring or connectors when power is applied. Also, do not check
signals during operation.
CAUTION: Be sure to connect the grounding terminal to earth ground.
CAUTION: When inspecting the unit, be sure to wait ten (10) minutes after turning OFF the power
supply before opening the cover.
CAUTION: Do not stop operation by switching OFF electromagnetic contactors on the primary or
secondary side of the inverter.
Ground fault
interrupter
Power
Input
Inverter
L1, L2, L3
U, V, W
Motor
PCS
FW
When there has been a sudden power failure while an operation instruction is active, then the unit
may restart operation automatically after the power failure has ended. If there is a possibility that
such an occurrence may harm humans, then install an electromagnetic contactor (Mgo) on the power
supply side, so that the circuit does not allow automatic restarting after the power supply recovers. If
the optional remote operator is used and the retry function has been selected, this will also cause
automatic restarting when a Run command is active. So, please be careful.
xii
CAUTION: Do not insert leading power factor capacitors or surge absorbers between the output
terminals of the inverter and motor.
Surge absorber
Ground fault
interrupter
Power
Input
Inverter
L1, L2, L3
U, V, W
GND lug
Motor
Leading power
factor capacitor
When there has been a sudden power failure while an operation instruction is active, then the unit
may restart operation automatically after the power failure has ended. If there is a possibility that
such an occurrence may harm humans, then install an electromagnetic contactor (Mgo) on the power
supply side, so that the circuit does not allow automatic restarting after the power supply recovers. If
the optional remote operator is used and the retry function has been selected, this will also cause
automatic restarting when a Run command is active. So, please be careful.
CAUTION: MOTOR TERMINAL SURGE VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FILTER (For the 400V CLASS)
In a system using an inverter with the voltage control PWM system, a voltage surge caused by the
cable constants such as the cable length (especially when the distance between the motor and the
inverter is 10m or more) and cabling method may occur at the motor terminals. A dedicated filter of
the 400V class for suppressing this voltage surge is available. Be sure to install a filter in this situation.
CAUTION: EFFECTS OF POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ON INVERTER
In the case below involving a general-purpose inverter, a large peak current can flow on the power
supply side, sometimes destroying the converter module:
1. The unbalance factor of the power supply is 3% or higher.
2. The power supply capacity is at least 10 times greater than the inverter capacity (or the power
supply capacity is 500kVA or more).
3. Abrupt power supply changes are expected, due to conditions such as:
a. Several inverters are interconnected with a short bus.
b. A thyristor converter and an inverter are interconnected with a short bus.
c. An installed phase advance capacitor opens and closes.
Where these conditions exist or when the connected equipment must be highly reliable, you MUST
install an input side AC-reactor of 3% (at a voltage drop at rated current) with respect to the supply
voltage on the power supply side. Also, where the effects of an indirect lightning strike are possible,
install a lightening conductor.
xiii
CAUTION: SUPPRESSION FOR NOISE INTERFERENCE FROM INVERTER
The inverter uses many semiconductor switching elements such as transistors and IGBTs. Thus, a radio
receiver or measuring instrument located near the inverter is susceptible to noise interference.
To protect the instruments from erroneous operation due to noise interference, they should be used
well away from the inverter. It is also effective to shield the whole inverter structure.
The addition of an EMC filter on the input side of the inverter also reduces the effect of noise from
the commercial power line on external devices.
Note that the external dispersion of noise from the power line can be minimized by connecting an
EMC filter on the primary side of the inverter.
EMC Filter
noise
Inverter
R1
R2
L1
U
S1
S2
L2
V
T1
T2
L3
W
EMC Filter
Motor
Inverter
Motor
Completely ground the
enclosure panel, metal
screen, etc. with as short
a wire as possible.
Remote
Operator
Grounded frame
Conduit or shielded cable
-- to be grounded
CAUTION: When the EEPROM error E08 occurs, be sure to confirm the setting values again.
CAUTION: When using normally closed active state settings (C011 to C017) for externally
commanded Forward or Reverse terminals [FW] or [RV], the inverter may start automatically when the
external system is powered OFF or disconnected from the inverter! So do not use normally closed
active state settings for Forward or Reverse terminals [FW] or [RV] unless your system design protects
against unintended motor operation.
CAUTION: In all the instrumentations in this manual, covers and safety devices are occasionally
removed to describe the details. While operating the product, make sure that the covers and safety
devices are placed as they were specified originally and operate it according to the instruction
manual.
CAUTION: Do not discard the inverter with household waste.
Contact an industrial waste management company in your area who can
treat industrial waste without polling the environment.
xiv
UL Cautions, Warnings and Instructions
Warnings and Cautions for Troubleshooting and Maintenance
The warnings and instructions in this section summarizes the procedures necessary to ensure an
inverter installation complies with Underwriters Laboratories guidelines.
WARNING: Use 60/75C Cu wire only. (for models: WL200-022S, -004H, -007H, -015H, -022H and
-030H)
WARNING: Use 75C Cu wire only. (for models: WL200-002S, -004S, -007S, -015S, -055H, -075H,
-110H, 150H and -185H)
WARNING: Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 rms
Symmetrical Amperes, 240 or 480V maximum.
WARNING: When protected by CC, G, J, or R class Fuses, or when Protected By A Circuit Breaker
Having An Interrupting Rating Not Less Than 100,000 rms Symmetrical Amperes, 240 or 480 Volts
Maximum.
WARNING: Install device in pollution degree 2 environment.
WARNING: Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature 50C
WARNING: Solid state motor overload protection is provided in each model
WARNING: Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection.
Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electric Code and any
additional local codes
WARNING: Motor over temperature protection is not provided by the drive.
xv
Terminal symbols and Screw size
Inverter Model
WL200-002S
WL200-004S
WL200-007S
WL200-015S
WL200-022S
WL200-004H
WL200-007H
WL200-015H
WL200-022H
WL200-030H
WL200-040H
WL200-055H
WL200-075H
WL200-110H
WL200-150H
WL200-185H
Screw Size
Required
Torque (N-m)
Wire range
M3.5
1.0
AWG16 (1.3mm )
M4
M4
1.4
1.4
AWG12 (5.3mm )
2
AWG10 (5.3mm )
M4
1.4
AWG16 (1.3mm )
M4
1.4
AWG14 (2.1mm )
M4
1.4
AWG12 (3.3mm )
M5
3.0
AWG10 (5.3mm )
M6
3.9 to 5.1
AWG6 (13mm )
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
(For more details, please refer to page 2–15)
xvi
Circuit Breaker and Fuse Sizes
CONSTRUCTION DETAILS: (CONT’D)
Distribution fuse and circuit breaker size marking is included in the manual to indicate that
the unit shall be connected with a Listed Cartridge Nonrenewable fuse or Inverse time
circuit breaker, rated 600 Vac with the current ratings as shown in the table below or Type
E Combination Motor Controller marking is included in the manual to indicate that the
unit shall be connected with, LS Industrial System Co.,Ltd, Type E Combination Motor
Controller MMS Series with the ratings as shown in the table below:
Model No.
Fuse
Type
WL200-002S
WL200-004S
WL200-007S
WL200-015S
WL200-022S
WL200-004H
WL200-007H
WL200-015H
WL200-022H
WL200-030H
WL200-040H
WL200-055H
WL200-075H
WL200-110H
WL200-150H
WL200-185H
Class J
Class CC
Class G
Class T
Rating(Maximum A)
10 A, AIC 200 kA
10 A, AIC 200 kA
10 A, AIC 200 kA
20 A, AIC 200 kA
30 A, AIC 200 kA
10 A, AIC 200 kA
10 A, AIC 200 kA
10 A, AIC 200 kA
10 A, AIC 200 kA
15 A, AIC 200 kA
15 A, AIC 200 kA
15 A, AIC 200 kA
30 A, AIC 200 kA
50 A, AIC 200 kA
50 A, AIC 200 kA
50 A, AIC 200 kA
Inverse Time
Circuit Breaker
Rating
(Maximum A)
Type E CMC
30A
MMS-32H,
240V,40A
20A
40A
MMS-32H,
480V,40A
or
MMS-63H,
480V,52A
Table of Contents
Safety Messages
Hazardous High Voltage .............................................................................................................................................. i
Caution when using Safe Stop Function ...............................................................................................................ii
General Precautions – Read These First! ...............................................................................................................ii
Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual ............................................................................................. iv
General Warnings and Cautions ..............................................................................................................................xi
UL Cautions, Warnings and Instructions ....................................................................................................... xiv
Terminal symbols and Screw size .......................................................................................................................... xv
Circuit Breaker and Fuse Sizes .............................................................................................................................. xvi
Table of Contents ...................................................................................................................................................... xvii
Revisions ........................................................................................................................................................................ xix
Contact Information ....................................................................................................................................................xx
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................ 1–2
WL200 Inverter Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 1–4
Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives .................................................................................................. 1–15
Frequently Asked Questions .............................................................................................................................. 1–20
Chapter 2: Inverter Mounting and Installation
Orientation to Inverter Features ......................................................................................................................... 2–2
Basic System Description ...................................................................................................................................... 2–4
Step-by-Step Basic Installation ........................................................................................................................... 2–6
Powerup Test ............................................................................................................................................................ 2–22
Using the Front Panel Keypad ........................................................................................................................... 2–24
Chapter 3: Configuring Drive Parameters
Choosing a Programming Device ...................................................................................................................... 3–2
Using the Keypad Devices .................................................................................................................................... 3–3
“D” Group: Monitoring Functions ...................................................................................................................... 3–5
“F” Group: Main Profile Parameters ................................................................................................................ 3–10
“A” Group: Standard Functions .......................................................................................................................... 3–11
“B” Group: Fine Tuning Functions .................................................................................................................... 3–43
“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions .................................................................................................... 3–79
“H” Group: Motor Constants Functions ......................................................................................................... 3–99
“P” Group: Other Parameters ...........................................................................................................................3–100
Chapter 4: Operations and Monitoring
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................ 4–2
Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices .......................................................................................................... 4–4
Control Logic Signal Specifications .................................................................................................................. 4–6
Intelligent Terminal Listing ................................................................................................................................. 4–10
Using Intelligent Input Terminals ..................................................................................................................... 4–12
Using Intelligent Output Terminals ................................................................................................................. 4–45
Analog Input Operation ...................................................................................................................................... 4–77
Analog Output Operation ................................................................................................................................... 4–79
xvii
xviii
Chapter 5: Inverter System Accessories
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................ 5–2
Component Descriptions ...................................................................................................................................... 5–3
Chapter 6: Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................................................ 6–2
Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions ............................................................................................. 6–8
Warning Codes ........................................................................................................................................................ 6–11
Restoring Factory Default Settings ................................................................................................................. 6–14
Maintenance and Inspection ............................................................................................................................. 6–15
Warranty .................................................................................................................................................................... 6–22
Appendix A: Glossary and Bibliography
Glossary........................................................................................................................................................................ A–2
Bibliography ............................................................................................................................................................... A–8
Appendix B: Modbus Network Communication
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................ B–2
Connecting the Inverter to Modbus ................................................................................................................. B–3
Network Protocol Reference ................................................................................................................................ B–5
Explanation of function codes .......................................................................................................................... B–10
Modbus Data Listing ............................................................................................................................................. B–24
Appendix C: Drive Parameter Setting Tables
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................ C–2
Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry ............................................................................................................... C–2
List of Parameters ..................................................................................................................................................... C–3
Appendix D: CE-EMC Installation Guidelines
CE-EMC Installation Guidelines .......................................................................................................................... D–2
Hitachi EMC Recommendations ......................................................................................................................... D–6
Appendix E: Safety (ISO13849-1)
Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................E–2
Stop Category defined in EN60204-1 ...............................................................................................................E–2
How it works ...............................................................................................................................................................E–2
Activation......................................................................................................................................................................E–2
Installation....................................................................................................................................................................E–3
Wiring example ..........................................................................................................................................................E–4
Components to be combined ..............................................................................................................................E–6
Periodical check (proof test) .................................................................................................................................E–6
Precautions ..................................................................................................................................................................E–7
Index
xix
Revisions
Revision History Table
No.
1
Revision Comments
Initial release.
Date of
Issue
2015/11
Operation
Manual No.
NT353X
xx
Contact Information
Hitachi America, Ltd.
Power and Industrial Division
50 Prospect Avenue
Tarrytown, NY 10591
U.S.A.
Phone: +1-914-631-0600
Fax: +1-914-631-3672
Hitachi Australia Pty. Ltd.
Suite 801, Level 8, 123 Epping Road,
North Ryde, NSW, 2113,
Australia
Phone: +61-2-9888-4100
Fax: +61-2-9888-4188
Hitachi Europe GmbH
Am Seestern 18
D-40547 Dusseldorf
Germany
Phone: +49-211-5283-0
Fax: +49-211-5283-649
Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
AKS Building, 3, kanda Neribei-cho
Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 101-0022
Japan
Phone: +81-3-4345-6910
Fax: +81-3-4345-6067
Hitachi Asia Ltd.
Industrial Components & Equipment
Division
No.30 Pioneer Crescent, #10-15 West Park
Bizcentral
Singapore 628560
Phone: +65-6305-7400
Fax: +65-6305-7401
Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
Narashino Division
1-1, Higashi-Narashino 7-chome
Narashino-shi, Chiba 275-8611
Japan
Phone: +81-47-493-8115
Fax: +81-47-477-4712
Hitachi East Asia Ltd.
6th Floor, North Tower
World Finance Centre, Harbour City
Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon
Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2735-9218
Fax: +852-2735-6793
NOTE: To receive technical support for the Hitachi inverter you purchased, contact the
Hitachi inverter dealer from whom you purchased the unit, or the sales office or factory
contact listed above. Please be prepared to provide the following inverter nameplate
information:
1. Model
2. Date of purchase
3. Manufacturing number (MFG No.)
4. Symptoms of any inverter problem
If any inverter nameplate information is illegible, please provide your Hitachi contact with
any other legible nameplate items. To reduce unpredictable downtime, we recommend that
you stock a spare inverter.
1–1
Chapt er 1:
Getting Started
In This Chapter…
1
page
-
Introduction ....................................................................................... 1–2
-
WL200 Inverter Specifications ........................................................ 1–4
-
Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives ..................................1–15
-
Frequently Asked Questions .......................................................... 1–20
1–2
Introduction
Main Features
Congratulation on your purchase of a WL200 Series Hitachi inverter! This inverter drive
features state-of-the-art circuitry and components to provide high performance. The
housing footprint is exceptionally small, given the size of the corresponding motor. The
Hitachi WL200 product line includes more than a dozen inverter models to cover motor
sizes from 1/4 horsepower to 25 horsepower, in either 240VAC or 480VAC power input
versions.
The main features are:
 200V and 400V class, 0.2 to 18.5kW inverters
 EU versions available
 EzSQ (simple programming function) integrated
 Built-in RS485 MODBUS RTU as standard, other FieldBus optional
 New current suppressing function
 Sixteen programmable speed levels
 PID control adjusts motor speed automatically to maintain a process variable value
 Password protection to avoid unexpected parameter change
The design in Hitachi inverters overcomes many of the traditional trade-offs between speed,
torque and efficiency. The performance characteristics are:
 Continuous operation at 100% torque within a 1:10 speed range (6/60Hz / 5/50Hz)
without motor derating.
 Fan has ON/OFF selection to provide longer life for cooling fan.
A full line of accessories from Hitachi is available to complete your motor application:
 Integrated USB port for PC communication
 Digital remote operator keypad
 Integrated brake chopper
 EMC filter (footprint type C1) optional
1–3
Inverter Specification Label
The Hitachi WL200 inverters have product labels located on the right side of the housing, as
pictured below. Be sure to verify that the specifications on the labels match your power
source, and application safety requirements.
Model name
Input ratings
Output ratings
MFG number
Inverter Model Name
The model number for a specific inverter contains useful information about its operating
characteristics. Refer to the model number legend below:
WL200
002
S
F
E
Restricted distribution
E=E.U.
Series name
Configuration type
F=with keypad
Input voltage:
S=Single-phase 200V class
H=Three-phase 400V class
Applicable motor capacity in kW
002=0.2kW
040=4.0kW
004=0.4kW
055=5.5kW
007=0.75kW
075=7.5kW
015=1.5kW
110=11kW
022=2.2kW
150=15kW
030=3.0kW
185=18.5kW
1–4
WL200 Inverter Specifications
Model-specific tables for 200V and 400V class inverters
The following tables are specific to WL200 inverters for the 200V and 400V class model
groups. Note that “General Specifications” on page 1–5 apply to both voltage class groups.
Footnotes for all specification tables follow the table below.
Item
WL200 inverters, 200V models
kW
Applicable motor
size *2
HP
200V
Rated capacity (kVA)
240V
Rated input voltage
Rated output voltage *3
Rated output current (A)
Cooling method
Weight
Kg
lb
Single-phase 200V class Specifications
002SFE
004SFE
007SFE
015SFE
022SFE
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
1/4
1/2
1
2
3
0.4
1.2
1.5
2.8
4.1
0.5
1.4
1.8
3.4
4.9
Single-phase: 200V-15% to 240V +10%, 50/60Hz 5%
Three-phase: 200 to 240V (proportional to input voltage)
1.2
2.6
3.5
6.0
9.6
Force
Self-cooling
ventilation
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.6
1.8
2.2
2.4
2.4
3.1
4.0
Item
WL200 inverters, 400V models
kW
Applicable motor
size *2
HP
380V
Rated capacity (kVA)
480V
Rated input voltage
Rated output voltage *3
Rated output current (A)
Cooling method
Kg
Weight
lb
Three-phase 400V class Specifications
004HFE
007HFE
015HFE
022HFE
030HFE
040HFE
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.0
4.0
1/2
1
2
3
4
5
1.4
1.4
2.9
3.9
5.4
6.2
1.7
1.8
3.6
5.0
6.8
7.9
Three-phase: 380V-15% to 480V +10%, 50/60Hz 5%
Three-phase: 380 to 480V (proportional to input voltage)
1.5
2.1
4.1
5.4
6.9
8.8
Self-cooling
Force ventilation
1.5
1.5
1.6
1.8
1.9
1.9
3.3
3.3
3.5
4.0
4.2
4.2
Item
WL200 inverters, 400V models
kW
Applicable
motor size *2
HP
380V
Rated capacity
(kVA)
480V
Rated input voltage
Rated output voltage *3
Rated output current (A)
Cooling method
Kg
Weight
lb
Three-phase 400V class Specifications
055HFE
075HFE
110HFE
150HFE
185HFE
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
7.5
10
15
20
25
8.8
13.2
15.8
25.1
29
11.1
16.7
20.0
31.6
36.6
Three-phase: 380V-15% to 480V +10%, 50/60Hz 5%
Three-phase: 380 to 480V (proportional to input voltage)
11.1
17.5
23.0
31.0
38.0
Force ventilation
2.1
3.5
3.5
4.7
5.2
4.6
7.7
7.7
10.4
11.5
1–5
General Specifications
The following table applies to all WL200 inverters.
Item
General Specifications
Protective housing *1
Control method
Carrier frequency
Output frequency range *4
IP20
Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) control
2kHz to 10kHz (derating required depending on the model)( *9)
0.1 to 400Hz
Digital command: 0.01% of the maximum frequency
Frequency accuracy
Analog command: 0.2% of the maximum frequency (25C  10C)
Frequency setting resolution
Digital: 0.01Hz; Analog: max. frequency/1000
V/f control (constant torque, reduced torque, free-V/F): base freq.
Volt./Freq. characteristic
30Hz - 400Hz adjustable
Overload capacity
60 sec. @120%, 12 sec. @140%
0.00 to 3600 seconds, linear and S-curve accel/decel, second accel/decel
Acceleration/deceleration time
setting available
Operator panel Up and Down keys / Value settings
Freq.
External signal
0 to 10 VDC (input impedance 10k Ohms), 4 to 20mA (input impedance
setting *8
100 Ohms), Potentiometer (1k to 2k Ohms, 2W)
Via network
RS485 ModBus RTU, other network option
FWD/ Operator panel Run/Stop (Forward/Reverse run change by command)
REV
External signal
Forward run/stop, Reverse run/stop
run
Via network
RS485 ModBus RTU, other network option
FW (forward run command), RV (reverse run command),
CF1 - CF4 (multi-stage speed setting), JG (jog command),
DB (external braking), SET (set second motor),
2CH (2-stage accel./decel. command), FRS (free run stop command),
Input
EXT (external trip), USP (startup function),
signal
Intelligent input terminal CS (commercial power switchover), SFT (soft lock),
AT (analog input selection), RS (reset), PTC (thermistor thermal protection),
Seven terminals,
STA (start), STP (stop), F/R (forward/reverse), PID (PID disable),
sink/source changeable
PIDC (PID reset), UP (remote control up function),
by a short bar
DWN (remote control down function), UDC (remote control data clear),
OPE (operator control),SF1 - SF7 (multi-stage speed setting; bit operation),
55 functions assignable
OLR (overload restriction), BOK (Braking confirmation),
LAC (LAD cancellation), ADD (add frequency enable),
F-TM (force terminal mode), KHC (Cumulative power clear),
MI1 - MI7 (general purpose inputs for EzSQ),
AHD (analog command hold), GS1,GS2 (STO inputs, safety related signals),
485 (Starting communication signal), PRG (executing EzSQ program),
HLD (retain output frequency), ROK (permission of run command),
DISP (display limitation), NO (no function)
Intelligent output
Output terminal
signal
43 functions assignable
RUN (run signal), FA1 - FA5 (frequency arrival signal),
OL,OL2 (overload advance notice signal), OD (PID deviation error signal),
AL (alarm signal), UV (under-voltage), RNT (run time expired),
ONT (power ON time expired), THM (thermal warning),
BRK (brake release), BER (brake error), ZS (0Hz detection),
ODc (analog voltage input disconnection),
OIDc (analog current input disconnection), FBV (PID second stage output),
NDc (network disconnect detection), LOG1 - LOG3 (Logic output signals),
WAC (capacitor life warning), WAF (cooling fan warning),
FR (starting contact), OHF (heat sink overheat warning), LOC (Low load),
MO1 - MO3 (general outputs for EzSQ), IRDY (inverter ready),
FWR (forward operation), RVR (reverse operation), MJA (major failure),
WCO (window comparator O), WCOI (window comparator OI),
FREF (frequency command source), REF (run command source),
SETM (second motor in operation), EDM (STO performance monitor),
OP (option control signal), NO (no function)
1–6
Item
Monitor output (analog)
Output
signal Pulse train output
(0 to 10Vdc, 32kHz max.)
Alarm output contact
Other functions
Protective function
Operating
environment
Coating color
Options
Standards
Temperature
Humidity
Vibration *11
Location
General Specifications
Output freq., output current, output voltage, input power,
thermal load ratio, LAD freq., heat sink temperature, general output (EzSQ)
[PWM output]
Output freq., output current, output voltage, input power,
thermal load ratio, LAD freq., heat sink temperature, general output (EzSQ)
[Pulse train output]
Output frequency, output current
ON for inverter alarm (1c contacts, both normally open or closed available.)
Free-V/f, manual/automatic torque boost, output voltage gain adjustment,
AVR function, reduced voltage start, motor data selection,
motor stabilization control, reverse running protection,
automatic carrier frequency reduction, energy saving operation,
PID function, non-stop operation at instantaneous power failure,
brake control, DC injection braking, dynamic braking (BRD),
frequency upper and lower limiters, jump frequencies,
curve accel and decel (S, U, inversed U), 16-stage speed profile,
fine adjustment of start frequency, accel and decel stop, process jogging,
frequency calculation, frequency addition, 2-stage accel/decel,
stop mode selection, start/end freq., analog input filter,
window comparators, input terminal response time,
output signal delay/hold function, rotation direction restriction,
stop key selection, software lock, safe stop function, scaling function,
display restriction, password function, user parameter, initialization,
initial display selection, cooling fan control, warning, trip retry,
frequency pull-in restart, frequency matching, overload restriction,
over current restriction, DC bus voltage AVR
Over-current, over-voltage, under-voltage, overload,
brake resistor overload, CPU error, memory error, external trip, USP error,
ground fault detection at power on, temperature error,
internal communication error, driver error, thermistor error, brake error,
safe stop, overload at low speed, modbus communication error,
option error, EzSQ command error, EzSQ nesting error,
EzSQ execution error, EzSQ user trip
Operating (ambient): -10 to 40C(*10), / Storage: -20 to 65C(*10)
20 to 90% humidity (non-condensing)
2
5.9m/s (0.6G), 10 to 55 Hz
Altitude 1,000m or less, indoors (no corrosive gasses or dust)
No painting, [mold: Black (Mansell N1.5)]
Remote operator unit, cables for the units, braking unit, braking resistor,
AC reactor, DC reactor, EMC filter, fieldbus
UL, CE, C-UL C-tick, Functional safety(Certification in progress))
1–7
Footnotes for the preceding table and the tables that follow:
Note1:
The protection method conforms to JIS C 0920 (IEC60529).
Note2:
Applicable motor size is reference motor. When select motors, take notice so that
rated current of motor does not exceed over the inverter’s rated current.
Note3:
The output voltage decreases as the main supply voltage decreases (except when
using the AVR function). In any case, the output voltage cannot exceed the input
power supply voltage.
Note4:
To operate the motor beyond 50/60Hz, consult the motor manufacturer for the
maximum allowable rotation speed.
Note5:
For achieving approved input voltage rating categories:
 460 to 480VAC – Over-voltage category 2
 380 to 460VAC – Over-voltage category 3
To meet the Over-voltage category 3, insert an EN or IEC standard compliant
isolation transformer that is earth grounded and star connected (for Low Voltage
Directive).
Note6:
At the rated voltage when using a Hitachi standard 3-phase, 4-pole motor.
Note7:
The braking torque via capacitive feedback is the average deceleration torque at
the shortest deceleration (stopping from 50/60Hz as indicated). It is not
continuous regenerative braking torque. The average deceleration torque varies
with motor loss. This value decreases when operating beyond 50Hz. If a large
regenerative torque is required, the optional regenerative braking unit and a
resistor should be used.
Note8:
The frequency command is the maximum frequency at 9.8V for input voltage 0 to
10VDC, or at 19.6mA for input current 4 to 20mA. If this characteristic is not
satisfactory for your application, contact your Hitachi representative.
Note9:
If the inverter is operated outside the region shown in the graph in the derating
curve, the inverter may be damaged or its service life may be shortened. Set
 Carrier Frequency Adjustment in accordance with the expected output
current level. See derating curve section for the detailed information of the
inverter operating range.
Note10: The storage temperature refers to the short-term temperature during
transportation.
Note11: Conforms to the test method specified in JIS JIS C 60068-2-6: 2010(IEC
60068-2-6:2007). For the model types excluded in the standard specifications,
contact your Hitachi sales representative.
1–8
Signal Ratings
Detailed ratings are in “Control Logic Signal Specifications” on page 4–6.
Signal / Contact
Built-in power for inputs
Discrete logic inputs
Discrete logic outputs
Analog output
Analog input, current
Analog input, voltage
+10V analog reference
Alarm relay contacts
Ratings
24VDC, 100mA maximum
27VDC maximum
50mA maximum ON state current, 27 VDC maximum OFF state voltage
10bit / 0 to 10VDC, 2mA
4 to 19.6 mA range, 20mA nominal
0 to 9.8 VDC range, 10VDC nominal, input impedance 10k
10VDC nominal, 10mA maximum
250 VAC, 2.5A (R load) max., 0.2A (I load, P.F.=0.4) max.
100 VAC, 10mA min
30 VDC, 3.0A (R load) max., 0.7A (I load, P.F.=0.4) max.)
5 VDC, 100mA min.
1–9
Derating Curves
The maximum available inverter current output is limited by the carrier frequency and
ambient temperature.. Choosing a higher carrier frequency tends to decrease audible noise,
but it also increases the internal heating of the inverter, thus decreasing (derating) the
maximum current output capability. Ambient temperature is the temperature just outside
the inverter housingsuch as inside the control cabinet where the inverter is mounted. A
higher ambient temperature decreases (derates) the inverter’s maximum current output
capacity.
Individual mounting
An inverter may be mounted individually in
an enclosure or side-by-side with other
Enclosure
inverter(s) as shown below. Side-by-side
mounting causes greater derating than
mounting inverters separately. Graphs for
either mounting methods are included in this
section. Refer to “Ensure Adequate
Ventilation” on page 2-10 for minimum
clearance dimensions for both mounting
configurations.
Side-by-side mounting
Enclosure
1–10
The following table shows which models need derating.
1-ph 200V class
Need
derating
-
-


-
-
-
-
-
-
-
WL200-002S
WL200-004S
WL200-007S
WL200-015S
WL200-022S
-
-
-
-
-
-
 : need derating
- : need no derating
3-ph 400V class
WL200-004H
WL200-007H
WL200-015H
WL200-022H
WL200-030H
WL200-040H
WL200-055H
WL200-075H
WL200-110H
WL200-150H
WL200-185H
Need
derating
-
-

-
-
-

-



Use the following derating curves to help determine the optimal carrier frequency setting
for your inverter and find the output current derating. Be sure to use the proper curve for
your particular WL200 inverter model number.
Legend for Graphs:
Ambient temperature 40°C max., individual mounting
Ambient temperature 50°C max., individual mounting
Ambient temperature 40°C max., side-by-side mounting
Derating curves:
Models need no derating
100%
80%
% of rated
output current
60%
40%
20%
0
2
4
6
8
10
Carrier frequency (kHz)
1–11
Derating curves, continued...
Models need derating
WL200-007S
Rated current 3.5A
3.6
3.0
Output
current (A)
2.0
1.0
WL200-015S
0
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Carrier frequency (kHz)
Rated current 6.0A
6.6
6.0
Output
current (A)
40°C individual
40°C side-by-side
5.0
4.0
0
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Carrier frequency (kHz)
1–12
Derating curves, continued...
WL200-015H
Rated current 4.1A
4.4
4.0
Output
current (A)
3.0
2.0
0
2
4
6
8
10 12 14
Carrier frequency (kHz)
WL200-055H
Rated current 11.1A
12
40°C individual
40°C side-by-side
11
10
Output
current (A)
9
8
7
6
0
2
4
6
8
10 12 14
Carrier frequency (kHz)
1–13
Derating curves, continued...
WL200-110H
Rated current 23.0A
26
24
22
40°C individual
50°C individual
20
Output
current (A)
18
16
14
0
2
4
6
8
10 12
14
Carrier frequency (kHz)
WL200-150H
Rated current 31.0A
32
30
28
Output
current (A)
50°C individual
40°C side-by-side
26
24
22
20
0
2
4
6
8
10 12
Carrier frequency (kHz)
14
1–14
Derating curves, continued...
WL200-185H
Rated current 38.0A
40
35
30
25
Output
current (A)
50°C individual
40°C side-by-side
20
15
10
0
2
4
6
8
10 12
Carrier frequency (kHz)
14
1–15
Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives
The Purpose of Motor Speed Control for Industry
Hitachi inverters provide speed control for 3-phase AC induction motors. You connect AC
power to the inverter, and connect the inverter to the motor. Many applications benefit
from a motor with variable speed, in several ways:
 Energy savings – HVAC
 Need to coordinate speed with an adjacent process – textile and printing presses
 Need to control acceleration and deceleration
 Sensitive loads – elevators, food processing, pharmaceuticals
What is an Inverter
The term inverter and variable-frequency drive are related and somewhat interchangeable.
An electronic motor drive for an AC motor can control the motor’s speed by varying the
frequency of the power sent to the motor.
An inverter, in general, is a device that converts DC power to AC power. The figure below
shows how the variable-frequency drive employs an internal inverter. The drive first
converts incoming AC power to DC through a rectifier bridge, creating an internal DC bus
voltage. Then the inverter circuit converts the DC back to AC again to power the motor. The
special inverter can vary its output frequency and voltage according to the desired motor
speed.
Power
Input
R/L1
S/L2
Variable-frequency Drive
Converter
Rectifier
Internal
DC Bus
Motor
Inverter
U/T1
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
The simplified drawing of the inverter shows three double-throw switches. In Hitachi
inverters, the switches are actually IGBTs (insulated gate bipolar transistors). Using a
commutation algorithm, the microprocessor in the drive switches the IGBTs on and off at a
very high speed to create the desired output waveforms. The inductance of the motor
windings helps smooth out the pulses.
1–16
Torque and Constant Volts/Hertz Operation
In the past, AC variable speed drives used an
open loop (scalar) technique to control speed.
The constant-volts-hertz operation maintains a
constant ratio between the applied voltage
and the applied frequency. With these
conditions, AC induction motors inherently
delivered constant torque across the operating
speed range. For some applications, this scalar
technique was adequate.
Output
voltage
V
Constant torque
f
0
100%
Output frequency
Today, with the advent of sophisticated microprocessors and digital signal processors (DSPs),
it is possible to control the speed and torque of AC induction motors with unprecedented
accuracy. The WL200 utilizes these devices to perform complex mathematical calculations
required to achieve superior performance. You can choose various torque curves to fit the
needs of your application. Constant torque applies the same torque level across the
frequency (speed) range. Variable torque, also called reduced torque, lowers the torque
delivered at mid-level frequencies. A torque boost setting will add additional torque in the
lower half of the frequency range for the constant and variable torque curves. With the
free-setting torque curve feature, you can specify a series of data points that will define a
custom torque curve to fit your application.
Inverter Input and Three-phase Power
The Hitachi WL200 Series of inverters includes two sub-groups: the 200V class and the 400V
class inverters. The drive described in this manual may be used in either the United States or
Europe, although the exact voltage level for commercial power may be slightly different
from country to country. Accordingly, a 200V class inverter requires (nominal) 200 to
240VAC, and 400V class inverter requires from 380 to 480VAC.
The 200V class inverters having a suffix of –SF accept single-phase 200V class input voltage
only. All 400V class inverters require three-phase power supply.
TIP: If your application only has single phase power available, refer to WL200 inverter of
3HP or less (European version with a suffix of -SFE); they can accept single phase input
power. Note: Larger models may be able to accept single-phase with derating. Contact your
Hitachi distributor for assistance.
The common terminology for single phase power is line (L) and Neutral (N). Three-phase
power connections are usually labeled Line 1 [R/L1], Line 2 [S/L2] and Line 3 [T/L3]. In any
case, the power source should include an earth ground connection. That ground connection
will need to connect to the inverter chassis and to the motor frame (see “Wire the Inverter
Output to Motor” on page 2–21).
1–17
Inverter Output to the Motor
3-phase AC motor
The AC motor must be connected only to the inverter’s output
terminals. The output terminals are uniquely labeled (to
U/T1
differentiate them from the input terminals) with the
designations U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. This corresponds to
typical motor lead connection designations T1, T2, and T3. It is
often not necessary to connect a particular motor lead for a
new application. The consequence of swapping any two of the
three connections is the reversal of the motor direction. In
V/T2
W/T3
applications where reversed rotation could cause equipment
Earth GND
damage or personnel injury, be sure to verify direction of
rotation before attempting full-speed operation.
For safety to personnel, you must connect the motor chassis ground to the ground
connection at the bottom of the inverter housing.
Notice the three connections to the motor do not include one marked “Neutral” or “Return”.
The motor represents a balanced “Y” impedance to the inverter, so there is no need for a
separate return. In other words, each of the three “Hot” connections serves also as a return
for the other connections, because of their phase relationship.
The Hitachi inverter is a rugged and reliable device. The intention is for the inverter to
assume the role of controlling power to the motor during all normal operations. Therefore,
this manual instructs you not to switch off power to the inverter while the motor is running
(unless it is an emergency stop). Also, do not install or use disconnect switches in the wiring
from the inverter to the motor (except thermal disconnect). Of course, safety-related
devices such as fuses must be in the design to break power during a malfunction, as
required by NEC and local codes.
1–18
Intelligent Functions and Parameters
Much of this manual is devoted to describing how to use inverter functions and how to
configure inverter parameters. The inverter is micro-processor-controlled, and has many
independent functions. The microprocessor has an on-board EEPROM for parameter
storage. The inverter’s front panel keypad provides access to all functions and parameters,
which you can access through other devices as well. The general name for all these devices
is the digital operator, integrated operator, or digital operator panel. Chapter 2 will show you
how to get a motor running, using a minimal set of function commands or configuring
parameters.
The optional read/write programmer will let you read and write inverter EEPROM contents
from the programmer. This feature is particularly useful for OEMs who need to duplicate a
particular inverter’s settings in many other inverters in assembly-line fashion.
Braking
In general, braking is a force that attempts to slow or stop motor rotation. So it is
associated with motor deceleration, but may also occur even when the load attempts to
drive the motor faster than the desired speed (overhauling). If you need the motor and load
to decelerate quicker than their natural deceleration during coasting, we recommend
installing a braking resistor. The dynamic braking unit (built into WL200) sends excess motor
energy into a resistor to slow the motor and load (See “Introduction” on page 5–2 and
“Dynamic Braking Selection Tables” on page 5–5 for more information). For loads that
continuously overhaul the motor for extended periods of time, the WL200 may not be
suitable (contact your Hitachi distributor).
The inverter parameters include acceleration and deceleration, which you can set to match
the needs of the application. For a particular inverter, motor, and load, there will be a range
of practically achievable accelerations and decelerations.
1–19
Velocity Profiles
The WL200 inverter is capable of sophisticated
speed control. A graphical representation of that
capability will help you understand and configure
the associated parameters. This manual makes use
of the velocity profile graph used in industry
(shown at right). In the example, acceleration is a
ramp to a set speed, and deceleration is a decline
to a stop.
Speed
Set speed
Accel
Decel
0
Velocity Profile
t
Maximum speed
Acceleration and deceleration settings specify the
Speed
time required to go from a stop to maximum
frequency (or vice versa). The resulting slope
(speed change divided by time) is the acceleration
or deceleration. An increase in output frequency
0
uses the acceleration slope, while a decrease uses
t
the deceleration slope. The accel or decel time a
Acceleration
(time setting)
particular speed change depends on the starting
and ending frequencies.
However, the slope is constant, corresponding to the full-scale accel or decel time setting.
For example, the full-scale acceleration setting (time) may be 10 seconds – the time
required to go from 0 to 60Hz.
The WL200 inverter can store up to 16 preset
Speed
speeds. And, it can apply separate acceleration
Speed 2
and deceleration transitions from any preset to
Speed 1
any other preset speed. A multi-speed profile
(shown at right) uses two or more preset speeds,
0
which you can select via intelligent input terminals.
t
Multi-speed Profile
This external control can apply any preset speed at
any time.
Alternatively, the selected speed is infinitely variable across the speed range. You can use
the potentiometer control on the keypad for manual control. The drive accepts analog
0-10VDC signals and 4-20 mA control signals as well.
The inverter can drive the motor in either direction.
Separate FW and RV commands select the
direction of rotation. The motion profile example
shows a forward motion followed by a reverse
motion of shorter duration. The speed presets and
analog signals control the magnitude of the speed,
while the FWD and REV commands determine the
direction before the motion starts.
Speed
Forward move
0
t
Reverse move
Bi-directional Profile
NOTE: The WL200 can move loads in both directions. However, it is not designed for use in
servo-type applications that use a bipolar velocity signal that determines direction.
1–20
Frequently Asked Questions
Q. What is the main advantage in using an inverter to drive a motor, compared to
alternative solutions?
A.
An inverter can vary the motor speed with very little loss of efficiency, unlike
mechanical or hydraulic speed control solutions. The resulting energy savings
usually pays for the inverter in a relatively short time.
Q. The term “inverter” is a little confusing, since we also use “drive” and “amplifier” to
describe the electronic unit that controls a motor. What does “inverter” mean?
A.
The term inverter, drive, and amplifier are used somewhat interchangeably in
industry. Nowadays, the term drive, variable-frequency drive, variable-speed drive,
and inverter are generally used to describe electronic, microprocessor-based
motor speed controllers. In the past, variable-speed drive also referred to various
mechanical means to vary speed. Amplifier is a term almost exclusively used to
describe drives for servo or stepper motors.
Q. Although the WL200 inverter is a variable speed drive, can I use it in a fixed-speed
application?
A.
Yes, sometimes an inverter can be used simply as a “soft-start” device, providing
controlled acceleration and deceleration to a fixed speed. Other functions of the
WL200 may be useful in such applications, as well. However, using a variable speed
drive can benefit many types of industrial and commercial motor applications, by
providing controlled acceleration and deceleration, high torque at low speeds, and
energy savings over alternative solutions.
Q. Can I use an inverter and AC induction motor in a positioning application?
A.
That depends on the required precision, and the slowest speed the motor must
turn and still deliver torque. The WL200 inverter will deliver full torque while
turning the motor at 6Hz (180RPM). DO NOT use an inverter if you need the
motor to stop and hold the load position without the aid of a mechanical brake
(use a servo or stepper motion control system).
Q. Can the inverter be controlled and monitored via a network?
A.
Yes. WL200 inverters have built-in ModBus communications. See Appendix B for
more information on network communications.
Q. Why does the manual or other documentation use terminology such as “200V class”
instead of naming the actual voltage, such as “230 VAC”
A.
A specific inverter model is set at the factory to work across a voltage range
particular to the destination country for that model. The model specifications are
on the label on the side of the inverter.
NOTE: The European 200V class inverter is for single phase input (-SFE).
1–21
Q. Why doesn’t the motor have a neutral connection as a return to the inverter?
A.
The motor theoretically represents a “balanced Y” load if all three stator windings
have the same impedance. The Y connection allows each of the three wires to
alternatively serve as input or return on alternate half-cycle.
Q. Does the motor need a chassis ground connection?
A.
Yes, for several reasons. Most importantly, this provides protection in the event of
a short in the motor that puts a hazardous voltage on its housing. Secondly,
motors exhibit leakage current that increase with aging. Lastly, a grounded chassis
generally emits less electrical noise than an ungrounded one.
Q. What type of motor is compatible with the Hitachi inverters?
A.
Motor type – It must be a three-phase AC induction motor. Use an inverter-grade
motor that has at least 800V insulation for 200V class inverters, or 1600V
insulation for 400V class.
Motor size – In practice, it’s better to find the right size motor for your
application; then look for the inverter to match the motor.
NOTE: There may be other factors that will affect motor selection, including heat dissipation,
motor operating speed profile, enclosure type, and cooling method.
Q. How many poles should the motor have?
A.
Hitachi inverters can be configured to operate motors with 2, 4, 6, or 8 poles. The
greater the number of the poles, the slower the top motor speed will be, but it will
have higher torque at the base speed.
Q. Will I be able to add dynamic (resistive) braking to my Hitachi WL200 drive after the
initial installation?
A.
Yes, the WL200 inverter already has a dynamic braking circuit built in. Just add the
resistor sized to meet the braking requirements. For more information, contact
your nearest Hitachi representative.
1–22
Q. How will I know if my application will require resistive braking?
A.
For new applications, it may be difficult to tell before you actually test a
motor/drive solution. In general, some application can rely on system losses such
as friction to serve as the deceleration force, or otherwise can tolerate a long decel
time. These applications will not need dynamic braking.
However, applications with a combination of a high-inertia load and a required
short decel time will need dynamic braking. This is a physics question that may be
answered either empirically or through extensive calculations.
Q. Several options related to electrical noise suppression are available for the Hitachi
inverters. How can I know if my application requires any of these options?
A.
The purpose of these noise filters is to reduce the inverter electrical noise so the
operation of nearby electrical devices is not affected. Some applications are
governed by particular regulatory agencies, and noise suppression is mandatory.
In those cases, the inverter must have the corresponding noise filter installed.
Other applications may not need noise suppression, unless you notice electrical
interference with the operation of other devices.
Q. The WL200 features a PID control. PID loops are usually associated with chemical
processes, heating, or process industries in general. How could the PID loop feature be
useful in my application?
A.
You will need to determine the particular main variable in your application the
motor affects. That is the process variable (PV) for the motor. Over time, a faster
motor speed will cause a faster change in the PV than a slow motor speed will. By
using the PID loop feature, the inverter commands the motor to run at the optimal
speed required to maintain the PV at the desired value for current conditions.
Using the PID loop feature will require an additional sensor and other wiring, and
is considered an advanced application.
2–1
Chapt er 2:
Inverter Mounting
and Installation
In This Chapter…
2
page
-
Orientation to Inverter Features ..................................................... 2–2
-
Basic System Description ................................................................. 2–4
-
Step-by-Step Basic Installation........................................................ 2–6
-
Powerup Test ...................................................................................2–22
-
Using the Front Panel Keypad .......................................................2–24
2–2
Orientation to Inverter Features
Unpacking and Inspection
Please take a few moments to unpack your new WL200 inverter and perform these steps:
1.
Look for any damage that may have occurred during transportation.
2.
Verify the contents of the box include:
a. One WL200 inverter
b. One WL200 Basic manual
3.
Inspect the specifications label on the side of the inverter. Make sure it matches the
product part number you ordered.
Main Physical Features
The WL200 Series inverters vary in size according to
the current output rating and motor size for each
model number. All feature the same basic Keypad and
connector interface for consistent ease of use. The
inverter construction has a heat sink at the back of the
housing. The larger models include a fan to enhance
heat sink performance. The mounting holes are
predrilled in the heat sink for your convenience.
Smaller models have two mounting holes, while larger
ones have four. Be sure to use all the mounting holes
provided.
Never touch the heat sink during or just after
operation; it can be very hot.
The electronics housing and front panel are built onto
the front of the heat sink.
Inverter Keypad – The inverter uses a digital operator
interface, or keypad. The four-digit display can show a
variety of performance parameters. LEDs indicate
whether the display units are Hertz or Amperes. Other
LEDs indicate Power (external), and Run/Stop mode
and Program/Monitor Mode status. Membrane keys
Run and Stop/Reset control monitor operation. The
ESC, SET,  and  keys allow an operator to navigate
to the inverter’s functions and parameter values. The
SET key is used when changing a parameter.
RUN PWR
Hz
ALM
A
PRG
2–3
Power Wiring Access – First, ensure no power source is connected to the inverter. If power
has been connected, verify that the Power LED is OFF and then wait ten minutes after power
down to proceed. After removing the terminal cover and front housing cover, the housing
partitions that cover the power and motor wiring exits will be able to slide upward as shown
below.
Notice the four wire exit slots in the housing partition. This helps keep the power and motor
wiring (to the left) separated from the signal-level logic or analog wiring (to the right).
Remove the housing partition and as shown as set them aside in a secure place while wiring.
Be sure to replace them afterward. Never operate the inverter with the partition removed or
the front housing cover removed.
The power input and motor 3-phase wiring connect to the lower row of the terminals. The
upper row of power terminals connect to optional braking units or DC link choke.
The following section in this chapter will describe system design and guide you through a
step-by-step installation process. After the section on wiring, this chapter will show how to
use the front panel keys to access functions and edit parameters.
Terminal cover
Front cover
Housing partition
HIGH VOLTAGE: Hazard of electrical shock. Disconnect incoming power before working on
this control. Wait ten (10) minutes before removing the front cover.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Hazard of electrical shock. Never touch the naked PCB (printed circuit
board) portions while the unit is powered up. Even for switch portion, the inverter must be
powered OFF before you change.
2–4
Basic System Description
A motor control system will obviously include a motor and inverter, as well as a circuit
breaker or fuses for safety. If you are connecting a motor to the inverter on a test bench just
to get started, that’s all you may need for now. But a system can also have a variety of
additional components. Some can be for noise suppression, while others may enhance the
inverter’s braking performance. The figure and table below show a system with all the
optional components you might need in your finished application.
From power supply
Breaker,
MCCB or
GFI
Name
Breaker /
disconnect
Input-side
AC Reactor
Radio noise
filter
L1 L2 L3
+1
Inverter
+
GND
T1 T2 T3
EMC filter (for
CE applications,
see Appendix D)
Radio noise
filter (use in
non-CE
applications)
DC link choke
Radio noise
filter
Output-side
AC Reactor
Motor
LCR filter
Function
A molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB), ground fault
interrupter (GFI), or a fused disconnect device. NOTE: The
installer must refer to the NEC and local codes to ensure
safety and compliance.
This is useful in suppressing harmonics induced on the
power supply lines and for improving the power factor.
WARNING: Some applications must use an input-side AC
Reactor to prevent inverter damage. See Warning on next
page.
Electrical noise interference may occur on nearby
equipment such as a radio receiver. This magnetic choke
filter helps reduce radiated noise (can also be used on
output).
Reduces the conducted noise on the power supply wiring
between the inverter and the power distribution system.
Connect to the inverter primary (input) side.
This capacitive filter reduces radiated noise from the main
power wires in the inverter input side.
Suppress harmonics generated by the inverter. However, it
will not protect the input diode bridge rectifier.
Electrical noise interference may occur on nearby
equipment such as a radio receiver. This magnetic choke
filter helps reduce radiated noise (can also be used on
input).
This reactor reduces the vibration in the motor caused by
the inverter’s switching waveforms, by smoothing the
waveform to approximate commercial power quality. It is
also useful to reduce harmonics when wiring from the
inverter to the motor is more than 10m in length.
Sine wave shaping filter for output side.
Thermal
switch
NOTE: Note that some components are required for regulatory agency compliance (see
chapter 5 and Appendix D).
2–5
WARNING: In the following examples involving a general-purpose inverter, a large peak
current flow on the main power supply side, and is able to destroy the converter module.
Where such situations are foreseen or the connected equipment must be highly reliable,
install an AC reactor between the power supply and the inverter. Also, where influence of
indirect lightning strike is possible, install a lightning conductor:
1. The unbalance factor of the power supply is 3% or higher.
2. The power supply capacity is at least 10 times greater than the inverter capacity
(or the power supply capacity is 500kVA or more).
3. Abrupt power supply changes are expected, due to conditions such as:
a. Several inverters are interconnected with a short bus.
b. A thyristor converter and an inverter are interconnected with a short bus.
c. An installed phase advance capacitor opens and closes.
WARNING: An inverter run by a private power generator may overheat the generator or
suffer from a deformed output voltage waveform of the generator. Generally, the generator
capacity should be five times that of the inverter (kVA) in a PWM control system or six times
greater in a PAM control system.
CAUTION: In the case of important equipment, to shorten the non-operational time of
inverter failure, please provide a backup circuit by commercial power supply or spare
inverter.
2–6
Step-by-Step Basic Installation
This section will guide you through the following basic steps of installation:
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Activity
Choose a mounting location in compliance with the Warnings and Cautions. See
NOTE below.
Check the mounting location for adequate ventilation
Cover the inverter’s ventilation openings to prevent debris from entering.
Check the inverter dimensions for footprint and mounting hole locations.
Study the Cautions, Warnings, wire and fuse sizes, and terminal torque
specifications before wiring the inverter.
Connect wiring for the inverter power input.
Wire the inverter output to the motor.
Uncover the inverter’s ventilation openings applied in Step 3.
Perform the Powerup Test. (This step includes several sub steps.)
Make observations and check your installation.
NOTE: If the installation is in an EU country, study the EMC installation guidelines in
Appendix D.
Page
2–7
2–8
2–8
2–9
2–14
2–17
2–21
2–22
2–22
2–35
2–7
Choosing a Mounting Location
1
Step 1: Study the following caution messages associated with mounting the inverter. This is
the time when mistakes are most likely to occur that will result in expensive rework,
equipment damage, or personal injury.
CAUTION: Be sure to install the unit on flame-resistant material such as steel plate.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
CAUTION: Be sure not to place any flammable materials near the inverter. Otherwise, there
is the danger of fire.
CAUTION: Be sure not to let the foreign matter enter vent openings in the inverter housing,
such as wire clippings, spatter from welding, metal shavings, dust, etc. Otherwise, there is
the danger of fire.
CAUTION: Be sure to install the inverter in a place that can bear the weight according to
the specifications in the text (Chapter 1, Specifications Tables). Otherwise, it may fall and
cause injury to personnel.
CAUTION: Be sure to install the unit on a perpendicular wall that is not subject to vibration.
Otherwise, it may fall and cause injury to personnel.
CAUTION: Be sure not to install or operate an inverter that is damaged or has missing parts.
Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
CAUTION: Be sure to install the inverter in a well-ventilated room that does not have direct
exposure to sunlight, a tendency for high temperature, high humidity or dew condensation,
high levels of dust, corrosive gas, explosive gas, inflammable gas, grinding-fluid mist, salt
damage, etc. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
2–8
Ensure Adequate Ventilation
2
Step 2: To summarize the caution messages – you will need to find a solid, non-flammable,
vertical surface that is in a relatively clean and dry environment. In order to ensure enough
room for air circulation around the inverter to aid in cooling, it is recommended to maintain
the specified clearance and the inverter specified in the below diagram.
Clear area
10 cm (3.94”)
minimum
Air flow
WL200
inverter
5 cm (1.97”)
minimum
5 cm (1.97”)
minimum
10 cm (3.94”)
minimum
CAUTION: Be sure to maintain the specified clearance area around the inverter and to
provide adequate ventilation. Otherwise, the inverter may overheat and cause equipment
damage or fire.
Keep Debris Out of Inverter Vents
3
Step 3: Before proceeding to the wiring section, it’s a
good time to temporarily covers the inverter’s
ventilation openings. Paper and masking tape are all
that is needed. This will prevent harmful debris such
as wire clippings and metal shavings from entering
the inverter during installation.
Ventilation holes (top)
Please observe this checklist while mounting the
inverter:
1. The ambient temperature must be in the range of
10 to 50C (using derating).
Ventilation holes
(both sides)
2. Keep any other heat-producing equipment as far
away from the inverter as possible.
3. When installing the inverter in an enclosure, maintain the clearance around the inverter
and verify that its ambient is within specification when the enclosure door is closed.
4. Do not remove the front housing at any time during operation.
2–9
Check Inverter Dimensions
4
Step 4: Locate the applicable drawing on the following pages for your inverter.
Dimensions are given in millimeters (inches) format.
Wl200 INVERTER
Power
Type
Single-phase 200V
WL200-002SF
WL200-004SF
WL200-007SF
W (mm)
H (mm)
68
128
D (mm)
D1 (mm)
109
13.5
122.5
27
NOTE: Some inverter housing require two mounting screws, while other requires four. Be
sure to use lock washers or other means to ensure screws do not loosen due to vibration.
2–10
Dimensional drawings, continued…
Wl200 INVERTER
Power
Type
Single-phase 200V
WL200-015SF
WL200-022SF
W (mm)
H (mm)
D (mm)
D1 (mm)
108
128
170.5
55
143.5
28
170.5
55
WL200-004HF
WL200-007HF
3-phase 400V
WL200-015HF
WL200-022HF
WL200-030HF
WL200-040HF
108
128
2–11
Dimensional drawings, continued…
Wl200 INVERTER
Power
Type
3-phase 400V
WL200-055HF
W (mm)
H (mm)
D (mm)
D1 (mm)
140
128
170.5
55
2–12
Dimensional drawings, continued…
Wl200 INVERTER
Power
Type
3-phase 400V
WL200-075HF
WL200-110HF
W (mm)
H (mm)
D (mm)
D1 (mm)
140
260
155
73.3
2–13
Dimensional drawings, continued…
Wl200 INVERTER
Power
Type
3-phase 400V
WL200-150HF
WL200-185HF
W (mm)
H (mm)
D (mm)
D1 (mm)
180
296
175
97
2–14
Prepare for Wiring
5
Step 5: It is very important to perform the wiring steps carefully and correctly. Before
proceeding, please study the caution and warning message here below.
WARNING: Use 60/75C Cu wire only. (for models: WL200-022S, -007H, -015H, -022H,
-030H and -040H)
WARNING: Use 75C Cu wire only. (for models: WL200-002S, -004S, -007S, -015S, -055H,
-075H, -110H, -150H and -185H)
WARNING: “Open Type Equipment.”
WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100k rms
symmetrical amperes, 240V maximum when protected by Class CC, G, J or R fuses or circuit
breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 240
volts maximum.” For models with suffix S.
WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100k rms
symmetrical amperes, 480V maximum when protected by Class CC, G, J or R fuses or circuit
breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 480
volts maximum.” For models with suffix H.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Be sure to ground the unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock
and/or fire.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Wiring work shall be carried out only by qualified personnel. Otherwise,
there is a danger of electric shock and/or fire.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Implement wiring after checking that the power supply is OFF. Otherwise,
you may incur electric shock and/or fire.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Do not connect wiring to an inverter or operate an inverter that is not
mounted according to the instructions given in this manual. Otherwise, there is a danger of
electric shock and/or injury to personnel.
2–15
Determining Wire and Fuse Sizes
The maximum motor current in your application determines the recommended wore size.
The following table gives the wire size in AWG. The “Power Lines” column applies to the
inverter input power, output wires to the motor, the earth ground connection, and any
other components shown in the “Basic System Description” on page 2–4. The “Signal Lines”
column applies to any wire connecting to the two green connectors just inside the front
cover panel.
Motor Output
Wiring
Inverter Model
Power Lines
kW
HP
0.2
0.4
0.75
¼
½
1
WL200-002SFE
WL200-004SFE
WL200-007SFE
AWG16 / 1.3mm2
(75C only)
10A
1.5
2
WL200-015SFE
AWG12 / 3.3mm2
(75C only)
20A
2.2
3
WL200-022SFE
AWG10 / 5.3mm2
30A
0.4
½
WL200-004HFE
0.75
1.5
1
2
WL200-007HFE
WL200-015HFE
2.2
3
WL200-022HFE
3.0
4.0
4
5
WL200-030HFE
WL200-040HFE
5.5
7.5
WL200-055HFE
7.5
11
10
15
WL200-075HFE
WL200-110HFE
15
20
WL200-150HFE
18.5
25
WL200-185HFE
AWG16 / 1.3mm2
AWG14 / 2.1mm2
AWG12 / 3.3mm2
AWG12 / 3.3mm2
(75C only)
AWG10 / 5.3mm2
(75C only)
AWG6 / 13mm2
(75C only)
Signal Lines
Applicable
equipment
Fuse (UL-rated,
class J,CC,G,T
600V)
18 to 28
AWG / 0.14
2
to 0.75 mm
shielded wire
(see Note 4)
10A
15A
30A
50A
Note 1: Field wiring must be made by a UL-Listed and CSA-certified closed-loop terminal
connector sized for the wire gauge involved. Connector must be fixed by using the
crimping tool specified by the connector manufacturer.
Note 2: Be sure to consider the capacity of the circuit breaker to be used.
Note 3: Be sure to use a larger wire gauge if power line length exceeds 66ft. (20m).
2
Note 4: Use 18 AWG / 0.75mm wire for the alarm signal wire ([AL0], [AL1], [AL2]
terminals).
Note 5: Type E Combination Motor Controller marking is to indicate that the unit shall be
connected with, LS Industrial System Co., Ltd, Type E Combination Motor
Controller MMS Series.
2–16
Terminal Dimensions and Torque Specs
The terminal screw dimensions for all WL200 inverters are listed in table below. This
information is useful in sizing spade lug or ring lug connectors for wire terminations.
CAUTION: Fasten the screws with the specified fastening torque in the table below. Check
for any loosening of screws. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
Types
WL200-002S,004S,007S
WL200-015S,022S
WL200-004H,007H,015H,022H,030H,040H,055H
WL200-075H,110H
WL200-150H,185H
Screw
Diameter
Width
(mm)
Tightening Torque
(Nm)
M3.5
7.6
1.0
M4
10
1.4
M5
M6
13
17.5
3.0
3.9 to 5.1
2–17
Wire the Inverter Input to a Supply
6
Step 6: In this step, you will connect wiring to the input of the inverter. First, you must
determine whether the inverter model you have required three-phase power only, or
single-phase power only. All models have the same power connection terminals [R/L1],
[S/L2], and [T/L3]. So you must refer to the specifications label (on the side of the inverter)
for the acceptable power source types! For inverters that can accept single-phase power
and are connected that way, terminal [S/L2] will remain unconnected.
Note the use of ring lug connectors for a secure connection.
Single-phase 200V
0.2 to 0.75kW
Single-phase
RB
L1
N
Power input
+1
+
-
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Output to Motor
Chassis Ground (M4)
Single-phase 200V
1.5 to 2.2kW
Three-phase 400V
0.4 to 4.0kW
Single-phase
RB
+1
Three-phase
+
-
RB PD/+ P/+ N/1
L1
N
Power input
Chassis Ground (M4)
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Output to Motor
Power input
Output to Motor
2–18
Three-phase 400V
5.5kW
R/L1
Chassis Ground (M4)
Three-phase 400V
S/L2
RB
PD/+1 P/+
T/L3
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Power input
N/-
Output to Motor
7.5, 11kW
R/L1 S/L2
T/L3
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
PD/+1 P/+
N/-
RB
Power input
G
G
Output to Motor
2–19
Three-phase 400V
15, 18.5kW
R/L1 S/L2
T/L3
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
PD/+1 P/+
N/-
RB
Power input
G
G
Output to Motor
NOTE: An inverter powered by a portable power generator may receive a distorted power
waveform, overheating the generator. In general, the generator capacity should be five
times that of the inverter (kVA).
2–20
CAUTION: Be sure that the input voltage matches the inverter specifications:
 Single-phase 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz (0.2kW to 2.2kW) for SFE models
 Three-phase 380 to 480 V 50/60Hz (0.4kW to 18.5kW) for HFE models
CAUTION: Be sure not to power a three-phase-only inverter with single-phase power.
Otherwise, there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of fire.
CAUTION: Be sure not to connect an AC power supply to the output terminals. Otherwise,
there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of injury and/or fire.
WL200 Inverter
Output to Motor
Power Input
CAUTION: Remarks for using ground fault interrupter breakers in the main power supply:
Adjustable frequency inverter with integrated CE-filters and shielded (screened) motor
cables have a higher leakage current toward earth GND. Especially at the moment of
switching ON this can cause an inadvertent trip of ground fault interrupters. Because of the
rectifier on the input side of the inverter there is the possibility to stall the switch-off
function through small amounts of DC current.
Please observe the following:
 Use only short time-invariant and pulse current-sensitive ground fault interrupters with
higher trigger current.
 Other components should be secured with separate ground fault interrupters.
 Ground fault interrupters in the power input wiring of an inverter are not an absolute
protection against electric shock.
CAUTION: Be sure to install a fuse in each phase of the main power supply to the inverter.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
CAUTION: For motor leads, ground fault interrupter breakers and electromagnetic
contactors, be sure to size these components properly (each must have the capacity for
rated current and voltage). Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
2–21
Wire the Inverter Output to Motor
7
Step 7: The process of motor selection is beyond the scope of this manual. However, it must
be an AC induction motor with three phases. It should also come with a chassis ground lug.
If the motor does not have three power input leads, stop the installation and verify the
motor type. Other guidelines for wiring the motor include:
 Use an inverter-grade motor for maximum motor life (1600V insulation).
 For standard motors, use the AC reactor accessory if the wiring between the inverter and
motor exceeds 10 meters in length.
Simply connect the motor to the terminals [U/T1], [V/T2], and [W/T3] as shown in page 2–17
to 2–19. This is a good time to connect the chassis ground lug on the drive as well. The
motor chassis ground must also connect to the same point. Use a star ground (single-point)
arrangement, and never daisy-chain the grounds (point-to-point).
 Check the mechanical integrity of each wire crimp and terminal connection.
 Replace the housing partition that covers access to the power connections.
CAUTION: Power terminal assignment is different compared to old models such as L100,
L200, X200 series, etc,. Pay attention when wiring the power cable.
Logic Control Wiring
After completing the initial installation and powerup test in this chapter, you may need to
wire the logic signal connector for your application. For new inverter users/applications, we
highly recommend that you first complete the powerup test in this chapter without adding
any logic control wiring. Then you will be ready to set the required parameters for logic
control as covered in Chapter 4, Operations and Monitoring.
IMPORTANT!: Please be sure to set the motor nameplate data into the appropriate
parameters to ensure proper operation and protection of the motor:
* b012 is the motor overload protection value
* A082 is the motor voltage selection
* H003 is the motor kW capacity
* H004 is the number of motor poles
Please refer to the appropriate pages in this guide and the Instruction Manual for further
details.
2–22
Uncover the Inverter Vents
8
Step 8: After mounting and wiring the inverter,
remove any temporary covers from the inverter
housing. This includes material over the side
ventilation holes.
Ventilation holes (top)
WARNING: Make sure the input power to the
inverter is OFF. If the drive has been powered, leave it
OFF for ten (10) minutes before continuing.
Ventilation holes
(both sides)
Powerup Test
9
Step 9: After wiring the inverter and motor, you’re ready to do a powerup test. The
procedure that follows is designed for the first-time use of the drive. Please verify the
following conditions before conducting the powerup test:
 You have followed all the steps in this chapter up to this step.
 The inverter is new, and is securely mounted to a non-flammable vertical surface.
 The inverter is connected to a power source and a motor.
 No additional wiring of the inverter connectors or terminals has been done.
 The power supply is reliable, and the motor is a known working unit, and the motor
nameplate ratings match the inverter ratings.
 The motor is securely mounted, and is not connected to any load.
Goals for the Powerup Test
If there are any exceptions to the above conditions at this step, please take a moment to
take any measures necessary to reach this basic starting point. The specific goals of this
powerup test are:
1. Verify that the wiring to the power supply and motor is correct.
2. Demonstrate that the inverter and motor are generally compatible.
3. Get an introduction to the use of the built-in operator keypad.
The powerup test gives you an important starting to ensure a safe and successful
application of the Hitachi inverter. We highly recommend performing this test before
proceeding to the other chapters in this manual.
2–23
Pre-test and Operational Precautions
The following instructions apply to the powerup test, or to any time the inverter is powered
and operating. Please study the following instructions and messages before proceeding
with the powerup test.
1. The power supply must have fusing suitable for the load. Check the fuse size chart
presented in Step 5, if necessary.
2. Be sure you have access to a disconnect switch for the drive input power if necessary.
However, do not turn OFF power during inverter operation unless it is an emergency.
3. Turn the keypad potentiometer to the minimum position (full counter-clockwise).
CAUTION: The heat sink fins will have a high temperature. Be careful not to touch them.
Otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
CAUTION: The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high
speed. Be sure to check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before
operating the inverter. Otherwise, there is the danger of injury.
CAUTION: If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default
setting (50Hz/60Hz), be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with the
respective manufacturer. Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting their
approval. Otherwise, there is the danger of equipment damage and/or injury.
CAUTION: Check the following before and during the Powerup test. Otherwise, there is the
danger of equipment damage.
 Is the shorting bar between the [+1] and [+] terminals installed? DO NOT power or
operate the inverter if the jumper is removed.
 Is the direction of the motor rotation correct?
 Did the inverter trip during acceleration or deceleration?
 Were the rpm and frequency meter readings as expected?
 Were there any abnormal motor vibration or noise?
Powering the Inverter
If you have followed all the steps, cautions and warnings up to this point, you’re ready to
apply power. After doing so, the following events should occur:
 The POWER LED will illuminate.
 The numeric (7-segment) LEDs will display a test pattern, then stop at ..
 The Hz LED will be ON.
If the motor starts running unexpectedly or any other problem occurs, press the STOP key.
Only if necessary should you remove power to the inverter as a remedy.
NOTE: If the inverter has been previously powered and programmed, the LEDs (other than
the POWER LED) may illuminate differently than as indicated above. If necessary, you can
initialize all parameters to the factory default settings. See “Restoring Factory Default
Settings” on page 6–14.
2–24
Using the Front Panel Keypad
Please take a moment to familiarize yourself with the keypad layout shown in the figure
below. The display is used in programming the inverter’s parameters, as well as monitoring
specific parameter values during operation.
(1) POWER LED
(4) RUN LED
(5) Monitor LED [Hz]
(2) ALARM LED
(6) Monitor
LED [A]
(8) 7-seg
LED
(3) Program LED
(8) 7-seg LED
(7) Run command LED
RUN

(9) RUN key
RUN
1
STOP
RESET
ESC
2
SET
(11) ESC key
(12) Up key
(13) Down key
PWR
Hz
ALM
A
PLG
(15) USB connector
(10) STOP/RESET key
(16) RJ45 connector
(14) SET key
Key and Indicator Legend
Items
(1) POWER LED
(2) ALARM LED
(3) Program LED
(4) RUN LED
(5) Monitor LED [Hz]
(6) Monitor LED [A]
(7) Run command LED
(8) 7-seg LED
(9) Run key
(10) Stop/reset key
(11) ESC key
(12) Up key
(13) Down key
(14) SET key
(15) USB connector
(16) RJ45 connector
Contents
Turns ON (Green) while the inverter is powered up.
Turns ON (Red) when the inverter trips.
Turns ON (Green) when the display shows changeable parameter.
Blinks when there is a mismatch in setting.
Turns ON (Green) when the inverter is driving the motor.
Turns ON (Green) when the displayed data is frequency related.
Turns ON (Green) when the displayed data is current related.
Turns ON (Green) when a Run command is set to the operator. (Run key is
effective.)
Shows each parameter, monitors etc.
Makes inverter run.
Makes inverter decelerates to a stop.
Reset the inverter when it is in trip situation
Go to the top of next function group, when a function mode is shown
Cancel the setting and return to the function code, when a data is shown
Moves the cursor to a digit left, when it is in digit-to-digit setting mode
Pressing for 1 second leads to display data of , regardless of current display.
Increase or decrease the data.
Pressing the both keys at the same time gives you the digit-to-digit edit.
Go to the data display mode when a function code is shown
Stores the data and go back to show the function code, when data is shown.
Moves the cursor to a digit right, when it is in digit-to-digit display mode
Connect USB connector (mini-B) for using PC communication
Connect RJ45 jack for remote operator. (RS422 only)
2–25
Keys, Modes, and Parameters
The purpose of the keypad is to provide a way to change
modes and parameters. The term function applies to
both monitoring modes and parameters. These are all
accessible through function codes that are primary
4-character codes. The various functions are separated
into related groups identifiable by the left-most
character, as the table shows.
Function
Group
“D”
“F”
“A”
“B”
“C”
“H”
“P”
“U”
“E”
Type (Category) of Function
Monitoring functions
Main profile parameters
Standard functions
Fine tuning functions
Intelligent terminal functions
Motor constant related functions
Pulse train input, torque, EzSQ, and
communication related functions
User selected parameters
Error codes
RUN

RUN
1
STOP
RESET
ESC
2
SET
Mode to Access
Monitor
Program
Program
Program
Program
Program
PWR
Hz
ALM
A
PGM
PRG LED
Indicator






Program

Program



You can see from the following page how to monitor and/or program the parameters.
Keypad Navigation Map
The WL200 Series inverter drives have many programmable functions and parameters.
Chapter 3 will cover these in detail, but you need to access just a few items to perform the
powerup test. The menu structure makes use of function codes and parameter codes to
allow programming and monitoring with only a 4-digit display and keys and LEDs. So, it is
important to become familiar with the basic navigation map of parameters and functions in
the diagram below. You may later use this map as a reference.
2–26
Func. code display
SET
: Moves to data display
Group "d"
Func. code display
SET


.
ESC


Func. code display
ESC : Jumps to the next group

ESC
Group "F"
Func. code display
Save
SET


.

SET
ESC
SET
ESC

.

Data display (F001 to F003)
Data does not blink because of real time synchronizing
ESC
Group "A"
Func. code display
SET
: Saves the data in EEPROM and returns to func. code display.
ESC
: Returns to func. code display without saving data.
SET




SET
ESC
SET
ESC



ESC
Group "b"

ESC
Group "C"

Data display
When data is changed, the display starts blinking, which means that
new data has not been activated yet.
SET
: Saves the data in EEPROM and returns to func. code display.
ESC
: Cancels the data change and returns to func. code display.
ESC
Group "H"

Press the both up and down key at the same
ESC
Group "P"

ESC
Group "U"

time in func. code or data display, then

single-digit edit mode will be enabled.
Refer to 2-35 for further information.

NOTE: Pressing the [ESC] key will make the display go to the top of next function group,
regardless the display contents. (e.g.   [ESC]  )
2–27
[Setting example]
After power ON, changing from . display to change the  (carrier frequency) data.
 Press [ESC] key to show
the function code
display after the first power ON
ESC
.

ESC
 Data of  will be shown on the
SET
 Press [ESC] key to move on to the function group 

ESC
 Press [ESC] key twice to move on to the function group .
  Press Up key to change increase function code (  )


 Press SET key to display the data of 
SET

 . 
Display is solid lighting.
ESC

 Press up key to increase the

SET
 . 
 Press SET key to set
data (.  .)
When data is changed, the display starts
blinking, which means that new data has
not been activated yet.
and save the data
SET :Fix and stores the data and moves back to the function code
ESC :Cancels the change and moves back to the function code
Function code xxx are for monitor and not possible to change.
Function codes xxx other than  are reflected on the performance just after changing the
data (before pressing SET key), and there will be no blinking.
When a function code is shown…
ESC key
Move on to the next function group
SET key
Move on to the data display
When a data is shown…
Cancels the change and moves back to
the function code
Fix and stores the data and moves back
to the function code

key
Increase function code
Increase data value

key
Decrease function code
Decrease data value
 Note
Keep pressing the [ESC] key for more than 1 second leads to d001 display, regardless the display situation.
But note that the display will circulates while keep pressing the [ESC] key because of the original function of
the key. (e.g.         … displays . after 1 second)
2–28
Selecting Functions and Editing Parameters
To prepare to run the motor in the powerup test, this section will show how to configure
the necessary parameters:
1. Select the digital operator as the source of motor speed command (=).
2. Select the digital operator as the source of the RUN command (=).
3. Set the motor base frequency () and AVR voltage of the motor ().
4. Set the motor current for proper thermal protection ().
5. Set the number of poles for the motor ().
The following series of programming tables are designed for successive use. Each table
uses the previous table’s final state as the starting point. Therefore, start with the first and
continue programming until the last one. If you get lost or concerned that some of the
other parameters setting may be incorrect, refer to “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on
page 6–14.
Prepare to Edit Parameters – This sequence begins with powering ON the inverter, then it
shows how to navigate to the “A” Group parameters for subsequent settings. You can also
refer to the “Keypad Navigation Map” on page 2–25 for orientation throughout the steps.
Action
Display
Turn ON the inverter
.
Func./Parameter
Inverter output frequency displayed
(0Hz in stop mode)
Press the ESC key

“” group selected
Press the ESC key 2 times

“” group selected
1. Select the digital operator for Speed Command – The inverter output frequency can
be set from several sources, including an analog input, memory setting, or the network, for
example. The powerup test uses the keypad as the speed control source for your
convenience. Note that the default setting depends on the country.
Action
(Starting point)

Press the SET key
Press the

Display
/


key to select
Press the SET key to store
Func./Parameter
“A” Group selected
Speed command source setting
Potentiometer of ext. operator
Control terminals
Digital operator (F001)
ModBus network
etc.

Digital operator (selected)

Stores parameter, returns to “”
2–29
2. Select the digital operator for RUN Command –
To RUN command causes the inverter to accelerate the
motor to the selected speed. The Run command can
arrive from various sources, including the control
terminals, the Run key on the keypad or the network. In
the figure to the right, notice the Run Key Enable LED,
just above the Run key. If the LED is ON, the Run key is
already selected as the source, and you may skip this
step. Note that the default setting depends on the
country.
Run Key Enable LED
RUN
RUN PWR
RUN PWR

Hz
Hz
Hz
A
A
A
RUN
1
STOP/
RESET
ESC
2
SET
ALM
ALM
ALM
PRG
PRG
PRG
If the Potentiometer Enable LED is OFF, follow these steps below (the table resumes action
from the end of the previous table).
Action
(Starting point)
Press the 
key two times
Press the SET key
Press the

/

key to select
Press the SET key to store
Display
Func./Parameter

Speed command source setting

Run command source setting

Control terminal
Digital operator
ModBus network input
etc.

 Digital operator (selected)

Stores parameter, returns to “”
NOTE: After completing the steps above, the Run Key Enable LED will be ON. This does not
mean the motor is trying to run; it means that the RUN key is now enabled. DO NOT press
the RUN key at this time – complete the parameter setup first.
2–30
3. Set the Motor Base Frequency and AVR voltage of the motor – The motor is
designed to operate at a specific AC frequency. Most commercial motors are designed for
50/60 Hz operation. First, check the motor specifications. Then follow the steps below to
verify the setting or correct it for your motor. DO NOT set it greater than 50/60 Hz unless
the motor manufacturer specifically approves operation at the higher frequency.
Action
(Starting point)
Press the

key two times
Press the SET key
Press the

key to select
Press the SET key
Func./Parameter

Run command source setting

Base frequency setting
.
Default value for the base frequency
= 50 Hz
Set to your motor specs (your display
may be different)

Store parameter, returns to “”
.

/
Display
CAUTION: If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default
setting (50Hz/60Hz), be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with the
respective manufacturer. Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting their
approval. Otherwise, there is the danger of equipment damage.
Set the AVR Voltage Setting – The inverter has an Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR)
function. It adjusts the output voltage to match the motor’s nameplate voltage rating. The
AVR smoothes out fluctuation in the input power source, but note that it does not boost
the voltage in the event of a brown-out. Use the AVR setting () that most closely
matches the one for your motor.
 200V class: 200 / 215 / 220 / 230 / 240 VAC
 400V class: 380 / 400 / 415 / 440 / 460 / 480 VAC
To set the motor voltage, follow the steps on the following table.
Action
(Starting point)
Press the

key and hold until 
Display

Base frequency setting

AVR voltage select

Press the SET key
Func./Parameter
or
Default value for AVR voltage:
200V class = 230VAC
400V class = 400VAC

Press the

/
Press the SET key

key to select

Set to your motor specs (your display
may be different)

Store parameter, returns to “”
2–31
4. Set the Motor Current – The inverter has thermal overload protection that is designed
to protect the inverter and motor from overheating due to an excessive load. The inverter’s
uses the motor’s current rating to calculate the time-based heating effect. This protection
depends on using correct current rating for your motor. The level of electronic thermal
setting, parameter , is adjustable from 20% to 100% of the inverter’s rated current. A
proper configuration will also help prevent unnecessary inverter trip events.
Read the motor’s current rating on its manufacturer’s nameplate. Then follow the steps
below to configure the inverter’s overload protection setting.
Action
(Starting point)
Display
Func./Parameter

AVR voltage select
Press the ESC key

First “B” Group parameter selected
Press the

Level of electronic thermal setting

key and hold until 
Press the SET key
Press the

/
Press the SET key
.

key to select
.

Default value will be 100% of inverter
rated current
Set to your motor specs (your display
may be different)
Store parameter, returns to “”
2–32
5. Set the Number of Motor Poles – The motor’s internal winding arrangement
determines its number of magnetic poles. The specification label on the motor usually
indicates the number of poles. For proper operation, verify the parameter setting matches
the motor poles. Many industrial motors have four poles, corresponding to the default
setting in the inverter ().
Follow the steps in the table below to verify the motor poles setting and change if
necessary (the table resumes action from the end of the previous table.)
Action
(Starting point)
Display
Func./Parameter
Level of electronic thermal setting
Press the ESC key two times

“H” Group selected
Press the

Motor poles parameter

2 = 2 poles
4 = 4 poles (default)
6 = 6 poles

48 = 48 poles
Set to your motor specs (your display
may be different)

Store parameter, returns to “”

key two times
Press the SET key.
Press the

/
Press the SET key.

key to select
…

This step concludes the parameter setups for the inverter. You are almost ready to run the
motor for the first time!
TIP: If you became lost during any of these steps, first observe the state of the PRG LED.
Then study the “Keypad Navigation Map” on page 2–25 to determine the current state of
the keypad controls and display. As long as you do not press the SET key, no parameter will
be changed by keypad entry errors. Note that power cycling the inverter causes it to power
up Monitor Mode, displaying the value for  (output frequency).
The next section will show you how to monitor a particular parameter from the display.
Then you will be ready to run the motor.
2–33
Monitoring Parameters with the Display
After using the keypad for parameter editing, it’s a good
idea to switch the inverter from Program Mode to
Monitor Mode. The PRG LED will be OFF, and the Hertz
or Ampere LED indicates the display units.
For the powerup test, monitor the motor speed
indirectly by viewing the inverter’s output frequency. The
output frequency must not be confused with base
frequency (50/60 Hz) of the motor, or the carrier
frequency (switching frequency of the inverter, in the
kHz range). The monitoring functions are in the “D” list,
located near the top left of the “Keypad Navigation Map”
on page 2–25.
RUN PWR
RUN PWR
....

Hz
Hz
A
A
RUN
1
STOP/
RESET
ESC
2
SET
ALM
ALM
PRG
PRG
Output frequency (speed) set – Resuming keypad operation from the previous table,
follow the steps below.
Action
(Starting point)
Display
Func./Parameter

Motor poles parameter
Press the ESC key four times

 is selected
Press the SET key.
.
Set frequency displayed
Running the Motor
If you have programmed all the parameters up to this point, you’re ready to run the motor!
First, review this checklist:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Verify the power LED is ON. If not, check the power connections.
Verify the Run Key Enable LED is ON. If it is OFF, check the  setting.
Verify the PRG LED is OFF. If it is ON, review the instructions above.
Make sure the motor is disconnected from any mechanical load.
Now, press the RUN key on the keypad. The RUN LED will turn ON.
Press the [] key for a few seconds. The motor should start turning.
Press the STOP key to stop the motor rotation.
2–34
Single-Digit Edit Mode
If a target function code or data is far from current data, using the single-digit edit mode
makes it quicker. Pressing the up key and down key at the same time leads you to go into
the digit-to-digit changing mode.
While in Single-digit edit mode (single digit is blinking):
SET
: Move cursor to right or set the func.code/data (lowest digit only)
ESC
: Move cursor to left.



ESC
(A)
SET
SET


ESC

SET

ESC


(A)
ESC



1st digit will be
blinking. Use up/down
keys to change the
value of the digit.
2nd digit will be
blinking. Use up/down
keys to change the
value of the digit.
SET







3rd digit will be
blinking. Use up/down
keys to change the
value of the digit.
4th digit will be blinking.
Use up/down keys to
change the value of the
digit.
If not existing codes are selected, the data sill not move to the function
code but blinking digit will move again to the left end digit.
.


(B)
SET
ESC
SET
.
.
ESC


.
1st digit will be blinking.
Use up/down keys to
change the value of the
digit.
SET
.
ESC


(B)
SET
.
ESC


.
.
2nd digit will be blinking.
Use up/down keys to
change the value of the
digit.
3rd digit will be blinking.
Use up/down keys to
change the value of the
digit.
▽
△
.
4th digit will be blinking.
Use up/down keys to
change the value of the
digit.
(Note) When pressing [ESC] with cursor on the highest digit, the cursor will jump to the lowest digit.
((A) and (B) in above figure.)
(Note) When pressing up key and down key at the same time in single-digit edit mode, the
single-digit edit mode is disabled and goes back to normal mode.
2–35
Powerup Test Observations and Summary
10
Step 10: Reading this section will help you make some useful observations when first
running the motor.
Error Codes – If the inverter displays an error code (format is “ xx”), see “Monitoring Trip
Events, History, & Conditions” on page 6–8 to interpret and clear the error.
Acceleration and Deceleration – The WL200 inverter has programmable acceleration and
deceleration value. The test procedure left these at the default value, 10 seconds. You can
observe this by setting the frequency  at about half speed before running the motor.
Then press RUN, and the motor will take 5 seconds to reach a steady speed. Press the STOP
key to see a 5 second deceleration to a STOP.
State of Inverter at Stop – If you adjust the motor’s speed to zero, the motor will slow to a
near stop, and the inverter turns the outputs OFF. The high-performance WL200 can rotate
at a very slow speed with high torque output, but not zero (must use servo systems with
position feedback for that feature). This characteristic means you must use a mechanical
brake for some applications.
Interpreting the Display – First, refer to the output frequency display readout. The
maximum frequency setting (parameter ) defaults to 50 Hz for your application.
Example: Suppose a 4-pole motor is rated for 60 Hz operation, so the inverter is configured
to output 60 Hz at full scale. Use the following formula to calculate the rpm.
Speed in RPM 
Frequency  60
Frequency 120 60 120


 1800 RPM
Pairs of poles
# of poles
4
The theoretical speed for the motor is 1800 RPM (speed of torque vector rotation).
However, the motor cannot generate torque unless its shaft turns at a slightly different
speed. This difference is called slip. So it’s common to see a rated speed of approximately
1750 RPM on a 60 Hz, 4-pole motor. Using a tachometer to measure shaft speed, you can
see the difference between the inverter output frequency and the actual motor speed. The
slip increases slightly as the motor’s load increases. This is why the inverter output value is
called “frequency”, since it is not exactly equal to motor speed.
Run/Stop Versus Monitor/Program Modes – The
Run LED on the inverter is ON in Run Mode, and
OFF in Stop Mode. The Program LED is ON when
the inverter is in Program Mode, and OFF for
Monitor Mode. All four mode combinations are
possible. The diagram to the right depicts the
modes and the mode transitions via keypad.
STOP/
RESET
Run
Stop
RUN
Monitor
ESC
SET
Program
NOTE: Some factory automation devices such as PLCs have alternative Run/Program
modes; the device is in either one mode or the other. In the Hitachi inverter, however, Run
Mode alternates with Stop Mode, and Program Mode alternates with Monitor Mode. This
arrangement lets you program some value while the inverter is operating – providing
flexibility for maintenance personnel.
3–1
Chapt er 3:
Configuring
Drive Parameters
In This Chapter…
3
page
-
Choosing a Programming Device .................................................... 3–2
-
Using the Keypad Devices ................................................................ 3–3
-
“D” Group: Monitoring Functions ................................................... 3–5
-
“F” Group: Main Profile Parameters .............................................3–10
-
“A” Group: Standard Functions ......................................................3–11
-
“B” Group: Fine Tuning Functions .................................................3–43
-
“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions ...................................3–79
-
“H” Group: Motor Constants Functions .......................................3–99
-
“P” Group: Other Parameters ......................................................3–100
3–2
Choosing a Programming Device
Introduction
Hitachi variable frequency drives (inverters) use the latest electronics technology for getting
the right AC waveform to the motor at the right time. The benefits are many, including
energy savings and higher machine output or productivity. The flexibility required to handle
a broad range of applications has required ever more configurable options and parameters
– inverter are now a complex industrial automation component. And this can make a
product seem difficult to use, but the goal of this chapter is to make this easier for you.
As the powerup test in Chapter 2 demonstrated, you do not have to program very many
parameters to run the motor. In fact, most applications would benefit only from
programming just a few, specific parameters. This chapter will explain the purpose of each
set of parameters, and help you choose the ones that are important to your application.
If you are developing a new application for the inverter and a motor, finding the right
parameters to change is mostly an exercise in optimization. Therefore, it is okay to begin
running the motor with a loosely tuned system. By making specific, individual changes and
observing their effects, you can achieve a finely tuned system.
Introduction of Inverter Programming
The front panel keypad is the first and best way to get to know the inverter’s capabilities.
Every function or programmable parameter is accessible from the keypad.
3–3
Using the Keypad Devices
The WL200 Series inverter front keypad contains all the elements for both monitoring and
programming parameters. The keypad layout is pictured below. All other programming
devices for the inverter have a similar key arrangement and function.
Display Units (Hertz / Amperes) LEDs
Run LED
Power LED
Alarm LED
Parameter Display
RUN
Run key Enable LED
Run key

RUN
1
STOP/
RESET
ESC
2
SET
PWR
Hz
ALM
A
PRG
Set key
USB port
(Mini B connector)
Remote operator
Connector (RJ45 )
(RS422 only)
Escape key
Up/Down keys
Program LED
Stop/Reset key
Key and Indicator Legend
 Run LED – ON when the inverter output is ON and the motor is developing torque (Run
Mode), and OFF when the inverter output is OFF (Stop Mode).
 Program LED – This LED is ON when the inverter is ready for parameter editing
(Program Mode). It is OFF when the parameter display is monitoring data (Monitor
Mode).
 Run Key Enable LED – This LED is ON when the inverter is ready to respond to the Run
key, OFF when the Run key is disabled.
 Run Key – Press this key to run the motor (the Run Enable LED must be ON first).
Parameter , Keypad Run Key Routing, determines whether the Run key generates a
Run FWD or Run REV command.
 Stop/Reset Key – Press this key to stop the motor when it is running (uses the
programmed deceleration rate). This key will also reset an alarm that has tripped.
 Parameter Display – A 4-digit, 7-segment display for parameters and function codes.
 Display Units, Hertz/Amperes – One of these LEDs will be ON to indicate the units
associated with the parameter display.
 Power LED – This is ON when the power input to the inverter is ON.
 Alarm LED – ON when an inverter trip is active (alarm relay contact will be closed).
 Escape Key – This key is used to escape from the current situation.
 Up/Down keys – Use these keys alternatively to move up or down the lists of parameter
and functions shown in the display, and increment/decrement values.
 Set key – This key is used to navigate through the lists of parameters and functions for
setting and monitoring parameter values. When the unit is in Program Mode and you
have edited a parameter value, press the Set key to write the new value to the EEPROM.
3–4
Operational Modes
The RUN and PRG LEDs tell just part of the story; Run
Mode and Program Modes are independent modes,
not opposite modes. In the state diagram to the right,
Run alternates with Stop, and Program Mode alternates
with Monitor Mode. This is a very important ability, for
it shows that a technician can approach a running
machine and change some parameters without
shutting down the machine.
The occurrence of a fault during operation will cause
the inverter to enter Trip Mode as shown. An event
such as an output overload will cause the inverter to
exit the Run Mode and turn OFF its output to the
motor. In the Trip Mode, any request to run the motor
is ignored. You must clear the error by pressing the
Stop/Reset switch. See “Monitoring Trip Events, History,
& Conditions” on page 6–8.
Run
STOP
RESET
Stop
RUN
FUNC
Monitor
Run
Program
STOP
RESET
Stop
RUN
STOP
RESET
Fault
Trip
Fault
Run Mode Edit
The inverter can be in Run Mode (inverter output is controlling motor) and still allow you to
edit certain parameters. This is useful in applications that must run continuously, you need
some inverter parameter adjustment.
The parameter tables in this chapter have a column titled “Run
Mode Edit”. An Ex mark  means the parameter cannot be
edited; a Check mark  means the parameter can be edited. The
Software Lock Setting (parameter ) determines when the Run
Mode access permission is in effect and access permission in
other conditions, as well. It is the responsibility of the user to
choose a useful and safe software lock setting for the inverter
operating conditions and personnel. Please refer to “Software
Lock Mode” on page 3–54 for more information.
Run
Mode
Edit


Control Algorithms
The motor control program in the WL200
inverter has two sinusoidal PWM switching
algorithms. The intent is that you select the
best algorithm for the motor and load
characteristics of your application. Both
algorithms generate the frequency output in a
unique way.
Once configured, the algorithm is the basis for
other parameter settings as well (see “Torque
Control Algorithms” on page 3–21). Therefore,
choose the best algorithm early in your
application design process.
Inverter Control Algorithms
V/F control
constant torque (V/F-VC)
V/F control,
variable (1.7) torque
V/F control,
Free V/f
Output
3–5
“D” Group: Monitoring Functions
You can access important parameter values with the “D” Group monitoring functions,
whether the inverter is in Run Mode or Stop Mode. After selecting the function code
number for the parameter you want to monitor, press the Set key once to show the value
on the display. In functions  and , the intelligent terminals use individual segments
of the display to show ON/OFF status.
“d” Function
Run
Mode
Edit
Units
 Output frequency monitor
Real time display of output frequency
to motor from
0.0 to 400.0Hz
If  is set 01, output frequency
() can be changed by up/down
key with d001 monitoring.

Hz
 Output current monitor
Filtered display of output current to
motor, range is
0 to 655.3 ampere

A
 Rotation direction monitor
Three different indications:
“”Forward
“”Stop
“”Reverse



% times
constant





Hz times
constant

V

KW
Func.
Code
Name

Process variable (PV),
PID feedback monitor

Intelligent input
terminal status
Description
Displays the scaled PID process
variable (feedback) value ( is
scale factor),
0.00 to 9999.00
Displays the state of the intelligent
input terminals:
ON
7
6 5 4
3
2
1 OFF
Terminal numbers
Displays the state of the intelligent
output terminals:
ON
Intelligent output
 terminal status
OFF
Relay

Scaled output frequency
monitor
 Output voltage monitor
 Input power monitor
12 11
Displays the output frequency scaled
by the constant in .
Decimal point indicates range:
0 to 3999
Voltage of output to motor,
Range is 0.0 to 600.0V
Displays the input power, range is 0
to 999.9 kW
3–6
“d” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Run
Mode
Edit
Description
Units
 Watt-hour monitor
Displays watt-hour of the inverter,
range is 0.0 to 999.9/ 1000. to 9999./
1000 to 9999 (10,000 to 99,900)/
100 to 999 (10,0000 to 999,9000)

 Elapsed RUN time monitor
Displays total time the inverter has
been in RUN mode in hours.
Range is 0. to 9999./
1000 to 9999 (10,000 to 99,900)/
100 to 999 (10,0000 to 99,9000)

hours
Displays total time the inverter has
been powered up in hours.
Range is 0. to 9999./
1000 to 9999 (10,000 to 99,900)/
100 to 999 (10,0000 to 99,9000)

hours

C


Range is 0 to 1024


Range is 0 to 9999














Elapsed power-on time
 monitor
 Heat sink temperature monitor
Temperature of the cooling fin, range
is -20 to 150
Displays the state of lifetime of
electrolytic capacitors on the PWB
and cooling fan.
Lifetime expired
 Life check monitor
Normal
Cooling fan
Program counter monitor
 [EzSQ]
Program number monitor
 [EzSQ]
User monitor 0
 [EzSQ]
User monitor 1
 [EzSQ]
User monitor 2
 [EzSQ]
 Dual monitor
 Frequency source monitor
 Run source monitor
Electrolytic caps
Result of EzSQ execution, range is
–2147483647 to 2147483647
Result of EzSQ execution, range is
–2147483647 to 2147483647
Result of EzSQ execution, range is
–2147483647 to 2147483647
Displays two different data
configured in  and .
Displays the frequency source
Operator
 to Multi-speed freq. 1 to 15
Jog frequency
Modbus network
Option
Potentiometer
Calculate function output
EzSQ
[O] input
[OI] input
[O] + [OI]
Terminal
Operator
Modbus network
Option
3–7
Func.
Code
“d” Function
Name
 DC bus voltage monitor
 BRD load ratio monitor
 Electronic thermal monitor
 Analog input [O] monitor
 Analog input [OI] monitor
Description
Voltage of inverter internal DC bus,
range is 0.0 to 999.9
Usage ratio of integrated brake
chopper, range is 0.0 to 100.0%
Accumulated value of electronic
thermal detection, range is from 0.0
to 100.0%
Displays [O] input value,
range is 0 to 1023
Displays [OI] input value,
range is 0 to 1023
Run
Mode
Edit
Units

V

%

%




 PID deviation monitor
Displays the scaled PID deviation
( is scale factor),
range is -9999.00 to 9999.00

% times
constant
 PID output monitor
Displays PID output, range is -100.00
to 100.00%

%
3–8
Trip Event and History Monitoring
The trip event and history monitoring feature lets you cycle through related information
using the keypad. See “Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions” on page 6–8 for more
details.
“d” Function
Run
Mode
Edit
Units

events








 Trip monitor 5


 Trip monitor 6




Func.
Code
Name
 Trip counter
Description
Number of trip events,
Range is 0. to 65530
 Trip monitor 1
 Trip monitor 2
 Trip monitor 3
 Trip monitor 4
 Warning monitor
Displays trip event information:
 Error code
 Output frequency at trip point
 Motor current at trip point
 DC bus voltage at trip point
 Cumulative inverter operation time
at trip point
 Cumulative power-ON time at trip
point
Displays the warning code
3–9
Local Monitoring with keypad connected
The WL200 inverter’s serial port may be connected to an external digital operator. During
those times, the inverter keypad keys will not function (except for the Stop key). However,
the inverter’s 4-digit display still provides the Monitor Mode function, displaying any of the
parameters  to . Function , Monitor Display Select for Networked Inverter,
determines the particular x parameter displayed. Refer to the previous table.
When monitoring the inverter with external keypad connected, please note the following:
 The inverter display will monitor x functions according to  setting when a device
is already connected to the inverter’s serial port at inverter powerup.
 When external keypad is connected, the inverter keypad will also display error codes for
inverter trip events. Use the Stop key or inverter Reset function to clear the error. Refer
to “Error Codes” on page 6–8 to interpret the error codes.
 The Stop key can be disabled, if you prefer, by using function .
3–10
“F” Group: Main Profile Parameters
The basic frequency (speed) profile is
defined by parameters contained in the
“F” Group as shown to the right. The set
running frequency is in Hz, but
acceleration and deceleration are
specified in the time duration of the
ramp (from zero to maximum frequency,
or from maximum frequency to zero).
The motor direction parameter
determines whether the keypad Run key
produces a FWD or REV command. This
parameter does not affect the intelligent
terminal [FW] and [REV] functions, which
you configure separately.
Output
frequency





t
0
Actual decel. time
Actual accel. time
Acceleration 1 and Deceleration 1 are the standard default accel and decel values for the
main profile. Accel and decel values for an alternative profile are specified by using
parameters x through x. The motor direction selection () determines the
direction of rotation as commanded only from the keypad. This setting applies to any motor
profile (1st or 2nd) in use at t particular time. When [LAC] is ON, acceleration and
deceleration time become 0.00 second and target frequency is set into the output
frequency immediately.
“F” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Description
 Output frequency setting
 Acceleration time (1)
Standard default target
frequency that determines
constant motor speed, range is
0.00 / start frequency to
maximum frequency ()
Standard default acceleration,
range is 0.00 to 3600.00 sec.
Acceleration time (1),
 2nd motor
 Deceleration time (1)
Standard default deceleration,
range is 0.00 to 3600.00 sec.
Deceleration time (1),
 2nd motor
 Keypad RUN key routing
Two options; select codes:
Forward
Reverse
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units

0.00
Hz

10.00
sec.

10.00
sec.

10.00
sec.

10.00
sec.

00

Acceleration and deceleration can be set via EzSQ as well via the following parameter.
Func.
Code
“P” Function
Name
Acceleration/Deceleration
 setting source selection
Description
Two options; select codes:
Via operator
Via EzSQ
Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults
Initial data
Units
00

3–11
“A” Group: Standard Functions
The inverter provides flexibility in how you control Run/Stop operation and set the output
frequency (motor speed). It has other control sources that can override the  / 
settings. Parameter  sets the source selection for the inverter’s output frequency.
Parameter  selects the Run command source (for FW or RV Run commands). The
default settings use the input terminals.
“A” Function
Func.
Code
Name
 Frequency source
Frequency source,
 2nd motor
 Run command source
Run command source,
 2nd motor
Description
Defaults
Run
Mode
Initial data Units
Edit
Eight options; select codes:
POT on ext. operator
Control terminal
Function F001 setting
Modbus network input
Option
via EzSQ
Calculate function output
Four options; select codes:
Control terminal
Run key on keypad,
or digital operator
Modbus network input
Option

01


01


01


01

Frequency Source Setting – For parameter , the following table provides a further
description of each option, and a reference to other page(s) for more information.
Code







Frequency Source
POT on ext. operator – The range of rotation of the knob
matches the range defined by  (start frequency) to 
(max. frequency), when external operator is used
Control terminal – The active analog input signal on analog
terminals [O] or [OI] sets the output frequency
Function  setting – The value in  is a constant, used
for the output frequency
Modbus network input – The network has a dedicated register
for inverter output frequency
Option – Select when an option card is connected and use the
frequency source from the option
Via EzSQ – The frequency source can be given by the EzSQ
function, when it is used
Calculate function output – The Calculated function has
user-selectable analog input sources (A and B). The output can
be the sum, difference, or product (+, -, x) of the two outputs.
Refer to page(s)…
3–15, 3–16, 3–39,
3–79, 4–77
3–10
B–26
(manual of each
option)
(EzSQ manual)
3–40
3–12
Run Command Source Setting – For parameter , the following table provides a
further description of each option, and a reference to other page(s) for more information.
Code

Run Command Source
Control terminal – The [FW] or [RV] input terminals control
Run/Stop operation

Keypad Run key – The Run and Stop keys provide control


Modbus network input – The network has a dedicated coil for
Run/Stop command and a coil for FW/RV
Option – Select when an option card is connected and use the
frequency source from the option
Refer to page(s)…
4–16
2–24
B–24
(manual of each
option)
/ Override Sources – The inverter allows some sources to override the setting for
output frequency and Run command in  and . This provides flexibility for
applications that occasionally need to use a different source, leaving the standard settings
in /.
The inverter has other control sources that can temporarily override the parameter 
setting, forcing a different output frequency source. The following table lists all frequency
source setting methods and their relative priority (“1” is the highest priority).
Priority
1
2
3
4
5
 Frequency Source Setting Method
[CF1] to [CF4] Multi-speed terminals
[OPE] Operator Control intelligent input
[F-TM] intelligent input
[AT] terminal
 Frequency source setting
Refer to page…
4–17
4–35
4–40
4–28
3–11
The inverter also has other control sources that can temporarily override the parameter
 setting, forcing a different Run command source. The following table lists all Run
command setting methods and their relative priority (“1” is the highest priority).
Priority
1
2
3
 Run Command Setting Method
[OPE] Operator Control intelligent input
[F-TM] intelligent input
 Run command source setting
Refer to page…
4–35
4–40
3–11
3–13
The figure below shows the correlation diagram of all frequency source setting methods and their
relative priority.
Multi-speed
Inputs
CF1 – 4, F1 – 7
ON
Multi-speed
 – 
+
[O] + [OI]
[AT]
terminal
Analog voltage
input [O]
Analog current
input [OI]
OFF
OFF
[AT]
selection

00
ON
Frequency
setting
[AT]
terminal is
assigned
No
02
Yes
03
OFF
OPE-SR/
OPE-SR mini
[VR]
ON
OFF
Operator
control
ON
ON
Digital operator
/= 
Frequency
source setting
/ 
01
Modbus
communication
02
00
OFF
Force
terminal
mode
ON
03
Option PCB
04
OFF
07
EzSQ
10
A input select for
calculate function

B input select for
calculate function

Calculation
system

(+)
(-)
(×)
Frequency calculate function
Note 1: You can set the inverter output frequency with function  only when you have specified “02” for
the frequency source setting . If the setting of function  is other than “”, function  operates
as the frequency command monitoring function. And by setting the frequency set in monitoring active
(=), you can change the inverter output frequency with function  or .
3–14
Basic Parameter Settings
These settings affect the most fundamental behavior of the inverter – the outputs to the
motor. The frequency of the inverter’s AC output determines the motor speed. You may
select from three different sources for the reference speed. During application development
you may prefer using the potentiometer, but you may switch to an external source (control
terminal setting) in the finished application, for example.
The base frequency and maximum frequency settings interact according to the graph below
(left). The inverter output operation follows the constant V/f curve until it reaches the
full-scale output voltage at the base frequency. This initial straight line is the
constant-torque part of the operating characteristic. The horizontal line over to the
maximum frequency serves to let the motor run faster, but at a reduced torque. This is the
constant-power operating range. If you want the motor to output constant torque over its
entire operating range (limited to the motor nameplate voltage and frequency rating), then
set the base frequency and maximum frequency equal as shown (below right).



Base
Frequency
Maximum
Frequency
V
100%
f
0

V
100%
f
0
Base Frequency =
Maximum Frequency
NOTE: The “2nd motor” settings in the table in this chapter store an alternate set of
parameters for a second motor. The inverter can use the 1st set or 2nd set of parameters
to generate the output frequency to the motor.
“A” Function
Func.
Code
Name
 Base frequency
Base frequency,
 2nd motor
 Maximum frequency
Maximum frequency,
 2nd motor
Description
Settable from 30.0 Hz to the
maximum frequency()
nd
Settable from 30.0 Hz to the 2
maximum frequency()
Settable from the base
frequency to 400.0 Hz
nd
Settable from the 2 base
frequency to 400.0 Hz
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units

50.0
Hz

50.0
Hz

50.0
Hz

50.0
Hz
3–15
Analog Input Settings
The inverter has the capability to accept an external analog input that can command the
output frequency to the motor. Voltage input (0-10 V) and current input (4-20mA) are
available on separate terminals ([O] and [OI] respectively). Terminal [L] serves as signal
ground for the two analog inputs. The analog input settings adjust the curve characteristics
between the analog input and the frequency output.
Adjusting [O-L] characteristics – In the
graph to the right,  and  select the
active portion of the input voltage range.
Parameters  and  select the start and
end frequency of the converted output
frequency range, respectively. Together, these
four parameters define the major line
segment as shown. When the line does not
begin at the origin ( and  > 0), then
 defines whether the inverter outputs
0Hz or the -specified frequency when the
analog input value is less than the 
setting. When the input voltage is greater
than the  ending value, the inverter
outputs the ending frequency specified by
.
Adjusting [OI-L] characteristics – In the
graph to the right,  and  select the
active portion of the input current range.
Parameters  and  select the start and
end frequency of the converted output
frequency range, respectively. Together, these
four parameters define the major line
segment as shown. When the line does not
begin at the origin ( and  > 0), then
 defines whether the inverter outputs
0Hz or the -specified frequency when the
analog input value is less than the 
setting. When the input voltage is greater
than the  ending value, the inverter
outputs the ending frequency specified by
.
Max frequency

=
=

0
%
0%
0V


Input scale
100%
10V
Max frequency

=
=

0
%
0%
0


Input scale
100%
20mA
If [AT] is not assigned to any of the intelligent input terminal, inverter recognizes the input
[O]+[OI].
Adjusting [VR-L] characteristics – This is used when an optional operator is used. Refer to
parameters  to  for the details.
3–16
“A” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units
Three options; select codes:
Select between [O] and [OI]
at [AT] (ON=OI, OFF=O)
Select between [O] and
external POT at [AT]
(ON=POT, OFF=O)
Select between [OI] and
external POT at [AT]
(ON=POT, OFF=OI)

00


[O] input active range start
frequency
The output frequency
corresponding to the analog
input range starting point,
range is 0.00 to 400.00

0.00
Hz

[O] input active range end
frequency
The output frequency
corresponding to the analog
input range ending point,
range is 0.00 to 400.00

0.00
Hz
The starting point (offset) for the
active analog input range,
range is 0. to 100.

0.
%
The ending point (offset) for the
active analog input range,
range is 0. to 100.

100.
%
 enable
Two options; select codes:
Use offset ( value)
Use 0Hz

01

 Analog input filter
Range n = 1 to 31,
1 to 30 : ×2ms filter
31: 500ms fixed filter with
±0.1kHz hys.

8.
Spl.
 [AT] selection
[O] input active range start
 voltage
[O] input active range end
 voltage
[O] input start frequency

: External Frequency Filter Time Constant – This filter smooths the analog input
signal for the inverter’s output frequency reference.
・  sets the filter range from n= to . This is a simple moving average calculation,
where n (number of samples) is variable.
・ = is a special value. It configures the inverter to use a movable deadband feature.
Initially the inverter uses the 500ms of filter time constant. Then, the deadband is
employed for each subsequent average of 16 samples. The deadband works by ignoring
small fluctuations in each new average: less than 0.1Hz change. When a 30-sample
average exceeds this deadband, then the inverter applies that average to the output
frequency reference, and it also becomes the new deadband comparison point for
subsequent sample averages.
The example graph below shoes a typical analog input waveform. The filter removes the
noise spikes. When a speed change (such as level increase) occurs, the filter naturally has a
delayed response. Due to the deadband feature (=), the final output changes only
when the 30-sample average moves past the deadband threshold.
3–17
TIP: The deadband feature is useful in applications that require a very stable output
frequency but use an analog input for the speed reference. Example application: A
grinding machine uses a remote potentiometer for operator speed input. After a setting
change, the grinder maintains a very stable speed to deliver a uniform finished surface.
=
Hz
Small step change
Output freq.
reference
16-sample avg.
+0.1
0
-0.1
Threshold exceeded
New deadband
Deadband
Analog input
+0.1
0
-0.1
Speed increase given
Noise spikes
t
EzSQ Related Settings
The WL200 series inverter has capability to execute EzSQ program like SJ700 series inverters.
Parameters  is for the EzSQ performance. Please refer to the EzSQ section for the
detailed explanation.
3–18
Multi-speed and Jog Frequency Settings
Multi-speed – The WL200 inverter has the capability to store and output up to 16 preset
frequencies to the motor ( to ). As in traditional motion terminology, we call this
multi-speed profile capability. These preset frequencies are selected by means of digital
inputs to the inverter. The inverter applies the current acceleration or deceleration setting to
change from the current output frequency to the new one. The first multi-speed setting is
duplicated for the second motor settings (the remaining 15 multi-speeds apply only to the
first motor).
“A” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Multi-speed operation
 selection
 Multi-speed freq. 0
Multi-speed freq. 0,
 2nd motor
 Multi-speed freq. 1 to 15
to

(for both motors)
Multistage speed/position
 determination time
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units

00


6.00
Hz

6.00
Hz
Defines 15 more speeds,
range is 0.00 / start frequency to
400.00Hz.
=Speed 1 to =Speed15

0.00
Hz
Set range is 0. to 200. (x 10ms)

0.
ms
Select codes:
Binary operation
(16 speeds selectable
with 4 terminals)
Bit operation
(8 speeds selectable
with 7 terminals)
Defines the first speed of a
multi-speed profile, range is 0.00
/ start frequency to 400.00Hz
There are two ways for speed selection, which are “binary operation” and “bit operation”.
For binary operation (=), you can select 16 speeds by combination of 4 digital inputs.
And for bit operation (=), you can select 8 speeds by using 7 digital inputs. Please
refer to the following figures for detailed explanation.
3–19
(1) Binary operation (“1”=ON)
Speed
Param.
CF4
CF3
CF2
Speed 0
















0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
Speed 1
Speed 2
Speed 3
Speed 4
Speed 5
Speed 6
Speed 7
Speed 8
Speed 9
Speed 10
Speed 11
Speed 12
Speed 13
Speed 14
Speed 15
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
CF1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
(2) Bit operation (“1”=ON, “X”=regardless the condition (ON or OFF))
Speed
Param.
Speed 0








Speed 1
Speed 2
Speed 3
Speed 4
Speed 5
Speed 6
Speed 7
SF7
SF6
SF5
SF4
SF3
SF2
SF1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
X
X
X
X
X
1
0
X
X
X
X
1
0
0
X
X
X
1
0
0
0
X
X
1
0
0
0
0
X
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
3–20
Jog Frequency – The jog speed setting is used whenever the Jog command is active. The
jog speed setting range is arbitrarily limited to 10 Hz, to provide safety during manual
operation. The acceleration to the jog frequency is instantaneous, but you can choose from
three modes for the best method for stopping the jog operation.
Func.
Code
“A” Function
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units
 Jog frequency
Defines limited speed for jog,
range is from start frequency to
9.99 Hz

6.00
Hz
 Jog stop mode
Define how end of jog stops the
motor; six options:
Free-run stop (invalid during
run)
Controlled deceleration
(invalid during run)
DC braking to stop(invalid
during run)
Free-run stop (valid during
run)
Controlled deceleration
(valid during run)
DC braking to stop(valid
during run)

04

Note 1: For jogging operation, turn JG terminal ON at first and then turn FW or RV terminal on.
Note 2: When jogging stop mode A039=02 or 05, DC braking data is needed.
Note 3: During jogging operation, frequency can be set with output frequency setting F001.
3–21
Torque Control Algorithms
The inverter generates the motor output
according to the V/f algorithm selected.
Parameter  selects the inverter algorithm for
generating the frequency output, as shown in the
diagram to the right ( for 2nd motor). The
factory default is  (constant torque).
Inverter Torque Control Algorithms
V/F control

constant torque (V/F-VC)
V/F control,
variable (1.7) torque

V/F control,
Free V/f


Output
Review the following description to help you
choose the best torque control algorithm for your
application.
The built-in V/f curves are oriented toward developing constant torque or variable
torque characteristics (see graphs below). You can select either constant torque or
reduced torque V/f control.
V
Constant and Variable (Reduced) Torque – The
100%
graph at right shows the constant torque
characteristic from 0Hz to the base frequency .
The voltage remains constant for output
frequencies higher than the base frequency.
 = 
Constant torque
Hz
0
Base
freq.
 = 
V
Max.
freq.
Variable torque
100%
Hz
0
10% Base
freq.
Base
freq.
Max.
freq.
The graph above (right) shows the variable (reduced) torque curve, which has a constant
torque characteristic from 0Hz to 10% of the base frequency. This helps to achieve higher
torque at low speed with reduced torque curve at higher speeds.
3–22
Free V/F Control – The free V/F setting function allows you to set arbitrary V/F
characteristics by specifying the voltages and frequencies ( to ) for the seven
points on the V/F characteristic curve.
The free V/F frequencies 1 to 7 set by this function must always be in the collating
sequence of “1234567”.
Since all the free V/F frequencies are set to 0Hz as default (factory setting), specify their
arbitrary values (being set with free-setting V/F frequency 7). The inverter does not operate
the free V/F characteristics with the factory setting.
Enabling the free V/F characteristics setting function disables the torque boost selection
(/), base frequency setting (/), and maximum frequency setting
(/) automatically. (The inverter regard the value of free-setting V/F frequency 7
() as the maximum frequency.)
Output voltage (V)
V7 ()
V6 ()
V5 ()
V4 ()
V1 ()
V2,3 (,)
0
Output freq.(Hz)
F1
F2
F3
() () ()
Item
Free-setting V/F freq. (7)
Free-setting V/F freq. (6)
Free-setting V/F freq. (5)
Free-setting V/F freq. (4)
Free-setting V/F freq. (3)
Free-setting V/F freq. (2)
Free-setting V/F freq. (1)
Free-setting V/F volt. (7)
Free-setting V/F volt. (6)
Free-setting V/F volt. (5)
Free-setting V/F volt. (4)
Free-setting V/F volt. (3)
Free-setting V/F volt. (2)
Free-setting V/F volt. (1)
Code














F4
F5
F6
F7
() () () ()
Set range
0 to 400 (Hz)
Free-setting V/F freq.5 to freq.7 (Hz)
Free-setting V/F freq.4 to freq.6 (Hz)
Free-setting V/F freq.3 to freq.5 (Hz)
Free-setting V/F freq.2 to freq.4 (Hz)
Free-setting V/F freq.1 to freq.3 (Hz)
0 to Free-setting V/F freq.2 (Hz)
0.0 to 800.0 (V)
Remarks
Setting of the output
freq. at each breakpoint
of the V/F characteristic
curve
Setting of the output
voltage at each
breakpoint of the V/F
characteristic curve *1)
*1) Even if the voltage higher than input is set as a free-setting V/F voltage 1 to 7, the
inverter output voltage cannot exceed the inverter input voltage or that specified by the
AVR voltage selection. Carefully note that selecting an inappropriate control system (V/F
characteristics) may result in overcurrent during motor acceleration or deceleration or
vibration of the motor or other machine driven by the inverter.
3–23
Manual Torque Boost – The Constant
V
= 5 (%)
and Variable Torque algorithms feature
100%
an adjustable torque boost curve. When
the motor load has a lot of inertia or
A
starting friction, you may need to
5% voltage
increase the low frequency starting
boost
torque characteristics by boosting the
(100%=)
Hz
0
voltage above the normal V/f ratio
1.8Hz
30Hz
fbase =
(shown at right). The function attempts
60Hz
to compensate for voltage drop in the
 = 3 (%)
motor primary winding in the low speed
range.
The boost is applied from zero to the base frequency. You set the breakpoint of the boost
(point A on the graph) by using parameters  and . The manual boost is calculated
as an addition to the standard V/f curve.
Be aware that running the motor at a low speed for a long time can cause motor
overheating. This is particularly true when manual torque boost is ON, or if the motor relies
on a built-in fan for cooling.
Voltage gain – Using parameter  you can modify the voltage gain of the inverter (see
graph at right). This is specified as a percentage of the full scale output voltage. The gain
can be set from 20% to 100%. It should be adjusted in accordance with the motor
specifications. Gain can be changed even during operation in V/f mode
Refrain from change the setting value suddenly (within 10%). Inverter may overvoltage trip
due to the rapid change of output voltage.
=100
V
100%
80%
=80
0
fbase
fmax
3–24
Voltage compensation gain and slip compensation gain – Using parameters  and
, you can obtain better performance under automatic torque boost mode (=).
See following table for the concept of adjustment, including other parameters.
Adjustment
Symptom
Motor torque is not enough at low speed
(The motor does not rotate at low speed)
Motor speed decreases (stalls) when a load
is given to the motor
Motor speed increases when a load is
given to the motor
The inverter trips due to overcurrent when
a load is given to the motor
“A” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Description
 Torque boost select
nd
 Torque boost select, 2 motor
 Manual torque boost value
Manual torque boost value, 2
 motor
nd
Manual torque boost
 frequency
Manual torque boost
 frequency, 2nd motor
 V/f characteristic curve
V/f characteristic curve,
 2nd motor
 V/f gain
nd
 V/f gain, 2 motor
Voltage compensation gain for
nd
 automatic torque boost, 2
Slip compensation gain for
motor
 / 

 / 
 / 
 / 
 / 
 / 
Defaults
Initial data
Units
00

00

Can boost starting torque
between 0 and 20% above
normal V/f curve,
range is 0.0 to 20.0%

1.0
%

1.0
%

5.0
%

5.0
%

00


00



100.
%
100.
%

100.


100.


100.


100.

Sets the frequency of the V/f
breakpoint A in graph (top of
previous page) for torque
boost,
range is 0.0 to 50.0%
Four available V/f curves;
Constant torque
Reduced torque (1.7)
Free V/F
Sets voltage gain of the inverter,
range is 20. to 100.%
Sets voltage compensation gain
under automatic torque boost,
range is 0. to 255.
Slip compensation gain for
nd
 automatic torque boost, 2
 / 


motor
 automatic torque boost
Run
Mode
Edit
 / 
Two options:
Manual torque boost
Automatic torque boost
Voltage compensation gain for
 automatic torque boost
Adjust item
Increase the voltage setting for manual
torque boost, step by step
Increase the voltage compensation gain for
automatic torque boost, step by step
Increase the slip compensation gain for
automatic torque boost, step by step
Reduce carrier frequency
Increase the slip compensation gain for
automatic torque boost, step by step
Decrease the slip compensation gain for
automatic torque boost, step by step
Decrease the voltage setting for manual
torque boost, step by step
Decrease the voltage compensation gain for
automatic torque boost, step by step
Decrease the slip compensation gain for
automatic torque boost, step by step
Sets slip compensation gain
under automatic torque boost,
range is 0. to 255.
3–25
DC Braking (DB) Settings
Normal DC braking performance – The DC
braking feature can provide additional
stopping torque when compared to a normal
deceleration to a stop. DC braking is
particularly useful at low speeds when normal
deceleration torque is minimal.
+
Running
Free run
DC brake
t
0

-

When you set  to  (Enable during stop), and the RUN command (FW/RV signal) turns
OFF, the inverter injects a DC voltage into the motor windings during deceleration below a
frequency you can specify ().
The braking power () and duration () can both be set. You can optionally specify a
wait time before DC braking (), during which the motor will free run.
DC Braking – Frequency Detection – You can instead set DC braking to operate during
RUN mode only, by setting  to  (Frequency detection). In this case DC braking
operates when the output frequency comes down to the one you specified in  while
the RUN command is still active. Refer to the graphs figures below.
External DB and Internal DC braking are invalid during the frequency detection mode.
FW
FW
ON
F-SET
F-SET


F-OUT
F-OUT
DB
Ex.1) Step change in F-SET.
ON
DB
DB
DB
Ex.2) Analog change in F-SET.
Example 1, (above left) shows the performance with = with a step-changing
frequency reference. In this case, when the reference goes to 0, the inverter immediately
starts DC braking because the set point drops below the value specified in . DC
braking continues until the set point exceeds . There will be no DC braking at next
downward transition because the FW input is OFF.
Example 2, (above right) shows a gradually changing frequency reference, for example by
analog input. In this case, there will be a DC braking period at starting because the
frequency set point is lower than the value specified in .
3–26
CAUTION: Be careful to avoid specifying a braking time that is long enough to cause motor
overheating. If you use DC braking, we recommend using a motor with a built-in thermistor,
and wiring it to the inverter’s thermistor input (see “Thermistor Thermal Protection” on
page 4–30). Also refer to the motor manufacturer’s specifications for duty-cycle
recommendations during DC braking.
DC braking performance at start can also be set separately ( and ).
And carrier frequency of DC braking performance can also be set separately ().
CAUTION: Be careful to avoid specifying a braking carrier frequency that is high enough to
cause inverter and motor overheating. If you use DC braking, we recommend using a motor
with a built-in thermistor, and wiring it to the inverter’s thermistor input (see “Thermistor
Thermal Protection” on page 4–30). Also refer to the motor manufacturer’s specifications
for duty-cycle recommendations during DC braking.
“A” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units
 DC braking enable
Three options; select codes:
Disable
Enable during stop
Frequency detection

00

 DC braking frequency
The frequency at which DC
braking begins,
range is from the start frequency
() to 60.00Hz

0.50
Hz
 DC braking wait time
The delay from the end of
controlled deceleration to start
of DC braking (motor free runs
until DC braking begins),
range is 0.0 to 5.0 sec.

0.0
sec.
DC braking force for
Level of DC braking force,
settable from 0 to 70%

50.
%
DC braking time for
Sets the duration for DC braking,
range is from 0.0 to 60.0 seconds

0.5
sec.
 detection for [DB] input
Two options; select codes:
Edge detection
Level detection

01

 DC braking force at start
Level of DC braking force at
start, settable from 0 to 70%

0.
%
 DC braking time at start
Sets the duration for DC braking,
range is from 0.0 to 60.0 seconds

0.0
sec.
Carrier frequency of DC braking
performance, range is from 2.0
to 10.0kHz

2.0
kHz
 deceleration
 deceleration
DC braking / edge or level
Carrier frequency during DC
 braking
3–27
Frequency-related Functions
Frequency Limits – Upper and lower
limits can be imposed on the inverter
output frequency. These limits will apply
regardless of the source of the speed
reference. You can configure the lower
frequency limit to be greater than zero as
shown in the graph. The upper limit must
not exceed the rating of the motor or
capability of the machinery. The maximum
frequency setting (/) takes
precedence over frequency upper limit
(/).
Settable
range

Lower
limit
0
“A” Function
Func.
Code

Output
frequency
Upper
 limit
Name
Frequency upper limit
Frequency upper limit,
 2nd motor
 Frequency lower limit
Frequency lower limit,
 2nd motor
Description
Sets a limit on output frequency
less than the maximum frequency
(/).
Range is from frequency lower limit
(/) to maximum frequency
(/).
0.00 setting is disabled
>0.00 setting is enabled
Sets a limit on output frequency
greater than zero.
Range is start frequency () to
frequency upper limit (/)
0.00 setting is disabled
>0.00 setting is enabled
Frequency command
Defaults
Run
Mode
Initial data Units
Edit

0.00
Hz

0.00
Hz

0.00
Hz

0.00
Hz
3–28
Jump Frequencies – Some motors or machines exhibit resonances at particular speed(s),
which can be destructive for prolonged running at those speeds. The inverter has up to
three jump frequencies as shown in the graph. The hysteresis around the jump frequencies
causes the inverter output to skip around the sensitive frequency values.
Output
frequency









Func.
Code
Frequency
command
“A” Function
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units

 Jump freq. (center) 1 to 3

Up to 3 output frequencies can
be defined for the output to
jump past to avoid motor
resonances (center frequency)
Range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

0.00
Hz

Jump freq. width (hysteresis) 1
 to 3

Defines the distance from the
center frequency at which the
jump around occurs
Range is 0.00 to 10.00 Hz

0.50
Hz
3–29
Acceleration stop/Deceleration stop – The acceleration stop and deceleration stop
frequency setting allows you to make the inverter wait, upon starting the motor or upon
decelerating the motor, until the motor slip becomes less when the motor load causes a
large moment of inertia. Use this function if the inverter trips because of overcurrent when
starting or decelerating the motor. This function operates with every acceleration and
deceleration pattern, regardless the acceleration and deceleration curve selection ( and
). Instead of setting , ,  and , acceleration and deceleration can be
held by intelligent input configured as ":HLD".
Output frequency
Output frequency




t
t
HLD input
Func.
Code
“A” Function
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units
 Acceleration hold frequency
Sets the frequency to hold
acceleration, range is 0.00 to
400.00Hz

0.00
Hz
 Acceleration hold time
Sets the duration of
acceleration hold, range is 0.0
to 60.0 seconds

0.0
sec.
 Deceleration hold frequency
Sets the frequency to hold
deceleration, range is 0.00 to
400.00Hz

0.00
Hz
 Deceleration hold time
Sets the duration of
deceleration hold, range is 0.0
to 60.0 seconds

0.0
sec.
3–30
PID Control
When enabled, the built-in PID loop calculates an ideal inverter output value to cause a
loop feedback process variable (PV) to move closer in value to the set point (SP). The
frequency command serves as the SP. The PID loop algorithm will read the analog input for
the process variable (you specify the current or voltage input) and calculate the output.
“A” Function
Func.
Code
Name
 PID enable
 PID proportional gain
 PID integral time constant
 PID derivative time constant
Description
Enables PID function,
three option codes:
PID Disable
PID Enable
PID Enable with reverse
output
Proportional gain has a range of
0.00 to 25.00
Integral time constant has a
range of 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds
Derivative time constant has a
range of 0.0 to 100.00 seconds
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units

00


1.00


1.0
sec.

0.00
sec.
 PV scale conversion
Process Variable (PV), scale factor
(multiplier), range of 0.01 to
99.99

1.00

 PV source
Selects source of Process
Variable (PV), option codes:
[OI] terminal (current in)
[O] terminal (voltage in)
Modbus network
Calculate function output

00

 Reverse PID action
Two option codes:
PID input = SP-PV
PID input = -(SP-PV)

00

 PID output limit
Sets the limit of PID output as
percent of full scale,
range is 0.0 to 100.0%

0.0
%
 PID feed forward selection
Selects source of feed forward
gain, option codes:
Disabled
[O] terminal (voltage in)
[OI] terminal (current in)

00


0.00
Hz

0.0
sec.
PID sleep function action
 threshold
PID sleep function action
 delay time
Sets the threshold for the action,
set range 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
Sets the delay time for the
action, set range 0.0 to 25.5 sec
NOTE: The setting  for the integrator is the integrator’s time constant Ti, not the gain.
The integrator gain Ki = 1/Ti. When you set  = 0, the integrator is disabled.
3–31
In standard operation, the inverter uses a reference source selected by parameter  for
the output frequency, which may be a fixed value (), a variable set by the front panel
potentiometer, or value from an analog input (voltage or current). To enable PID operation,
set =. This causes the inverter to calculate the target freq, or setpoint.
A calculated target frequency can have a lot of advantages. It lets the inverter adjust the
motor speed to optimize some other process of interest, potentially saving energy as well.
Refer to the figure below. The motor acts upon the external process. To control that
external process, the inverter must monitor the process variable. This requires wiring a
sensor to either the analog input terminal [O] (voltage) or terminal [OI] (current).
Setpoint
+
SP
Error
Freq.
PID
Calculation
Inverter
External
Process
Motor
PV
Process Variable (PV)
Sensor
When enabled, the PID loop calculates the ideal output frequency to minimize the loop
error. This means we no longer command the inverter to run at a particular frequency, but
we specify the ideal value for the process variable. That ideal value is called the setpoint,
and is specified in the units of the external process variable. For a pump application it may
be gallons/minute, or it could be air velocity or temperature for an HVAC unit. Parameter
 is a scale factor that relates the external process variable units to motor frequency. The
figure below is a more detailed diagram of the function.
Standard setting

Scale factor
Scale factor
Reciprocal
Multi-speed
setting
 to
Setpoint
(Target)


Frequency
source select


P gain
1


SP
+
POT meter on
ext. panel
Frequency
setting
I gain

+
D gain
Process variable (Feedback)
Analog input scaling (OI)
V/I select

Scale factor
[AT]
[L]
[O]
[OI]
A GND
Voltage




 
Current
 PID V/I input select
Monitor

3–32
PID Loop Configuration
The inverter’s PID loop algorithm is configurable for various applications.
PID Output Limit – The PID loop controller has a built-in output limit function. This
function monitors the difference between the PID setpoint and the loop output (inverter
output frequency), measured as a percentage of the full scale range of each. The limit is
specified by parameter .
 When the difference |(Setpoint – loop output)| is smaller than or equal to the  limit
value, the loop controller operates in its normal linear range.
 When the difference |(Setpoint – loop output)| is larger than the  limit value, the
loop controller changes the output frequency as needed so that the difference does not
exceed the limit.
The diagram below shows PID setpoint changes and the related output frequency behavior
when a limit value in  exists.
Limit imposed
on output
%
Output limit

PID Setpoint
Output freq.

Output limit
Limit imposed
on output
t
Deviation (error) Inversion – In typical heating loops or ventilation loops, an increase in
energy into the process results in an increasing PV. In this case, the Loop Error = (SP – PV).
For cooling loops, an increase in energy into the process results in a decreasing PV. In this
case, the Loop Error = –(SP – PV). Use  to configure the error term.
 =
SP
+
Error

PV
 =
Freq.
PID
calculation
PV from process with
positive correlation
SP
-

Error
+
PV
Freq.
PID
calculation
PV from process with
negative correlation
3–33
PID deviation output – If PID deviation "" exceeds the value in , output signal
configured as  (OD) is activated.
PID feedback comparison output – If PID feedback is out of the range between  and
 output signal configured as  (FBV) is activated.
PID feedback
PID FBV output high limit
PID FBV output low limit
Time
ON
FW input
ON
FBV output
ON
PID scaling – When PID scale parameter () is set, following variables are scaled.
(monitored) = (variable) × ()

























PID Sleep Function
The inverter shuts off the output when the PID output becomes less than the specified
value () in case of PID is set enabled, or shuts off when the frequency command
becomes less than the specified value in case of PID is set disabled. And if the PID output or
frequency command exceeds the specified value () for a specified period (),
inverter automatically restarts the operation. This is the PID sleep function.
PID output
PID sleep function
triggering level
Run command (internal)

PID sleep function action delay time
Run
Stop

Run
Run command (external)
Run

PID Sleep function is always enabled, even the PID function is disabled.
3–34
Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) Function
The automatic voltage regulation (AVR) feature keeps the inverter output waveform at
relatively constant amplitude during power input fluctuations. This can be useful if the
installation is subject to input voltage fluctuations. However, the inverter cannot boost its
motor output to a voltage higher than the power input voltage. If you enable this feature,
be sure to select the proper voltage class setting for your motor.
“A” Function
Func.
Code
Name
 AVR function select
AVR function select,
 2nd motor
 AVR voltage select
AVR voltage select,
 2nd motor
Description
Automatic (output) voltage
regulation, selects from three
type of AVR functions, three
option codes:
AVR enabled
AVR disabled
AVR enabled except during
deceleration
200V class inverter settings:
200/215/220/230/240
400V class inverter settings:
380/400/415/440/460/480
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units

02


02



230/
400
230/
400
V
V
 AVR filter time constant
Define the time constant of the
AVR filter, range is 0.000 to
10.000 sec.

0.300
sec.
 AVR deceleration gain
Gain adjustment of the braking
performance, range is 50 to
200%

100.
%
Note: The motor behave as generator during deceleration and the energy is regenerated to the
drive. As a result, the DC voltage in the inverter increases and cause over-voltage trip
when exceeding the OV level. When the voltage is set high, deceleration time can be set
shorter thanks to the energy consumption due to the incensement of loss in inverter. In
order to set deceleration time shorter without over-voltage trip, please try to set AVR off
during deceleration or to tune the AR filter time constant and AVR deceleration gain.
3–35
Energy Savings Mode / Optional Accel/Decel
Energy Saving Mode – This function allows the inverter to deliver the minimum power
necessary to maintain speed at any given frequency. This works best when driving variable
torque characteristic loads such as fans and pumps. Parameter = enables this
function and  controls the degrees of its effect. A setting of 0.0 yields slow response
but high accuracy, while a setting of 100 will yield a fast response with lower accuracy.
Func.
Code
“A” Function
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units
 Energy-saving operation mode
Two option codes:
Normal operation
Energy-saving operation

00

 Energy-saving mode tuning
Range is 0.0 to 100 %.

50.0
%
The acceleration time is controlled so that the output current below the level set by the
Overload Restriction Function if enabled (Parameters , , and ). If Overload
Restriction is not enabled, then the current limit used is 150% of the inverter’s rated output
current.
The deceleration time is controlled so that the output current is maintained below 150% of
the inverter’s rated current, and the DC bus voltage is maintained below the OV Trip level
(400V or 800V).
NOTE: If the load exceeds the rating of the inverter, the acceleration time may be increased.
NOTE: If using a motor with a capacity that is one size smaller than the inverter rating,
enable the Overload Restriction function () and set the Overload Restriction Level
() to 1.5 times the motor nameplate current.
NOTE: Be aware that the acceleration and deceleration times will vary, depending on the
actual load conditions during each individual operation of the inverter.
NOTE: When analog input is a source of frequency command, be sure to set analog filter
=(500ms). Otherwise, there can be the case that this energy saving function doesn’t
work well.
3–36
Second Acceleration and Deceleration Functions
The WL200 inverter features two-stage acceleration and deceleration ramps. This gives
flexibility in the profile shape. You can specify the frequency transition point, the point at
which the standard acceleration () or deceleration () changes to the second
acceleration () or deceleration (). Or, you can use intelligent input [2CH] to trigger
this transition. These profile options are also available for the second motor settings. Select
a transition method via  as depicted below. Be careful not to confuse the second
acceleration/deceleration settings with settings for the second motor!
 = 
 = 
Transition via 2CH input
Output
frequency
Output
frequency
Accel 2
Accel 2

Accel 1
Accel 1
t
0
2CH
input
Transition via freq. level
Frequency
transition point
t
0
1
t
0
“A” Function
Func.
Code
Name
 Acceleration time (2)
Acceleration time (2),
 2nd motor
 Deceleration time (2)
Deceleration time (2),
 2nd motor
Select method to switch to
 Acc2/Dec2 profile
Select method to switch to
 Acc2/Dec2 profile, 2nd motor
Acc1 to Acc2 frequency
 transition point
Acc1 to Acc2 frequency
 transition point, 2nd motor
Dec1 to Dec2 frequency
 transition point
Dec1 to Dec2 frequency
 transition point, 2nd motor
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units

10.00
sec.

10.00
sec.

10.00
sec.

10.00
sec.

00


00

Output frequency at which
Accel1 switches to Accel2, range
is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

0.00
Hz

0.00
Hz
Output frequency at which
Decel1 switches to Decel2,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

0.00
Hz

0.00
Hz
nd
Duration of 2 segment of
acceleration, range is:
0.00 to 3600.00 sec.
nd
Duration of 2 segment of
deceleration, range is:
0.00 to 3600.00 sec.
Three options for switching
from 1st to 2nd accel/decel:
2CH input from terminal
Transition frequency
Forward and reverse
NOTE: For  and  (and for 2nd motor settings), if you set a very rapid Acc1 or Dec1
time (less than 1.0 second), the inverter may not be able to change rates to Acc2 or Dec2
before reaching the target frequency. In that case, the inverter decreases the rate of Acc1 or
Dec1 in order to achieve the second ramp to the target frequency.
3–37
Accel/Decel
Standard acceleration and deceleration is
linear. The inverter CPU can also calculate
an S-curve acceleration or deceleration
curve as shown. This profile is useful for
favoring the load characteristics in
particular applications.
Output
frequency
Target
freq.
Curve settings for acceleration and
deceleration are independently selected. To
enable the S-curve, use function 
(acceleration) and  (deceleration).
Func.
Code
Accel. curve selection
S-curve
 = 
Linear
 = 
“A” Function
Name
t
0
Description
Acceleration period
Defaults
Run
Mode
Initial data Units
Edit
 Acceleration curve selection
Set the characteristic curve of
Acc1 and Acc2, five options:
linear
S-curve
U-curve
Inverse U-curve

01

 Deceleration curve selection
Set the characteristic curve of
Dec1 and Dec2, options are
same as above ()

01

 Acceleration curve constant
Range is 01 to 10.

02

 Deceleration curve constant
Range is 01 to 10.

02

See next page for the details.
3–38
(1) Acceleration / deceleration pattern summary
Setting


Curve
Linear

Freq.

Freq.
S-curve
Freq.


U-curve
Inverse U-curve
Freq.
Freq.
(Accel.
pattern)
t
t
t
Freq.
t
Freq.
Freq.
(Decel.
pattern)
t
Remarks
Standard pattern.
t
t
Effective for preventing
the collapse of cargo
carried by lift or
conveyor for example.
t
Effective for the tension control of winding machine,
to prevent cutting the object to be wound, for
example.
(2)  Curve constant (swelling)
Freq.
 = 
S-curve
Freq.
 = 
U-curve
Freq.
 = 
Inverse U-curve
=
=
=
=
=
0
=
t
0
t
0
Large  value will result in a big swelling.  is the same concept as above.
t
3–39
Additional Analog Input Settings
Input Range Settings – The parameters in the following table adjust the input
characteristics of the analog current input. When using the inputs to command the inverter
output frequency, these parameters adjust the starting and ending ranges for the current,
as well as the output frequency range. Related characteristic diagrams are located in
“Analog Input Settings” on page 3–15.
Analog sampling setting is the value specified in .
“A” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units

[OI] input active range start
frequency
The output frequency
corresponding to the analog
input range starting point,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

0.00
Hz

[OI] input active range end
frequency
The output frequency
corresponding to the current
input range ending point,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

0.00
Hz
The starting point (offset) for
the current input range,
range is 0. to 100.%

20.
%
The ending point (offset) for
the current input range,
range is 0. to 100.%

100.
%
Two options; select codes:
Use offset ( value)
Use 0Hz

00

[OI] input active range start
 current
[OI] input active range end
 current
[OI] input start frequency
 select
Refer to parameter  to  for analog voltage input.
3–40
Analog Input Calculate Function – The inverter can mathematically combine two input
sources into one value. The Calculate function can either add, subtract, or multiply the two
selected sources. This provides the flexibility needed by various applications. You can use
the result for the output frequency setting (use =) or for the PID Process Variable
(PV) input (use =).
Digital operator


Potentiometer
A input select
[O] input
[OI] input
Network variable
A
B
Digital operator
 A+B
 A-B
“CAL”
(result)
 A*B
Potentiometer
B input select
[O] input
[OI] input
Network variable

“A” Function
Func.
Code
Name
A input select for calculate
 function
B input select for calculate
 function
 Calculation symbol
Description
Six options:
Operator
VR
Terminal [O] input
Terminal [OI] input
RS485
Option
Calculates a value based on the
A input source ( selects)
and B input source (
selects).
Three options:
ADD (A input + B input)
SUB (A input - B input)
MUL (A input * B input)
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units

02


03


00

3–41
Add Frequency – The inverter can add or subtract on offset value to the output frequency
setting which is specified by  (will work with any of the five possible sources). The ADD
Frequency is a value you can store in parameter . The ADD Frequency is summed with
or subtracted from the output frequency setting only when the [ADD] terminal is ON.
Function  selects whether to add or subtract. By configuring an intelligent input as the
[ADD] terminal, your application can selectively apply the fixed value in  to offset
(positively or negatively) the inverter output frequency in real time.
 Frequency source setting
Keypad potentiometer
Control terminal
+
Function  setting
Modbus network input
Σ
Output frequency setting
+/-
Calculate function output

ADD direction select
 ADD frequency
[ADD]
Intelligent input
Func.
Code
“A” Function
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units
 ADD frequency
An offset value that is applied
to the output frequency when
the [ADD] terminal is ON.
Range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

0.00
Hz
 ADD direction select
Two options:
Plus (adds  value to
the output frequency
setting)
Minus (subtracts 
value from the output
frequency setting)

00

3–42
Input Range Settings – The parameters in the following table adjust the input
characteristics of the VR (POT meter on external operator) input. When using the inputs to
command the inverter output frequency, these parameters adjust the starting and ending
ranges for the current, as well as the output frequency range. Related characteristic
diagrams are located in “Analog Input Settings” on page 3–15.
Analog sampling setting is the value specified in .
“A” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units

[VR] input active range start
frequency
The output frequency
corresponding to the analog
input range starting point,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

0.00
Hz

[VR] input active range end
frequency
The output frequency
corresponding to the current
input range ending point,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

0.00
Hz
 [VR] input active range start %
The starting point (offset) for
the current input range,
range is 0. to 100.%

0.
%
 [VR] input active range end %
The ending point (offset) for the
current input range,
range is 0. to 100.%

100.
%
Two options; select codes:
Use offset ( value)
Use 0Hz

01

[VR] input start frequency
 select
Refer to parameter  to  for analog voltage input.
3–43
“B” Group: Fine Tuning Functions
The “B” Group of functions and parameters adjust some of the more subtle but useful
aspects of motor control and system configuration.
Automatic Restart Mode
The restart mode determines how the inverter will resume operation after a fault causes a
trip event. The five options provide advantages for your applications. Frequency matching
allows the inverter to read the motor speed by virtue of its residual magnetic flux and
restart the output at the corresponding frequency. The inverter can attempt a restart a
certain number of times depending on the particular trip event:
 Over-current trip, restart up to 3 times
 Over-voltage trip, restart up to 3 times
When the inverter reaches the maximum number of restarts (3), you must power cycle the
inverter to reset its operation.
Other parameters specify the allowable under-voltage level and the delay time before
restarting. The proper settings depend on the typical fault conditions for your application,
the necessity of restarting the process in unattended situations, and whether restarting is
always say.
If the actual power failure time is
shorter than the  set value,
Power failure < allowable power fail
inverter resumes from the set
Time (), Inverter resumes
frequency in .
Input
power
The resumption mode is called
“active frequency matching” and
the inverter performs reduced
voltage start to avoid over-current
trip.
Inverter
output
Restart level of active
freq. matching
Motor
current
Motor
rotation

Free-running
Power fail
Allowable power
fail time

Retry wait time

Deceleration rate of active
freq. matching

If the motor current exceeds the
 set value during this period,
the inverter decelerates according
to the  set value and helps to
reduce the motor current.
When the motor current is less than
, the inverter increases motor
speed toward the set speed. The
inverter continues this retry process
until the motor speed comes to the
previous set speed.
Overload restriction ( to ) is not valid when active frequency matching is activated.
If the actual power failure time is longer than the  set value, the inverter does not
resume and the motor will coast to stop.
3–44
Automatic restart (retry) related parameters.
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Restart mode on power
 failure / under-voltage trip
Allowable under-voltage
 power failure time
Description
Select inverter restart method,
Five option codes:
Alarm output after trip, no
automatic restart
Restart at 0Hz
Resume operation after
frequency matching
Resume previous freq. after
freq. matching, then
decelerate to stop and
display trip info
Resume operation after
active freq. matching
The amount of time a power
input under-voltage can occur
without tripping the power
failure alarm. Range is 0.3 to 25
sec. If under-voltage exists
longer than this time, the
inverter trips, even if the restart
mode is selected.
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data Units

00


1.0
sec.

Retry wait time before motor
restart
Time delay after under-voltage
condition goes away, before the
inverter runs motor again.
Range is 0.3 to 100.0 seconds.

1.0
sec.

Instantaneous power failure /
under-voltage trip alarm
enable
Three option codes:
Disable
Enable
Disable during stop and
decelerates to a stop

00

Two option codes:
Restart 16 times
Always restart

00


0.00
Hz

00

Range is 1 to 3 times

3
times
Range is 0.3 to 100.0 sec.

1.0
sec.
Number of restarts on power
 failure / under-voltage trip
events
 Restart frequency threshold
Restart mode on over voltage
 / over current trip
Number of retry on over
 voltage / over current trip
Retry wait time on over
 voltage / over current trip
Restart the motor from 0Hz if the
frequency becomes less than this
set value during the motor is
coasting, range is 0.00 to
400.00Hz
Select inverter restart method,
Five option codes:
Alarm output after trip, no
automatic restart
Restart at 0Hz
Resume operation after
frequency matching
Resume previous freq. after
active freq. matching, then
decelerate to stop and
display trip info
Resume operation after
active freq. matching
3–45
Active Frequency Matching Restart
Goal of the active frequency matching is the same as normal frequency matching.
Difference is the method. Please select the suitable one for your application.
Func.
Code

“b” Function
Name
Current level of active freq.
matching
Deceleration rate of active
 freq. matching

Start freq. of active freq.
matching
Description
Defaults
Run
Mode
Initial data Units
Edit
Sets the current level of active freq.
matching restart, range is
0.2*inverter rated current to
1.5*inverter rated current, resolution
0.1

Rated
current
A
Sets the deceleration rate when
active freq. matching restart, range is
0.1 to 3000.0, resolution 0.1

0.5
sec.
Three option codes:
freq at previous shutoff
start from max. Hz
start from set frequency

00

3–46
Electronic Thermal Overload Alarm Setting
The thermal overload detection protects the inverter and motor from overheating due to an
excessive load. It uses a current/inverse time curve to determine the trip point.
First, use  to select the torque characteristic that matches your load. This allows the
inverter to utilize the best thermal overload characteristic for your application.
The torque developed in a motor is directly proportional to the current in the windings,
which is also related to the heat generated (and temperature, over time).
Therefore, you must set the thermal overload threshold in terms of current (amperes) for
parameter . The range is 20% to 100% of the rated current for each inverter model. If
the current exceeds the level you specify, the inverter will trip and log an event (error ) in
the history table. The inverter turns the motor output OFF when tripped. Separate settings
are available for the second motor (if applicable) as shown in the following table.
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
 Level of electronic thermal
Level of electronic thermal,
 2nd motor
Electronic thermal
 characteristic
Electronic thermal
 characteristic, 2nd motor
Free setting electronic
 thermal ~freq.1
Free setting electronic
 thermal ~current1
Free setting electronic
 thermal ~freq.2
Free setting electronic
 thermal ~current2
Free setting electronic
 thermal ~freq.3
Free setting electronic
 thermal ~current3
Description
Defaults
Run
Mode
Initial data Units
Edit

Rated
current
Rated
current

01


01

Range is 0 to 400Hz

0.
Hz
Range is 0 to inverter rated current
Amps

0.00
A
Range is 0 to 400Hz

0.
Hz
Range is 0 to inverter rated current
Amps

0.00
A
Range is 0 to 400Hz

0.
Hz
Range is 0 to inverter rated current
Amps

0.00
A
Set a level between 20% and 100%
for the rated inverter current.
Select from three curves, option
codes:
Reduced torque
Constant torque
Free setting

A
A
WARNING: When parameter , level of electronic thermal setting, is set to motor FLA
rating (Full Load Ampere nameplate rating), the inverter provides solid state motor overload
protection at 115% of motor FLA or equivalent. If parameter  exceeds the motor FLA
rating, the motor may overheat and be damaged. Parameter , level of electronic
thermal setting, is a variable parameter.
3–47
Electronic thermal characteristic – The characteristic curve is unique, but reduction rate
depending on frequency is selected in .
 Reduced Torque (=)
Example: WL200-022S**(Rated current 9.6A= b012), Base FQ=60Hz
Reduction rate
60Hz (Reduction rate: x1.0)
x1.0
x0.8
6Hz (Reduction rate: x0.6)
Trip time
[s]
Trip time
[s]
60
60
x0.6
0
0
16
20
5
6
50
60
3.0
0
Base FQ
3.0
0
10.56 11.5 14.4[A]
(110%) (120%) (150%)
6.34 6.91 8.64[A]
(66%) (72%) (90%)
Output frequency [Hz]
Motor current [A]
Motor current [A]
 Constant Torque (=)
Example: WL200-022S**(Rated current 9.6A= b012), Base FQ=60Hz
Reduction rate
60Hz (Reduction rate: x1.0)
x1.0
0Hz (Reduction rate: x0.8)
Trip time
[s]
Trip time
[s]
60
60
3.0
0.5
x0.8
0
3
60
0
Output frequency [Hz]
0
10.56 11.5 14.4[A]
(110%) (120%) (150%)
Motor current [A]
7.04 9.2
11.5[A]
(88%) (96%) (120%)
Motor current [A]
 Free setting (=)
Output current [A]
Reduction rate
b020
x1.0
b018
x0.8
b016
Setting range
0
3
400
Output frequency [Hz]
0
b015 b017
b019
A004 Max. FQ
Output frequency [Hz]
3–48
Electronic Thermal Warning Output – You can configure this function so that the inverter
outputs a warning signal before the electronic thermal protection operates against motor
overheat. You can also set the threshold level to output a warning signal with the electronic
thermal warning level setting in function “”.
To output the warning signal, assign parameter “” (THM) to one of the intelligent output
terminals [11] to [12] ( to ), or to the relay output terminal ().
Electronic Thermal Subtraction Function
Electronic thermal is separated into for the motor and for the inverter when = to .
It depends on plural pattern / rate and becomes able to subtract electronic thermal
integrated value from in consideration of the heat production of the motor then.
Subtraction rates in each pattern are defined by /. Please set the large value with
enough margins for the characteristic of the application motor.
Thermal accumulation gain for the motor can be defined by  in case of = to .
If it is set to 100%, accumulation is same as in case of =. Please note that when b913
is small, the time to trip gets longer and it means that the protection is delayed.
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Electronic thermal
 subtraction function select
 Thermal subtraction time
Thermal subtraction time
 constant
Description
Four option codes:
OFF
Linear subtraction: pre-fixed
ratio
Linear subtraction: ratio set in

Subtraction with first-order lag
filter: ratio set in 
Defaults
Run
Mode
Initial data Units
Edit

00


600.00
sec.

120.00
sec.

100.0
%
This function is valid when =
Range is 0.10 to 100000.00 s
Out of warranty when setting less
than initial value (600.00[s])
This function is valid when =
Range is 0.10 to 100000.00 s
Out of warranty when setting less
than initial value (120.00[s])
Range is 1.0 to 200.0 %
 Thermal accumulation gain
Out of warranty when setting less
than initial value (100.0[%])
3–49
Subtraction function of electronic thermal for motor – Electronic thermal subtraction
function select () is prepared to be able to select from 3 patterns of subtraction rate.
When =, subtraction is invalid.
 =
When output current is less than thermal count level, subtracted constantly with fixed
rate as max value thermal counter (trip level) down to 0 in 10 minutes.
Output Current
Output Current
Thermal Count
Level
Thermal Counter
Thermal Counter
Rate to subtract
100%/10min
Trip
100[%]
(Trip Level)
10[min]

=
When output current is less than thermal count level, subtracted constantly with fixed
rate as max value thermal counter (trip level) down to 0 within the time defined with
thermal subtraction time ().
Output Current
Output Current
Thermal Count
Level
Thermal Counter
100[%]
(Trip level)
100%/
Thermal Counter

Trip
3–50

=
When output current is less than thermal count level, subtracted with the value equal
to thermal counter value multiplied with linear filter of time constant () and target
as 0. (when output current keeps to be less than thermal count level, thermal counter
becomes 0 within a time approximately 5 times )
Output Current
Output Current
Thermal Count
Level
Thermal Counter
100[%]
(Trip level)
Thermal Counter
Subtraction rate
Calc. 
Trip

5 times of 
Electronic Thermal Accumulation Gain – Only for accumulation for motor electronic
thermal protection, value to accumulate is multiplied with electronic thermal accumulation
gain () instead of standard value. When = and common to inverter protection,
b913 is void.
3–51
Electronic Thermal Function for inverter – When electronic thermal protection
subtraction selection () is set other than 0, electronic thermal protection for inverter
and motor are separated. Electronic thermal protection for inverter in this case is as
described below.

Thermal protection characteristics for inverter is fixed
(Identical to the electronic thermal protection of constant torque characteristics with
thermal level  of rated current (=rated current, =))

Characteristics are independent from to  setting therefore. (only for
electronic thermal protection for Motor is valid)

Error code for inverter’s electronic thermal protection is E38 (inverter thermal
protection). (Error code for motor electronic thermal protection remains to be E05)
E38 trip cannot be reset for 10 seconds, identical to E05.

Subtraction is invalid for inverter electronic thermal protection.
When b910=0, electronic thermal protection for inverter and motor is common.
Following table is summery of electronic thermal protection according to b910 setting
Characteristics of electronic thermal protection for inverter according to  setting
Item
(Electronic thermal subtraction function select)

Characteristics
Common to
motor
 to 
Valid


Characteristics for inverter thermal protection is fixed
(Identical to the constant torque characteristics with
thermal level b012 of rated current)
Invalid
Subtraction
Error Code

Not available
E05
E38 (Inverter Electronic Thermal Protection)
Characteristics of electronic thermal protection for motor according to  setting
Item
(Electronic thermal subtraction function select)

Characteristics
Common to
inverter
 to 
Valid
Subtraction
Error Code
Not available



Not common with inverter when subtraction valid
Valid (only for motor)
Subtraction
max to zero in
10 minutes.
Subtraction max
to zero in the
time defined by

E05
Subtraction with
time constant set
in 
3–52
Current limitation Related Functions
Overload Restriction:  – If the inverter’s
output current exceeds a preset current level
you specify during acceleration or constant
speed, the overload restriction feature
automatically reduces the output frequency
during powering drive (and can increase the
speed during regeneration) to restrict the
overload. This feature does not generate an
alarm or trip event. You can instruct the inverter
to apply overload restriction only during
constant speed, thus allowing higher currents
for acceleration. Or, you may use the same
threshold for both acceleration and constant
speed.
Motor
current
Restriction area

t
0
Regenerating

Output
frequency
Powering
t
0

You can specify two types of overload restriction operation by setting functional items ,
, , and , ,  separately. To switch between these two is done by
assigning “ (OLR)” to an intelligent input terminal and make it ON/OFF.
When the inverter detects an overload, it must decelerate the motor to reduce the current
until it is less than the threshold. You can choose the rate of deceleration that the inverter
uses to lower the output current.
Over-current Trip Suppression:  – The
Over-current Trip Suppression function monitors
the motor current and actively changes the
output frequency profile to maintain the motor
current within the limits. Although “LAD” refers
to “linear acceleration / deceleration”, the
inverter only “STOPs” the acceleration and
deceleration ramp so that it will not cause an
over-current trip event.
The graph at right shows an inverter output
profile that starts acceleration to a constant
speed. At two different points during the
acceleration, motor current increases and
exceeds the fixed level of Over-current Trip
Suppression level.
 = / OC LAD STOP = Enabled
Motor
current
Approx. 150% of the inverter
rated current
t
0
Output
frequency
Stops accel
Resumes accel
0
t
Set acc time ()
Actual acc time
When the Over-current Trip Suppression feature is enabled by  = /, the inverter
stops the acceleration ramp in each case until the motor current level is again less than the
threshold value, which is approximately 150% of the rated current of the inverter.
Exceptionally 200% of rated current, about 004SFE/004HFE.
3–53
When using the Over-current Trip Suppression feature, please note the following:
 When the feature is enabled ( = /), the actual acceleration may be longer
than the value set by parameters / in some cases.
 The Over-current Trip Suppression feature does not operate by maintaining a
constant motor current, so it does not prevent Over-current trip events completely.
Over-current trip event may happen during extreme acceleration or by the
short-circuit states for example.
 When  is set to “…Enable with voltage reduction”, the Over-current Trip
Suppression function raises the effect by reducing output voltage after an
acceleration and deceleration halt.
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Overload restriction
operation mode
Description
Select the operation mode during
overload conditions, four options,
option codes:
Disabled
Enabled for acceleration and
constant speed
Enabled for constant speed only
Enabled for acceleration and
constant speed, increase speed
at regen.
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data Units

01


01


Rated
current
x 1.2
A

Rated
current
x 1.2
A

1.0
sec.

1.0
sec.
 operation mode 2
Select the operation mode during
overload conditions, four options,
option codes:
Disabled
Enabled for acceleration and
constant speed
Enabled for constant speed only
Enabled for acceleration and
constant speed, increase speed
at regen.

01

 Overload restriction level 2
Sets the level of overload restriction,
between 20% and 150% of the rated
current of the inverter, setting
resolution is 1% of rated current

Rated
current
x 1.2
A
Sets the deceleration rate when
inverter detects overload, range is
0.1 to 3000.0, resolution 0.1

1.0
sec.
Three option codes:
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled with voltage reduction

00


Overload restriction
 operation mode, 2nd motor
 Overload restriction level
Overload restriction level,
 2nd motor
Sets the level of overload restriction,
between 20% and 150% of the rated
current of the inverter, setting
resolution is 1% of rated current
Deceleration rate at
 overload restriction
Deceleration rate at
nd
 overload restriction, 2
motor
Overload restriction
Deceleration rate 2 at
 overload restriction

OC suppression selection
Sets the deceleration rate when
inverter detects overload, range is
0.1 to 3000.0, resolution 0.1
3–54
Software Lock Mode
The software lock function keeps personnel from accidentally changing parameters in the
inverter memory. Use  to select from various protection levels.
The table below lists all combinations of  option codes and the
Run
ON/OFF state of the [SFT] input. Each Check  or Ex  indicates
Mode
Edit
whether the corresponding parameter(s) can be edited. The Standard
Parameters column below shows access in permitted for some lock

modes. These refer to the parameter tables throughout this chapter,

each of which includes a column titled Run Mode Edit as shown to the
right.
The marks (Check  or Ex ) under the “Run Mode Edit” column title indicate whether
access applies to each parameter as defined in the table below. In some lock modes, you
can edit only  and the Multi-speed parameter group that includes , ,
–, and  (Jog). However, it does not include , Multi-speed operation
selection. The editing access to  itself is unique, and is specified in the right-most two
columns below.

Lock
Mode
[SFT]
Intelligent
Input
Standard Parameters
Stop
Run




OFF

Run
Run mode
edit access
ON





OFF

Run mode
edit access



ON






(ignored)






(ignored)






(ignored)

High level
access





Stop
 and
Multi-Speed
Stop and Run
NOTE: Since the software lock function  is always accessible, this feature is not the
same as password protection used in other industrial control devices. So if you want to use
password function, use parameter  together with the . See page 3–77 for detailed
explanation of the password function.
3–55
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Software lock mode
 selection
Description
Prevents parameter changes, in five
options, option codes:
all parameters except  are
locked when [SFT] terminal is ON
all parameters except  and
output frequency  are locked
when [SFT] terminal is ON
all parameters except  are
locked
all parameters except  and
output frequency  are locked
High level access including 
Defaults
Run
Mode
Initial data Units
Edit

01

See appendix C for the accessible
parameters in this mode.
NOTE: To disable parameter editing when using  lock modes  and , assign the
[SFT] function to one of the intelligent input terminals.
See “Software Lock” on page 4–27.
Motor Cable Length Parameter
To achieve higher motor control performance, the WL200 inverter has the Motor Cable
Length Parameter setting . Normally there is no need to adjust this parameter, however
in case of long motor cable and/or shielded cable, where there is a comparatively higher
earth capacitance, set this parameter higher to achieve better motor control performance.
Note that the parameter is indicative and no formula to calculate the suitable value.
Normally, longer the motor cable, bigger the set value. Please adjust depending on your
system.
For 15 and 18.5kW inverter, it is not needed to set .
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Motor cable length
 parameter
Description
Set range is 5 to 20.
Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults
Initial data Units
10.

3–56
Run/power ON warning time
Inverter outputs the operation time over (RNT) or the plug-in time over (ONT) signal when
the time specified as the run/power ON warning time () is exceeded.
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Description
Run/power ON warning
 time
Range is,
.: Warning disabled
. to .:
10 to 99,990 hrs (unit: 10)
 to :
100,000 to 655,350 hrs (unit: 100)
Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults
Initial data Units
0.
hours
(1) Operation time over (RNT) signal
To use this signal function, assign function “11 (RNT)” to one of the intelligent output
terminals [11] to [12] ( to ), or to the alarm relay output (). Specify the
run/power-ON warning time ().
(2) Plug-in time over (ONT) signal
To use this signal function, assign function “12 (ONT)” to one of the intelligent output
terminals [11] to [12] ( to ), or to the alarm relay output (). Specify the
run/power-ON warning time ().
Rotation restriction related parameter
Rotation direction restriction:  – The rotation direction restriction function allows you
to restrict the direction of the motor rotation. This function is effective regardless of the
specification of operation command input device (e.g., control terminal or integrated
operator). If an operation command to drive the motor in a restricted direction is given, the

inverter (display) shows ().
Func.
Code
“b” Function
Name
 Rotation direction restriction
Description
Three option codes:
No restriction
Reverse rotation is restricted
Forward rotation is restricted
Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults
Initial data Units
00

3–57
Reduced voltage start
The reduced voltage start function enables you to make the inverter increase the output
voltage gradually when starting the motor.
Set a small value for the reduced voltage start selection () if you intend to increase the
start torque. On the other hand, setting a small value will cause the inverter to perform
full-voltage starting and to easily trip because of overcurrent.
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Description
Reduced voltage start
Set range,  (disabling the function), 
(approx. 6ms) to  (approx. 1.5s)
 selection
FW
Output freq.
Start freq. 
Output voltage
Reduced voltage start

 

Defaults
Run
Mode
Initial data Units
Edit

2

3–58
Display related parameters
Function code display restriction:  – The function code display restriction allows you
to arbitrarily switch the display mode or the display content on the integrated operator.
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Function code display
 restriction
Description
Six option codes:
Full display
Function-specific display
User setting (and )
Data comparison display
Basic display
Monitor display only
Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults
Initial data Units
00

(1) Function-specific display mode (=)
If a specific function has not been selected, the monitor does not show the parameters
concerning the specific function. Following table lists the details of display conditions.
No.
Displayed conditions
Displayed func. codes when condition fulfilled.
1
2nd motor
C001...C007=08
F202, F203, A201 to A204, A220, A244, A245, A261,
A262, A281, A282, A292 to A296, b212, b213, b221
to b223, C241, H203, H204, H206
2
EzSQ
A017=01,02
d023 to d027, P100 to P131
5
Free V/F control
A044=02 OR
C001...C007=08 AND
A244=02
b100 to b113
6
Free setting of
electronic-thermal
b013=02 OR
C001...C007=08 AND
b213=02
b015 to b020
7
VC or VP1.7 control
A044=00,01
A041 to A043,A046, A047
8
VC or VP1.7 control for 2nd
motor
C001...C007=08 AND
A244=00,01
A241 to A243, A246, A247
9
DC breaking
A051=01,02 OR
C001...C007=07
A052 to A059
10
PID
A071=01,02
d004, d153, d155, A072 to A079, A156, A157, C044,
C052, C053
11
EzCOM
C096=01,02
C098 to C100, P140 to P155
12
Curving accel/deceleration
A097,A098=01...03
A131, A132, A150 to A153
13
Controlled deceleration
b050=01,02,03
b051 to b054
14
Breaking
b120=01
b121 to b127
15
Decel. overvoltage. suppress
b130=01,02
b131 to b134
3–59
(2) User setting display mode (=)
The monitor displays only the codes and items that are arbitrarily assigned to user
parameters ( to ), except codes ,  and .
Refer to User parameter ( to ) section for the detail.
(3) Data comparison display mode (=)
The monitor displays only the parameters that have been changed from the factory
settings. All monitoring indications xxx and code ,, are always
displayed.
(4) Basic display mode (=)
The monitor displays basic parameters. (The monitor display is the factory setting.) The
following table lists the parameters that can be displayed in basic display mode.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Code displayed
 to 































Item
Monitoring indication
Output frequency setting
Acceleration time (1)
Deceleration time (1)
Keypad Run key routing
Frequency source
Run command source
Base frequency
Maximum frequency
[AT] selection
Multi-speed frequency 0
Multi-speed frequency 1
Multi-speed frequency 2
Multi-speed frequency 3
V/F characteristic curve selection
V/F gain
Energy saving operation mode
Restart mode on power failure / under volt. trip
Allowable under-voltage power failure time
Restart mode on over volt. / over current trip
Retry wait time on over volt. / over current trip
Function code display restriction
Carrier frequency
Initialization mode (parameters or trip history)
Decel. overvoltage suppression enable
Decel. overvoltage suppression level
Initialization trigger
Password A setting
Password A for authentication
Output [11] function
Output [12] function
Alarm relay active state
3–60
Initial display selection:  – The initial display selection function allows you to specify
data displayed on the integrated operator on powerup. The table below lists the display
items selectable. (The factory setting is  [].)
Panel display selection:  – When an external operator is connected to WL200 via
RS-422 port, the display is locked and shows only one parameter configured by .
Automatic return to the initial display:  – 10 min. after the last key operation, display
returns to the initial parameter set by .
Frequency conversion coefficient setting:  – By setting , converted output
frequency is monitored in . ( =   )
Frequency set in monitoring:  – If  is set in , frequency can be changed by
up/down key in monitor display  and .
Action selection in case of external operator disconnection:  – When an external
operator is disconnected, the inverter behaves according to  setting.
3–61
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data Units
Func. code that SET key
pressed last displayed.(*)
 to  to 
displayed
 displayed
B display of LCD operator

001

Specify a constant to scale the
displayed frequency for 
monitor, range is 0.01 to 99.99

1.00

When an external operator is
connected via RS-422 port, the
built-in display is locked and
shows only one "d" parameter
configured in:
 to 

001


001


002

Two option codes:
Freq. set disabled
Freq. set enabled

00

 display
10 min. after the last key
operation, display returns to the
initial parameter set by . Two
option codes:
Disable
Enable

00

 Ex. operator com. loss action
Five option codes:
Trip
Trip after deceleration to a
stop
Ignore
Coasting (FRS)
Decelerates to a stop

02

 Initial display selection
Frequency scaling conversion
 factor
Display ex.operator
 connected
1st parameter of Dual
 Monitor
2nd parameter of Dual
 Monitor
 Frequency set in monitoring
Automatic return to the initial
Set any two "d" parameters in
 and , then they can be
monitored in . The two
parameters are switched by
up/down keys.
Set range:  to 
(*) note: If the power is off with displaying “” after the set,  comes when power is on again.
3–62
User Parameter Registration
Parameter group “U” is the user parameter. Any function code can be chosen to registor on
this parameter up to 32. When display mode is set to be “user parameter” (= ) then
is  to and , ,  are displayed.
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Description
Function code display
 restriction

to
User parameters 1 to 32

Run
Mode
Edit
Six option codes:
Full display
Function-specific display
User setting (and )
Data comparison display
Basic display
Monitor display only

Set range,
“", to 

Defaults
Initial data Units
00


Automatic User Parameter Registration
The automatic user parameter setting function allows you to make the inverter
automatically record changed function codes in  to . You can use the stored
function codes as a history of data change. To enable this function, select “” (enabling
automatic user parameter setting) for the .
When any data is changed and SET key is pressed, the function code will be stored in 
to  sequentially.
The latest data is in , and the oldest one is in .
Stored function codes in  to  are not duplicated. If duplicated function code is
changed, old existing function code is deleted. If number of changed function code exceeds
32, the oldest one in  is deleted.
Func.
Code
“b” Function
Name
Automatic user parameter
 registration

to

User parameters 1 to 32
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Two option codes:
Disable
Enable

Set range,
“", to 

Defaults
Initial data Units
00


3–63
Controlled Stop Operation at Power Loss
Controlled stop operation at power loss helps avoid tripping or free-running (coasting) of
the motor when power is lost while in run mode. The inverter controls the internal DC bus
voltage while decelerating the motor, and brings the motor to a controlled stop.
Power
OFF




DC bus voltage


Under-voltage
level
Output frequency




Should power be lost while the inverter is in run mode, this function will have the following
effect:
 When the internal DC bus voltage of the inverter comes down to the set level of ,
the inverter decreases the output frequency by the amount set in . (During this
interval the DC bus voltage rises due to regeneration, so does not reach the UV level.)
 The inverter then continues deceleration according to the value set in . If the DC
bus voltage rises up to the set value of , the inverter stops deceleration to avoid OV
tripping.
 During this interval, the DC bus voltage decreases again due to lack of input power.
 When the DC bus voltage comes down to the set value of , the inverter starts
deceleration according to the set value of  again. This process will be repeated as
needed until the motor is brought to a stop.
3–64
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Controlled deceleration on
 power loss
DC bus voltage trigger level
 of ctrl. decel.
Over-voltage threshold of
 ctrl. decel.
Deceleration time of ctrl.
 decel.
Initial freq. drop of ctrl.
 decel.
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data Units
Four option codes:
Trips
Decelerates to a stop
Decelerates to a stop with DC
bus voltage controlled
Decelerates to a stop with DC
bus voltage controlled, then
restart

00

Setting of DC bus voltage to start
controlled decel. operation. Range is
0.0 to 1000.0

220.0/
440.0
V
Setting the OV-LAD stop level of
controlled decel. operation. Range is
0.0 to 1000.0

360.0/
720.0
V
Range is 0.01 to 3600.00

1.00
sec.
Setting of initial freq. drop.
Range is 0.0 to 10.0 Hz

0.0
Hz
NOTE: If the DC bus voltage comes down to the UV level during this operation, the inverter
trips with under-voltage and motor will free-run (coast) to a stop.
NOTE: If the set value of <, then the inverter internally swaps the  and 
values. However the displayed values are not changed.
NOTE: This function cannot be interrupted until it is completed. So if the power is restored
during this operation, wait until the operation is done (motor stops) and then give the run
command.
3–65
Window Comparator, Analog disconnection
The window comparator function outputs signals when the values of analog inputs O and
OI are within the maximum and minimum limits specified for the window comparator. You
can monitor analog inputs with reference to arbitrary levels (to find input terminal
disconnection and other errors).
You can specify a hysteresis width for the maximum-limit and minimum-limit levels of the
window comparator. You can also specify limit levels and a hysteresis width individually for
analog inputs O and OI.
You can fix the analog input data to be applied to an arbitrary value when WCO or WCOI is
output. For this purpose, specify a desired value as the operation level at O/OI
disconnection (//). When “no” is specified, the analog input data is reflected
as input.
Output values of ODc and OIDc are the same as those of WCO and WCOI, respectively.
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Maximum-limit level of
 window comparator (O)
Minimum-limit level of
 window comparator (O)
Hysteresis width of window
 comparator (O)
Maximum-limit level of
 window comparator (OI)
Minimum-limit level of
 window comparator (OI)
Hysteresis width of window
 comparator (OI)
Operation level at O
 disconnection
Operation level at OI
 disconnection
O or OI
Max.(100%)
Description
Set range, {Min.-limit level () +
hysteresis width ()x2} to 100 %
(Minimum of 0%)

100.
%
Set range, 0 to {Max.-limit level
() - hysteresis width ()x2} %
(Maximum of 0%)

0.
%
Set range, 0 to {Max.-limit level
() - Min.-limit level ()}/2 %
(Maximum of 10%)

0.
%
Set range, {Min.-limit level ( +
hysteresis width ()x2} to 100 %
(Minimum of 0%)

100.
%
Set range, 0 to {Max.-limit level
() - hysteresis width ()x2} %
(Maximum of 0%)

0.
%
Set range, 0 to {Max.-limit level
() - Min.-limit level ()}/2 %
(Maximum of 10%)

0.
%
Set range, 0 to 100%, or “no” (ignore)

no

Set range, 0 to 100%, or “no” (ignore)

no

Hysteresis width
(, , )
Applied analog data
ON
ON
Max.-limit level of window
comparator (/)
Analog operation level at
disconnection (/)
Min.-limit level of window
comparator (/)
Analog input data
0%
WCO/WCOI
ODc/OIDc
Defaults
Run
Mode
Initial data Units
Edit
ON
3–66
Ambient Temperature Setting
Sets the ambient temperature where the inverter is installed, so to calculate internally the
lifetime of cooling fan. Incorrect data will result in an incorrect calculation result.
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Ambient temperature
 setting
Description
Set range is,
-10 to 50 C
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data Units

40
C
Watt-hour related
When the watt-hour monitoring function is selected, the inverter displays the watt-hour
value of electric power given to the inverter. You can also convert the value to be displayed
to gain data by setting the cumulative input power display gain setting (). Value
displayed by function  is expressed as follows:
 =
Watt-hour (kWh)
Watt-hour gain setting ()
The watt-hour input gain can be set within the range 1 to 1000 in step of 1.
You can clear the watt-hour data by specifying “01” for the watt-hour clearance function
() and pressing the STR key. You can also clear the watt-hour data at an intelligent
input terminal by assigning parameter “” (KHC: watt-hour clearance) to the terminal.
When the watt-hour display gain setting () is set to “”, the watt-hour data up to
999000 (kWh) can be displayed.
Func.
Code
“b” Function
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data Units
 Watt-hour clearance
Two option codes:
OFF
ON (press STR then clear)

00

 Watt-hour display gain
Set range is,
1. to 1000.

1.

3–67
Carrier frequency (PWM) related
Carrier frequency adjustment:  – The internal switching frequency of the inverter
circuitry (also called the chopper frequency). It is called the carrier frequency because the
lower AC power frequency of the inverter “rides” the carrier. The faint, high-pitched sound
you hear when the inverter is in Run Mode is characteristic of switching power supplies in
general. The carrier frequency is adjustable from 2.0kHz to 10kHz. The audible sound
decreases at the higher frequencies, but RFI noise and leakage current may be increased.
Refer to the specification derating curves in Chapter 1 to determine the maximum
allowable carrier frequency setting for your particular inverter and environmental conditions.
Refer also to  for automatic carrier frequency reduction.
NOTE: The carrier frequency setting must stay within specified limits for inverter-motor
applications that must comply with particular regulatory agencies. For example, European
CE-approved application requires the carrier to be 3kHz or less.
Automatic carrier frequency reduction:  – The automatic carrier frequency reduction
automatically reduces the carrier frequency according to the increase in output current. To
enable this function, specify “” for automatic carrier frequency reduction selection ().
When the output current increases to 72%,
84%, or 96% of the rated current, this function
reduces the carrier frequency to 9, 6, or 3 kHz,
respectively. This function restores the original
carrier frequency when the output decreases
to 5% lower than each reduction start level.
The rate of carrier frequency reduction is 2kHz
per second. The maximum limit of carrier
frequency change by this function is the value
specified for the carrier frequency setting ();
the minimum limit is 3 kHz.
Carrier freq.
10kHz
9kHz
5%
5%
5%
6kHz
3kHz
0
50
72%
100
84%
96%
Output current
Note: If 3 kHz or less freq. has been specified for , this function is disabled regardless
of the setting of .
[Remark: Above graph is for schematic concept and the profile is a subject to change
reflecting the temperature test. ]
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
 Carrier frequency
Automatic carrier frequency
 reduction
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data Units
Sets the PWM carrier (internal
switching frequency), range is 2.0 to
10.0 kHz

2.0
kHz
Three option codes:
Disabled
Enabled, depending on the
output current
Enabled, depending on the
heat-sink temperature

01

3–68
Miscellaneous Settings
The miscellaneous settings include initialization modes, and others. This section covers
some of the most important settings you may need to configure.
Start frequency adjustment:  – When the inverter starts to run, the output frequency
does not ramp from 0Hz. Instead, it steps directly to the start frequency (), and the
ramp proceeds upward from there.
Initialization related: , , ,  – These functions allow you to restore the
factory default settings. Please refer to “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on page 6–14.
Stop key enable function:  – This function allows you to decide whether the stop key
on the integrated operator is enabled or not.
Dynamic Braking related functions: , , , – These parameters are for using
the internal brake chopper so to get more regeneration torque of the motor.
Cooling Fan Control:  – You can select the performance of the cooling fan (if your
inverter model includes a fan). This function controls whether the cooling fan stops or
keeps on running after the inverter stops the motor. This can result in an additional energy
saving and extends fan life.
Func.
Code
“b” Function
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data Units
Sets the starting frequency for the
inverter output, range is 0.01 to 9.99
Hz

0.50
Hz
 (parameters or trip history)
Select initialized data, five option
codes:
Initialization disabled
Clears Trip history
Initializes all Parameters
Clears Trip history and initializes
all parameters
Clears Trip history and initializes
all parameters and EzSQ
program

00

 Country for initialization
Select default parameter values for
country on initialization, two option
codes:
area A
area B

01

 STOP key enable
Select whether the STOP key on the
keypad is enabled, three option
codes:
Enabled
Disabled always
Disabled for stop

00

 Start frequency
Initialization mode
3–69
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data Units
 ratio
Selects the rate of use (in %) of the
regenerative braking resistor per 100
sec. intervals, range is 0.0 to the
value calculated by the value of .
If the connected resister’s allowable
range is narrower then above range,
the resister’s range is prior.
0%: Function disabled
>0%: Enabled, per value

0.0
%
 Cooling fan control
Selects when the fan is ON during
inverter operation, three options:
Fan is always ON
Fan is ON during run, OFF
during stop (5 minute delay
from ON to OFF)
Fan is temperature controlled

01

 cooling fan
Two option codes:
Count
Clear

00

 Initialization target data
Select initialized parameters, four
option codes:
All parameters
All parameters except in/output
terminals and communication.
Only registered parameters in
xxx.
All parameters except registered
parameters in xxx and .

00

Three option codes:
Disable
Enable during run only
Enable always

00


360/
720
V

Min.
resistance
Ω

00

Dynamic braking usage
Clear elapsed time of

Dynamic braking control
(BRD) selection
 BRD activation level
 BRD resistor
 Initialization trigger (*)
Range is:
330 to 380V (200V class)
660 to 760V (400V class)
Set the value of the resistor
connected to the inverter. By this
setting, upper limit of  as the
inverter hardware is calculated
automatically.
Range is minimum connectable
resistor Rbmin to 600.0Ω
This is to perform initialization by
parameter input with ,  and
. Two option codes:
Initialization disable
Perform initialization
(*) Note: When 01 is set on , and SET key is pressed, initialization starts immediately
and there is not any way to restore the previous parameter setting. WL200 doesn’t have a
method to trigger the initialization by key action as the other Hitachi inverter models have.
3–70
Stop Mode / Restart Mode Configuration: / – You can configure how the
inverter performs a standard stop (each time Run FWD and REV signals turn OFF). Setting
 determines whether the inverter will control the deceleration, or whether it will
perform a free-run stop (coast to a stop). When using the free-run stop selection, it is
imperative to also configure how you want the inverter to resume control of motor speed.
Setting  determines whether the inverter will ensure the motor always resumes at 0 Hz,
or whether the motor resumes from its current coasting speed (also called active frequency
matching). The run command may turn OFF briefly, allowing the motor to coast to a slower
speed from which normal operation can resume.
In most applications a controlled deceleration is desirable, corresponding to =.
However, applications such as HVAC fan control will often use a free-run stop (=).
This practice decreases dynamic stress on system components, prolonging system life. In
this case, you will typically set = in order to resume from the current speed after a
free-run stop (see diagram down below: active frequency matching resume). Note that
using the default setting, =, can cause trip events when the inverter attempts to
force the load quickly to zero speed.
NOTE: Other events can cause (or be configured to cause) a free-run stop, such as power
loss (see “Automatic Restart Mode” on page 3–43), or an intelligent input terminal [FRS]
signal. If all free-run stop behavior is important to your application (such as HVAC), be sure
to configure each event accordingly.
3–71
An additional parameter further configures all
instances of a free-run stop. Parameter ,
Retry Wait Time Before Motor Restart, sets the
minimum time the inverter will free-run. For
example, if  = 4 seconds (and =)
and the cause of the free-run stop lasts 10
seconds, the inverter will free-run (coast) for a
total of 14 seconds before driving the motor
again.
The figure at below right describes how active
frequency matching resume operates. After
waiting the time set in , the inverter tries
to catch the speed of the motor shaft and
outputs the speed set in . At this time, if
the motor current rises up to the value set in
, the inverter decreases the frequency
according to the deceleration time set in ,
and finally comes to the required speed.
Following are the related parameters for this
control.
Code





Parameter contents
Current level of active frequency
matching
Deceleration rate of active frequency
matching
Start freq. of active freq. matching
Restart mode after FRS
Stop mode selection
Zero frequency resume
 = 
Stop mode = free-run stop
 = 
Resume from 0Hz
[FRS]
t
0
Zero-frequency start
Motor
speed
t
0
Active frequency matching resume
 = 
Stop mode = free-run stop
 = 
Resume from current speed
[FRS]
t
0
Wait time



Motor
speed
t
0

Motor
current
RMS
t
0
Func.
Code
“b” Function
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data Units
 Restart mode after FRS
Selects how the inverter resumes
operation when free-run stop (FRS) is
cancelled, three options:
Restart from 0Hz
Restart from frequency detected
from real speed of motor (freq.
matching)
Restart from frequency detected
from real speed of motor (active
freq. matching)

00

 Stop mode selection
Select how the inverter stops the
motor, two option codes:
DEC (decelerate to stop)
FRS (free-run to stop)

00

3–72
Free-V/F Settings Related
Please refer to page 3–21 for detailed explanation of the function.
Func.
Code














“b” Function
Name
Description
Free V/F setting, freq.1
Set range, 0 to value of 
Free V/F setting, voltage.1
Set range, 0.0 to 800.0V
Free V/F setting, freq.2
Set range, value of  to 
Free V/F setting, voltage.2
Set range, 0.0 to 800.0V
Free V/F setting, freq.3
Set range, value of  to 
Free V/F setting, voltage.3
Set range, 0.0 to 800.0V
Free V/F setting, freq.4
Set range, value of  to 
Free V/F setting, voltage.4
Set range, 0.0 to 800.0V
Free V/F setting, freq.5
Set range, value of  to 
Free V/F setting, voltage.5
Set range, 0.0 to 800.0V
Free V/F setting, freq.6
Set range, value of  to 
Free V/F setting, voltage.6
Set range, 0.0 to 800.0V
Free V/F setting, freq.7
Set range,  to 400
Free V/F setting, voltage.7
Set range, 0.0 to 800.0V
Run
Mode
Edit














Defaults
Initial data Units
0.
Hz
0.0
V
0.
Hz
0.0
V
0.
Hz
0.0
V
0.
Hz
0.0
V
0.
Hz
0.0
V
0.
Hz
0.0
V
0.
Hz
0.0
V
3–73
Brake Control Function Related
The brake control function allows you to make the inverter control an external brake used
for a lift or other machines. To enable this function, specify “” (enabling the brake control
function) for the Brake Control Enable (). This function operates as described below.
(1) When the inverter receives an operation command, it starts the output and accelerates
the motor up to the Brake Release Frequency Setting.
(2) After the Brake Release Frequency Setting is reached, the inverter waits for the braking
wait time (), and then outputs the brake release signal (BOK). However, if the
inverter output current has not reached the brake release current (), the inverter
does not output the brake release signal, but trips and outputs a brake error signal
(BER).
(3) When the braking confirmation signal (BOK) has been assigned to an intelligent input
terminal (that is, when “” is specified for one of “” to “”), the inverter waits
for the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation () without accelerating the motor after
receiving the brake release signal. If the inverter does not receive the braking
confirmation signal within the braking confirmation time (), it trips with the
braking error signal (BER) output. When the braking confirmation signal (BOK) has not
been assigned to any intelligent input terminal, the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation
() is invalid. In such cases, the inverter proceeds to the operation described in item
(4) after the output of the brake release signal.
(4) After the input of the braking confirmation signal (or the output of the brake release
signal [when the BOK signal function is disabled]), the inverter waits for the Brake Wait
Time for Acceleration (), and then starts accelerating the motor up to the set
acceleration frequency.
(5) When the operation command is turned off, the inverter decelerates the motor down to
the braking frequency (), and then turns off the brake release signal (BRK).
Output freq.
Braking freq.
()
Brake release freq.
()
(4)
(7)
(5)
(1)
Operation command
(2)
Brake release signal
ON
Brake confirmation
signal
ON
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Time to reach Brake release freq.
Brake Wait Time for Release ()
Brake Wait Time for Confirmation ()
Brake Wait Time for Acceleration ()
Time to decelerate down to Braking freq
Brake Wait Time for Confirmation ()
Brake Wait Time for Stopping ()
(6)
3–74
(6) When the braking confirmation signal (BOK) has been assigned to an intelligent input
terminal (that is, when “” is specified for one of “” to “”), the inverter waits,
after turning off the brake release signal, until the braking confirmation is turned off at
least for the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation () without decelerating the motor. If
the braking confirmation signal is not turned off within the Brake Wait Time for
Confirmation (), the inverter trips with the braking error signal (BER) output. When
the braking confirmation signal (BOK) has not been assigned to any intelligent input
terminal, the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation () is invalid. In such cases, the
inverter proceeds to the operation described in item (7) after the brake release signal is
turned off.
(7) After the braking confirmation signal (or the brake release signal [when the BOK signal
function is disabled]) is turned off, the inverter waits for the Brake Wait Time for
Stopping (), and then starts decelerating the motor down to 0Hz.
NOTE: The above timing chart shows the operation on the assumption that the braking
confirmation signal “” (BOK) is assigned to one of the terminal 1 to 7 ( to ). If
the BOK signal is not assigned to any terminal, the Brake Wait Time for Acceleration ()
begins when the brake release signal is turned on, and the Brake Wait Time for Stopping
() begins when the brake release signal is turned off.
When using the brake control function, assign the following signal functions to intelligent
input and output terminals as needed.
(1) To input a signal indicating that the brake is released from the external brake to the
inverter, assign the braking confirmation signal (: BOK) to one of the terminal 1 to 7
( to )
(2) Assign the brake release signal (: BRK), which is a brake-releasing command, to one
of the output terminal 11 to 12 ( to ). To output a signal when braking is
abnormal, assign the brake error signal (: BER) to an output terminal.
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data Units
 Brake control enable
Two option codes:
Disable
Enable
Enable (same as )

00

 Brake Wait Time for Release
Set range: 0.00 to 5.00 sec

0.00
sec.
Set range: 0.00 to 5.00 sec

0.00
sec.
Set range: 0.00 to 5.00 sec

0.00
sec.
 Confirmation
Set range: 0.00 to 5.00 sec

0.00
sec.
 Brake release freq.
Set range: 0 to 400Hz

0.00
sec.
 Brake release current
Set range: 0 to 150% of inverter
rated current

Rated
current
A
 Braking freq. setting
Set range: 0 to 400Hz

0.00
Hz
Brake Wait Time for
 Acceleration
Brake Wait Time for
 Stopping
Brake Wait Time for
3–75
DC Bus AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulation) for Deceleration Settings
This function is to achieve stable DC bus
voltage in case of deceleration. DC bus
voltage rises due to regeneration during
deceleration. When this function is
activated (= or ), inverter
controls the deceleration time so that
the DC bus voltage not to go up to the
overvoltage trip level, and leads to the
trip-less operation during deceleration.
DC bus voltage
Threshold voltage to start DC bus AVR ()
t
Freq
Please note that the actual deceleration
time can be longer in this case.
t
Normal
operation
“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Deceleration overvoltage
 suppression enable

Decel. overvoltage. suppress
level
Decel. overvoltage. suppress
 const.
Decel. overvoltage. suppress
 proportional gain
Decel. overvoltage. suppress
 integral time
Description
DC bus AVR
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data Units
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled with accel.

00

DC bus voltage of suppression.
Range is:
200V class330 to 395
400V class660 to 790

380
/760
V

1.00
sec.

0.20


1.0
sec.
Accel. rate when b130=02.
Set range: 0.10 to 30.00 sec.
Proportional gain when b130=01.
Range is: 0.00 to 5.00
Integration time when b130=01.
Range is: 0.00 to 150.0
3–76
STO (Safe Torque Off) Setting
Please refer to the appendix E for detailed information.
Func.
Code
“b” Function
Name
Description
Two option codes:
No trip (Hardware shutoff only)
E37 trip
E98/E99 trip/ display .
With external fault detection
E99 trip/ display . Without
external fault detection
Display . With external
fault detection
Display input status. Without
external fault detection
Display input status. With
external fault detection
 GS input mode
Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults
Initial data Units
00

Data Read/Write selection
By setting b166 to “01”, both Read and Write function by WOP are inhibited. This function is
different from “software lock function”.
Func.
Code
“b” Function
Name
 Data Read/Write selection
Description
Two option codes:
Read/Write enable
both Read, Write disable
Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults
Initial data Units
00

3–77
Password Function
The WL200 inverter has password function to prevent from changing parameters or to hide
a part of parameters. There are two passwords for  (Function Code Display Restriction)
and  (Software Lock) corresponding to password A and password B.
If password is forgotten, there is no way to delete password. Please be careful to set
password.
 Overview of password function (Example of password A)
 Password not set (default)
 =  (accessible)
 =  (impossible to change)
 = Accessible
Set “” in 
(Set password)
Set “” in 
(Delete password)
 Password protected
 = read only
In this mode, the password protection
is enabled and parameter  cannot
be changed.
 Password authenticated
Set “” in 
 =  (impossible to change)
 =  (accessible)
 =  (accessible)
 =  (impossible to change)
Cycle the power or no key
operation for approx. 10 min.
 = Accessible
In this mode, password protection is
temporary disabled, however, the
password is not deleted
 Function Code Display Restriction Function and Software Lock Function
Target of password
Applied parameters
for setting password
Function description
Function Code
Display Restriction
 (password A)
Depending on the value in , a part of function codes
are not displayed. (Displayed parameters can be
changed.)
, 
Software Lock
 (password B)
Depending on the value in , all or a part of
parameters cannot be changed. (All the function codes
and data are displayed.)
, 
 How to Set Password
(1) Set parameter  and/or  depending on your demand
(2) Set password in  and/or (“” is not available.)



SET

SET
ESC
Cursor to left
SET
.
SET
Dot indicates that the
password is set
Cursor to right
(3) Password has been set and locked.
Parameter  and/or  cannot be changed.
3–78
 How to authenticate Password
For a person who knows the password, unlock password protection as follows.
(4) Set password in  and/or .
Displays for 1sec.



SET


SET
ESC
SET
Displays for 1sec.


SET
(5) If entered password is matched, “ (Good)” is displayed for 1 second and
password protection is unlocked temporary. If cycling the power or no key operation
lasts 10 min., password protection is enabled again automatically. If entered
password is unmatched, “ (Error)” is displayed and protection is not unlocked.
 How to change Password
(6) Make password authentication as above (4).
(7) Set new password in  and/or 

.

SET

SET
ESC
.
SET
SET
(8) After changing the password, password protection is enabled automatically.
 How to delete Password
(9) Make password authentication as above (4).
(10) Set “” in  and/or 
(11) Password has been deleted and all the password information are cleared

.

SET

SET
ESC
SET

SET
3–79
“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions
The seven input terminals [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], and [7] can be configured for any of 56
different functions. The next two tables show how to configure the seven terminals. The
inputs are logical, in that they are either OFF or ON. We define these states as OFF=0, and
ON=1.
The inverter comes with default options for the seven terminals. These settings are initially
unique, each one having its own setting. You can use any option on any terminal, and even
use the same option twice to create a logical OR (though usually not required).
NOTE: Terminals [3] and [4] have the ability to be logical inputs, and to be safety inputs in
case of safe stop function is selected.
NOTE: Terminal [5] has the ability to be a logical input, and to be an analog input for a
thermistor device when PTC function (option code 19) is assigned to that terminal.
Input Terminal Configuration
Functions and Options – The function codes in the following table let you assign one of 56
options to any of the seven logic inputs for the WL200 inverters. The functions 
through  configure the terminals [1] through [7] respectively. The “value” of these
particular parameters is not a scalar value, but it is a discrete number that selects one
option from many available options.
For example, if you set function =, you have assigned option  (Forward Run) to
terminal [1]. The option codes and the specifics of how each one works are in Chapter 4.
Func.
Code
“C” Function
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
 Input [1] function

 Input [2] function




Input [3] function
[GS1 assignable]
Input [4] function
Select input terminal function, 56
[GS2 assignable] options (see next section)
Input [5] function
[PTC assignable]



 Input [6] function

 Input [7] function

Defaults
Initial data
Units
00
[FW]
01
[RV]
12
[EXT]
18
[RS]
02
[CF1]
03
[CF2]
06
[JG]
The input logic conversion is programmable for each of the seven inputs default to
normally open (active high), but you can select normally closed (active low) in order to
invert the sense of the logic.







3–80
Func.
Code
“C” Function
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units
 Input [1] active state

00

 Input [2] active state

00


00


00


00

 Input [6] active state

00

 Input [7] active state

00

 Input [3] active state
Select logic conversion, two option
codes:
normally open [NO]
normally closed [NC]
 Input [4] active state
 Input [5] active state
NOTE: An input terminal configured for option code  ([RS] Reset command) cannot be
configured for normally closed operation.
Note: This response time is disregarded when power-on or reset. For example, when the
power is up when FW terminal is on, then the operation starts regardless this response time
as soon as the internal reset process is completed.
Func.
Code
“C” Function
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units
 Input [1] response time

1.

 Input [2] response time

1.


1.


1.


1.

 Input [6] response time

1.

 Input [7] response time

1.

 Input [3] response time
 Input [4] response time
 Input [5] response time
Sets response time of each input
terminal, set range:
(x 2 [ms]) to (x 2 [ms])
(0 to 400 [ms])
Intelligent Input Terminal Overview
Each of the seven intelligent terminals may be assigned any of the options in the following
table. When you program one of the option codes for terminal assignments  to ,
the respective terminal assumes the function role of that option code. The terminal
functions have a symbol or abbreviation that we use to label a terminal using that function.
For example, the “Forward Run” command is [FW]. The physical label on the terminal block
connector is simply 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7. However, schematic examples in this manual also
use the terminal symbol (such as [FW]) to show the assigned option. The option codes for
 to  determine the active state of the logical input (active high or active low).
3–81
Input Function Summary Table – This table shows all intelligent input functions at a
glance. Detailed description of these functions, related parameters and settings, and
example wiring diagrams are in “Using Intelligent Input Terminals” on page 4–12.
Input Function Summary Table
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol
Function Name

FW
FORWARD Run/Stop

RV
Reverse Run/Stop

CF1
Multi-speed Select,
Bit 0 (LSB)

CF2
Multi-speed Select,
Bit 1

CF3
Multi-speed Select,
Bit 2

CF4
Multi-speed Select,
Bit 3 (MSB)

JG
Jogging

DB
External DC braking

SET
Set (select) 2nd Motor
Data

2CH
2-stage Acceleration
and Deceleration

FRS
Free-run Stop

EXT

USP

CS
Commercial power
source switchover

SFT
Software Lock

AT
Analog Input
Voltage/Current Select

RS
Reset Inverter
Description
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
External Trip
OFF
Unattended Start
Protection
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Inverter is in Run Mode, motor runs forward
Inverter is in Stop Mode, motor stops
Inverter is in Run Mode, motor runs reverse
Inverter is in Stop Mode, motor stops
Binary encoded speed select, Bit 0, logical 1
Binary encoded speed select, Bit 0, logical 0
Binary encoded speed select, Bit 1, logical 1
Binary encoded speed select, Bit 1, logical 0
Binary encoded speed select, Bit 2, logical 1
Binary encoded speed select, Bit 2, logical 0
Binary encoded speed select, Bit 3, logical 1
Binary encoded speed select, Bit 3, logical 0
Inverter is in Run Mode, output to motor runs at
jog parameter frequency
Inverter is in Stop Mode
DC braking will be applied during deceleration
DC braking will not be applied
The inverter uses 2nd motor parameters for
generating frequency output to motor
The inverter uses 1st (main) motor parameters for
generating frequency output to motor
Frequency output uses 2nd-stage acceleration and
deceleration values
Frequency output uses standard acceleration and
deceleration values
Causes output to turn OFF, allowing motor to free
run (coast) to stop
Output operates normally, so controlled
deceleration stop motor
When assigned input transitions OFF to ON,
inverter latches trip event and displays 
No trip event for ON to OFF, any recorded trip
events remain in history until reset
On powerup, the inverter will not resume a Run
command (mostly used in the US)
On powerup, the inverter will resume a Run
command that was active before power loss
Motor can be driven by commercial power
Motor is driven via the inverter
The keypad and remote programming devices are
prevented from changing parameters
The parameters may be edited and stored
Refer to “Analog Input Settings” on page3–15.
The trip condition is reset, the motor output is
turned OFF, and powerup reset is asserted
Normal power-ON operation
3–82
Input Function Summary Table
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol
Function Name
PTC
PTC thermistor Thermal
Protection
(C005 only)
ANLG
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

STA
Start
(3-wire interface)

STP
Stop
(3-wire interface)
Description
OPEN
ON

F/R
FWD, REV
(3-wire interface)
OFF

PID
PID Disable
ON
OFF

PIDC
PID Reset
ON
OFF

UP

DWN

UDC
Remote Control UP
Function (motorized
speed pot.)
ON
Remote Control Down
Function (motorized
speed pot.)
ON
Remote Control Data
Clearing
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON

OPE
Operator Control
OFF

SF1
Multi-speed Select,
Bit operation Bit 1

SF2
Multi-speed Select,
Bit operation Bit 2

SF3
Multi-speed Select,
Bit operation Bit 3

SF4
Multi-speed Select,
Bit operation Bit 4

SF5
Multi-speed Select,
Bit operation Bit 5

SF6
Multi-speed Select,
Bit operation Bit 6
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
When a thermistor is connected to terminal [5] and
[L], the inverter checks for over-temperature and
will cause trip event and turn OFF output to motor
A disconnect of the thermistor causes a trip event,
and the inverter turns OFF the motor
Starts the motor rotation
No change to present motor status
Stops the motor rotation
No change to present motor status
Selects the direction of motor rotation: ON = FWD.
While the motor is rotating, a change of F/R will
start a deceleration, followed by a change in
direction
Selects the direction of motor rotation: OFF = REV.
While the motor is rotating, a change of F/R will
start a deceleration, followed by a change in
direction
Temporarily disables PID loop control. Inverter
output turns OFF as long as PID Enable is active
(=)
Has no effect on PID loop operation, which
operates normally if PID Enable is active (=)
Resets the PID loop controller. The main
consequence is that the integrator sum is forced to
zero
No effect on PID controller
Accelerates (increases output frequency) motor
from current frequency
Output to motor operates normally
Decelerates (decreases output frequency) motor
from current frequency
Output to motor operates normally
Clears the UP/DWN frequency memory by forcing
it to equal the set frequency parameter F001.
Setting  must be set= to enable this
function to work
UP/DWN frequency memory is not changed
Forces the source of the output frequency setting
 and the source of the Run command  to
be from the digital operator
Source of output frequency set by  and source
of Run command set by  is used
Bit encoded speed select, Bit 1, logical 1
Bit encoded speed select, Bit 1, logical 0
Bit encoded speed select, Bit 2, logical 1
Bit encoded speed select, Bit 2, logical 0
Bit encoded speed select, Bit 3, logical 1
Bit encoded speed select, Bit 3, logical 0
Bit encoded speed select, Bit 4, logical 1
Bit encoded speed select, Bit 4, logical 0
Bit encoded speed select, Bit 5, logical 1
Bit encoded speed select, Bit 5, logical 0
Bit encoded speed select, Bit 6, logical 1
Bit encoded speed select, Bit 6, logical 0
3–83
Input Function Summary Table
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol
Function Name

SF7
Multi-speed Select,
Bit operation Bit 7

OLR
Overload Restriction
Source Changeover

BOK
Brake confirmation

LAC
LAD cancellation

ADD

F-TM
Force Terminal Mode

KHC
Clear watt-hour data

MI1
General purpose input
(1)

MI2
General purpose input
(2)

MI3
General purpose input
(3)

MI4
General purpose input
(4)

MI5
General purpose input
(5)

MI6
General purpose input
(6)

MI7
General purpose input
(7)

AHD
Analog command hold

GS1
GS1 input (C003 only)

GS2
GS2 input (C004 only)

485
Start EzCOM

PRG
Executing EzSQ
program

HLD
Retain output frequency

ROK
Permission of Run
command

DISP
Display limitation

no
Description
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ADD frequency enable
OFF
ON
No function
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Bit encoded speed select, Bit 7, logical 1
Bit encoded speed select, Bit 7, logical 0
Perform overload restriction
Normal operation
Brake wait time () is valid
Brake wait time () is not valid
Set ramp times are ignored. Inverter output
immediately follows the freq. command.
Accel. and/or decel. is according to the set ramp
time
Adds the  (add frequency) value to the output
frequency
Does not add the  value to the output
frequency
Force inverter to use input terminals for output
frequency and Run command sources
Source of output frequency set by  and source
of Run command set by  is used
Clear watt-hour data
No action
General purpose input (1) is made ON under EzSQ
General purpose input (1) is made OFF under EzSQ
General purpose input (2) is made ON under EzSQ
General purpose input (2) is made OFF under EzSQ
General purpose input (3) is made ON under EzSQ
General purpose input (3) is made OFF under EzSQ
General purpose input (4) is made ON under EzSQ
General purpose input (4) is made OFF under EzSQ
General purpose input (5) is made ON under EzSQ
General purpose input (5) is made OFF under EzSQ
General purpose input (6) is made ON under EzSQ
General purpose input (6) is made OFF under EzSQ
General purpose input (7) is made ON under EzSQ
General purpose input (7) is made OFF under EzSQ
Analog command is held
Analog command is not held
EN60204-1 related signals:
Signal input of “Safe torque off” function.
Starts EzCOM
No execution
Executing EzSQ program
No execution
Retain the current output frequency
No retention
Run command permitted
Run command is not permitted
Only a parameter configured in  is shown
All the monitors can be shown
(input ignored)
3–84
Output Terminal Configuration
The inverter provides configuration for logic (discrete) and analog outputs, shown in the
table below.
“C” Function
Func.
Code
Name

Output [11] function
[EDM assignable]
 Output [12] function
Description
[EO] terminal selection
[AM] terminal selection
 (Analog voltage output
0...10V)

Digital current monitor
reference value
Defaults
Initial data
Units

00
[RUN]
01
[FA1]
05
[AL]
11 programmable functions:
Output frequency (PWM)
Output current (PWM)
Output frequency (Pulse train)
Output voltage (PWM)
Input power (PWM)
Electronic thermal load ratio
(PWM)
LAD frequency (PWM)
Output current (Pulse train)
Heat sink temperature (PWM)
General output (PWM)
Option(PWM)

07

9 programmable functions:
Output frequency
Output current
Output voltage
Input power
Electronic thermal load ratio
LAD frequency
Heat sink temperature
General output
Option

07
[LAD]

Current with digital current monitor
output at 1,440Hz
Range is 20% to 150% of rated
current

Rated current
A
44 programmable functions
available for logic (discrete) outputs
(see next section)
 Alarm relay function
 (Pulse/PWM output)
Run
Mode
Edit





3–85
The output logic conversion is programmable for terminal [11], [12] and the alarm relay terminal.
The open-collector output terminal [11] and [12] defaults to normally open (active low), but you
can select normally closed (active high) for the terminal in order to invert the sense of the logic.
You can invert the logical sense of the alarm relay output as well.
Func.
Code
“C” Function
Name
Description
 Output [11] active state
 Output [12] active state
 Alarm relay active state
Select logic conversion, two option
codes:
normally open [NO]
normally closed [NC]
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units

00


00


01

You can also adjust the output with ON/OFF delays.
Func.
Code
“C” Function
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units
 Output [11] on delay

0.0
Sec.
 Output [11] off delay

0.0
Sec.

0.0
Sec.

0.0
Sec.
 Relay output on delay

0.0
Sec.
 Relay output off delay

0.0
Sec.
 Output [12] on delay
 Output [12] off delay
Set range is 0.0 to 100.0 sec.
NOTE: If you are using the output terminal OFF delay feature (any of ,  > 0.0 sec.),
the [RS] (reset) terminal affects the ON-to-OFF transition slightly. Normally (with using OFF
delays), the [RS] input causes the motor output and the logic outputs to turn OFF together,
immediately. However, when any output uses an OFF delay, then after the [RS] input turns
ON, that output will remain ON for an additional 1 sec. period (approximate) before turning
OFF.
3–86
Output Function Summary Table – This table shows all functions for the logical outputs
(terminals [11], [12] and [AL]) at a glance. Detailed descriptions of these functions, related
parameters and settings, and example wiring diagrams are in “Using Intelligent Output
Terminals” on page 4–45.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol
Output Function Summary Table
Function Name

RUN
Run Signal

FA1
Frequency Arrival Type
1–Constant Speed

FA2
Frequency Arrival Type
2–Over frequency

OL

OD
Output Deviation for PID
Control

AL
Alarm Signal

FA3
Frequency Arrival Type
3–Set frequency

UV
Under-voltage

RNT
Run Time Expired

ONT
Power ON time Expired

THM
Thermal Warning

BRK
Brake Release Signal

BER
Brake Error Signal

ZS
Zero Hz Speed
Detection Signal
Overload Warning
Signal 1
Description
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
When the inverter is in Run Mode
When the inverter is in Stop Mode
When output to motor is at the set frequency
When output to motor is OFF, or in any acceleration
or deceleration ramp
When output to motor is at or above the set freq.,
even if in accel () or decel () ramps
When output to motor is OFF, or at a level below
the set frequency
When output current is more than the set threshold
() for the overload signal
When output current is less than the set threshold
for the deviation signal
When PID error is more than the set threshold for
the deviation signal
When PID error is less than the set threshold for the
deviation signal
When an alarm signal has occurred and has not
been cleared
When no alarm has occurred since the last cleaning
of alarm(s)
When output to motor is at the set frequency,
during accel () and decel ().
When output to motor is OFF, or is not at a level of
the set frequency
Inverter is in Under-voltage
Inverter is not in Under-voltage
Total running time of the inverter exceeds the
specified value
Total running time of the inverter does not exceed
the specified value
Total power ON time of the inverter exceeds the
specified value
Total power ON time of the inverter does not
exceed the specified value
Accumulated thermal count exceeds the  set
value
Accumulated thermal count does not exceed the
 set value
Output for brake release
No action for brake
Brake error has occurred
Brake performance is normal
Output frequency falls below the threshold
specified in 
Output frequency is higher than the threshold
specified in 
3–87
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol
Output Function Summary Table
Function Name

FA4
Frequency Arrival Type
4–Over frequency

FA5
Frequency Arrival Type
5–Set frequency

OL2

ODc

OIDc
Overload Warning
Signal 2
Description
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Analog Voltage Input
Disconnect Detection
ON
Analog Current input
Disconnect Detection
ON
OFF
OFF
ON

FBV
PID Second Stage
Output
OFF
Network Disconnect
Detection

NDc

LOG1

LOG2
Logic Output Function 2

LOG3
Logic Output Function 3

WAC
Capacitor Life Warning
Signal

WAF
Cooling Fan Warning
Signal

FR

OHF
ON
OFF
ON
Logic Output Function 1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Starting Contact Signal
Heat Sink Overheat
Warning
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
When output to motor is at or above the set freq.,
even if in accel () or decel () ramps
When output to motor is OFF, or at a level below
the set frequency
When output to motor is at the set frequency,
during accel () and decel ().
When output to motor is OFF, or is not at a level of
the set frequency
When output current is more than the set threshold
() for the overload signal
When output current is less than the set threshold
for the deviation signal
When the [O] input value <  setting (signal loss
detected)
When no signal loss is detected
When the [OI] input value <  setting (signal
loss detected)
When no signal loss is detected
Transitions to ON when the inverter is in RUN Mode
and the PID Process Variable (PV) is less than the
Feedback Low Limit ()
Transitions to OFF when the PID Process Variable
(PV) exceeds the PID High Limit (), and
transitions to OFF when the inverter goes from Run
Mode to Stop Mode
When the communications watchdog timer (period
specified by ) has time out
When the communications watchdog timer is
satisfied by regular communications activity
When the Boolean operation specified by  has
a logical “1” result
When the Boolean operation specified by  has
a logical “0” result
When the Boolean operation specified by  has
a logical “1” result
When the Boolean operation specified by  has
a logical “0” result
When the Boolean operation specified by  has
a logical “1” result
When the Boolean operation specified by  has
a logical “0” result
Lifetime of internal capacitor has expired.
Lifetime of internal capacitor has not expired.
Lifetime of cooling fan has expired.
Lifetime of cooling fan has not expired.
Either FW or RV command is given to the inverter
No FW or RV command is given to the inverter, or
both are given to the inverter
Temperature of the heat sink exceeds a specified
value ()
Temperature of the heat sink does not exceed a
specified value ()
3–88
Option
Code
Output Function Summary Table
Terminal
Symbol
Function Name
Description
ON

LOC
Low load detection

MO1
General Output 1

MO2
General Output 2

MO3
General Output 3

IRDY
Inverter Ready Signal

FWR
Forward Rotation

RVR
Reverse Rotation

MJA
Major Failure Signal

WCO
Window Comparator for
Analog Voltage Input

WCOI

FREF
Frequency Command
Source

REF
Run Command Source

SETM
2

EDM
STO (Safe Torque Off)
Performance Monitor
(Output terminal 11
only)

OPO

no
Window Comparator for
Analog Current Input
nd
Motor Selection
Option card output
Not used
Motor current is less than the specified value ()
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Motor current is not less than the specified value
()
General output 1 is ON
General output 1 is OFF
General output 2 is ON
General output 2 is OFF
General output 3 is ON
General output 3 is OFF
Inverter can receive a run command
Inverter cannot receive a run command
Inverter is driving the motor in forward direction
Inverter is not driving the motor in forward
direction
Inverter is driving the motor in reverse direction
Inverter is not driving the motor in reverse direction
Inverter is tripping with major failure
Inverter is normal, or is not tripping with major
failure
Analog voltage input value is inside of the window
comparator
Analog voltage input value is outside of the window
comparator
Analog current input value is inside of the window
comparator
Analog current input value is outside of the window
comparator
Frequency command is given from the operator
Frequency command is not given from the operator
Run command is given from the operator
Run command is not given from the operator
nd
2 motor is being selected
nd
2 motor is not being selected
ON
STO is being performed
OFF
STO is not being performed
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
(output terminal for option card)
(output terminal for option card)
-
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
3–89
Output Function Adjustment Parameters
The following parameters work in conjunction with the intelligent output function, when
configured.
Low Load Detection output – The output
mode parameter () sets the mode of
the detection at which the low load
detection signal [LOC] turns ON. Two kinds
of modes can be selected. The detection
level parameter () is to set the level of
the low load.
This function is for generating an early
warning logic output, without causing
either a trip event or a restriction of the
motor current (those effects are available
on other functions).
Func.
Code
Output
current

“C” Function
Name
t
0
[LOC]
output
1
0
Description
ON
Run
Mode
Edit
t
Defaults
Initial data
Units
 current detection
Two option codes:
During acceleration,
deceleration and constant
speed
During constant speed only

01

 Low current detection level
Set the level of low load detection,
range is 0.0 to 1.5*inverter rated
current

Rated
current
A
Output mode of low
3–90
Overload Warning Output –The overload
warning level parameter (//)
sets the motor current level at which the
overload warning signal [OL/OL2] turns ON.
The range of setting is from 0% to 150% of the
rated current for the inverter. This function is
for generating an early warning logic output,
without causing either a trip event or a
restriction of the motor current (those effects
are available on other functions).
Processing cycle of overload warning signal
[OL/OL2] can be selected from 40ms or 2ms
by . Overload warning filter time constant
() and overload warning hysteresis ()
are enable only when =. Overload
warning signal is turned off when output
current is lower than “overload warning level
(//) – overload warning
hysteresis ()”.
Name
Output mode of overload
warning
Overload warning level, 2
 motor
 Overload warning level 2
Overload warning
 processing cycle select
Overload warning filter
 time constant
Overload warning
hysteresis
nd
t
0
[OL/OL2]
output
1
0
ON
t
Output
current
//


C041
t
0
[OL/OL2]
output
1
0
Description
 Overload warning level

//

“C” Function
Func.
Code

Output
current
Two option codes:
During accel., decel. and
constant speed
During constant speed only
Sets the overload warning signal
level between 0% and 200% (from
0 to two time the rated current of
the inverter)
Sets the overload warning signal
level between 0% and 200% (from
0 to two time the rated current of
the inverter)
Sets the overload warning signal 2
level between 0% and 200% (from
0 to two time the rated current of
the inverter)
Two option codes:
40ms
2ms
Set the filter time constant for
output current detection used for
judgement of overload warning.
Range is 0 to 9999 ms
Set the hysteresis for overload
warning signal.
Range is 0 to 50% of the rated
current of the inverter
ON
Run
Mode
Edit
ON
t
Defaults
Initial data
Units

01


Rated current
x 1.15
A

Rated current
x 1.15
A

Rated current
x 1.15
A

00


0
msec.

10.00
%
3–91
Frequency Arrival Output – The frequency
arrival signals, [FA1] to [FA5], are intended to
indicate when the inverter output has reached
(arrived at) the target frequency. You can
adjust the timing of the leading and trailing
edges of the signal via two parameters
specified to acceleration ad deceleration
ramps, / and /. Refer also
to chapter 4.
Func.
Code
Output
freq.
“C” Function
Name
/

C041t
/

C041
[FA2]/[FA4]
output
1
0
ON
Run
Mode
Edit
Description
t
Defaults
Initial data
Units

Frequency arrival setting
for acceleration
Sets the frequency arrival setting
threshold for [FA2]/[FA3] during
acceleration,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

0.00
Hz

Frequency arrival setting
for deceleration
Sets the frequency arrival setting
threshold for [FA2]/[FA3] during
deceleration,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

0.00
Hz

Frequency arrival setting 2
for acceleration
Sets the frequency arrival setting
threshold for [FA4]/[FA5] during
acceleration,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

0.00
Hz

Frequency arrival setting 2
for deceleration
Sets the frequency arrival setting
threshold for [FA4]/[FA5] during
deceleration,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

0.00
Hz
PID FBV Output – The Error for the PID
loop is the magnitude (absolute value) of
the difference between the Set point
(desired value) and Process Variable (actual
value). The PID output deviation signal
[OD] (output terminal function option code
) indicates when the error magnitude has
exceeded a magnitude defined by .
Func.
Code
Name
 PID deviation level
PID Error (PV-SP) deviation threshold
Output

C041
[OD]
output
1
0
t
Description
Sets the allowable PID loop error
magnitude (absolute value), SP-PV,
range is 0.0 to 100%
t

Initial data
Units
3.0
%
3–92
Electronic Thermal Warning Output – Please refer to page 3–48 for detailed information.
“C” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Description
Electronic thermal warning
 level
Set range is 0 to 100%
Setting 0 means disabled.
Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults
Initial data
Units
90.
%
Zero speed detection Output – The inverter outputs the 0Hz speed detection signal when
the inverter output frequency falls below the threshold frequency specified in the zero
speed detection level ().
To use this function, assign parameter “” to one of the intelligent output terminals [11],
[12] (, ), or to the alarm relay output terminal ().
“C” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Description
 Zero speed detection level
Set range is 0.00 to 100.00Hz
Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults
Initial data
Units
0.00
Hz
Heat Sink Overheat Warning Output – The inverter monitors the temperature of its heat
sink, and outputs the heat sink overheat warning (OHF) signal when the temperature
exceeds the heat sink overheat warning level specified in parameter .
Func.
Code
“C” Function
Name
Heat sink overheat
 warning
Description
Set range is 0 to 110 C
Run
Mode
Edit

Defaults
Initial data
Units
100.
C
3–93
Network Communications Settings
The following table lists parameters that configure the inverter’s serial communications
terminal. The settings affect how the inverter communication with a Modbus network (for
networked inverter applications). The settings cannot be edited via the network, in order to
ensure network reliability. Refer to Appendix B for more information on controlling any
monitoring your inverter from a network.
“C” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units
 Communication speed
Eight option codes:
2,400 bps
4,800 bps
9,600 bps
19,200 bps
38,400 bps
57,600 bps
76,800 bps
115,200 bps

05
baud
 Modbus address
Set the address of the inverter on
the network. Range is 1 to 247

1.

 Communication parity
Three option codes:
No parity
Even parity
Odd parity

00

 Communication stop bit
Two option codes:
1 bit
2 bit

1
bit
Selects inverter response to
communications error.
Five options:
Trip
Decelerate to a stop and trip
Disable
Free run stop (coasting)
Decelerates to a stop

02

Sets the communications watchdog
timer period.
Range is 0.00 to 99.99 sec
0.0 = disabled

0.00
sec.
 Communication wait time
Time the inverter waits after
receiving a message before it
transmits.
Range is 0. to 1000. ms

0.
msec.
Communication selection
Three option codes;
Modbus-RTU
EzCOM
EzCOM<Administrator>

00

Communication error
 select


Communication error
time-out
3–94
Analog Input Signal Calibration Settings
The functions in the following table
configure the signals for the analog input
terminals. Note that these settings do not
change the current/voltage or sink/source
characteristics – only the zero and span
(scaling) of the signals.
Freq setpoint
Max. freq
200%
100%
Max. freq /2
50%
These parameters are already adjusted
before the shipment, and therefore it is not
recommended to do the adjustment at the
customer.
Func.
Code
0
0V, 4mA
“C” Function
Name
Description
5V, 12mA
Run
Mode
Edit
10V, 20mA
Defaults
Initial data
Units
 O input span calibration
Scale factor between the external
frequency command on terminals
L–O (voltage input) and the
frequency output,
range is 0.0 to 200.0%

100.0
%
 OI input span calibration
Scale factor between the external
frequency command on terminals
L–OI (voltage input) and the
frequency output,
range is 0.0 to 200.0%

100.0
%
Scale factor of PTC input.
Range is 0.0 to 200.0%

100.0
%
Thermistor input (PTC)
 span calibration
NOTE: When you restore factory default settings, the values will change to those listed
above. Be sure to manually reconfigure the values for your application, if needed, after
restoring factory defaults.
3–95
Miscellaneous Functions
The following table contains miscellaneous functions not in other function groups.
“C” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units
Displays debug parameters.
Two option codes:
Disable
Enable <Do not set>
(for factory use)

00

 selection
Controls speed setpoint for the
inverter after power cycle.
Two option codes:
Clear last frequency (return to
default frequency )
Keep last frequency adjusted
by UP/DWN

00

 Reset selection
Determines response to Reset input
[RS].
Four option codes:
Cancel trip state at input signal
ON transition, stops inverter if
in Run Mode
Cancel trip state at signal OFF
transition, stops inverter if in
Run Mode
Cancel trip state at input ON
transition, no effect if in Run
Mode
Clear the memories only
related to trip status

00

 Restart mode after reset
Determines the restart mode after
reset is given, three option codes:
Start with 0 Hz
Start with freq. matching
Start with active freq. matching

00

 UP/DWN clear mode
Freq. set value when UDC signal is
given to the input terminal, two
option codes:
0 Hz
Original setting (in the EEPROM
memory at power on)

00

 Debug mode enable *
Up/Down memory mode
CAUTION: Do not change the debug mode for safety reasons. Otherwise unexpected
performances may occur.
3–96
Analog Output Calibration Related Functions
These functions are for adjustment of analog output EO and AM. The outputs are adjusted
at factory before the shipment, and therefore basically no need to adjust at the customer.
But in case you need to change the gain depending on your system (i.e. analog meter
specification), you can use these functions for the adjustment.
Func.
Code
“C” Function
Name
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units
 EO gain adjustment
Set range is 50 to 200%

100.
%
 AM gain adjustment
Set range is 50 to 200%

100.
%
 AM bias adjustment
Set range is 0 to 100%

0.
%
3–97
Output Logic and Timing
Logic Output Function – The inverter has a built-in logic output feature. Select any two
operands out of all intelligent output options except LOG1 to LOG3 and their operator out
of AND, OR, or XOR (exclusive OR). The terminal symbol for the new output is [LOG]. Use
,  or  to route the logical result to terminal [11], [12] or the relay terminals.
LOG1-LOG3, no, OPO cannot be the operand.

11
Intelligent outputs
used as internal
inputs:
RUN, FA1, FA2,
OL, OD, AL, Dc,
…EDM

12
//
Operand A
//
//
Operator
AND, OR, XOR
RUN, FA1, FA2,
OL, OD, AL, Dc,
…EDM
Operand B

AL1
AL0
AL2
The following table shows all four possible input combinations with each of the three
available logic operations.
Operand
A
B
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
AND
0
0
0
1
Operator
OR
0
1
1
1
XOR
0
1
1
0
3–98
Func.
Code
“C” Function
Name
 Logic output 1 operand A
 Logic output 1 operand B
 Logic output 1 operator
 Logic output 2 operand A
 Logic output 2 operand B
 Logic output 2 operator
 Logic output 3 operand A
 Logic output 3 operand B
 Logic output 3 operator
Description
All the programmable
functions available for logic
(discrete) outputs except LOG1 to
LOG3, OPO, no
Applies a logic function to calculate
[LOG] output state,
Three options:
[LOG] = A AND B
[LOG] = A OR B
[LOG] = A XOR B
All the programmable
functions available for logic
(discrete) outputs except LOG1 to
LOG3, OPO, no
Applies a logic function to calculate
[LOG] output state,
Three options:
[LOG] = A AND B
[LOG] = A OR B
[LOG] = A XOR B
All the programmable
functions available for logic
(discrete) outputs except LOG1 to
LOG3, OPO, no
Applies a logic function to calculate
[LOG] output state,
Three options:
[LOG] = A AND B
[LOG] = A OR B
[LOG] = A XOR B
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units

00


00


00


00


00


00


00


00


00

Other Functions
To avoid the miss-input of the multi-speed due to the time rug, waiting time to fix the
multi-speed can be set by . When input is detected, data is fixed after the time
defined with .
3–99
“H” Group: Motor Constants Functions
The “H” Group parameters configure the inverter
for the motor characteristics. You must manually
set  and  values to match the motor.
Parameter  is factory-set. If you want to
reset the parameters to the factory default
settings, use the procedure in “Restoring Factory
Default Settings” on page 6–14. Use  to
select the torque control algorithm as shown in
the diagram.
Inverter Torque Control Algorithms
V/F control

constant torque (V/F-VC)
V/F control,
variable (1.7) torque

V/F control,
Free V/f

“H” Function
Func.
Code
Name
 Motor capacity
Motor capacity,
 2nd motor
 Motor poles setting
Motor poles setting,
 2nd motor
Description
Twelve selections:
0.1/0.2/0.4/0.75/1.5/2.2/3.7/
5.5/7.5/11/15/18.5
Twenty four selections:
2 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 10 / 12 / 14 / 16 / 18 /
20 / 22 / 24 / 26 / 28 / 30 / 32 / 34
/ 36 / 38 / 40 / 42 / 44 / 46 / 48
Motor stabilization
 constant
Motor stabilization
 constant, 2nd motor
Motor constant (factory set),
range is 0 to 255
Run
Mode
Edit

Output
Defaults
Initial data
Units
kW

Specified by
the capacity of
each inverter
model

4
poles

4
poles

100.


100.


kW
3–100
“P” Group: Other Parameters
P group parameters are for other functionality such as option error related, EzSQ related,
and communication (CompoNet, DeviceNet, EtherNet, ProfiBus, CAN Open, and CC-Link)
related.
Option Card Error
You can select how the inverter reacts when an error results from a built-in option card.
“P” Function
Func.
Code
Name

Reaction when option card
error occurs
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Two option codes:
Inverter trips
Ignores the error (Inverter
continues operation)

Defaults
Initial data
Units
00

EzSQ User Parameter and other options Related Settings
Please refer to EzSQ manual, manual of each option and appendix B for the detailed
description of the function.
“P” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Communication watchdog
Description
Run
Mode
Edit
Defaults
Initial data
Units
Set range is 0.00 to 99.99s

1.00
Sec.
Tripping
Tripping after decelerating and
stopping the motor
Ignoring errors
Stopping the motor after
free-running
Decelerating and stopping the
motor

00

0 to 20

01

Tripping
Tripping after decelerating and
stopping the motor
Ignoring errors
Stopping the motor after
free-running
Decelerating and stopping the
motor

00

 RPM
0/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/22/
24/26/28/30/32/34/36/38/40/42/
44/46/48

0
poles
 EzSQ user parameter
to
U(00) to U(31)

Each set range is 0 to 65535

0.

 timer (for option)
Inverter action on
 communication error
(for option)
DeviceNet polled I/O:
 Output instance number
Inverter action on
 communication idle mode
Motor poles setting for
3–101
“P” Function
Func.
Code
Name
 EzCOM number of data

1 to 247

1.

0000 to FFFF

0000

 EzCOM source 1 register
0000 to FFFF

0000

destination 2
 EzCOM
address
1 to 247

2.

0000 to FFFF

0000

0000 to FFFF

0000

1 to 247

3.

0000 to FFFF

0000

 EzCOM source 3 register
0000 to FFFF

0000

destination 4
 EzCOM
address
1 to 247

4.

0000 to FFFF

0000

0000 to FFFF

0000

1 to 247

5.

0000 to FFFF

0000

 EzCOM source 5 register
 Option I/F command
to
register to write 1 to 10

 Option I/F command
to
register to read 1 to 10

 Profibus Node address
0000 to FFFF

0000

0000h to FFFFh

0000

0000h to FFFFh

0000

0. to 125.

0.

Profibus Clear Node
  address
…Clear
…Hold previous time value

00

 Profibus Map selection
…PPO type
…Conventional
…Flexible Mode Format Selection

00

 DeviceNet MAC ID
0 to 63

63

EzCOM destination 1
address
EzCOM destination 1
register
EzCOM destination 2


EzCOM destination 3
address
EzCOM destination 3
register
EzCOM destination 4
 register
 EzCOM source 4 register


EzCOM destination 5
address
EzCOM destination 5
register


Units
5.
 register
 EzCOM source 2 register

Initial data



Defaults
1 to 5


Description
Run
Mode
Edit

4–1
Chapt er 4:
Operations and
Monitoring
In This Chapter…
4
page
-
Introduction ....................................................................................... 4–2
-
Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices .......................................... 4–4
-
Control Logic Signal Specifications ................................................ 4–6
-
Intelligent Terminal Listing ............................................................ 4–10
-
Using Intelligent Input Terminals ..................................................4–12
-
Using Intelligent Output Terminals...............................................4–45
-
Analog Input Operation .................................................................4–77
-
Analog Output Operation .............................................................. 4–79
4–2
Introduction
The previous material in Chapter 3 gave a reference listing of all the programmable
functions of the inverter. We suggest that you first scan through the listing of inverter
functions to find a general familiarity. This chapter will build on that knowledge in the
following ways:
1. Related functions – Some parameters interact with or depend on the settings in other
functions. This chapter lists “required settings” for a programmable function to serve as a
cross-reference and an aid in showing how function interacts.
2. Intelligent terminals – Some functions rely on an input signal on a control logic
connector terminal, or generate output signals in other cases.
3. Electrical interfaces – This chapter shows how to make connections between the
inverter and other electrical devices.
4. PID Loop Operation – The WL200 has a built-in PID loop that calculates the optimal
inverter output frequency to control an external process. This chapter shows the parameters
and input/output terminals associated with PID loop operation.
5. Multiple motors – A single WL200 inverter may be used with two or more motors in
some types of applications. This chapter shows the electrical connections and inverter
parameters involved in multiple-motor applications.
The topics in this chapter can help you decide the features that are important to your
application, and how to use them. The basic installation covered in Chapter 2 concluded
with the powerup test and running the motor. Now, this chapter starts from that point and
shows how to make the inverter part of a larger control or automation system.
Caution Messages for Operating Procedures
Before continuing, please read the following Caution messages.
CAUTION: The heat sink fins will have a high temperature. Be careful not to touch them.
Otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
CAUTION: The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high
speed. Be sure to check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before
operating the inverter. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
CAUTION: If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default
setting (50Hz/60Hz), be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with the
respective manufacturer. Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting their
approval. Otherwise, there is the danger of equipment damage.
4–3
Warning Messages for Operating Procedures
WARNING: Be sure to turn ON the input power supply only after closing the front case.
While the inverter is energized, be sure not to open the front case. Otherwise, there is the
danger of electric shock.
WARNING: Be sure not to operate electrical equipment with wet hands. Otherwise, there is
the danger of electric shock.
WARNING: While the inverter is energized, be sure not to touch the inverter terminals even
when the motor is stopped. Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.
WARNING: If the retry mode is selected, the motor may suddenly restart after a trip stop.
Be sure to stop the inverter before approaching the machine (be sure to design the
machine so that safety for personnel is secure even if it restarts.) Otherwise, it may cause
injury to personnel.
WARNING: If the power supply is cut OFF for a short period of time, the inverter may
restart operating after the power supply recovers if the Run command is active. If a restart
may pose danger to personnel, so be sure to use a lock-out circuit so that it will not restart
after power recovery. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
WARNING: The Stop Key is effective only when the stop function is enabled. Be sure to
enable the Stop Key separately from the emergency stop. Otherwise, it may cause injury to
personnel.
WARNING: During a trip event, if the alarm reset is applied and the Run command is
present, the inverter will automatically restart. Be sure to apply the alarm reset only after
verifying the Run command is OFF. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
WARNING: Be sure not to touch the inside of the energized inverter or to put any
conductive object into it. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or fire.
WARNING: If power is turned ON when the Run command is already active, the motor will
automatically start and injury may result. Before turning ON the power, confirm that the
RUN command is not present.
WARNING: When the Stop key function is disabled, pressing the Stop key does not stop
the inverter, nor will it reset a trip alarm.
WARNING: Be sure to provide a separate, hard-wired emergency stop switch when the
application warrants it.
4–4
Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices
Hitachi inverters (drives) are useful in many types of applications. During installation, the
inverter keypad (or other programming device) will facilitate the initial configuration. After
installation, the inverter will generally receive its control commands through the control
logic connector or serial interface from another controlling device. In a simple application
such as single-conveyor speed control, a Run/Stop switch and potentiometer will give the
operator all the required control. In a sophisticated application, you may have a
programmable logic controller (PLC) as the system controller, with several connections to the
inverter.
It is not possible to cover all the possible types of application in this manual. It will be
necessary for you to know the electrical characteristics of the devices you want to connect
to the inverter. Then, this section and the following sections on I/O terminal functions can
help you quickly and safely connect those devices to the inverter.
CAUTION: There is a possibility to damage the inverter or other devices if your application
exceeds the maximum current or voltage characteristics of a connection point.
The connections between the inverter and
other devices rely on the electrical input/output
characteristics at both ends of each connection,
shown in the diagram to the right. The
inverter’s configurable inputs accept either a
sourcing or sinking output from an external
device (such as PLC). This chapter shows the
inverter’s internal electrical component(s) at
each I/O terminal. In some cases, you will need
to insert a power source in the interface wiring.
Input
circuit
Output
circuit
Output
circuit
signal
return
Input
circuit
Other device
WL200 inverter
P24
+-
24V
1
2
3
Input
circuits
…
After making the schematic, then:
WL200 inverter
signal
return
…
In order to avoid equipment damage and get
your application running smoothly, we
recommend drawing a schematic of each
connection between the inverter and the other
device. Include the internal components of each
device in the schematic, so that it makes a
complete circuit loop.
Other device
7
1. Verify that the current and voltage for each
GND
L
connection is within the operating limits of
each device.
2. Make sure that the logic sense (active high or active low) of any ON/OFF connection is
correct.
3. Check the zero and span (curve end points) for analog connections, and be sure the
scale factor from input to output is correct.
4. Understand what will happen at the system level if any particular device suddenly loses
power, or powers up after other devices.
4–5
Example Wiring Diagram
The schematic diagram below provides a general example of logic connector wiring, in
addition to basic power and motor wiring converted in Chapter 2. The goal of this chapter
is to help you determine the proper connections for the various terminals shown below for
your application needs.
Breaker, MCCB
or GFI
R
Power source,
3-phase or
1-phase, per
inverter model
U(T1)
WL200
(L1)
Motor
V(T2)
S
(L2)
W(T3)
T
N(L3)
PD/+1
24V
Jumper wire
(Source logic)
P24
+-
DC reactor
(optional)
P/+
PLC
L
Thermistor
Brake
resistor
(optional)
RB
N/-
Forward
L
GND for logic inputs
AL1
Intelligent inputs,
7 terminals
Relay contacts,
type 1 Form C
AL0
NOTE: For the wiring
of intelligent I/O and
analog inputs, be sure
to use twisted pair /
shielded cable. Attach
the shielded wire for
each signal to its
respective common
terminal at the inverter
end only.
Input impedance of
each intelligent input is
4.7k
Braking
unit
(optional)
1
2
3/GS
1
4/GS
2
5/PT
C
6
AL2
Input
circuits
Output circuit
[5] configurable as
discrete input or
thermistor input
Open collector output
Freq. arrival signal
Load
11/EDM
Load
12
+
-
7/EB
CM2
Meter
Termination resistor (200)
(Change by slide switch)
EO
L
Meter
0~10VDC
4~20mA
L
L
H
Apprx.10k
+
-
RS485
transceiver
OI
Apprx.100
L
USB
transceiver
L
EA
L
Option port
controller
L
GND for analog signals
Serial communication port
(RS485/Modbus)
SN
10Vdc
O
Pulse train input
24Vdc 32kHz max.
SP
RS485
transceiver
AM
Analog reference
GND for logic outputs
L
L
NOTE: Common for
RS485 is “L”.
RJ45 port
(Optional operator port)
USB (mini-B) port
(PC communication port)
USB power: Self power
Option port connector
4–6
Control Logic Signal Specifications
The control logic connectors are located just behind the front housing cover. The relay
contacts are just to the left of the logic connectors. Connector labeling is shown below.
RS485
comm.
SN 7
Relay
contacts
Logic inputs
6
5
4
3
2
1
L
Jumper wire
SP EO EA H
O
OI
PL P24
C
L AM CM2 12 11
AL2 AL1 AL0
RS485 Pulse Input for
comm. Train EzSQ
output only
Terminal Name
P24
PLC
1
2
3/GS1
4/GS2
5/PTC
6
7
GS1(3)
GS2(4)
Analog
input
Analog
output
Logic
output
Description
+24V for logic inputs
Ratings
24VDC, 100mA. (do not short to terminal L)
Intelligent input common
To change to sink type, remove the jumper
wire between [PLC] and [L], and connect it
between [P24] and [PLC]. In this case,
connecting [L] to [1] to [7] makes each input
ON. Please remove the jumper wire when
using external power supply.
Discrete logic inputs
(Terminal [3],[4] and [5] have
dual function. See following
description and related pages
for the details.)
27VDC max. (use PLC or an external supply
referenced to terminal L)
Safe stop input GS1
Safe stop input GS2
Functionality is based on ISO13849-1
See appendix for the details.
PTC(5)
Motor thermistor input
L (in upper row) *1
GND for logic inputs
11/EDM
Discrete logic outputs [11]
(Terminal [11] has dual
function. See following
description and related pages
for the details.)
12
Discrete logic outputs [12]
CM2
AM
GND for logic output
Analog voltage output
EO
Pulse train output
L (in bottom row) *2
GND for analog signals
Connect motor thermistor between PTC and L
terminal to detect the motor temperature. Set
 in .
Sum of input [1] to [7] currents (return)
50mA max. ON state current,
27 VDC max. OFF state voltage
Common is CM2
In case the EDM is selected, the functionality is
based on ISO13849-1
4VDC max. ON state voltage depression
50mA max. ON state current,
27 VDC max. OFF state voltage
Common is CM2
100 mA: [11], [12] current return
0 to 10VDC 2mA maximum
10VDC 2mA maximum
32kHz maximum
Sum of [OI], [O], and [H] currents (return)
4–7
Terminal Name
Description
OI
Analog current input
O
Analog voltage input
H
SP, SN
+10V analog reference
Serial communication terminal
AL0
Relay common contact
AL1 *3
Relay contact, normally open
AL2 *3
Relay contact, normally closed
Note 1:
Note 2:
Note 3:
Ratings
4 to 19.6 mA range, 20 mA nominal,
input impedance 250 
0 to 9.8 VDC range, 10 VDC nominal,
input impedance 10 k
10VDC nominal, 10mA max.
For RS485 Modbus communication.
250VAC,
2.5A
250VAC,
0.2A
100VAC, 10mA
30VDC,
3.0A
30VDC,
0.7A
5VDC, 100mA
(R load) max.
(I load, P.F.=0.4) max.
min.
(R load) max.
(I load, P.F.=0.4) max.
min.
The two terminals [L] are electrically connected together inside the inverter.
We recommend using [L] logic GND (to the right) for logic input circuits and [L]
analog GND (to the left) for analog I/O circuits.
Default relay N.O./N.C. configuration is reversed. See page 4–54.
Wiring sample of control logic terminal (sink logic)
Jumper wire
(source logic)
SN
SP
7
EO
6
EA
2
5/PTC 4/GS2 3/GS1
H
O
OI
L
1
AM
L
CM2
PLC
P24
12
11/EDM
RY
RY
Variable resistor
for freq. setting
(1k-2k)
Freq. meter
Note:
If relay is connected to intelligent output, install a diode across the relay coil
(reverse-biased) in order to suppress the turn-off spike.
4–8
Caution for intelligent terminals setting
In turning on power when the inputs to the intelligent terminals become the following
operations, the set data might be initialized.
Please ensure not becoming the following operations, in changing the function allocation
of the intelligent input terminal.
1) Turning on power while [Intelligent input terminal 1/2/3 are ON] and
[Intelligent input terminal 4/5/6/7 are OFF].
2) After 1)'s condition, turning off power.
3) After 2)'s condition, turning on power while [Intelligent input terminal 2/3/4 are ON] and
[Intelligent input terminal 1/5/6/7 are OFF].
Sink/source logic of intelligent input terminals
Sink or source logic is switched by a jumper wire as below.
Sink logic
2
Source logic
1
L PLC P24
2
Jumper wire
1
L PLC P24
Jumper wire
Wire size for control and relay terminals
Use wires within the specifications listed below. For safe wiring and reliability, it is
recommended to use ferrules, but if solid or stranded wire is used, stripping length should
be 8mm.
Control logic terminal
Relay output terminal
8mm
Control logic
terminal
Relay terminal
Solid
2
mm (AWG)
0.2 to 1.5
(AWG 24 to 16)
Stranded
2
mm (AWG)
0.2 to 1.0
(AWG 24 to 17)
Ferrule
2
mm (AWG)
0.25 to 0.75
(AWG 24 to 18)
0.2 to 1.5
(AWG 24 to 16)
0.2 to 1.0
(AWG 24 to 17)
0.25 to 0.75
(AWG 24 to 18)
4–9
Recommended ferrule
For safe wiring and reliability, it is recommended to use following ferrules.
Wire size
2
mm (AWG)
0.25 (24)
Model name of
ferrule *
AI 0.25-8YE
0.34 (22)
L [mm]
Φd [mm]
ΦD [mm]
12.5
0.8
2.0
AI 0.34-8TQ
12.5
0.8
2.0
0.5 (20)
AI 0.5-8WH
14
1.1
2.5
0.75 (18)
AI 0.75-8GY
14
1.3
2.8
Φd
8
L
ΦD
* Supplier: Phoenix contact
Crimping pliers: CRIPMFOX UD 6-4 or CRIMPFOX ZA 3
How to connect?
(1) Push down an orange actuating lever by a slotted screwdriver (width 2.5mm max.).
(2) Plug in the conductor.
(3) Pull out the screwdriver then the conductor is fixed.
2.5mm
Push down an
orange actuating
lever.
Plug in the
conductor.
Pull out the
screwdriver to fix
the conductor.
4–10
Intelligent Terminal Listing
Intelligent Inputs
Use the following table to locate pages for intelligent input material in this chapter.
Symbol
Code
Input Function Summary Table
Function Name
FW
RV
CF1
CF2
CF3
CF4
JG
DB
SET
2CH
FRS
EXT
USP
CS
SFT
AT
RS
PTC
STA
STP
F/R
PID
PIDC
UP
DWN
UDC
OPE
SF1 to SF7
OLR
BOK
LAC
ADD
F-TM
KHC
MI1 to MI7
AHD
GS1
GS2
485
PRG
HLD
ROK
DISP
NO
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
27
28
29
31
32 to 38
39
44
46
50
51
53
56 to 62
65
77
78
81
82
83
84
86
255
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
Multi-speed Select, Bit 0 (LSB)
Multi-speed Select, Bit 1
Multi-speed Select, Bit 2
Multi-speed Select, Bit 3 (MSB)
Jogging
External DC braking
Set (select) 2nd Motor Data
2-stage Acceleration and Deceleration
Free-run Stop
External Trip
Unattended Start Protection
Commercial power source switchover
Software Lock
Analog Input Voltage/Current Select
Reset Inverter
PTC thermistor Thermal Protection
Start (3-wire interface)
Stop (3-wire interface)
FWD, REV (3-wire interface)
PID Disable
PID Reset
Remote Control UP Function
Remote Control Down Function
Remote Control Data Clearing
Operator Control
Multi-speed Select, Bit operation Bit 1 to 7
Overload Restriction Source Changeover
Brake confirmation
LAD cancellation
Add frequency enable
Force Terminal Mode
Clear watt-hour data
General purpose input (1) to (7)
Analog command hold
STO1 input (Safety related signal)
STO2 input (Safety related signal)
Starting communication signal
Executing EzSQ program
Retain output frequency
Permission of Run command
Display limitation
No assign
Page
4–16
4–16
4–17
4–17
4–17
4–17
4–19
4–20
4–21
4–22
4–23
4–24
4–25
4–26
4–27
4–28
4–29
4–30
4–31
4–31
4–31
4–32
4–32
4–33
4–33
4–33
4–35
4–36
4–37
4–37
4–38
4–39
4–40
4–40
4–41
4–42
4–43
4–43
B–20
4–43
4–43
4–44
4–44
4–11
Intelligent Outputs
Use the following table to locate pages for intelligent output material in this chapter.
Symbol
RUN
FA1
FA2
OL
OD
AL
FA3
UV
RNT
ONT
THM
BRK
BER
ZS
FA4
FA5
OL2
ODc
OIDc
FBV
NDc
LOG1to LOG3
WAC
WAF
FR
OHF
LOC
MO1 to MO3
IRDY
FWR
RVR
MJA
WCO
WCOI
FREF
REF
SETM
Code
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
09
11
12
13
19
20
21
24
25
26
27
28
31
32
33 to 35
39
40
41
42
43
44 to 46
50
51
52
53
54
55
58
59
60
EDM
62
OP
no
63
255
Input Function Summary Table
Function Name
Run Signal
Frequency Arrival Type 1–Constant Speed
Frequency Arrival Type 2–Over frequency
Overload Warning Signal
PID Deviation error signal
Alarm Signal
Frequency Arrival Type 3–Set frequency
Under-voltage
Run Time Expired
Power ON time Expired
Thermal Warning
Brake Release Signal
Brake Error Signal
Zero Hz Speed Detection Signal
Frequency Arrival Type 4–Over frequency
Frequency Arrival Type 5–Set frequency
Overload Warning Signal 2
Analog Voltage Input Disconnect Detection
Analog Voltage Output Disconnect Detection
PID Second Stage Output
Network Disconnect Detection
Logic Output Function 1 to 3
Capacitor Life Warning Signal
Cooling Fan Warning Signal
Starting Contact Signal
Heat Sink Overheat Warning
Low load detection
General Output 1 to 3
Inverter Ready Signal
Forward Operation
Reverse Operation
Major Failure Signal
Window Comparator for Analog Voltage Input
Window Comparator for Analog Current Input
Frequency Command Source
Run Command Source
nd
2 Motor in operation
STO (Safe Torque Off) Performance Monitor
(Output terminal 11 only)
Option control signal
Not used
Page
4–48
4–49
4–49
4–51
4–52
4–53
4–49
4–55
4–56
4–56
4–57
4–58
4–58
4–59
4–49
4–49
4–51
4–60
4–60
4–61
4–64
4–65
4–66
4–66
4–67
4–68
4–69
4–69
4–70
4–71
4–71
4–72
4–73
4–73
4–74
4–74
4–75
4–76
4–12
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Terminals [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6] and [7] are identical, programmable inputs for general use.
The input circuits can use the inverter’s internal (isolated) +24V field supply or an external
power supply. This section describes input circuits operation and how to connect them
properly to switches or transistor outputs on field devices.
The WL200 inverter features selectable sinking or sourcing inputs. These terms refer to the
connection to the external switching device–it either sinks current (from the input to GND)
or sources current (from a power source) into the input. Note that the sink/source naming
convention may be different in your particular country or industry. In any case, just follow
the wiring diagrams in this section for your application.
The inverter has a jumper wire for configuring
the choice of sinking or sourcing inputs. To
access it, you must remove the front cover of
the inverter housing. In the figure to the top
right, the jumper wire is shown as attached to
the logic terminal block (connector). For EU
and version (suffix –xFE), it is originally
located as source type logic. If you need to
change to the sink type connection, remove
the jumper wire and connect it as shown in
the figure at the bottom right.
Logic inputs
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
L PLC P24
Jumper wire
Source logic connection
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
L PLC P24
Jumper wire
Sink logic connection
CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF power to the inverter before changing the jumper wire
position. Otherwise, damage to the inverter circuitry may occur.
Jumper wire for
[PLC] Terminal Wiring – The [PLC] terminal
sink logic
WL200 inverter
(Programmable Logic Control terminal) is
P24
named to include various devices that can
connect to the inverter’s logic inputs. In
24V
PLC Input common
the figure to the right, note the [PLC]
+
terminal and the jumper wire. Locating
the jumper wire between [PLC] and [L]
1
sets the input logic source type, which is
Input
the default setting for EU and US versions.
circuits
In this case, you connect input terminal to
7
[P24] to make it active. If instead you
locate the jumper wire between [PLC] and
[P24], the input logic will be sink type. In
Logic GND
L
this case, you connect the input terminal
Jumper wire for
to [L] to make it active.
source logic
The wiring diagram on the following pages show the four combinations of using sourcing
or sinking inputs, and using the internal or an external DC supply.
4–13
The two diagrams below input wiring circuits using the inverter’s internal +24V supply. Each
diagram shows the connection for simple switches, or for a field device with transistor
outputs. Note that in the lower diagram, it is necessary to connect terminal [L] only when
using the field device with transistors. Be sure to use the correct connection of the jumper
wire shown for each wiring diagram.
Sinking Inputs, Internal Supply
Jumper wire = [PLC] – [P24] position
Jumper wire
WL200
P24
24V
Input common
PLC
Field device
GND
Logic GND
1
+
-
L
1
Input
circuits
7
7
Input switches
Open collector outputs,
NPN transistors
Sourcing Inputs, Internal Supply
Jumper wire = [PLC] – [L] position
Field device
Common to
[P24]
Jumper wire
WL200
P24
24V
PLC Input common
Logic GND
1
L
1
Input
circuits
7
to PNP bias
circuits
PNP transistor
sourcing outputs
GND
7
Input switches
+
-
4–14
The two diagrams below show input wiring circuits using an external supply. If using the
“Sinking Inputs, External Supply” in below wiring diagram, be sure to remove the jumper
wire, and use a diode (*) with the external supply. This will prevent a power supply
contention in case the jumper wire is accidentally placed in the incorrect position. For the
“Sourcing Inputs, External Supply”, please connect the jumper wire as drawn in the diagram
below.
Sinking Inputs, External Supply
Jumper wire = Removed
WL200
P24
Field device
*
+
-
*
24V
24V
Input common
PLC
+
-
24V
GND
Logic GND
1
+
-
L
1
Input
circuits
7
7
Input switches
Open collector outputs,
NPN transistors
* Note: If the external power supply to GND is (optionally)
connected to [L], then install the above diode.
Sourcing Inputs, External Supply
Jumper wire = Removed
PNP transistor
sourcing outputs
24V
WL200
+
-
Field device
P24
24V
PLC Input common
L
1
1
Input
circuits
7
+
-
7
Input switches
24V
GND
+
-
4–15
The inverter control section can be powered externally with 24 Vdc as shown below. This
will allow you to read and write parameters using the keypad or via communication (such as
Modbus/RTU or with optional fieldbus communication cards).
NOTE: You CANNOT use the ProDriveNext programming software when powering the
inverter in this way! It will also not be possible to drive a motor.
WL200
DC24V
P24
PLC
L
1
7
By having ability inverter doesn’t block the current flowing into itself when it is not powered.
This may cause the closed circuit when two or more inverters are connected to common I/O
wiring as shown below to result in unexpected turning the on the input. To avoid this closed
circuit, please put the diode (rated:50V/0.1A) in the path as described below.
P24
P24
PLC
PLC
L
L
1
1
7
4–16
Forward Run/Stop and Reverse Run/Stop Commands:
When you input the Run command via the terminal [FW], the inverter executes the Forward
Run command (high) or Stop command (low). When you input the Run command via the
terminal [RV], the inverter executes the Reverse Run command (high) or Stop command
(low).
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

FW
Forward Run/Stop

RV
Reverse Run/Stop
Function Name
Valid for inputs
 to 
Required settings
 = 
State
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Notes:
 When the Forward Run and Reverse Run
commands are active at the same time, the
inverter enters the Stop Mode.
 When a terminal associated with either [FW] or
[RV] function is configured for normally closed,
the motor starts rotation when that terminal is
disconnected or otherwise has no input voltage.
Description
Inverter is in Run Mode, motor runs forward
Inverter is in Stop Mode, motor stops
Inverter is in Run Mode, motor runs reverse
Inverter is in7Stop Mode, motor stops
Example (default input configuration shown—see
page 3–79):
7
6
5
4
RV
FW
2
1
3
L PLC P24
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
NOTE: The parameter , Keypad Run Key Routing, determines whether the single Run
key issues a Run FWD command or Run REV command. However, it has no effect on the
[FW] and [RV] input terminal operation.
WARNING: If the power is turned ON and the Run command is already active, the motor
starts rotation and is dangerous! Before turning power ON, confirm that the Run command
is not active.
4–17
Multi-Speed Select ~Binary Operation
The inverter can store up to 16 different target
frequencies (speeds) that the motor output uses for
steady-state run condition. These speeds are accessible
through programming four of the intelligent terminals as
binary-encoded inputs [CF1] to [CF4] per the table to the
right. These can be any of the six inputs, and in any order.
You can use fewer inputs if you need eight or fewer
speeds.
NOTE: When choosing a subset of speeds to use, always
start at the top of the table, and with the least-significant
bit: [CF1], [CF2], etc.
3rd
7th
5th
2nd
1st
6th
4th
0th
[CF1]
[CF2]
[CF3]
[FW]
Speed
Multispeed
Input Function
Speed 0
Speed 1
Speed 2
Speed 3
Speed 4
Speed 5
Speed 6
Speed 7
Speed 8
Speed 9
Speed 10
Speed 11
Speed 12
Speed 13
Speed 14
Speed 15
CF4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CF3 CF2 CF1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
The example with eight speeds in the
figure below shows how input switches
configured for [CF1]–[CF3] functions can
change the motor speed in real time.
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
NOTE: Speed 0 depends on 
parameter value.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

CF1
Multi-speed Select,
Bit 0 (LSB)

CF2
Multi-speed Select,
Bit 1

CF3
Multi-speed Select,
Bit 2

CF4
Multi-speed Select,
Bit 3 (MSB)
Valid for inputs
Required settings
Function Name
State
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
 to 
, =,
 to 
Notes:
 When programming the multi-speed settings, be
sure to press the SET key each time and then set
the next multi-speed setting. Note that when the
key is not pressed, no data will be set.
 When a multi-speed setting more than 50Hz
(60Hz) is to be set, it is necessary to program the
maximum frequency  high enough to allow
that speed
Description
Binary encoded speed select, Bit 0, logical 1
Binary encoded speed select, Bit 0, logical 0
Binary encoded speed select, Bit 1, logical 1
Binary encoded speed select, Bit 1, logical 0
Binary encoded speed select, Bit 2, logical 1
Binary encoded speed select, Bit 2, logical 0
Binary encoded speed select, Bit 3, logical 1
Binary encoded speed select, Bit 3, logical 0
Example (some CF inputs require input
configuration; some are default inputs):
CF4 CF3 CF2 CF1
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–18
While using the multi-speed capability, you can monitor the present frequency with
monitor function  during each segment of a multi-speed operation.
NOTE: When using the Multi-speed Select settings [CF1] to [CF4], do not display parameter
 or change the value of  while the inverter is in Run Mode (motor running). If it is
necessary to check the value of  during Run Mode, please monitor  instead of
.
There are two ways to program the speeds into the registers  to :
1. Standard keypad programming:
a. Select each parameter  to .
b. Press the SET key to view the parameter value.
c. Use the

and

keys to edit the value.
d. Use the SET key to save the data to memory.
2. Programming using the CF switches. Set the speed by following these steps:
a. Turn the Run command OFF (Stop Mode).
b. Turn inputs ON to select desired Multi-speed. Display the value of  on the
digital operator.
c. Set the desired output frequency by pressing the

and

keys.
d. Press the SET key once to store the set frequency. When this occurs, indicates
the output frequency of Multi-speed n.
e. Press the SET key once to confirm that the indication is the same as the set
frequency.
f. Repeat operations in 2. a) to 2. e) to set the frequency of other Multi-speeds. It can
be set also by parameters  to  in the first procedure 1. a) to 1. d).
4–19
Jogging Command
The Jog input [JG] is used to command
the motor to rotate slowly in small
increments for manual operation. The
speed is limited to 9.99 Hz. The
frequency for the jogging operation is
set by parameter . Jogging does not
use an acceleration ramp, so we
recommend setting the jogging
frequency  to 5 Hz or less to prevent
tripping.
[JG]
[FW],
[RV]
1
0
1
0
Jog
speed

When the terminal [JG] is turned ON and
the Run command is issued, the inverter
outputs the programmed jog frequency
to the motor. To enable the Run key on
the digital operator for jog input, set the
value 01 (terminal mode) in  (Run
command source).

Jog decel type
The type of deceleration used to end a motor jog operation is selectable by programming
function . The options are:
•  valid during operation, Free-run stop (coasting)
•  valid during operation, Deceleration (normal level) and stop
•  valid during operation, Use DC braking and stop
•  invalid during operation, Free-run stop (coasting)
•  invalid during operation, Deceleration (normal level) and stop
•  invalid during operation, Use DC braking and stop
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

JG
Valid for inputs
Required settings
Function Name
Jogging
State
ON
OFF
 to 
=, >,
>0, 
Notes:
 No jogging operation is performed when the set
value of jogging frequency  is smaller than
the start frequency , or the value is 0Hz.
 Be sure to stop the motor when switching the
function [JG] ON or OFF.
Description
Inverter is in Run Mode, output to motor runs at jog
parameter frequency
Inverter is in Stop Mode
Example (default input configuration shown—see
page 3–79):
JG
7
6
FW
5
4
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
3
2
1
L PLC P24
4–20
External Signal for DC Braking
When the terminal [DB] is turned ON, the DC
braking feature is enabled. Set the following
parameters when the external DC braking
terminal [DB] is to be used:
  – DC braking delay time setting. The
range is 0.1 to 5.0 seconds.
Scenario 1
[FW,RV]
1
0
1
0
[DB]
Output
frequency
  – DC braking force setting. The range
is 0 to 100%.
The scenarios to the right help show how DC
braking works in various situations.
1. Scenario 1 – The [FW] or [RV] terminal is ON.
When [DB] is ON, DC braking is applied.
When [DB] is OFF again, the output
frequency ramps to the prior level.
2. Scenario 2 – The Run command is applied
from the operator keypad. When the [DB]
terminal is ON, DC braking is applied. When
the [DB] terminal is OFF again, the inverter
output remains OFF.
3. Scenario 3 – The Run command is applied
from the operator keypad. When the [DB]
terminal is ON, DC braking is applied after
the delay time set by  expires. The
motor is in a free-running (coasting)
condition. When the [DB] terminal is OFF
again, the inverter output remains OFF.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol
Function Name

DB
External DC Braking
 to 
Required settings
, 
Scenario 2
Run command 1
from operator
0
1
[DB]
0
Output
frequency
t
Scenario 3
Run command 1
from operator
0
1
[DB]
0
OFF
Notes:
 Do not use the [DB] input continuously or for a
long time when the DC braking force setting 
is high (depends on the motor application).
 Do not use the [DB] feature for continuous or
high duty cycle as a holding brake. The [DB] input
is designed to improve stopping performance.
Use a mechanical brake for holding a stop
position.
delay
Output
frequency

t
State
ON
Valid for inputs
t
Description
Applies DC injection braking during deceleration
Does not apply DC injection braking during
deceleration
Example (requires input configuration—see
page 3–79):
DB
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–21
Set Second Motor
If you assign the [SET] function to an intelligent input terminal, you can select between two
sets of motor parameters. The second parameters store an alternate set of motor
characteristics. When the terminal [SET] is turned ON, the inverter will use the second set of
parameters to generate the frequency output to the motor. When changing the state of the
[SET] input terminal, the change will not take effect until the inverter is stopped.
When you turn ON the [SET] input, the inverter operates per the second set of parameters.
When the terminal is turned OFF, the output function returns to the original settings (first
set of motor parameters). Refer to “2nd Motor Selection” on page 4–75 for details.
Parameters
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol
SET
SET
Stop Run















-
Parameters
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Function Name
State
 to 
Required settings
(none)
Description
ON
causes the inverter to use the 2nd set of motor
parameters for generating the frequency output to
motor
OFF
causes the inverter to use the 1st (main) set of
motor parameters for generating the frequency
output to motor
Set (select) 2nd
Motor data
Valid for inputs
SET
Stop Run
















-
Notes:
 If the terminal state is changed while the inverter
is running, the inverter continues using the
current set of parameters until the inverter is
stopped.
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
SET
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–22
Two Stage Acceleration and Deceleration
When terminal [2CH] is turned ON, the inverter
changes the rate of acceleration and
deceleration from the initial settings ( and
) to use the second set of acceleration/
deceleration values. When the terminal is
turned OFF, the inverter is returned to the
original acceleration and deceleration time
( acceleration time 1, and 
deceleration time 1). Use  (acceleration
time 2) and  (deceleration time 2) to set
the second stage acceleration and deceleration
times.
Target
frequency
second
Output
frequency
initial
1
0
1
0
[2CH]
[FW,RV]
t
In the graph shown above, the [2CH] becomes active during the initial acceleration. This
causes the inverter to switch from using acceleration 1 () to acceleration 2 ().
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol
2CH
Function Name
Two-stage
Acceleration and
Deceleration
Valid for inputs
 to 
Required settings
, , =
State
ON
OFF
Notes:
 Function  selects the method for second stage
acceleration. It must be set =  to select the input
terminal method in order for the [2CH] terminal
assignment to operate.
Description
Frequency output uses 2nd-stage acceleration and
deceleration values
Frequency output uses the initial acceleration 1 and
deceleration 1 values
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
2CH
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–23
Free-run Stop
When the terminal [FRS] is turned ON, the inverter stops the output and the motor enters
the free-run state (coasting). If terminal [FRS] is turned OFF, the output resumes sending
power to the motor if the Run command is still active. The free-run stop feature works with
other parameters to provide flexibility in stopping and starting motor rotation.
In the figure below, parameter  selects whether the inverter resumes operation from 0
Hz (left graph) or the current motor rotation speed (right graph) when the [FRS] terminal
turns OFF. The application determines the best setting.
Parameter  specifies a delay time before resuming operation from a free-run stop. To
disable this feature, use a zero delay time.
 = 
 = 
Resume from motor speed
Zero frequency start
Motor speed
[FRS]
[FW,RV]
 Wait time
Motor speed
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
[FRS]
[FW,RV]
t
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol
FRS
Function Name
Free-run Stop
t
State
ON
OFF
Valid for inputs
 to 
Required settings
, ,  to 
Notes:
 When you want the [FRS] terminal to be active
low (normally closed logic), change the setting
( to ) that corresponds to the input
( to ) that is assigned the [FRS] function.
Description
Causes output to turn OFF, allowing motor to free
run (coast) to stop
Output operates normally, so controlled
deceleration and stops motor
Example (requires input configuration—
see page 3–79):
FRS
7
6
5
4
3
2
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
1
L PLC P24
4–24
External Trip
When the terminal [EXT] is turned ON, the inverter enters the trip state, indicates error code
, and stops the output. This is a general purpose interrupt type feature, and the
meaning of the error depends on what you connect to the [EXT] terminal. Even if the [EXT]
input is turned OFF, the inverter remains in the trip state. You must reset the inverter or
cycle power to clear the error, returning the inverter to the Stop Mode.
In the graph below, the [EXT] input turns ON during normal Run Mode operation. The
inverter lets the motor free-run to a stop, and the alarm output turns ON immediately.
When the operator initiates a Reset command, the alarm and error are cleared. When the
Reset is turned OFF, the motor begins rotation since the Run command is already active.
[EXT] terminal
1
0
ON
Free run
Motor revolution speed
[RS] terminal
Alarm output terminal
Run command [FW,RV]
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol
EXT
Function Name
External Trip
1
0
1
0
1
0
ON
ON
ON
t
State
ON
OFF
Valid for inputs
 to 
Required settings
(none)
ON
Notes:
 If the USP (Unattended Start Protection) feature
is in use, the inverter will not automatically
restart after canceling the EXT trip event. In that
case, it must receive either another Run
command (OFF-to- ON transition), a keypad
Reset command, or an [RS] intelligent terminal
input signal.
Description
When assigned input transitions OFF to ON, inverter
latches trip event and displays 
No trip event for ON to OFF, any recorded trip
events remain in history until Reset.
Example (default input configuration shown—see
page 3–79):
EXT
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–25
Unattended Start Protection
If the Run command is already set when power is turned ON, the inverter starts running
immediately after powerup. The Unattended Start Protection (USP) function prevents that
automatic startup, so that the inverter will not run without outside intervention. When [USP]
is active and you need to reset an alarm and resume running, either turn the Run command
OFF, or perform a reset operation by the terminal [RS] input or the keypad Stop/reset key.
In the figure below, the [USP] feature is enabled. When the inverter power turns ON, the
motor does not start, even though the Run command is already active. Instead, it enters the
USP trip state, and displays  error code. This requires outside intervention to reset the
alarm by turning OFF the Run command per this example (or applying a reset). Then the
Run command can turn ON again and start the inverter output.
Run command [FW,RV] 1
0
[USP] terminal 1
0
Alarm output terminal 1
0
Inverter output frequency
0
Inverter power supply 1
0
Events:
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol
USP
Function Name
Unattended Start
Protection
Valid for inputs
 to 
Required settings
(none)

Alarm
cleared
State
ON
OFF
Notes:
 Note that when a USP error occurs and it is
canceled by a reset from a [RS] terminal input, the
inverter restarts running immediately.
 Even when the trip state is canceled by turning the
terminal [RS] ON and OFF after an under voltage
protection  occurs, the USP function will be
performed.
 When the running command is active immediately
after the power is turned ON, a USP error will
occur. When this function is used, wait for at least
three (3) seconds after the powerup to generate a
Run command.
t
Run
command
Description
On powerup, the inverter will not resume a Run
command (mostly used in the US)
On powerup, the inverter will resume a Run
command that was active before power loss
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
USP
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–26
Commercial power source switchover
The commercial power source switching function allows you to switch the power supply
(between the inverter and commercial power supply) to your system of which the load
causes a considerable moment of inertia. You can use the inverter to accelerate and
decelerate the motor in the system and the commercial power supply to drive the motor for
constant speed operation.
To use this function, assign parameter “ (CS)” to one of the intelligent input terminal [1]
to [7] ( to ). When the [CS] is turned OFF with an operation command is being
given, the inverter waits for the retry wait time before motor starts (), adjusts the
output frequency to the speed of the free-running motor, and then accelerates the motor
with the adjusted frequency.
MC2
Mechanically interlock the MC3 and
MC2 contacts with each other.
Otherwise you may damage the drive.
NFB
If the earth leakage breaker (ELB) trips
because of a ground fault, the commercial
power will be disabled. Therefore, contact a
backup power supply from the commercial
power line circuit (ELBC) to your system if
needed.
ELBC
MC1
WL200
R
S
T
FWY
RVY
CSY
MC3
THRY
U
V
W
Motor
FW
RV
CS
L
Use weak-current type relays for FWY, RVY, and CSY. The figures below show the sequence
and timing of operations for reference.
Switching from inverter to commercial power
MC1
ON
MC2
ON
ON
FW
ON
CS
ON
MC1
MC2
MC3
Switching from commercial power to inverter
ON
Inverter
Operation
output freq.
ON
Duration of the interlock of
MC2 and MC3 (0.5 to 1 s)
MC3
ON
FW
ON
CS
ON
Inverter
output freq.
0.5 to 1 s
Retry wait time 
Start with freq. matching
If the inverter trips because of overcurrent when it starts the motor with frequency
matching, increase the retry wait time before motor starts ().
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

CS
Function Name
Commercial power
source switchover
Valid for inputs
 to 
Required settings
, 
State
ON
OFF
Notes:
inverter may start the motor with 0 Hz if:
 the motor speed is no more than half of the base frequency, or
 the voltage induced on the motor is attenuated quickly.
Description
4–27
Software Lock
When the terminal [SFT] is turned ON, the data of all the parameters and functions (except
the output frequency, depending on the setting of ) is locked (prohibited from editing).
When the data is locked, the keypad keys cannot edit inverter parameters. To edit
parameters again, turn OFF the [SFT] terminal input.
Use parameter  to select whether the output frequency is excluded from the lock state
or is locked as well.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

SFT
Function Name
Software Lock
State
ON
OFF
Valid for inputs
 to 
Required settings
 (excluded from lock)
Notes:
 When the [SFT] terminal is turned ON, only the
output frequency can be changed.
 Software lock can include the output frequency by
setting .
 Software lock by the operator is also possible
without the [SFT] terminal being used ().
Description
The keypad and remote programming devices are
prevented from changing parameters
The parameters may be edited and stored
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
SFT
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–28
Analog Input Current/Voltage Select
The [AT] terminal selects whether the inverter uses the voltage [O] or current [OI] input
terminals for external frequency control. When intelligent input [AT] is ON, you can set the
output frequency by applying a current input signal at [OI]-[L]. When the [AT] input is OFF,
you can apply a voltage input signal at [O]-[L] to set the output frequency. Note that you
must also set parameter  =  to enable the analog terminal set for controlling the
inverter frequency.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

AT
Function Name
State
Analog Input
Voltage/Current
Select
Valid for inputs
 to 
Required settings
 = 
ON
OFF
Notes:
 If the [AT] option is not assigned to any intelligent
input terminal, then inverter recognizes [AT] =
OFF in following table.
Combination of  setting and [AT] input for
analog input activation.
Description
See the table down below
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
AT
7
6
H




[AT] Input
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Analog Input Configuration
[OI]
[O]
Keypad Pot
[O]
Keypad Pot
[OI]
 Be sure to set the frequency source setting
= to select the analog input terminals.
5
4
3
2
O OI L

+-
4-20 mA
0-10 V
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
1
L PLC P24
4–29
Reset Inverter
The [RS] terminal causes the inverter to execute the
reset operation. If the inverter is in Trip Mode, the
reset cancels the Trip state. When the signal [RS] is
turned ON and OFF, the inverter executes the reset
operation. The minimum pulse width for [RS] must
be 12 ms or greater. The alarm output will be
cleared within 30 ms after the onset of the Reset
command.
12 ms
minimum
1
[RS]
0
Approx. 30 ms
Alarm 1
signal 0
t
WARNING: After the Reset command is given and the alarm reset occurs, the motor will
restart suddenly if the Run command is already active. Be sure to set the alarm reset after
verifying that the Run command is OFF to prevent injury to personnel.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

RS
Function Name
Reset Inverter
State
ON
OFF
Valid for inputs
 to 
Required settings
(none)
Notes:
 While the control terminal [RS] input is ON, the
keypad displays alternating segments. After RS
turns OFF, the display recovers automatically.
 Pressing the Stop/Reset key of the digital operator
can generate a reset operation only when an
alarm occurs.
Description
The motor output is turned OFF, the Trip Mode is
cleared (if it exists), and powerup reset is applied
Normal power ON operation
Example (default input configuration shown—see
page 3–79):
RS
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
L PLC P24
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
 A terminal configured with the [RS] function can only be configured for normally open operation. The
terminal cannot be used in the normally closed contact state.
 When input power is turned ON, the inverter performs the same reset operation as it does when a pulse
on the [RS] terminal occurs.
 The Stop/Reset key on the inverter is only operational for a few seconds after inverter powerup when a
hand-held remote operator is connected to the inverter.
 If the [RS] terminal is turned ON while the motor is running, the motor will be free running (coasting).
 If you are using the output terminal OFF delay feature (any of , ,  > 0.0 sec.), the [RS]
terminal affects the ON-to-OFF transition slightly. Normally (without using OFF delays), the [RS] input
causes the motor output and the logic outputs to turn OFF together, immediately. However, when any
output uses an OFF delay, then after the [RS] input turns ON, that output will remain ON for an additional
1 sec. period (approximate) before turning OFF.
4–30
Thermistor Thermal Protection
Motors that are equipped with a thermistor can be protected from overheating. Input
terminal [5] has the unique ability to sense a thermistor resistance. When the resistance
value of the thermistor connected to terminal [PTC] (5) and [L] is more than
3 kΩ ±10%, the inverter enters the Trip Mode, turns OFF the output to the motor, and
indicates the trip status . Use this function to protect the motor from overheating.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol
PTC
Function Name
Thermistor Thermal
Protection
State
Description
ON
When a thermistor is connected to terminals [5] and
[L], the inverter checks for over-temperature and will
cause trip () and turn OFF the output to the
motor
OFF
Valid for inputs
 only
Required settings
(none)
Notes:
 Be sure the thermistor is connected to terminals
[5] and [L]. If the resistance is above the threshold
the inverter will trip. When the motor cools down
enough, the thermistor resistance will change
enough to permit you to clear the error. Press the
STOP/Reset key to clear the error.
An open circuit in the thermistor causes a trip, and
the inverter turns OFF the output
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
PTC
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Thermistor
L PLC P24
4–31
Three-wire Interface Operation
The 3-wire interface is an industry standard motor control interface. This function uses two
inputs for momentary contact start/stop control, and a third for selecting forward or reverse
direction. To implement the 3-wire interface, assign  [STA] (Start),  [STP] (Stop), and 
[F/R] (Forward/Reverse) to three of the intelligent input terminals. Use a momentary contact
for Start and Stop. Use a selector switch, such as SPST for the Forward/Reverse input. Be
sure to set the operation command selection = for input terminal control of motor.
If you have a motor control interface that needs logic-level control (rather than momentary
pulse control), use the [FW] and [RV] inputs instead.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

STA

STP
Stop Motor

F/R
Forward/Reverse
Function Name
Start Motor
State
ON
OFF
ON
Valid for inputs
 to 
Required settings
 = 
OFF
ON
OFF
Notes:
 The STP logic is inverted. Normally the switch will
be closed, so you open the switch to stop. In this
way, a broken wire causes the motor to stop
automatically (safe design).
 When you configure the inverter for 3-wire
interface control, the dedicated [FW] terminal is
automatically disabled. The [RV] intelligent
terminal assignment is also disabled.
Description
Start motor rotation on momentary contact (uses
acceleration profile)
No change to motor operation
No change to motor operation
Stop motor rotation on momentary contact (use
deceleration profile)
Select reverse direction of rotation
Select forward direction of rotation
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
F/R
7
6
5
STP STA
4
3
2
1
L PLC P24
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
The diagram below shows the use of 3-wire control. STA (Start Motor) is an edge-sensitive
input; an OFF-to-ON transition gives the Start command. The control of direction is
level-sensitive, and the direction may be changed at any time. STP (Stop Motor) is also a
level-sensitive input.
1
0
1
[STP] terminal
0
1
[F/R] terminal
0
[STA] terminal
Motor revolution
speed
t
4–32
PID ON/OFF and PID Clear
The PID loop function is useful for controlling motor speed to achieve constant flow,
pressure, temperature, etc. in many process applications. The PID Disable function
temporarily suspends PID loop execution via an intelligent input terminal. It overrides the
parameter  (PID Enable) to stop PID execution and return to normal motor frequency
output characteristics. The use of PID Disable on an intelligent input terminal is optional. Of
course, any use of the PID loop control requires setting PID Enable function =.
The PID Clear function forces the PID loop integrator sum = 0. So, when you turn ON an
intelligent input configured as [PIDC], the integrator sum is reset to zero. This is useful when
switching from manual control to PID loop control and the motor is stopped.
CAUTION: Be careful not to turn PID Clear ON and reset the integrator sum when the
inverter is in Run Mode (output to motor is ON). Otherwise, this could cause the motor to
decelerate rapidly, resulting in a trip.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

PID

PIDC
Function Name
PID Disable
PID Clear
Valid for inputs
 to 
Required settings

State
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Notes:
 The use of [PID] and [PIDC] terminals are optional.
Use = if you want PID loop control enabled
all the time.
 Do not enable/disable PID control while the motor
is running (inverter is in Run Mode).
 Do not turn ON the [PIDC] input while the motor
is running (inverter is in Run Mode).
Description
Disables PID loop execution
Allows PID loop execution
Force the value of the integrator to zero
No change in PID loop execution
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
PIDC PID
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–33
Remote Control Up and Down Functions
The [UP] [DWN] terminal functions can adjust the output frequency for remote control
while the motor is running. The acceleration time and deceleration time of this function is
same as normal operation ACC1 and DEC1 (2ACC1,2DEC1). The input terminals operate
according to these principles:
 Acceleration - When the [UP] contact is turned ON, the output frequency accelerates
from the current value. When it is turned OFF, the output frequency maintains its current
value at that moment.
 Deceleration - When the [DWN] contact is turned ON, the output frequency decelerates
from the current value. When it is turned OFF, the output frequency maintains its current
value at that moment.
In the graph below, the [UP] and [DWN] terminals activate while the Run command remains
ON. The output frequency responds to the [UP] and [DWN] commands.
Motor speed
[UP]
[DWN]
[FW,RV]
1
0
1
0
1
0
t
4–34
It is possible for the inverter to retain the frequency set from the [UP] and [DWN] terminals
through a power loss. Parameter  enables/disables the memory. If disabled, the
inverter retains the last frequency before an UP/DWN adjustment. Use the [UDC] terminal
to clear the memory and return to the original set output frequency.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

UP

DWN

UDC
Function Name
Remote Control UP
Function (motorized
speed pot.)
State
ON
OFF
Description
Accelerates (increases output frequency) motor
from current frequency
Output to motor operates normally
Decelerates (increases output frequency) motor
from current frequency
Remote Control
DOWN Function
(motorized speed
pot.) .)
OFF
Output to motor operates normally
Remote Control Data
Clear
ON
OFF
Clears the Up/Down frequency memory
No effect on Up/Down memory
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
Valid for inputs
 to 
Required settings
 = 
ON
Notes:
 This feature is available only when the frequency
command source is programmed for operator
control. Confirm  is set to .
 This function is not available when [JG] is in use.
 The range of output frequency is 0 Hz to the value
in  (maximum frequency setting).
 This setting modifies the inverter speed from using
 output frequency setting as a starting point.
DWN UP
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–35
Force Operation from Digital Operator
This function permits a digital operator interface to override the following two settings in
the inverter:

 - Frequency source

 - Run command source
When using the [OPE] terminal input, typically  and  are configured for sources
other than the digital operator interface for the output frequency and Run command
sources, respectively. When the [OPE] input is ON, then user has immediate command of
the inverter, to start or stop the motor and to set the speed.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol
OPE
Valid for inputs
Required settings
Function Name
Force Operation
from Digital
Operator
State
Description
ON
Forces the operator interface to override:
 - Frequency Source Setting, and  - Run
Command Source Setting
OFF
Parameters  and  are in effect again,
for the frequency source and the Run command
source, respectively
 to 
 (set not equal to )
 (set not equal to )
Notes:
 When changing the [OPE] state during Run Mode
(inverter is driving the motor), the inverter will
stop the motor before the new [OPE] state takes
effect.
 If the [OPE] input turns ON and the digital
operator gives a Run command while the inverter
is already running, the inverter stops the motor.
Then the digital operator can control the motor.
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
OPE
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–36
Multi-Speed Select ~Bit Operation
The inverter can store up to 16 different
target frequencies (speeds) that the
motor output uses for steady-state run
condition. These speeds are accessible
through programming seven of the
intelligent terminals as bit-encoded
inputs [SF1] to [SF7] per the table to the
right. These can be any of the seven
inputs, and in any order. You can use
fewer inputs if you need eight or fewer
speeds.
3rd
7th
5th
2nd
1st
6th
4th
0th
[SF1]
[SF2]
[SF3]
[SF4]
[SF5]
[SF6]
[SF7]
[FW]
Speed
Multispeed
SF7
Speed 0  0
Speed 1  X
Speed 2  X
Speed 3  X
Speed 4  X
Speed 5  X
Speed 6  X
Speed 7  1
Input Function
SF6
SF5
SF4
SF3
SF2
SF1
0
X
X
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
0
X
X
0
X
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
The example with eight speeds in the
figure below shows how input switches
configured for [SF1]–[SF7] functions can
change the motor speed in real time.
NOTE: Speed 0 depends on 
parameter value.
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Option Terminal
Code
Symbol
 to 
SF1 to SF7

Valid for inputs
Required settings
Function Name
Multistage Speed
~Bit Operation
State
ON
OFF
 to 
, =,
 to 
Notes:
 When programming the multi-speed settings, be
sure to press the SET key each time and then set
the next multi-speed setting. Note that when the
key is not pressed, no data will be set.
 When a multi-speed setting more than 50Hz
(60Hz) is to be set, it is necessary to program the
maximum frequency  high enough to allow
that speed
Description
Makes multistage speed by combination of the
inputs.
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
SF7 SF6 SF5 SF4 SF3 SF2 SF1
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–37
Overload Restriction Source Changeover
This function allows you to change the parameter sets of overload restriction. Please refer
to “Current limitation Related Functions” on page 3–52 for details.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol
Function Name
State

OLR
Overload restriction
source changeover
ON
OFF
Valid for inputs
 to 
Required settings
 to 
Description
Parameter sets , ,  are enabled.
Parameter sets , ,  are enabled.
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
Notes:
OLR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
L PLC P24
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Brake Confirmation
This function is for brake performance. Please refer to "Brake Control Function Related” on
page 3–73 for details.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

BOK
Function Name
Brake confirmation
State
ON
OFF
Valid for inputs
 to 
Required settings
 to ,  to 
Notes:
Description
Brake confirmation signal is being given
Brake confirmation signal is not given
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
BOK
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–38
LAD Cancellation
This function is for canceling the set ramp time and changes the output speed immediately
according to the set speed. Please refer to page 3–10 for details.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol
Function Name
State
ON

LAC
Valid for inputs
Required settings
Notes:
LAD cancellation
 to 
OFF
Description
Disabling the set ramp time and inverter output
immediately follows the speed command.
Accelerates and decelerates according to the set
ramp time
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
LAC
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–39
Add Frequency Enable
The inverter can add or subtract an offset value to the output frequency setting which is
specified by  (will work with any of the five possible sources). The ADD Frequency is a
value you can store in parameter . The ADD Frequency is summed with or subtracted
from the output frequency setting only when the [ADD] terminal is ON. Function 
selects whether to add or subtract. By configuring an intelligent input as the [ADD] terminal,
your application can selectively apply the fixed value in  to offset (positively or
negatively) the inverter output frequency in real time.
Keypad potentiometer
 Frequency source setting
Control terminal
+
Output frequency setting
Σ
Function  setting
Modbus network input
+/-
Calculate function output

ADD direction select
 ADD frequency
[ADD]
Intelligent input
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol
ADD
Function Name
ADD Frequency
Enable
Valid for inputs
 to 
Required settings
, , 
State
ON
OFF
Notes:
  may specify any source; the Add Frequency
will be added to or subtracted from that value to
yield output frequency value.
Description
Applies the  Add Frequency value to the output
frequency
Does not apply the Add frequency. The output
frequency retains its normal value
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
ADD
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–40
Force Terminal Mode
The purpose of this intelligent input is to allow a device to force the inverter to allow
control of the following two parameters via the control terminals:
•  - Frequency source setting ( = control terminals [FW] and [RV]
•  - Run command source setting ( = control terminals [O] or [OI]
Some applications will require one or both settings above to use a source other than the
terminals. You may prefer to normally use the inverter’s keypad and potentiometer, or to
use the Modbus network for control, for example. However, an external device can turn ON
the [F-TM] input to force the inverter to (temporarily) allow control (frequency source and
Run command) via control terminals. When the [F-TM] input is OFF, then the inverter uses
the regular sources specified by  and  again.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol
F-TM

Function Name
Force Terminal
Mode
State
Description
ON
Forces = (frequency source setting = control
terminal), and =(Run command source
setting = control terminal)
OFF
Valid for inputs
 to 
Required settings
Notes:
 When changing the [F-TM] state during Run Mode
(inverter is driving the motor), the inverter will
stop the motor before the new [F-TM] state takes
effect.
Inverter applies the user setting for  and 
normally
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
F-TM
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
L PLC P24
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Clearance of cumulative power data
This function is to clear the cumulative input power data.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol
Function Name
State

KHC
Clear watt-hour data
ON
OFF
Valid for inputs
Required settings
Notes:
 to 
Description
Clear the cumulative power data
Does not clear the data
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
KHC
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–41
General Purpose Input (1) to (7)
These functions are used with EzSQ function. Refer to a manual of EzSQ for the details.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol
 to  MI1 to MI7
Valid for inputs
Required settings
Notes:
Function Name
General purpose
input (1) to (7)
 to 
State
ON
OFF
Description
General purpose input is made ON
General purpose input is made OFF
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
MI7
MI6
MI5
MI4
MI3
MI2
MI1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
L PLC P24
4–42
Analog Command Hold
This function allows you to make the inverter hold the analog command input via the
external analog input terminal when the [AHD] terminal is made ON.
While the [AHD] is turned ON, the up/down function can be used based on the analog
signal held by this function as reference data.
When “” is specified for Up/down
memory mode selection (), the result
of up/down processing can be stored in
memory.
If the inverter power is turned on or the
[RS] terminal turned off with the [AHD]
terminal left turned on, the data held
immediately before power on or turning
off the [RS] terminal will be used.
AHD
ON
Analog
input
command
Hold the data
Frequency
command
NOTE: Set frequency remains when the inverter is switched with [SET] terminal with [AHD]
on. Turn [AHD] terminal off to re-hold the set frequency.
NOTE: Frequent use of this function may result in a shorter in memory component of the
inverter.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

AHD
Valid for inputs
Required settings
Notes:
Function Name
Analog command
hold
 to 
State
ON
OFF
Description
Hold the analog input value
Does not hold the analog input value
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
AHD
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.


2
1
L PLC P24
4–43
Safe Stop Related Signals
The function is based on European norm, EN60204-1, EN954-1. Please refer to the relevant
pages for the detailed explanation.
Option
Code


Terminal
Symbol
STO1
STO2
Function Name
State
Safety related signals
ON
OFF
Description
Refer to Safe Stop section (Appendix E Safety)
HIGH VOLTAGE: Dangerous voltage exists even after the Safe Stop is activated. It does NOT
mean that the main power has been removed.
Executing EzSQ program
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

PRG
Function Name
Executing EzSQ
program
State
Description
ON
OFF
Refer to EzSQ manual
Retain output frequency
This function allows you to retain output frequency.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

HLD
Valid for inputs
Required settings
Notes:
Function Name
Retain output
frequency
 to 
State
Description
ON
OFF
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
HLD
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–44
Permission of Run command
This function allows you to accept run command.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

ROK
Valid for inputs
Function Name
Permission of Run
command
State
ON
OFF
 to 
Required settings
Description
Run command can be accepted
Run command is ignored
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
ROK
Notes:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
L PLC P24
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Display limitation
This function is to show only the contents of initial display set by .
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

DISP
Valid for inputs
Required settings
Notes:
Function Name
Display limitation
 to 
State
Description
ON
OFF
Example (requires input configuration—see page
3–79):
DISP
7
6
5
4
3
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
2
1
L PLC P24
4–45
Using Intelligent Output Terminals
The intelligent output terminals are programmable in a similar way to the intelligent input
terminals. The inverter has several output functions that you can assign individually to two
physical logic outputs. One of the outputs is an open-collector transistor, and the other
output is the alarm relay (form C – normally open and normally closed contacts). The relay
is assigned the alarm function by default, but you can assign it to any of the functions that
the open-collector output uses.
CAUTION: The digital outputs (relay and/or open collector) available on the drive must not
be considered as safety related signals. The outputs of the external safety relay must be
used for integration into a safety related control/command circuit
Sinking Outputs, Open Collector
The open-collector transistor output
can handle up to 50mA. We highly
recommend that you use an external
power source as shown at the right.
It must be capable of providing at
least 50mA to drive the output at full
load. To drive loads that require
more than 50mA, use external relay
circuits as shown below right.
WL200 Inverter
Logic output
common
CM2
12
11
+
Load
Sinking Outputs, Open Collector
If you need output current greater
than 50mA, use the inverter output
to drive a small relay. Be sure to use
a diode across the coil of the relay as
shown (reverse-biased) in order to
suppress the turn-off spike, or use a
solid-state relay.
WL200 Inverter
Logic output
common
CM2
12
+
RY
11
4–46
Internal Relay Output
The inverter has an internal relay output with
normally open and normally closed contacts
(Type 1 form C). The output signal that controls
the relay is configurable; the Alarm Signal is the
default setting. Thus, the terminals are labeled
[AL0], [AL1], [AL2], as shown to the right. However,
you can assign any one of the nine intelligent
outputs to the relay. For wiring purposes, the
general terminal functions are:
Inverter logic
circuit board
AL0
AL1
AL2
 [AL0] – Common contact
 [AL1] – Normally open contact
 [AL2] – Normally closed contact
The relay itself can be configured as “normally open or closed.” Parameter , Alarm
Relay Active State, is the setting. This setting determines whether or not the relay coil is
energized when its output signal is OFF:
 = – “Normally open” (relay coil is de-energized when output signal is OFF)
 = – “Normally closed” (relay coil is energized when the output signal is OFF)
Since the relay already has normally open [AL1]
and normally closed [AL2] contacts, the purpose
of the ability to invert the relay coil’s active state
may not be obvious. It allows you to determine
whether or not an inverter power loss causes the
relay to change state. The default relay
configuration is the Alarm Signal (=), as
shown to the right. And, = sets the relay to
“normally closed” (relay coil normally energized).
The reason for this is that a typical system design
will require an inverter power loss to assert an
alarm signal to external devices.
The relay can be used for other intelligent output
signals, such as the Run Signal (set =). For
these remaining output signal types, the relay coil
typically must NOT change state upon inverter
power loss (set =). The figure to the right
shows the relay settings for the Run Signal
output.
If you assign the relay an output signal other than
the Alarm Signal, the inverter can still have an
Alarm Signal output. In this case, you can assign it
to terminal [11], providing an open collector
output.
AL
Inverter logic
circuit board
=
=
AL0
AL1
AL2
Relay shown with inverter
power ON, Alarm Signal OFF
RUN
Inverter logic
circuit board
=
=
AL0
AL1
AL2
Relay shown with inverter
power ON, Run Signal OFF
4–47
Output Signal ON/OFF Delay Function
Intelligent outputs including terminals [11], [12] and the output relay have configurable
signal transition delays. Each output can delay either the OFF-to-ON or ON-to-OFF
transitions, or both. Signal transition delays are variable from 0.1 to 100.0 seconds. This
feature is useful in applications that must tailor inverter output signals to meet timing
requirements of certain external devices.
The timing diagram below shows a sample output signal (top line) and the results of
various ON/OFF delay configurations.
 Original signal - This example signal waveform consists of three separate pulses named
“A,” “B,” and “C.”
 ...with ON delay - Pulse A is delayed by the duration of the ON delay time. Pulses B and
C do not appear at the output, because they are shorter than the ON delay.
 ...with OFF delay - Pulse A is lengthened by the amount of the OFF delay time. The
separation between pulses B and C does not appear at the output, because it is shorter
than the OFF delay time.
 ...with ON/OFF delays - Pulse A is delayed on both leading and trailing edges by the
amounts of the ON and OFF delay times, respectively. Pulses B and C do not appear at
the output, because they are shorter than the ON delay time.
ON
delay
Output Signals:
Original (no delays)
…with ON delay
…with OFF delay
…with ON/OFF delays
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
OFF
delay
A
ON
delays
B
C
OFF
delays
t
Func.






Description
Output [11] ON delay
Output [11] OFF delay
Output [12] ON delay
Output [12] OFF delay
Output relay ON delay
Output relay OFF delay
Range
0.0 to 100.0 sec.
0.0 to 100.0 sec.
0.0 to 100.0 sec.
0.0 to 100.0 sec.
0.0 to 100.0 sec.
0.0 to 100.0 sec.
Default
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Use of the ON/OFF signal delay functions is optional. Note that any of the intelligent output
assignments in this section can be combined with ON/OFF signal timing delay
configurations.
4–48
Run Signal
When the [RUN] signal is selected as an
intelligent output terminal, the inverter
outputs a signal on that terminal when it is in
Run Mode. The output logic is active low, and
is the open collector type (switch to ground).
[FW,RV]
Terminal
Symbol

RUN
Function Name
Run Signal
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings
(none)
State
ON
OFF
Notes:
 The inverter outputs the [RUN] signal whenever
the inverter output exceeds the start frequency
specified by parameter . The start frequency
is the initial inverter output frequency when it
turns ON.
 The example circuit for terminal [11] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the
negative going turn-off spike generated by the
coil from damaging the inverter’s output
transistor.

Output
frequency
Run
signal
Option
Code
1
0
start freq.
1
0
ON
t
Description
when inverter is in Run Mode
when inverter is in Stop Mode
Example for terminal [11] (default output
configuration shown – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
RUN
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
RUN
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–49
Frequency Arrival Signals
The Frequency Arrival group of outputs helps coordinate external systems with the current
velocity profile of the inverter. As the name implies, output [FA1] turns ON when the output
frequency arrives at the standard set frequency (parameter ). Output [FA2] relies on
programmable accel/ decel thresholds for increased flexibility. For example, you can have
an output turn ON at one frequency during acceleration, and have it turn OFF at a different
frequency during deceleration. All transitions have hysteresis to avoid output chatter if the
output frequency is near one of the thresholds.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

FA1
Frequency Arrival
Type 1 – Constant
Speed

FA2
Frequency Arrival
Type 2 – Over
frequency

FA3
Frequency Arrival
Type 3 – Set
frequency

FA4
Frequency Arrival
Type 4 – Over
frequency (2)

FA5
Function Name
Frequency Arrival
Type 5 – Set
frequency (2)
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings
, , , ,
State
Description
ON
when output to motor is at the constant frequency
when output to motor is OFF, or in any acceleration or
deceleration ramp
when output to motor is at or above the set frequency
thresholds for, even if in acceleration or decel ramps
when output to motor is OFF, or during accel or decel
before the respective thresholds are crossed
when output to motor is at the set frequency
when output to motor is OFF, or in any acceleration or
deceleration ramp
when output to motor is at or above the set frequency
thresholds for, even if in acceleration or decel ramps
when output to motor is OFF, or during accel or decel
before the respective thresholds are crossed
when output to motor is at the set frequency
when output to motor is OFF, or in any acceleration or
deceleration ramp
Example for terminal [12] (default output
configuration shown – see page 3–84):
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Notes:
 For most applications you will need to use only
one type of frequency arrival outputs (see
examples). However, it is possible assign both
output terminals to output functions [FA1] and
[FA2]
 For each frequency arrival threshold, the output
anticipates the threshold (turns ON early) by
1.5Hz
 The output turns OFF as the output frequency
moves away from the threshold, delayed by
0.5Hz
 The example circuit for terminal [11] drives a
relay coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the
negative going turn-off spike generated by the
coil from damaging the inverter’s output
transistor
Inverter output
terminal circuit
FA1
CM2
11
12
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
FA1
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–50
Frequency arrival output [FA1] uses the
standard output frequency (parameter
) as the threshold for switching. In
the figure to the right, Frequency Arrival
[FA1] turns ON when the output
frequency gets within Fon Hz below or
Foff Hz above the target constant
frequency, where Fon is 1% of the set
maximum frequency and Foff is 2% of the
set maximum frequency. This provides
hysteresis that prevents output chatter
near the threshold value. The hysteresis
effect causes the output to turn ON
slightly early as the speed approaches the
threshold. Then the turn-OFF point is
slightly delayed. Note the active low
nature of the signal, due to the open
collector output.
Frequency arrival output [FA2/FA4] works
the same way; it just uses two separate
thresholds as shown in the figure to the
right. These provide for separate
acceleration and deceleration thresholds
to provide more flexibility than for [FA1].
[FA2/FA4] uses / during
acceleration for the ON threshold, and
/ during deceleration for the
OFF threshold. This signal also is active
low. Having different accel and decel
thresholds provides an asymmetrical
output function. However, you can use
equal ON and OFF thresholds, if desired.
Frequency arrival output [FA3/FA5] works
also the same way, only difference is
arriving at set frequency.
Output
freq.

Fon
Foff

Foff
Fon
0
FA1
signal
ON
ON
Fon=1% of max. frequency
Foff=2% of max. frequency
Output
freq.
thresholds
Fon
/
Foff
/
0
FA2/FA4
signal
ON
Fon=1% of max. frequency
Foff=2% of max. frequency
Output
freq.
thresholds
Foff
Fon
/
Fon
/
0
FA3/FA5
signal
ON
ON
Fon=1% of max. frequency
Foff=2% of max. frequency
Foff
4–51
Overload Warning Signal
When the output current exceeds a
preset value, the [OL] terminal signal
turns ON. The parameter  and
set the overload threshold.
(Two thresholds can be set.) The
overload detection circuit operates
during powered motor operation
and during regenerative braking.
The output circuits use
open-collector transistors, and are
active low. Please refer to “Overload
Warning Output” on page 3–90 for
details.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

OL

OL2
Function Name
Overload Warning
Signal 1
Overload Warning
Signal 2
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings
, 
Output
current
Threshold
/
Power running
Regeneration
/
Threshold
[OL]/[OL2] 1
signal 0
ON
ON
t
State
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Notes:
 The default value is 100%. To change the level
from the default, set  (overload level) and/or
 (overload level (2)).
 The example circuit for terminal [11] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the
negative-going turn-off spike generated by the
coil from damaging the inverter’s output
transistor.
Description
when output current is more than the set threshold
for the overload signal
when output current is less than the set threshold
for the overload signal
(Same as above)
(Same as above)
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
OL
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
OL
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–52
Output Deviation for PID Control
The PID loop error is defined as the
magnitude (absolute value) of the difference
between the Setpoint (target value) and the
Process Variable (actual value). When the
error magnitude exceeds the preset value for
, the [OD] terminal signal turns ON. Refer
to “PID Control” on page 3–30.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol
Function Name
OD
Output Deviation for
PID Control
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings

State
ON
OFF
Notes:
 The default difference value is set to 3%. To
change this value, change parameter 
(deviation level).
 The example circuit for terminal [11] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the
negative-going turn-off spike generated by the
coil from damaging the inverter’s output
transistor.
SP,PV
Process variable

Setpoint

[OD] 1
signal 0
ON
ON
t
Description
When PID error is more than the set threshold for
the deviation signal.
when PID error is less than the set threshold for the
deviation signal
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
OD
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
OD
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–53
Alarm Signal
The inverter alarm signal is active when a fault has
occurred and it is in the Trip Mode (refer to the
diagram at right). When the fault is cleared the alarm
signal becomes inactive.
Run
STOP
RESET
Stop
RUN
STOP
RESET
We must make a distinction between the alarm signal
Trip
Fault
[AL] and the alarm relay contacts [AL0], [AL1] and [AL2]. Fault
The signal [AL] is a logic function, which you can assign
Alarm signal active
to the open collector output terminals [11], [12], or the
relay outputs.
The most common (and default) use of the relay is for [AL], thus the labeling of its terminals.
Use an open collector output (terminal [11] or [12]) for a low-current logic signal interface
or to energize a small relay (50 mA maximum). Use the relay output to interface to higher
voltage and current devices (10 mA minimum).
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol
AL
Function Name
Alarm Signal
State
ON
OFF
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings
, , 
Notes:
 By default, the relay is configured as normally
closed (=). Refer to the next page for an
explanation.
 In the default relay configuration, an inverter
power loss turns ON the alarm output. The alarm
signal remains ON as long as the external control
circuit has power.
 When the relay output is set to normally closed, a
time delay of less than 2 seconds occurs after
powerup before the contact is closed.
 Terminals [11] and [12] are open collector outputs,
so the electric specifications of [AL] are different
from the contact output terminals [AL0], [AL1],
[AL2].
 This signal output has the delay time (300 ms
nominal) from the fault alarm output.
 The relay contact specifications are in “Control
Logic Signal Specifications” on page 4–6. The
contact diagrams for different conditions are on
the next page.
Description
when an alarm signal has occurred and has not
been cleared
when no alarm has occurred since the last clearing
of alarm(s)
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
AL
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (default
output configuration shown – see page 4–46 and
3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
AL
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–54
The alarm relay output can be configured in two main ways:

Trip/Power Loss Alarm – The alarm relay is configured as normally closed (=)
by default, shown below (left). An external alarm circuit that detects broken wiring also
as an alarm connects to [AL0] and [AL1]. After powerup and short delay (< 2 seconds),
the relay energizes and the alarm circuit is OFF. Then, either an inverter trip event or an
inverter power loss will de-energize the relay and open the alarm circuit

Trip Alarm – Alternatively, you can configure the relay as normally open (=),
shown below (right). An external alarm circuit that detects broken wiring also as an
alarm connects to [AL0] and [AL2]. After powerup, the relay energizes only when an
inverter trip event occurs, opening the alarm circuit. However, in this configuration, an
inverter power loss does not open the alarm circuit.
Be sure to use the relay configuration that is appropriate for your system design. Note that
the external circuits shown assume that a closed circuit = no alarm condition (so that a
broken wire also causes an alarm). However, some systems may require a closed circuit =
alarm condition. In that case, then use the opposite terminal [AL1] or [AL2] from the ones
shown.
N.C. contacts (=)
N.O. contacts (=)
When an alarm occurs or During normal operation or
During normal operation
When an alarm occurs
when power is OFF
when power is OFF
AL0
AL1
AL2
AL0
AL2
AL0
Load
Power
supply
Load
Power
supply
Power
Run Mode
AL0-AL1
AL0-AL2
Power
ON
Normal
Closed
Open
ON
Trip
Open
OFF
–
Open
Power
supply
AL1
AL1
AL2
AL0
Load
Power
supply
Load
Run Mode
AL0-AL1
AL0-AL2
ON
Normal
Open
Closed
Closed
ON
Trip
Closed
Open
Closed
OFF
–
Open
Closed
AL1
AL2
4–55
Under-voltage Signal
The inverter outputs the under-voltage signal during under-voltage.
To output the under-voltage signal, assign function “ (UV)” to one of the intelligent
output terminals [11] to [12], or to the relay output terminal.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

UV
Function Name
Under-voltage
signal
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings

State
ON
OFF
Notes:
 The example circuit for terminal [11] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the
negative-going turn-off spike generated by the
coil from damaging the inverter’s output
transistor.
Description
Inverter is during under-voltage
Inverter is not during under-voltage
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
UV
THM
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
UV
THM
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–56
Running Time and Power On Time Over Signal
The inverter outputs the operation time expiration signal and power on time expiration
signal.
To enable this function, assign “ (RNT)”, and/or “ (ONT)” to intelligent output terminals.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol
Function Name

RNT
Run time expiration
signal

ONT
Power ON time
expiration signal
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings

State
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Notes:
 The example circuit for terminal [11] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the
negative-going turn-off spike generated by the
coil from damaging the inverter’s output
transistor.
Description
Accumulated operation time of the inverter exceeds
the set value of 
Accumulated operation time of the inverter does
not exceed the set value of 
Accumulated power on time of the inverter exceeds
the set value of 
Accumulated power on time of the inverter does not
exceed the set value of 
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
RNT
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
ONT
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–57
Electronic Thermal Warning Signal Output
You can configure this function so that the inverter outputs a warning signal before the
electronic thermal protection operates against motor overheat. You can also set the
threshold level to output a warning signal with the electronic thermal warning level setting
().
To output the warning signal, assign function “ (THM)” to one of the intelligent output
terminals [11] to [12], or to the relay output terminal.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol
THM
Function Name
Thermal warning
signal output
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings

State
ON
OFF
Notes:
 The example circuit for terminal [11] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the
negative-going turn-off spike generated by the
coil from damaging the inverter’s output
transistor.
Description
Accumulated thermal level exceeds the electronic
thermal warning level ()
Accumulated thermal level does not exceed the
electronic thermal warning level ()
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
THM
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
THM
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–58
External Brake Related Output Signals
These signals are used with brake control function.
To output the warning signals, assign function “ (BRK)” and “ (BER)” to the intelligent
output terminals [11] and [12], or to the relay output terminal.
Refer to ”Brake Control Function Related” on page 3–73 for details.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol
Function Name

BRK
Brake release signal

BER
Brake error signal
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings
 to 
State
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Notes:
 The example circuit for terminal [11] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the
negative-going turn-off spike generated by the
coil from damaging the inverter’s output
transistor.
Description
Brake is ready to be released
Brake is not ready to be released
Brake error has occurred
Brake is working properly
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
BRK/BER
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
BRK/BER
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–59
Zero Hz Speed Detection Signal
The inverter outputs the 0Hz speed detection signal when the inverter output frequency
falls below the threshold level ().
To use this function, assign “ (ZS)” to one of the intelligent output terminals.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

ZS
Function Name
Zero Hz speed
detection signal
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings

State
ON
OFF
Notes:
 The example circuit for terminal [11] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the
negative-going turn-off spike generated by the
coil from damaging the inverter’s output
transistor.
Description
Output frequency is less than 
Output frequency is not less than 
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
ZS
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
ZS
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.

Load
4–60
Analog Input Disconnect Detect
This feature is useful when the inverter receives a speed reference from an external device.
Upon input signal loss at either the [O] or [OI] terminal, the inverter normally just
decelerates the motor to a stop. However, the inverter can use the intelligent output
terminal [Dc] to signal other devices that a signal loss has occurred.
Voltage signal loss at [O] terminal - Parameter  is the Start Frequency Adjustment. It
sets the beginning (minimum) output frequency when the speed reference source is greater
than zero. If the analog input at terminal [O] is less than the Start Frequency, the inverter
turns ON the [ODc] output to indicate a signal loss condition.
Current signal loss at [OI] terminal - The [OI] terminal accepts a 4mA to 20mA signal,
with 4mA representing the beginning of the input range. If the input current falls below
4mA, the inverter applies a threshold to detect signal loss.
Note that a signal loss is not an inverter trip event. When the analog input value is again
above the  value, the [Dc] output turns OFF. There is no error condition to clear.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol
Function Name
State

ODc
Analog voltage Input
Disconnect Detect

OIDc
Analog current Input
Disconnect Detect
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings
=, 
Notes:
 The [Dc] output can indicate an analog signal
disconnect when the inverter is in Stop Mode, as
well as Run Mode.
 The example circuit for terminal [11] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the
negative-going turn-off spike generated by the
coil from damaging the inverter’s output
transistor.
Description
when signal loss is detected on [O] input
when no signal loss is detected on [O] input
when signal loss is detected on [OI] input
when no signal loss is detected on [OI] input
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
DC
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
DC
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–61
PID Second Stage Output
The inverter has a built-in PID loop feature for two-stage control, useful for certain
applications such as building ventilation or heating and cooling (HVAC). In an ideal control
environment, a single PID loop controller (stage) would be adequate. However, in certain
conditions, the maximum output energy from the first stage is not enough to maintain the
Process Variable (PV) at or near the Setpoint (SP). And, the output of the first stage is in
saturation. A simple solution is to add a second stage, which puts an additional and
constant amount of energy into the system under control. When size properly, the boost
from the second stage brings the PV toward the desired range, allowing the first stage PID
control to return to its linear range of operation.
The two-stage method of control has some advantages for particular applications.
 The second stage is only ON in adverse conditions, so there is an energy savings during
normal conditions.
 Since the second stage is simple ON/OFF control, it is less expensive to add than just
duplicating the first stage.
 At powerup, the boost provided by the second stage helps the process variable reach the
desired setpoint sooner than it would if the first stage acted alone.
 Even though the second stage is simple ON/OFF control, when it is an inverter you can
still adjust the output frequency to vary the boost it provides.
Refer to the example diagram below. Its two stages of control are defined as follows:
 Stage 1 - Inverter #1 operating in PID loop mode, with motor driving a fan
 Stage 2 - Inverter #2 operating as an ON/OFF controller, with motor driving a fan
Stage #1 provides the ventilation needs in a building most of the time. On some days, there
is a change in the building’s air volume because large warehouse doors are open. In that
situation, Stage #1 alone cannot maintain the desired air flow (PV sags under SP). Inverter
#1 senses the low PV and its PID Second Stage Output at [FBV] terminal turns ON. This
gives a Run FWD command to Inverter #2 to provide the additional air flow.
4–62
To use the PID Second Stage Output feature, you will need to choose upper and lower
limits for the PV, via  and  respectively. As the timing diagram below shows, these
are the thresholds Stage #1 inverter uses to turn ON or OFF Stage #2 inverter via the [FBV]
output. The vertical axis units are percent (%) for the PID setpoint, and for the upper and
lower limits. The output frequency, in Hz, is superimposed onto the same diagram.
When the system control begins, the following events occur (in sequence in the timing
diagram):
1. Stage #1 inverter turns ON via the [FW] Run command.
2. Stage #1 inverter turns ON the [FBV] output, because the PV is below the PV low limit
. So, Stage #2 is assisting in loop error correction from the beginning.
3. The PV rises and eventually exceeds the PV high limit . Stage #1 inverter then turns
OFF the [FBV] output to Stage #2, since the boost is no longer needed.
4. When the PV begins decreasing, only Stage #1 is operating, and it is in the linear control
range. This region is where a properly configured system will operate most often.
5. The PV continues to decrease until it crosses under the PV low limit (apparent external
process disturbance). Stage #1 inverter turns ON the [FBV] output, and Stage #2 inverter
is assisting again.
6. After the PV rises above the PV low limit, the [FW] Run command to Stage #1 inverter
turns OFF (as in a system shutdown).
7. Stage #1 inverter enters Stop Mode and automatically turns OFF the [FBV] output, which
causes Stage #2 inverter to also stop.
%/Hz
PV high limit
Output frequency
PID feedback (PV)

PID setpoint (SP)
PV low limit

Stage #1 [FW]
1
0
[FBV] to Stage #2 [FW]
1
0
Events:
1,2
3
4
The terminal [FBV] configuration table is on the following page.
5
6
7
t
4–63
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol
FBV
Function Name
State
ON
 Transitions to ON when the inverter is in RUN
Mode and the PID Process Variable (PV) is less
than the Feedback Low Limit ()
OFF
 Transitions to OFF when the PID Feedback Value
(PV) exceeds the PID High Limit ()
 Transitions to OFF when the inverter goes from
Run Mode to Stop Mode
Feedback Value
Check
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings
, , 
Description
Notes:
 The [FBV] is designed for implementing two-stage
control. The PV high limit and PV low limit
parameters,  and , do not function as
process alarm thresholds. Terminal [FBV] does not
provide a PID alarm function.
 The example circuit for terminal [11] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the
negative-going turn-off spike generated by the
coil from damaging the inverter’s output
transistor.
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
FBV
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
FBV
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–64
Communication signal Disconnect Detection
This signal function is enabled only when Modbus-RTU has been selected for the
communication. If a reception timeout occurs, the inverter continues to output the
communication line disconnection signal until it receives the next data.
Specify the limit time for reception timeout by setting the communication trip time ().
External control equipment
Monitoring timer
Communication
trip time 
Communication line
disconnection signal (NDc)
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

NDc
Function Name
Communication
signal disconnect
detection
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings

State
Description
ON
When there is a disconnection in communication
OFF
When there is no disconnection in communication
Notes:
 The example circuit for terminal [11] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the
negative-going turn-off spike generated by the
coil from damaging the inverter’s output
transistor.
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
NDc
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
NDc
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–65
Logic Output Function
The inverter has a built-in logic output feature. Select any two operands out of all intelligent
output options except LOG1 to LOG3 and their operator out of AND, OR, or XOR (exclusive
OR). The terminal symbol for the new output is [LOG]. Use ,  or  to route the
logical result to terminal [11], [12] or the relay terminals.
Intelligent outputs used as
internal inputs:
RUN, FA1, FA2… or
all other output
signals
//
Operand A
//
RUN, FA1, FA2… or
all other output
signals
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol



LOG1
LOG2
LOG3
Operand B
Function Name
Logic Output
Function
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings
 to 
Notes:
[LOG1]/[LOG2]/[LOG3]
(//)
Operator
AND, OR, XOR
Input Status
A
B
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
State
ON
OFF
[LOG] Output State
AND
OR
XOR
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
Description
when the Boolean operation specified by 
// has a logical “1” result
when the Boolean operation specified by 
// has a logical “0” result
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
LOG1~3
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
LOG1~3
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–66
Lifetime Warning Output Function
Capacitor life warning signal - The inverter checks the operating life of the capacitors on
the internal circuit board on the basis of the internal temperature and cumulative power on
time. You can also monitor the state of the capacitor life warning signal [WAC] in . If
the [WAC] signal is given out, it is recommended to replace the main PCB and control PCB.
Cooling fan warning signal - The inverter gives out the cooling fan speed-drop signal
[WAF] when it detects the rotation speed of the cooling fan drops down to approx. 75% of
the full speed. If “01” has been selected for the cooling fan control (), the inverter will
not give out the [WAF] signal even when the cooling fan is stopped. If the signal is given
out, check the cooling fan cover for clogging. You can also monitor the state of [WAF]
signal in .
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

WAC
Capacitor life
warning signal

WAF
Cooling fan warning
signal
Function Name
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings

Notes:
State
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Description
Calculated lifetime of the electrolytic capacitor is
expired
Electrolytic capacitor is normal
Calculated lifetime of the cooling fan is expired
Cooling fan is normal
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
WAC
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
WAC
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
Load
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
4–67
Starting Contact Signal
The inverter gives out the starting contact signal [FR] while it is receiving an operational
command. The FR signal is given out, regardless the setting of the run command source
setting (). If the forward operation [FW] and reverse operation [RV] are given at the
same time, the inverter stops the motor operation.
Forward operation command
Reverse operation command
Starting contact signal (FR)
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

FR
Function Name
Starting contact
signal
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings

Notes:
State
ON
OFF
Description
Either [FW] or [RV] is given
Both [FW] and [RV] is given at the same time, or no
operation command is given
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
FR
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
FR
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–68
Heat Sink Overheat Warning
The inverter monitors the temperature of its internal heatsink, and gives out the heat sink
overheat warning signal [OHF] when the temperature exceeds the overheat warning level
().
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

OHF
Function Name
Heat sink overheat
warning
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings

Notes:
State
Description
ON
Heat sink temperature exceeds the  set level
Heat sink temperature does not exceed the  set
level
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
OFF
Inverter output
terminal circuit
OHF
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
OHF
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
Load
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
4–69
Low Load Detection Signal
The low load detection signal output indicates the general status of the inverter output
current. When the output current becomes less than the value specified by , the [LOC]
output turns ON.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol
LOC

Function Name
Low load detection
State
ON
OFF
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings
, 
Notes:
Description
When the output current becomes less than the
value specified by 
When the output current is more than the value
specified by 
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
LOC
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
LOC
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
Load
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
General Output (1) to (3)
The functions are for EzSQ. Refer to a manual of EzSQ for detailed description.
Option
Code



Terminal
Symbol
MO1
MO2
MO3
Function Name
General input (1)
General input (2)
General input (3)
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings

State
Description
ON
Each general output is turned on
OFF
Each general output is turned off
Notes:
Refer to a manual of EzSQ for detailed explanation.
4–70
Inverter Ready Signal
The inverter outputs the inverter ready signal [IRDY] when it is ready for operation (i.e.
when it can receive an operational command).
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol
Function Name
State
ON

IRDY
Inverter ready signal
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings
, 
OFF
Notes:
 The inverter can recognize only the operation
command is given while the [IRDY] signal is given
out
 If the [IRDY] signal is not given out, check whether
the input power supply voltage (connect to the R,
S, and T terminals) is within the range of
specification
Description
The inverter is ready to accept the operation
command
The inverter is not ready to accept the operation
command
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
IRDY
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
IRDY
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
Load
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
4–71
Forward Rotation, Reverse Rotation Signals
Forward Rotation signal- The inverter continues to output the forward rotation signal
[FWR] while it is driving the motor for forward operation. The [FWR] signal is turned off
while the inverter is driving the motor for reverse operation or stopping the motor.
Reverse Rotation signal - The inverter continues to output the forward rotation signal
[RVR] while it is driving the motor for reverse operation. The [RVR] signal is turned off while
the inverter is driving the motor for forward operation or stopping the motor.
Output freq.
Forward rotation signal (FWR)
Reverse rotation signal (RVR)
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

FWR
Forward rotation

RVR
Reverse rotation
Function Name
State
ON
OFF
ON
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings

Notes:
OFF
Description
Inverter is driving the motor for forward operation
Inverter is driving the motor for reverse operation,
or the motor is stopped
Inverter is driving the motor for reverse operation
Inverter is driving the motor for forward operation,
or the motor is stopped
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
FWR
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
FWR
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
Load
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
4–72
Major Failure Signal
The inverter gives out the major failure signal in addition to an alarm signal when it trips
because of one of the errors listed in note down below.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

MJA
Function Name
Major failure signal
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings

Notes:
The output applies to the tripping caused by
hardware as shown below.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Error code
.*
.*
.*
.*
.*
.*
Description
EEPROM error
CT error
CPU error
Ground-fault at power ON
CPU error
Main Circuit Error
State
Description
ON
OFF
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
MJA
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
MJA
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–73
Window Comparator for Analog Inputs
The window comparator function outputs signals when the value of analog inputs [O] and
[OI] are within the maximum and minimum limits specified for the window comparator. You
can monitor analog inputs with reference to arbitrary levels (to find input terminal
disconnection and other errors).
Refer to ”Window Comparator, Analog disconnection” on page 3–65 for details.
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol
Function Name
State

WCO
Window comparator for
analog voltage input

WCOI
Window comparator for
analog current input
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings
 to , , 
Notes:
 Output values of ODc and OIDc are the same as
those of WCO and WCOI, respectively.
Description
[O] input is inside of the window comparator
[O] input is outside of the window comparator
[OI] input is inside of the window comparator
[OI] input is outside of the window comparator
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
WCO
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
WCO
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–74
Frequency Command Source, Run Command Source
Frequency Command Source signal - The inverter outputs the frequency command
source signal [FREF] while frequency command can be given by operator ( = ). The
[FREF] signal is turned off while frequency command cannot be given by operator
Run Command Source signal - The inverter outputs the frequency command source
signal [REF] while run command can be given by operator ( = ). The [REF] signal is
turned off while run command cannot be given by operator
Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

FREF
Frequency command
source

REF
Run command source
Function Name
Valid for outputs
, , 
Required settings

Notes:
State
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Description
Frequency command source is via operator
Frequency command source is not via operator
Run command source is via operator
Run command source is not via operator
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
FREF
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
FREF
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–75
2nd Motor Selection
This function allows you to switch the inverter setting to control two different types of
motors. To use this function, assign function “” to one of the input terminal and make it
nd
on or off. When 2 motor parameters are selected, output signal [SETM] turns on.
No.
Codes
Description
No.
Codes
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14














Acceleration time (1)
Deceleration time (1)
Frequency source
Run command source
Base frequency
Maximum frequency
Multi-speed frequency 0
Torque boost select
Manual torque boost value
Manual torque boost freq.
V/f characteristic curve
V/f gain
Voltage comp. gain for automatic torque boost
Slip comp. gain for automatic torque boost
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27














Option
Code
Terminal
Symbol

SETM
Function Name
nd
2
motor selection
Valid for outputs

Required settings

Notes:
State
ON
OFF
Description
Frequency upper limit
Frequency lower limit
AVR function select
AVR voltage select
Acceleration time (2)
Deceleration time (2)
Select method to switch to Acc2/Dec2 profile
Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition point
Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition point
Overload warning level
Motor capacity
Motor poles
Motor stabilization constant
Description
nd
2 motor parameter sets are selected
st
1 motor parameter sets are selected
Example for terminal [11] (requires output
configuration – see page 3–84):
Inverter output
terminal circuit
SETM
CM2
11
RY
Example for terminal [AL0], [AL1], [AL2] (requires
output configuration – see page 4–46 and 3–84):
Inverter logic
circuit board
SETM
AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
Load
4–76
STO (Safe Torque Off) Performance Monitor
This signal is specific for Safe Stop function.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol
EDM
Function Name
STO (Safe Torque Off)
Performance Monitor
(Output terminal 11
only)
Valid for outputs

Required settings

Notes:
State
Description
ON
OFF
Dedicated to terminal [11]:
Inverter output
terminal circuit
EDM
CM2
11
RY
4–77
Analog Input Operation
The WL200 inverters provide for analog input to
command the inverter frequency output value.
The analog input terminal group includes the [L],
[OI], [O], and [H] terminals on the control
connector, which provide for Voltage [O] or
Current [OI] input. All analog input signals must
use the analog ground [L].
If you use either the voltage or current analog
input, you must select one of them using the logic
input terminal function [AT] analog type. Refer to
the table on next page showing the activation of
each analog input by combination of  set
parameter and [AT] terminal condition. The [AT]
terminal function is covered in “Analog Input
Current/Voltage Select” on page 4–28. Remember
that you must also set  =  to select analog
input as the frequency source.
AM H
O OI L
+V Ref.
Voltage input
Current input
A GND
V/I input
select
[AT]

Freq.
setting
AM H
O OI L

+-
4-20 mA
0-10 V
NOTE: If no logic input terminal is configured for the [AT] function, then inverter recognizes
that [AT]=OFF and MCU recognizes [O]+[OI] as analog input.
Using an external potentiometer is a common way to
control the inverter output frequency (and a good way
to learn how to use the analog inputs). The
potentiometer uses the built-in 10V reference [H] and
the analog ground [L] for excitation, and the voltage
input [O] for the signal. By default, the [AT] terminal
selects the voltage input when it is OFF.
Take care to use the proper resistance for the
potentiometer, which is 1 to 2 k, 2 Watts.
Voltage Input – The voltage input circuit uses
terminals [L] and [O]. Attach the signal cable’s
shield wire only to terminal [L] on the inverter.
Maintain the voltage within specifications (do not
apply negative voltage).
Current Input – The current input circuit uses
terminals [OI] and [L]. The current comes from a
sourcing type transmitter; a sinking type will not
work! This means the current must flow into
terminal [OI], and terminal [L] is the return back to
the transmitter. The input impedance from [OI] to
[L] is 100 Ohms. Attach the cable shield wire only to
terminal [L] on the inverter.
AM H
O OI L
1 to 2k, 2W
AM H
0 to 9.6 VDC,
0 to 10V nominal
AM H
4 to 19.6 mA DC,
4 to 20mA nominal
O OI L
+-
O OI L

See I/O specs on page 4–6.
4–78
The following table shows the available analog input settings. Parameter  and the input
terminal [AT] determine the External Frequency Command input terminals that are available,
and how they function. The analog inputs [O] and [OI] use terminal [L] as the reference
(signal return).




[AT] Input
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Analog Input Configuration
[O]
[OI]
[O]
Integrated POT on external panel
[OI]
Integrated POT on external panel
Other Analog Input-related topics:
·
·
·
·
·
·
“Analog Input Settings”
“Additional Analog Input Settings”
“Analog Signal Calibration Settings”
“Analog Input Current/Voltage Select”
“ADD Frequency Enable”
“Analog Input Disconnect Detect”
4–79
Analog Output Operation
In inverter applications it is useful to monitor the
inverter operation from a remote location or from the
front panel of an inverter enclosure. In some cases, this
requires only a panel-mounted volt meter. In other
cases, a controller such as a PLC may provide the
inverter’s frequency command, and require inverter
feedback data (such as output frequency or output
current) to confirm actual operation. The analog output
terminal [AM] serves these purposes.
AM H
Analog
Voltage
Output
+
O OI L
A GND
10VDC
full scale,
2mA max
See I/O specs on page 4–6.
The inverter provides an analog voltage output on terminal [AM] with terminal [L] as analog
GND reference. The [AM] can output inverter frequency or current output value. Note that
the voltage range is 0 to +10V (positive-going only), regardless of forward or reverse motor
rotation. Use  to configure terminal [AM] as indicated below.
Func.

Code











Description
Inverter output frequency
Inverter output current
Digital output frequency
Inverter output voltage
Inverter input power
Electronic Thermal Load
LAD frequency
Digital current monitor
Cooling fin temperature
General purpose
Option
4–80
The [AM] signal offset and gain are adjustable, as indicated below.
Func.


Description
[AM] output gain
[AM] output offset
Range
0. to 255.
0.0 to 10.0
Default
100.
0.0
The graph below shows the effect of the gain and offset setting. To calibrate the [AM]
output for your application (analog meter), follow the steps below:
1. Run the motor at the full scale speed, or most common operating speed.
a. If the analog meter represents output frequency, adjust offset () first, and then
use  to set the voltage for full scale output.
b. If [AM] represents motor current, adjust offset () first, and then use  to set
the voltage for full scale output. Remember to leave room at the upper end of the
range for increased current when the motor is under heavier loads.
AM output offset adjustment
AM output gain adjustment
AM output
AM output
10V
10V
=0 to 10
=0 to 255
Parallel
movement
5V
5V
0
1/2 FS
Full scale (FS)
Hz or A
0
1/2 FS
Full scale (FS)
Hz or A
NOTE: As mentioned above, first adjust the offset, and then adjust the gain. Otherwise the
required performance cannot be obtained because of the parallel movement of the offset
adjustment.
5–1
Chapt er 5:
Inverter System
Accessories
In This Chapter…
5
page
-
Introduction ....................................................................................... 5–2
-
Component Descriptions.................................................................. 5–3
5–2
Introduction
A motor control system will obviously include a motor and inverter, as well as fuses for
safety. If you are connecting a motor to the inverter on a test bench just to get started,
that’s all you may need for now. But a fully developed system can also have a variety of
additional components. Some can be for noise suppression, while others may enhance the
inverter’s braking performance. The figure below shows a system with several possible
optional components, and the table gives part number information.
From power supply
Name
Breaker,
MCCB or
GFI
AC reactor
(Input choke)
RF noise filter
EMC filter
Capacitive
filter
L1
L2
L3
+1
Inverter
DC link
choke
+
Braking
Unit
GND
T1
T2
RF noise filter
AC reactor
(Input choke)
or LCR filter
Thermal
switch
EMC filter (for CE)
Capacitive filter
DC link choke
Braking resistor
Braking resistor
NEMA-rated

Braking unit
RF noise filter, output side
AC reactor, output side
BRD-xxx
ZCL-xxx
ACL-x2-xxx
LCR filter
Combination:
ACL-x2-xxx
LPF-xxx
R-2-xxx
HRB-x,
NSRBx00-x
NJRB-xxx
BRD-xxx
ZCL-xxx
HRL-xxx
HRL-xxC
NOTE: The Hitachi part number series for accessories
includes different sizes of each part type, specified by the –x
suffix. Hitachi product literature can help match size and
rating of your inverter to the proper accessory size.
Each inverter accessory comes with its own printed
instruction manual. Please refer to those manuals for
complete installation details. This chapter gives only an
overview of these optional system devices.
T3
Motor
AC reactor, input side
RF noise filter, input side
Part No. Series
EU, Japan
USA
ALI-xxx2
HRL-x
ZCL-xxx
ZCL-xxx
Refer to Appendix D
“CE-EMC Installation
Guidelines”.
CFI-x
CFI-x
DCL-x-xx
HDC-xxx
JRB-xxx-x
JRB-xxx-x
SRB-xxx-x
SRB-xxx-x
5–3
Component Descriptions
AC Reactors, Input Side
This is useful in suppressing harmonics induced on the power supply lines, or when the
main power voltage imbalance exceeds 3% (and power source capacity is more than 500
kVA), or to smooth out line fluctuations. It also improves the power factor.
In the following cases for a general-purpose inverter, a large peak current flow on the main
power supply side, and is able to destroy the inverter module:
 If the unbalanced factor of the power supply is 3% or higher
 If the power supply capacity is at least 10 times greater than the inverter capacity (the
power supply capacity is 500 kVA or more)
 If abrupt power supply changes are expected
Examples of these situations include:
1. Several inverters are connected in parallel, sharing the same power bus
2. A thyristor converter and an inverter are connected in parallel, sharing the same power
bus
3. An installed phase-advance (power factor correction) capacitor opens and closes
Where these conditions exist or when the connected equipment must be highly reliable,
you MUST install an input-side AC reactor of 3% (at a voltage drop at rated current) with
respect to the supply voltage on the power supply side. Also, where the effects of an
indirect lightning strike are possible, install a lightning conductor.
Example calculation:
VRS = 205V, VST = 203V, VTR = 197V,
where VRS is R-S line voltage, VST is S-T line voltage, VTR is T-R line voltage
Unbalance factor of voltage =
Max. line voltage(min .)  Mean Line voltage
100
Meanline voltage

VRS 
VRS  VST  VTR 
VRS  VST  VTR 
3
3 100  205  202 100  1.5%
202
Please refer to the documentation that comes with the AC reactor for installation
instructions.
AC Reactors, Output Side
This reactor reduces the vibrations in the motor caused by the inverter’s switching
waveforms, by smoothing the waveforms to approximate commercial power quality. It is
also useful to reduce the reflected voltage wave phenomenon when wiring from the
inverter to the motor is more than 10m in length. Please refer to the documentation that
comes with the AC reactor for installation instructions.
5–4
Zero-phase Reactor (RF Noise Filter)
The zero-phase reactor helps reduce radiated
noise from the inverter wiring. It can be used on
the input or output side of the inverter. The
example zero-phase reactor shown to the right
comes with a mounting bracket. The wiring
must go through the opening to reduce the RF
component of the electrical noise. Loop the
wires three times (four turns) to attain the full
RF filtering effect. For larger wire sizes, place
multiple zero-phase reactors (up to four)
side-by-side for a greater filtering effect.
5–5
Dynamic Braking Selection Tables
The WL200 series inverter models have internal braking units. Additional stopping torque is
available by adding external resistors. The required braking torque depends on your
particular application. Other tables in this section will help you choose the proper resistor.
Performance without
resistor
200V Class
WL200
Model
Number
HP
002
004
007
015
022
1/4
1/2
1
2
3
Integrated
Resister
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
Braking
Torque
(%)
50
50
50
50
50
Performance without
resistor
400V Class
WL200
Model
Number
HP
004
007
015
022
030
040
055
075
110
150
185
1/2
1
2
3
4
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
Integrated
Resister
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
Braking
Torque
(%)
50
50
50
50
20
20
20
20
20
15
15
Performance at Minimum Resistance
Min.
Resistance
(Ohms)
100
100
50
50
50
Braking
Torque
(%)
200
200
200
200
150
Max.
Braking
Duty
Cycle
(%)
10
10
10
10
10
Performance at Minimum Resistance
Min.
Resistance
(Ohms)
180
180
180
180
100
100
100
70
70
70
35
Braking
Torque
(%)
150
150
150
150
100
100
100
80
80
60
60
Max.
Braking
Duty
Cycle
(%)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Min. Resistance at 100%
Braking Duty Cycle
Min.
Resistance at
100% Braking
Duty Cycle
(Ohms)
317
317
159
159
159
Braking
Torque
(%)
150
100
100
100
50
Min. Resistance at 100%
Braking Duty Cycle
Min.
Resistance at
100% Braking
Duty Cycle
(Ohms)
570
570
570
570
317
317
317
222
222
222
111
Braking
Torque
(%)
100
100
100
60
60
50
40
40
30
20
20
6–1
Chapt er 6:
Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
In This Chapter…
6
page
-
Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 6–2
-
Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions ............................. 6–8
-
Restoring Factory Default Settings ...............................................6–14
-
Maintenance and Inspection ......................................................... 6–15
-
Warranty .......................................................................................... 6–22
6–2
Troubleshooting
Safety Messages
Please read the following safety messages before troubleshooting or performing
maintenance on the inverter and motor system.
WARNING: Wait at least ten (10) minutes after turning OFF the input power supply before
performing maintenance or an inspection. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock.
WARNING: Make sure that only qualified personnel will perform maintenance, inspection,
and part replacement. Before starting to work, remove any metallic objects from your
person (wristwatch, bracelet, etc.). Be sure to use tools with insulated handles. Otherwise,
there is a danger of electric shock and/or injury to personnel.
WARNING: Never remove connectors by pulling on its wire leads (wires for cooling fan and
logic P.C.board). Otherwise, there is a danger of fire due to wire breakage and/or injury to
personnel.
General Precautions and Notes
 Always keep the unit clean so that dust or other foreign matter does not enter the
inverter.
 Take special care in regard to breaking wires or making connection mistakes.
 Firmly connect terminals and connectors.
 Keep electronic equipment away from moisture and oil. Dust, steel filings and other
foreign matter can damage insulation, causing unexpected accidents, so take special
care.
Inspection Items
This chapter provides instructions or checklists for these inspection items:
 Daily inspection
 Periodical inspection (approximately once a year)
 Insulation resistance (Megger) test (approximately once two years)
6–3
Troubleshooting Tips
The table below lists typical symptoms and the corresponding solution(s).
1. Inverter does not power up.
Possible Cause(s)
Power cable is incorrectly wired.
Short bar or DCL between [P] and [PD] is
disconnected.
Power cable is breaking.
Corrective Action
Check input wiring
Install short bar or DCL between [P] and [PD] terminal.
Check input wiring.
2. Motor does not start.
Possible Cause(s)
Incorrect RUN command source is
selected.
Incorrect frequency source is selected.
Frequency setting is 0Hz.
RUN command is not set to input terminal.
“Multi-speed input(s) (02 to 05:CF1 to
CF4)” is (are) set to input terminal(s) and
active.
Both FW and RV input are active.
Rotation direction restriction (b035) is
enabled.
Incorrect input wiring or short bar position
Incorrect analog input or variable resistor
wiring
RUN command source is operator, but
input terminal is set to "Force terminal"
and active.
RUN command source is terminal, but
input terminal is set to "Force operator"
and active.
Inverter is in trip status.
(With ALARM LED and "Exxx" indication)
Safety function is enabled and either GS1
or GS2 input is inactive.
Corrective Action
Check RUN command source (A002) for correct source.
Ex. Terminal (digital input) : 01
Operator (RUN key) : 02
Check frequency source (A001) for correct source.
Ex. Terminal (analog input) : 01
Operator (F001) : 02
If frequency source is terminal (A001=01), check analog
voltage or current signal at [O] or [OI] terminals.
If frequency source is operator (A001=02), set frequency in
F001.
Depending on frequency source, input proper frequency
reference.
If frequency source is multi-speed operation, set frequency in
A020 to A035 and A220.
If RUN command source is terminal (A002=01), set "forward"
(00:FW) or "reverse" (01:RV) to any input terminals. In case of
3-wire control, set "3-wire start" (20:STA), "3-wire stop"
(21:STP) and "3-wire FW/RV" (22:F/R) to any input terminals.
Deactivate the input(s).
If RUN command source is FW/RV input, activate either FW or
RV input.
Check b035.
Wire inputs correctly and/or install short bar. (ON/OFF status
of inputs are monitored in d005.)
Wire correctly.
In case of analog voltage or variable resistor input, check
voltage between [O] and [L] terminal.
In case of analog current, check current between current
source and [OI] terminal.
Deactivate the input.
Deactivate the input.
Reset inverter by STOP/RESET key and check error code.
If safety function is used, activate both GS1 and GS2. If not,
disable safety function by dip switch.
6–4
Possible Cause(s)
"18:RS", "14:CS" or "11:FRS" is set to input
terminal and the input is active.
"84:ROK" is set to input terminal and the
input is not active.
Cable between inverter and motor or
internal cable of motor is breaking.
Excess load.
Motor is locked.
Corrective Action
Deactivate the input.
Activate the input.
Check the wiring.
Remove excess load.
Unlock the motor.
3. Motor does not accelerate to command speed.
Possible Cause(s)
Bad connection of analog wiring.
Overload restriction or OC suppression
function works.
Max. frequency (A004) or upper limit
(A061/A261) is lower than as expected.
Acceleration time is excessive.
“Multi-speed input(s) (02 to 05:CF1 to
CF4)” is (are) set to input terminal(s) and
active.
"06:JG " is set to input terminal and the
input is active.
Excess load.
Motor is locked.
Over fluxing
Corrective Action
Check the wiring.
In case of analog voltage or variable resistor input, check
voltage between [O] and [L] terminal.
In case of analog current, check current between current
source and [OI] terminal.
Check the function level.
Check the value.
Change acceleration time (F002/A092/A292).
Deactivate the input(s).
Deactivate the input.
Remove excess load.
Unlock the motor.
Refer to Note.1.
4. Inverter does not respond to changes in frequency setting from operator.
Possible Cause(s)
Incorrect frequency source is selected.
"51:F-TM" is set to input terminal and the
input is active.
Corrective Action
Check frequency source (A001=02).
Deactivate the input.
5. A part of function codes is not displayed.
Possible Cause(s)
Corrective Action
"Function code display restriction" (b037) is Set 00 (all display) to b037.
enabled.
"86:DISP" is set to input terminal and the
Deactivate the input.
input is active.
6. Operator (keypad) does not respond.
Possible Cause(s)
"86:DISP" is set to input terminal and the
input is active.
Corrective Action
Deactivate the input.
6–5
7. Parameter data does not change.
Possible Cause(s)
Inverter is in RUN status.
Software lock function (b031) is enabled.
Corrective Action
Stop the inverter, make sure the motor stops and try again.
If "RUN mode edit" is enabled, a part of function codes can be
changed in RUN status.
Disable software lock function.
8. Motor rotates reverse direction with forward command.
Possible Cause(s)
Incorrect power wiring.
Incorrect logic of direction signal in 3-wire
operation.
Corrective Action
Exchange any two of U/T1, V/T2 or W/T3.
Check the logic of input set as "22:F/R".
9. Motor rotates reverse direction with RUN key of keypad.
Possible Cause(s)
Keypad RUN key routing (F004) is
incorrectly set.
Corrective Action
Check F004.
10. Overcurrent trip (E03)
Possible Cause(s)
Acceleration time is short.
Excess load.
Overload restriction (b021) is disabled (00).
Corrective Action
Change acceleration time (F002/A092/A292).
Enable "acceleration hold" function (A069,A070)
Remove excess load.
Enable torque boost function.
Set free V/f in V/F characteristic curve selection
(A044/A244=02)
Enable overload restriction (b021=01/02/03).
When the inverter trips due to Overcurrent (E03), despite overload restriction is enabled (b021=01/02/03).
Overload restriction level (b022/b025) is
Set overload restriction level (b022/b025) lower.
high.
Deceleration rate at overload restriction
Set deceleration rate at overload restriction (b023/b026)
(b023/b026) is too short.
longer.
Over fluxing
Refer to Note.1.
11. STOP/RESET key does not respond.
Possible Cause(s)
Corrective Action
STOP/RESET key disabled.
Check "STOP key enable" function. (b087)
Deceleration overvoltage suppression
Check b130 and b050.
(b130) or controlled deceleration on power
loss (b050) function is enabled.
6–6
12. Sound noise of motor or machine.
Possible Cause(s)
Carrier frequency is low.
Machine frequency and motor frequency
are resonated.
Over excitation
Corrective Action
Set carrier frequency (b083) higher. (This could cause electric
noise and leak current higher.)
Change output frequency slightly. If resonating in
accel/deceleration, use jump frequency function (A063-68) to
avoid machine frequency.
Set base frequency (A003/A203) and AVR voltage
(A082/A282) according to motor rating. If not improved,
reduce V/f gain (A045/A245) slightly or change V/f curve
(A044/A244) as free V/f.
13. Overload trip (E05).
Possible Cause(s)
Improper electronic thermal level
Over fluxing
Corrective Action
Check electronic thermal setting (b012/b013)
Refer to Note.1.
14. Over voltage trip (E07).
Possible Cause(s)
Short deceleration time
Overvoltage suppression during
deceleration (b130) is disabled (00).
Corrective Action
Change deceleration time. (F003/F203/A093/A293)
Enable overvoltage suppression (b130=01/02).
When the inverter trips due to over voltage, despite over voltage suppression is enabled.
Improper overvoltage suppression
Check overvoltage suppression proportional gain (b134) and
proportional gain (b134) or integral time
integral time (b135).
(135).
Overvoltage suppression level (b131) is
Set Overvoltage suppression level (b131) lower. (Lower limit of
high.
parameter b131 must be (input voltage)×√2×1.1.)
15. Thermistor error trip (E35).
Possible Cause(s)
Thermistor is set to input [5] and DC24V is
supplied.
Corrective Action
Check setting of input terminal [5] (C005).
16. Unstable output frequency.
Possible Cause(s)
Improper parameters
Load variation is excessive.
Power voltage variation is excessive.
Over fluxing
Corrective Action
Set output frequency slightly smaller or bigger value than
power source frequency.
Change motor stabilization constant (H006/H206).
Change motor and inverter to one size bigger.
Check power source.
Refer to Note.1.
17. Output torque is not sufficient.
Possible Cause(s)
Improper parameters [Acceleration]
Improper parameters [Deceleration]
Corrective Action
Increase torque boost (A042/A242-A043/A243)
Reduce carrier frequency (A083).
Change torque boost select (A041/A241) to automatic.
Increase deceleration time (F003/F203/A093/A293).
Disable AVR function (A081/A281).
Install dynamic braking resistor or regenerative braking unit.
6–7
18. If cable to operator is disconnected, inverter will trip or stop.
Possible Cause(s)
Improper setting of b165.
Corrective Action
Set ex.operator com loss action (b165) to 02.
19. No response over Modbus communication.
Possible Cause(s)
New parameter is not updated.
Incorrect setting of RUN command source
(A002/A202).
Incorrect setting of Frequency source
(A001/A201).
Incorrect setting of com. speed.
Incorrect setting or duplication of Modbus
address.
Incorrect setting of com. parity.
Incorrect setting of com. stop bit.
Incorrect wiring.
Corrective Action
If C071, C074 or C075 is changed, cycle power or reset
inverter by turning RS terminal ON and OFF.
Set RUN command source (A002/A202) to 03.
Set frequency source (A001/A201) to 03.
Check communication speed (A071).
Check Modbus address (A072).
Check communication parity (A074).
Check communication stop bit (A075).
Check communication wiring at SP,SN terminals.
20. When inverter starts, ECB (Earth leakage Circuit Breaker) trips.
Possible Cause(s)
Leak current of inverter is excessive.
Corrective Action
Reduce carrier frequency (A083).
Increase current sensor level of ECB or replace ECB with
another one having higher current sensor level.
21. DC braking doesn’t work
Possible Cause(s)
DC braking force for deceleration (A054)
isn’t set. (Defaults (0.))
DC braking time for deceleration (A055)
isn’t set. (Defaults (0.0))
Corrective Action
Set DC braking force for deceleration (A054).
Set DC braking time for deceleration (A055).
22. Under-voltage error
Possible Cause(s)
Decrease in input voltage due to capacity
shortage of electric source.
Corrective Action
Make capacity of electric source larger.
23. TV or radio near inverter receives noises
Possible Cause(s)
The radiation noise generated by the
inverter.
Corrective Action
Put away those devices from the inverter as far as possible.
Note.
Set the parameter A041 from 01 to 00 and try. Take a guess motor constant about the connected
motor either Europe or Japanese. Change parameter setting H003 to another and cut & try. If the
motor constant is closer to Japanese, set the parameter setting b085 from 01 to 00. Change the
current parameter setting H003 to another value anyway. Then, change the parameter setting
H003 to your thinking value cut & try.
6–8
Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions
Fault Detection and Clearing
The microprocessor in the inverter detects a variety of
fault conditions and captures the event, recording it
in a history table. The inverter output turns OFF, or
“trips” similar to the way a circuit breaker trips due to
an over-current condition. Most faults occur when the
motor is running (refer to the diagram to the right).
However, the inverter could have an internal fault and
trip in Stop Mode.
In either case, you can clear the fault by pressing the
Stop/Reset key. Additionally, you can clear the
inverter’s cumulative trip history by performing the
procedure “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on
page 6–14 (setting = will clear the trip history
but leave inverter settings intact).
RUN
STOP
RUN
STOP
RESET
STOP
RESET
Trip
Fault
Error Codes
An error code will appear on the display automatically when a fault causes the inverter to
trip. The following table lists the cause associated with the error.
Error
Code
Name
 Over-current event while at
constant speed
 Over-current event during
deceleration
 Over-current event during
Cause(s)
The inverter output was short-circuited, or the motor shaft
is locked or has a heavy load. These conditions cause
excessive current for the inverter, so the inverter output is
turned OFF.
Setting in dual-voltage motor is wrong.
acceleration
 Over-current event during
other conditions
 Overload protection
When a motor overload is detected by the electronic
thermal function, the inverter trips and turns OFF its output.
 Braking resistor overload
When the BRD operation rate exceeds the setting of "b090",
this protective function shuts off the inverter output and
displays the error code.
 Over-voltage protection
When the DC bus voltage exceeds a threshold, due to
regenerative energy from the motor.
 EEPROM error
When the built-in EEPROM memory has problems due to
noise or excessive temperature, the inverter trips and turns
OFF its output to the motor.
 Under-voltage error
A decrease of internal DC bus voltage below a threshold
results in a control circuit fault. This condition can also
generate excessive motor heat or cause low torque. The
inverter trips and turns OFF its output.
 Current detection error
If an error occurs in the internal current detection system,
the inverter will shut off its output and display the error
code.
protection
6–9
Error
Code
Name
Cause(s)
 CPU error
A malfunction in the built-in CPU has occurred, so the
inverter trips and turns OFF its output to the motor.
 External trip
A signal on an intelligent input terminal configured as EXT
has occurred. The inverter trips and turns OFF the output to
the motor.
 USP
When the Unattended Start Protection (USP) is enabled, an
error occurred when power is applied while a Run signal is
present. The inverter trips and does not go into Run Mode
until the error is cleared.
 Ground fault
The inverter is protected by the detection of ground faults
between the inverter output and the motor upon during
powerup tests. This feature protects the inverter, and does
not protect humans.
 Input over-voltage
The inverter tests for input over-voltage after the inverter
has been in Stop Mode for 100 seconds. If an over-voltage
condition exists, the inverter enters a fault state. After the
fault is cleared, the inverter can enter Run Mode again.
 Inverter thermal detection
When the thermal sensor in the inverter module
is not connected.
When the inverter internal temperature is above the
threshold, the thermal sensor in the inverter module detects
the excessive temperature of the power devices and trips,
turning the inverter output OFF.

system error
Inverter thermal trip
 CPU communication error
When communication between two CPU fails, inverter trips
and displays the error code.
 Main circuit
The inverter will trip if the power supply establishment is
not recognized because of a malfunction due to noise or
damage to the main circuit element.
error (*3)
 Driver error
An internal inverter error has occurred at the safety
protection circuit between the CPU and main driver unit.
Excessive electrical noise may be the cause. The inverter has
turned OFF the IGBT module output.
 Thermistor
When a thermistor is connected to terminals [5] and [L] and
the inverter has sensed the temperature is too high, the
inverter trips and turns OFF the output.
 Braking error
When "01" has been specified for the Brake Control Enable
(b120), the inverter will trip if it cannot receive the braking
confirmation signal within the
Brake Wait Time for Confirmation (b124) after the output of
the brake release signal.
 Safe Stop
 Low-speed overload
Safe stop signal is given.
 Operator connection
When the connection between inverter and operator
keypad failed, inverter trips and displays the error code.
 Modbus communication
When “trip” is selected (C076=00) as a behavior in case of
communication error, inverter trips when timeout happens.
 EzSQ invalid instruction
The program stored in inverter memory has been
destroyed, or the PRG terminal was turned on without a
program downloaded to the inverter.
protection
error
If overload occurs during the motor operation at a very low
speed, the inverter will detect the overload and shut off the
inverter output.
6–10
Error
Code
Name
Cause(s)
 EzSQ nesting count error
Subroutines, if-statement, or for-next loop are nested in
more than eight layers
 EzSQ instruction error
 EzSQ user trip (0 to 9)
Inverter found the command which cannot be executed.
to

 Option error
to

When user –defined trip happens, inverter trips and displays
the error code.
The inverter detects errors in the option board mounted in
the optional slot. For details, refer to the instruction manual
for the mounted option board.
6–11
Warning Codes
If set parameter is conflicted to other parameters, warning code is displayed as follows.
Warning
Code
Warning condition
Frequency upper limit ()
>
Max. Frequency ()
>
Max. Frequency ()
>
Max. Frequency ()


Frequency lower limit ()
Output Frequency setting ()
Multi-speed freq. 0 ()
Output Frequency setting ()
Multi-speed freq. 0 ()
>
Frequency upper limit ()


Frequency lower limit ()
>




Start frequency ()
>
Start frequency ()
>


Start frequency ()
>




Start frequency ()
>
Frequency lower limit ()
Output Frequency setting ()
Multi-speed freq. 0 ()
Multi-speed freq. 1-15 (-)
Start frequency ()
Output Frequency setting ()
Multi-speed freq. 0 ()
Multi-speed freq. 1-15 (-)
>
Jogging frequency ()
=
Jump frequency
(////)
Free setting V/f frequency 7
>
Frequency upper limit ()
Free setting V/f frequency 7
>


Free setting V/f frequency 7
>




Frequency upper limit ()
>
Frequency lower limit ()
Output Frequency setting ()
Multi-speed freq. 0 ()
Max. Frequency ()
>
Max. Frequency ()
>
Max. Frequency ()


Frequency lower limit ()
Output Frequency setting ()
Multi-speed freq. 0 ()
Output Frequency setting ()
Multi-speed freq. 0 ()
>
Frequency upper limit ()


Frequency lower limit ()
>




Start frequency ()
>
Start frequency ()
>


Start frequency ()
>
























Output Frequency setting ()
Multi-speed freq. 0 ()
Free setting V/f frequency 7
=
>
Free setting V/f frequency 7
>
Free setting V/f frequency 7
>
Output Frequency setting ()
Multi-speed freq. 0 ()
Frequency upper limit ()
Output Frequency setting ()
Multi-speed freq. 0 ()
Frequency upper limit ()
Frequency lower limit ()
Output Frequency setting ()
Multi-speed freq. 0 ()
Jump frequency
(////)
Frequency upper limit ()
Frequency lower limit ()
Output Frequency setting ()
Multi-speed freq. 0 ()
6–12
Other indications
Display
Rotating
Name
Reset

Under-voltage

Waiting to restart

Restricted operation
command
Trip history
initializing
No data
(Trip monitor)


Blinking
Communication error

Auto-tuning
completed

Auto-tuning error
Descriptions
RS input is ON or STOP/RESET key is pressed.
If input voltage is under the allowed level, inverter shuts
off output and wait with this indication.
This indication is displayed after tripping before
restarting.
Commanded RUN direction is restricted in b035.
Trip history is being initialized.
No trip/waning data exists.
Communication between inverter and digital operator
fails.
Auto-tuning is completed properly.
Auto-tuning fails.
NOTE: Reset is not allowed in 10 second after trip.
NOTE: When error E08, E14 and E30 occur, reset operation by RS terminal or STOP/RESET
key is not accepted. In this case, reset by cycling power. If still same error occurs, perform
initialization.
6–13
Trip History and Inverter Status
We recommend that you first find the cause of the fault before clearing it. When a fault occurs, the
inverter stores important performance data at the moment of the fault. To access the data, use
the monitor function (xxx) and select  details about the present fault. The previous 5 faults
are stored in  to . Each error shifts - to -, and writes the new error to
.
The following Monitor Menu map shows how to access the error codes. When fault(s) exist,
you can review their details by first selecting the proper function:  is the most recent,
and  is the oldest.
Trip history 1 (Latest)

ESC

Trip history 6
SET
  . 

A
Hz
A
. Power up or initial processing
Output frequency
Hz
A
Output current
. Stop
. Constant speed
. Acceleration

   .  A
. 0Hz command and RUN
DC bus voltage
. Starting

. DC braking


Error code
Inverter status
at trip point
. Deceleration
Hz

Trip cause

 .  

Hz

 .  

  . 

...
Hz
A
Elapsed RUN time
. Overload restriction



Hz
A
Elapsed powerON time
Note: Indicated inverter status could be
different from actual inverter behavior.
e.g. When PID operation or frequency given
by analog signal, although it seems constant
speed, acceleration and deceleration could
be repeated in very short cycle.
6–14
Restoring Factory Default Settings
You can restore all inverter parameters to the original factory (default) settings according to
area of use. After initializing the inverter, use the powerup test in Chapter 2 to get the
motor running again. To initialize the inverter, follow the steps below.
(1) Select initialization mode in .
(2) If =,  or , select initialization target data in .
(3) If =,  or , select country code in .
(4) Set  in .
(5) The following display appears for a few seconds, and initialization is completed with
 displayed.
Display during initialization
Initialization
mode



Initialization of trip history
Initialization for area A
Initialization for area B
The left digit rotates during initialization

Blinking alternately
Operation
mode after
initialization
mode

“b” Function
Func.
Code
Name
Initialization mode
 (parameters or trip
history)
Description
Select initialized data, five option codes:
Initialization disabled
Clears Trip history
Initializes all Parameters
Clears Trip history and initializes all parameters
Clears Trip history and initializes all parameters and EzSQ program
 data setting
Select initialized parameters, four option codes:
All parameters
All parameters except in/output terminals and communication.
Only registered parameters in xxx.
All parameters except registered parameters in xxx and .
 Initial value select
Select default parameter values:
area A
area B
 Initialization trigger
This is to perform initialization by parameter input with ,  and
. Two option codes:
Initialization disable
Perform initialization
Initialization target
Data of b084 is not saved in EEPROM to avoid unintentional initializing.
6–15
Maintenance and Inspection
Daily and Yearly Inspection Chart
Item Inspected
Check for…
Inspection
Cycle
Daily
Ambient
Extreme
environment temperatures &
humidity
Criteria

Thermometer,
hygrometer
Ambient temperature
between –10 to 50C,
Humidity 90% or less
non-condensing
Abnormal noise &
vib.

Visual and aural
Stable environment for
electronic controls
Power supply Voltage tolerance
voltage

Digital volt meter,
measure between
inverter terminals
[L1], [L2], [L3]
200V class: 50/60 Hz
200 to 240V (-15/+10%)
400V class: 50/60 Hz
380 to 460V (-15/+10%)
Major
Overall devices
Main
circuit
Year
Inspection
Method
Ground
Insulation
Adequate resistance

Refer to Page 6–16 5 MΩ or greater
Mounting
No loose screws

Torque wrench
Components Overheating

Thermal trip events No trip events
IGBT
Resistance value

Refer to Page 6–17
Terminal
block
Secure connections

Visual
No abnormalities
Smoothing
capacitors
Leaking, swelling
Visual
No abnormalities
Relay(s)
Chattering

Aural
Single click when
switching ON or OFF
Resistors
Cracks or discoloring

Visual
Check Ohms of optional
braking res.
Function
Voltage balance
between phases

Measure voltage
between U,V,W
Difference must be 2% or
less.
Protection circuit

e.g. Input Ex.trip
signal and check
inverter behavior
and alarm signal.
Functions properly.
Overall
No odor, discoloring,
corrosion

Visual
No abnormalities
Capacitor
Leaking, swelling

Visual
Undistorted appearance
Cooling fan
Noise

Power down,
manually rotate
Rotation must be smooth
Dust

Visual
Vacuum to clean
Mounting

Visual
Mounted firmly
Dust

Visual
Vacuum to clean
Visual
All LED segments work

Control
circuit
Cooling
Heat sink
Display LEDs
Note 1:
Note 2:
Note 3:
Legibility
M3.5: 1.0Nm
M4: 1.4Nm
M5: 3.0
M6: 3.9 to 5.1Nm
M8: 5.9 to 8.8Nm
The life of a capacitor is affected by the ambient temperature. See page 6–21.
Designed life of a cooling fan is.10 years. However, it is affected by the ambient
temperature and other environmental conditions.
The inverter must be cleaned periodically. If dust accumulates on the fan and heat
sink, it can cause overheating of the inverter.
6–16
Megger test
The megger is a piece of test equipment that uses a high voltage to determine if insulation
degradation has occurred. For inverters, it is important that the power terminals be isolated
from the Earth GND terminal via the proper amount of insulation.
The circuit diagram below shows the inverter wiring for performing the megger test. Just
follow the steps to perform the test:
1. Remove power from the inverter and wait at least 10 minutes before proceeding.
2. Open the front housing panel to access the power wiring.
3. Remove all wires to terminals [R, S, T, PD/+1, P/+, N/–, U, V, and W]. Most importantly,
the input power and motor wires will be disconnected from the inverter.
4. Use a bare wire and short terminals [R, S, T, PD/+1, P/+, N/–, U, V, and W] together as
shown in the diagram.
5. Connect the megger to the inverter Earth GND and to the shorted power terminals as
shown. Then perform the megger test at 500 VDC and verify 5MΩ or greater resistance.
WL200
6. After completing the test, disconnect the megger from the inverter.
7. Reconnect the original wires to terminals [R, S, T, PD/+1, P/+, N/–, U, V, and W].
CAUTION: Do not connect the megger to any control circuit terminals such as intelligent
I/O, analog terminals, etc. Doing so could cause damage to the inverter.
CAUTION: Never test the withstand voltage (HIPOT) on the inverter. The inverter has a
surge protector between the main circuit terminals above and the chassis ground.
CAUTION: Power terminal assignment is different compared to old models such as L100,
L200, X200 series, etc,. Pay attention when wiring the power cable.
6–17
IGBT Test Method
The following procedure will check the inverter transistors (IGBTs) and diodes:
1. Disconnect input power to terminals [R, S, and T] and motor terminals [U, V, and W].
2. Disconnect any wires from terminals [+] and [–] for regenerative braking.
3. Use a Digital Volt Meter (DVM) and set it for 1Ω resistance range. You can check the
status of the charging state of terminals [R, S, T, U, V, W, +, and –] of the inverter and the
probe of the DVM by measuring the charging state.
[PD/+1] [P/+] [RB]
D1
D2
D3
[R/L1]
[S/L2]
[T/L3]
TR1
TR2
TR3
[U/T1]
[V/T2]
[W/T3]
+
D4
D5
D6
TR7
TR4
TR5
TR6
[N/-]
Table Legend
Part
D1
D2
D3
D4
Almost infinite resistance:  ∞ Ω
DVM
Measured
Value
–
+
[R] [+1]
∞Ω
[+1] [R]
0Ω
[S] [+1]
∞Ω
[+1] [S]
0Ω
[T] [+1]
∞Ω
[+1] [T]
0Ω
[R] [–]
0Ω
[–] [R]
∞Ω
Part
D5
D6
TR1
TR2
TR3
Almost zero resistance:  0 Ω
DVM
Measured
Value
–
+
[S] [–]
0Ω
[–] [S]
∞Ω
[T] [–]
0Ω
[–] [T]
∞Ω
[U] [+]
∞Ω
[+] [U]
0Ω
[V] [+]
∞Ω
[+] [V]
0Ω
[W] [+]
∞Ω
[+] [W]
0Ω
Part
TR4
TR5
TR6
TR7
DVM
Measured
Value
– +
[U] [–]
0Ω
[–] [U]
∞Ω
[V] [–]
0Ω
[–] [V]
∞Ω
[W] [–]
0Ω
[–] [W]
∞Ω
[RB] [+]
∞Ω
[+] [RB]
0Ω
[RB] [–]
∞Ω
[–] [RB]
∞Ω
NOTE: The resistance values for the diodes or the transistors will not be exactly the same,
but they will be close. If you find a significance difference, a problem may exist.
NOTE: Before measuring the voltage between [+] and [–] with the DC current range,
confirm that the smoothing capacitor is discharged fully, then execute the tests.
6–18
General Inverter Electrical Measurements
The following table specifies how to measure key system electrical parameters. The
diagrams on the next page show inverter-motor systems and the location of measurement
points for these parameters.
Parameter
Supply voltage
E1
Supply current
I1
Supply power
W1
Circuit location of
measurement
Measuring
instrument
ER – across L1 and L2
ES – across L2 and L3
ET – across L3 and L1
Fundamental
wave effective
value
Single phase
E1 – across L1 and N
Ir – L1
Is – L2
It – L3
Single phase
I1 = L1
W11 – across L1 and L2
W12 – across L2 and L3
Single phase
W1 – across L1 and N
Supply power
factor Pf1
Pf 1 
Notes
Moving-coil type
voltmeter or
rectifier type
voltmeter
Reference Value
Commercial supply
voltage
200V class:
200–240V, 50/60 Hz
400V class:
380–460V, 50/60 Hz
Total effective
value
—
Total effective
value
—
W1
100%
3  E1  I1
—
Output voltage
EO
EU – across U and V
EV – across V and W
EW – across W and U
Rectifier type
voltmeter
Total effective
value
—
Output current
IO
IU – U
IV – V
IW – W
Moving-coil type
ammeter
Total effective
value
—
Output power
WO
WO1 – across U and V
WO2 – across V and W
Electronic type
wattmeter
Total effective
value
—
Output power
factor PfO
Calculate the output power factor from the output voltage E,
output current I, and output power W.
Pf O 
W1
100%
3  EO  I O
—
Note 1:
Use a meter indicating a fundamental wave effective value for voltage, and
meters indicating total effective values for current and power.
Note 2:
The inverter output has a distorted waveform, and low frequencies may cause
erroneous readings. However, the measuring instruments and methods listed
above provide comparably accurate results.
Note 3:
A general-purpose digital volt meter (DVM) is not usually suitable to measure a
distorted waveform (not pure sinusoid).
6–19
The figures below show measurement locations for voltage, current, and power
measurements listed in the table on the previous page. The voltage to be measured is the
fundamental wave effective voltage. The power to be measured is the total effective power.
Single-phase Measurement Diagram
Inverter
L1
L1
I1
U
T1
IIUU
EEUU
E1
W1
V
T2
IIVV
EEVV
N
N
W
WO1
Motor
WO2
T3
IIWW
EEWW
Three-phase Measurement Diagram
Inverter
L1
R
IIRU
EERU
N
EEUU
S
IITW
V
T2
EEVV
W
WO1
IIVV
W2
T
E
ETW
T1
IIUU
W1
IISV
EESV
U
WO2
T3
IIWW
EEWW
Motor
6–20
Inverter Output Voltage Measurement Techniques
Taking voltage measurements around drives equipment requires the right equipment and a
safe approach. You are working with high voltages and high-frequency switching
waveforms that are not pure sinusoids. Digital voltmeters will not usually produce reliable
readings for these waveforms. And, it is usually risky to connect high voltage signals to
oscilloscopes. The inverter output semiconductors have some leakage, and no-load
measurements produce misleading results. So, we highly recommend using the following
circuits to measure voltage for performing the equipment inspections.
R/L1
R/L1
S/L2
S/L2
T/L3
T/L3
HIGH VOLTAGE: Be careful not to touch wiring or connector terminals when working with
the inverters and taking measurements. Be sure to place the measurement circuitry
components above in an insulated housing before using them.
6–21
Capacitor Life Curves
The DC bus inside the inverter uses a large capacitor as shown in the diagram below. The
capacitor handles high voltage and current as it smoothes the power for use by the inverter.
So, any degradation of the capacitor will affect the performance of the inverter.
Power
Input
Variable-frequency Drive
Motor
Converter
R/L1
Rectifier
Inverter
Internal
DC Bus
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
Capacitor life is reduced in higher ambient temperatures, as the graph below demonstrates.
Under the condition of average ambient temperature 40°C, 80% load, 24 hours operation,
the lifetime is 10years. Be sure to keep the ambient temperature at acceptable levels, and
perform maintenance inspections on the fan, heat sink, and other components. If the
inverter is installed on a cabinet, the ambient temperature is the temperature inside the
cabinet.
Operation 24hours/day, 80% load
Operation 24hours/day, 100% load
Ambient
temperature, C
50
40
30
20
10
Years
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
6–22
Warranty
Warranty Terms
The warranty period under normal installation and handling conditions
shall be two (2) years from the date of manufacture, or one (1) year from
the date of installation, whichever occurs first. The warranty shall cover the
repair or replacement, at Hitachi's sole discretion, of ONLY the inverter that
was installed.
1. Service in the following cases, even within the warranty period, shall be
charged to the purchaser:
a. Malfunction or damage caused by mis-operation or modification or
improper repair
b. Malfunction or damage caused by a drop after purchase and
transportation
c. Malfunction or damage caused by fire, earthquake, flood, lightening,
abnormal input voltage, contamination, or other natural disasters
d. If the preset parameter setting (such as b911 to b913, etc.) is out of
specifications.
2. When service is required for the product at your work site, all expenses
associated with field repair shall be charged to the purchaser.
3. Always keep this manual handy; please do not lose it. Please contact
your Hitachi distributor to purchase replacement or additional manuals.
A–1
Appendix A:
Glossary and
Bibliography
In This Appendix…
A
page
-
Glossary ............................................................................................. A–2
-
Bibliography ..................................................................................... A–8
A–2
Glossary
Ambient
Temperature
The air temperature in the chamber containing a powered electronic
unit. A unit’s heat sinks rely on a lower ambient temperature in order to
dissipate heat away from sensitive electronics.
Arrival Frequency
The arrival frequency refers to the set output frequency of the inverter
for the constant speed setting. The arrival frequency feature turns on an
output when the inverter reaches the set constant speed. The inverter
has various arrival frequencies and pulsed or latched logic options.
Base Frequency
The power input frequency for which an AC induction motor is
designed to operate. Most motors will specify a 50 to 60 Hz value. The
Hitachi inverters have a programmable base frequency, so you must
ensure that parameter matches the attached motor. The term base
frequency helps differentiate it from the carrier frequency. See also
Carrier Frequency and Frequency Setting.
Braking Resistor
An energy-absorbing resistor that dissipates energy from a decelerating
load. Load inertia causes the motor to act as a generator during
deceleration. For the X200 inverter models, the braking unit and
braking resistor are optional (external) components. See also
Four-quadrant Operation and Dynamic Braking.
Break-away Torque
The torque a motor must produce to overcome the static friction of a
load, in order to start the load moving.
Carrier Frequency
The frequency of the constant, periodic, switching waveform that the
inverter modulates to generate the AC output to the motor. See also
PWM.
CE
A regulatory agency for governing the performance of electronic
products in Europe. Drive installations designed to have CE approval
must have particular filter(s) installed in the application.
Choke
An inductor that is tuned to react at radio frequencies is called a
“choke,” since it attenuates (chokes) frequencies above a particular
threshold. Tuning is often accomplished by using a movable magnetic
core. In variable-frequency drive systems, a choke positioned around
high-current wiring can help attenuate harmful harmonics and protect
equipment. See also Harmonics.
DC Braking
The inverter DC braking feature stops the AC commutation to the
motor, and sends a DC current through the motor windings in order to
stop the motor. Also called “DC injection braking,” it has little effect at
high speed, and is used as the motor is nearing a stop.
Deadband
In a control system, the range of input change for which there is no
perceptible change in the output. In PID loops, the error term may have
a dead band associated with it. Deadband may or may not be desirable;
it depends on the needs of the application.
A–3
Diode
A semiconductor device that has a voltage-current characteristic that
allows current to flow only in one direction, with negligible leakage
current in the reverse direction. See also Rectifier.
Duty Cycle
1. The percent of time a square wave of fixed frequency is ON (high)
versus OFF (low).
2. The ratio of operating time of a device such as a motor to its resting
time. This parameter usually is specified in association with the
allowable thermal rise for the device.
Dynamic Braking
For the WL200 inverter models, the braking unit and braking resistor
are optional (external) components. The dynamic braking feature
shunts the motor-generated EMF energy into a special braking resistor.
The added dissipation (braking torque) is effective at higher speeds,
having a reduced effect as the motor nears a stop.
EDM
[Functional Safety Related Term] External Device Monitoring, the output
signal from inverter to external device in order to feed back the status
that the both safety path working properly. Safety certificate is issued
based on the condition that this EDM signal is interfaced to certified
external device to avoid restarting or to inform in case of failure in
safety path.
Error
In process control, the error is the difference between the desired value
or setpoint (SP) and the actual value of the process variable (PV). See
also Process Variable and PID Loop.
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference - In motor/drive systems, the switching of
high currents and voltages creates the possibility of generating radiated
electrical noise that may interfere with the operation of nearby sensitive
electrical instruments or devices. Certain aspects of an installation, such
as long motor lead wire lengths, tend to increase the chance of EMI.
Hitachi provides accessory filter components you can install to decrease
the level of EMI.
Four-quadrant
operation
Referring to a graph of torque versus direction, a four-quadrant drive
can turn the motor either forward or reverse, as well as decelerate in
either direction (see also reverse torque). A load that has a relatively
high inertia and must move in both directions and change directions
rapidly requires four-quadrant capability from its drive.
Free-run Stop
A method of stopping a motor, caused when the inverter simply turns
OFF its motor output connections. This may allow the motor and load
to coast to a stop, or a mechanical brake may intervene and shorten the
deceleration time.
Frequency Setting
While frequency has a broad meaning in electronics, it typically refers
to motor speed for variable-frequency drives (inverters). This is because
the output frequency of the inverter is variable, and is proportional to
the attained motor speed. For example, a motor with a base frequency
of 60 Hz can be speed controlled with an inverter output varying from 0
to 60 Hz. See also Base Frequency, Carrier Frequency, and Slip.
A–4
Harmonics
A harmonic is a whole number multiple of a base of fundamental
frequency. The square waves used in inverters produce high frequency
harmonics, even though the main goal is to produce lower-frequency
sine waves. These harmonics can be harmful to electronics (including
motor windings) and cause radiated energy that interferes with nearby
electronic devices. Chokes, line reactors, and filters are sometimes used
to suppress the transmission of harmonics in an electrical system. See
also Choke.
Horsepower
A unit of physical measure to quantify the amount of work done per
unit of time. You can directly convert between horsepower and Watts
as measurements of power.
IGBT
Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor(IGBT) – A semiconductor transistor
capable of conducting very large currents when in saturation and
capable of withstanding very high voltages when it is OFF. This
high-power bipolar transistor is the type used in Hitachi inverters.
Inertia
The natural resistance a stationary object to being moved by an
external force. See also Momentum.
Intelligent Terminal
A configurable input or output logic function on the Hitachi inverters.
Each terminal may be assigned one of several functions.
Inverter
A device that electronically changes DC to AC current through an
alternating process of switching the input to the output, inverted and
non-inverted. A variable speed drive such as the Hitachi WL200 is also
called an inverter, since it contains three inverter circuits to generate
3-phase output to the motor.
Isolation
Transformer
A transformer with 1:1 voltage ratio that provides electrical isolation
between its primary and secondary windings. These are typically used
on the power input side of the device to be protected. An isolation
transformer can protect equipment from a ground fault or other
malfunction of nearby equipment, as well as attenuate harmful
harmonics and transients on the input power.
Jogging Operation
Usually done manually, a jog command from an operator’s panel
requests the motor/drive system to run indefinitely in a particular
direction, until the machine operator ends the jog operation.
Jump Frequency
A jump frequency is a point on the inverter output frequency range that
you want the inverter to skip around. This feature may be used to avoid
a resonant frequency, and you can program up to three jump
frequencies in the inverter.
Line Reactor
A three-phase inductor generally installed in the AC input circuit of an
inverter to minimize harmonics and to limit short-circuit current.
Momentum
The physical property of a body in motion that causes it to remain in
motion. In the case of motors, the rotor and attached load are rotating
and possesses angular momentum.
A–5
Motor Load
In motor terminology, motor load consists of the inertia of the physical
mass that is moved by the motor and the related friction from guiding
mechanisms. See also Inertia.
Multi-speed
Operation
The ability of a motor drive to store preset discrete speed levels for the
motor, and control motor speed according to the currently selected
speed preset. The Hitachi inverters have 16 preset speeds.
NEC
The National Electric Code is a regulatory document that governs
electrical power and device wiring and installation in the United States.
NEMA
The National Electric Manufacturer’s Association. NEMA Codes are a
published series of device ratings standards. Industry uses these to
evaluate or compare the performance of devices made by various
manufacturers to a known standard.
Open-collector
Outputs
A common logic-type discrete output that uses an NPN transistor that
acts as a switch to a power supply common, usually ground. The
transistor’s collector is open for external connection (not connected
internally). Thus, the output sinks external load current to ground.
Power Factor
A ratio that expresses a phase difference (timing offset) between
current and voltage supplied by a power source to a load. A perfect
power factor = 1.0 (no phase offset). Power factors less than one cause
some energy loss in power transmission wiring (source to load).
PID Loop
Proportional - Integral-Derivative - A mathematical model used for
process control. A process controller maintains a process variable (PV)
at a setpoint (SP) by using its PID algorithm to compensate for dynamic
conditions and vary its output to drive the PV toward the desired value.
For variable-frequency drives, the process variable is the motor speed.
See also Error.
Process Variable
A physical property of a process that is of interest because it affects the
quality of the primary task accomplished by the process. For an
industrial oven, temperature is the process variable. See also PID Loop
and Error.
Proof Test
[Functional Safety Related Term] The test to be carried out periodically
to confirm the proper working of safety path. Safety certificate is issued
based on the condition that this proof test is carried out at least once a
year.
PWM
Pulse-width modulation: A type of AC adjustable frequency drive that
accomplishes frequency and voltage control at the output section
(inverter) of the drive. The drive output voltage waveform is at a
constant amplitude, and by “chopping” the waveform (pulsewidthmodulating), the average voltage is controlled. The chopping frequency
is sometimes called the Carrier Frequency.
A–6
Reactance
The impedance of inductors and capacitors has two components. The
resistive part is constant, while the reactive part changes with applied
frequency. These devices have a complex impedance (complex
number), where the resistance is the real part and the reactance is the
imaginary part.
Rectifier
An electronic device made of one or more diodes that converts AC
power into DC power. Rectifiers are usually used in combination with
capacitors to filter (smooth) the rectified waveform to closely
approximate a pure DC voltage source.
Regenerative
Braking
A particular method of generating reverse torque to a motor, an
inverter will switch internally to allow the motor to become a generator
and will either store the energy internally, deliver the braking energy
back to the main power input, or dissipate it with a resistor.
Regulation
The quality of control applied to maintain a parameter of interest at a
desired value. Usually expressed as a percent (±) from the nominal,
motor regulation usually refers to its shaft speed.
Reverse Torque
The torque applied in the direction opposite to motor shaft rotation. As
such, reverse torque is a decelerating force on the motor and its
external load.
Rotor
The windings of a motor that rotate, being physically coupled to the
motor shaft. See also Stator.
Saturation Voltage
For a transistor semiconductor device, it is in saturation when an
increase in input current no longer results in an increase in the output
current. The saturation voltage is the voltage drop across the device.
The ideal saturation voltage is zero.
Sensorless Vector
Control
A technique used in some variable-frequency drives (featured in some
other Hitachi inverter model families) to rotate the force vector in the
motor without the use of a shaft position sensor (angular). Benefits
include an increase in torque at the lowest speed and the cost savings
from the lack of a shaft position sensor.
Setpoint (SP)
The setpoint is the desired value of a process variable of interest. See
also Process Variable (PV) and PID Loop.
Single-phase power
An AC power source consisting of Hot and Neutral wires. An Earth
Ground connection usually accompanies them. In theory, the voltage
potential on Neutral stays at or near Earth Ground, while Hot varies
sinusoidally above and below Neutral. This power source is named
Single Phase to differentiate it from three-phase power sources. Some
Hitachi inverters can accept single phase input power, but they all
output three-phase power to the motor. See also Three-phase.
Slip
The difference between the theoretical speed of a motor at no load
(determined by its inverter output waveforms) and the actual speed.
Some slip is essential in order to develop torque to the load, but too
much will cause excessive heat in the motor windings and/or cause the
motor to stall.
A–7
Squirrel Cage
A “nick-name” for the appearance of the rotor frame assembly for an
AC induction motor.
Stator
The windings in a motor that are stationary and coupled to the power
input of the motor. See also Rotor.
Tachometer
1. A signal generator usually attached to the motor shaft for the
purpose of providing feedback to the speed controlling device of
the motor.
2. A speed-monitoring test meter that may optically sense shaft
rotation speed and display it on a readout.
Thermal Switch
An electromechanical safety device that opens to stop current flow
when the temperature at the device reaches a specific temperature
threshold. Thermal switches are sometimes installed in the motor in
order to protect the windings from heat damage. The inverter can use
thermal switch signals to trip (shut down) if the motor overheats. See
also Trip.
Thermistor
A type of temperature sensor that changes its resistance according to
its temperature. The sensing range of thermistors and their ruggedness
make them ideal for motor overheating detection. Hitachi inverters
have built-in thermistor input circuits, which can detect an overheated
motor and shut off (trip) the inverter output.
Three-phase power
An AC power source with three Hot connections that have phase offsets
of 120 degrees is a 3-phase power source. Usually, Neutral and Earth
Ground wires accompany the three Hot connections. Loads may be
configured in a delta or Y configuration. A Y-connected load such as an
AC induction motor will be a balanced load; the currents in all the Hot
connections are the same. Therefore, the Neutral connection is
theoretically zero. This is why inverters that generate 3-phase power for
motors do not generally have a Neutral connection to the motor.
However, the Earth Ground connection is important for safety reasons,
and is provided.
Torque
The rotational force exerted by a motor shaft. The units of
measurement consist of the distance (radius from shaft center axis) and
force (weight) applied at that distance. Units are usually given as
pound-feet, ounce-inches, or Newton-meters.
Transistor
A solid state, three-terminal device that provides amplification of
signals and can be used for switching and control. While transistors
have a linear operating range, inverters use them as high-powered
switches. Recent developments in power semiconductors have
produced transistors capable of handling high voltages and currents, all
with high reliability. The saturation voltage has been decreasing,
resulting in less heat dissipation. Hitachi inverters use state-of-the-art
semiconductors to provide high performance and reliability in a
compact package. See also IGBT and Saturation Voltage.
A–8
Trip Event
An event that causes the inverter to stop operation is called a “trip”
event (as in tripping a circuit breaker). The inverter keeps a history log
of trip events. They also require an action to clear.
Watt Loss
A measure of the internal power loss of a component, the difference
between the power it consumes and what its output delivers. An
inverter’s watt loss is the input power minus the power delivered to the
motor. The watt loss is typically highest when an inverter is delivering
its maximum output. Therefore, watt loss is usually specified for a
particular output level. Inverter watt loss specifications are important
when designing enclosures.
Bibliography
Title
Variable Speed Drive Fundamentals, 2nd Ed.
Electronic Variable Speed Drives
Hitachi Inverter Technical Guide Book
Author and Publisher
Phipps, Clarence A.
The Fairmont Press, Inc. / Prentice-Hall, Inc. 1997
Brumbach, Michael E.
Delmar Publishers 1997
ISBN 0-8273-6937-9
Published by Hitachi, Ltd. Japan 1995
Publication SIG-E002
B–1
Appendix B:
Modbus Network
Communication
In This Appendix…
B
page
-
Introduction .......................................................................................B–2
-
Connecting the Inverter to Modbus ...............................................B–3
-
Network Protocol Reference............................................................B–5
-
Explanation of function codes ...................................................... B–10
-
Modbus Data Listing ...................................................................... B–24
B–2
Introduction
WL200 Series inverters have built-in RS-485 serial communications, featuring the Modbus
RTU protocol. The inverters can connect directly to existing factory networks or work with
new networked applications, without any extra interface equipment. The specifications are
in the following table.
If any network option card connected, Modbus cannot work.
Item
Specifications
User-selectable
Communication mode
Character code
LSB placement
Electrical interface
Data bits
Parity
2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19.2k / 38.4k /
57.6k / 76.8k / 115.2k bps
Asynchronous
Binary
Transmits LSB first
RS-485 differential transceiver
8-bit (Modbus RTU mode)
None / even / odd
Stop bits
Startup convention
Wait time for response
1 or 2 bits
One-way start from host device
0 to 1000 msec.
Connections
Connector
Station address numbers from 1 to 32
Terminal connector
Overrun, Framing block check code,
CRC-16, or horizontal parity
500m maximum
Transmission speed
Error check
Cable length













The network diagram below shows a series of inverters communicating with a host
computer. Each inverter must have a unique address, from 1 to 32, on the network. In a
typical application, a host computer or controller is the master and each of the inverter(s) or
other devices is a slave.
1
2
31
B–3
Connecting the Inverter to Modbus
Modbus connector is in control terminal block as below. Note that RJ45 connector (RS-422) is
used for external operator only.
Dip switch for termination resistor
7
SN
SP
EO
6
EA
5
H
4
O
3
OI
2
L
1
AM
L
CM2
PLC
12
USB
RS-422
(Operator)
P24
11
RS-485
(Modbus)
External device
(Master)
-
+
SP
SN
SP SN
SP SN
SP SN
WL200 (No.2)
WL200 (No.3)
WL200 (No.n)
200
-
WL2
00 (No.1)
Terminate Network Wiring - The RS-485 wiring must be terminated at each physical end
to suppress electrical reflections and help decrease transmission errors. WL200 has a
built-in 200 resistor activated by a dip switch. Select termination resistors that match the
characteristic impedance of the network cable. The diagram above shows a network with
the needed termination resistor at each end.
B–4
Inverter Parameter Setup - The inverter has several settings related to Modbus
communications. The table below lists them together. The Required column indicates which
parameters must be set properly to allow communications. You may need to refer to the
host computer documentation in order to match some of its settings.
Func.
Code
Name
Required
Settings
A001
Frequency source

00Keypad potentiometer
01Control terminal
02Function F001 setting
03Modbus network input
10Calculate function output
A002
Run command source

01Control terminal
02Run key on keypad, or digital operator
03 Modbus network input
C071
Communication speed

03 2400 bps
044800 bps
05 9600 bps
06 19.2k bps
0738.4k bps
0857.6k bps
0976.8k bps
10115.2k bps
C072
Modbus Address

Network address, range is 1 to 247
C074
Communication parity

00No parity
01Even parity
02Odd parity
C075
Communication stop bit

Range is 1 or 2
C076
Communication error select

00Trip (Error code E60)
01Decelerate to a stop and trip
02Disable
03Free run stop (coasting)
04Decelerate to a stop
C077
Communication error time-out

Comm. Watchdog timer period,
range is 0.00 to 99.99 sec.
C078
Communication wait time

Time the inverter waits after receiving a
message before it transmits.
Range is 0. to 1000. ms
NOTE: When you change any of the parameters above, the inverter power must be
rebooted in order to activate new parameters. Instead of rebooting, turning ON/OFF of
reset terminal works as same.
B–5
Network Protocol Reference
Transmission procedure
The transmission between the external control equipment and the inverter takes the
procedure below.
 Query - A frame sent from the external control equipment to the inverter
 Response - A frame returned from inverter to the external control equipment
The inverter returns the response only after the inverter receives a query from the external
control equipment and does not output the response positively. Each frame is formatted
(with commands) as follows:
Frame Format
Header (silent interval)
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
Trailer (silent interval)
B–6
Message Configuration: Query
Slave address:
 This is a number of 1 to 32 assigned to each inverter (slave). (Only the inverter having
the address given as a slave address in the query can receive the query.)
 When slave address “0” is specified, the query can be addressed to all inverters
simultaneously. (Broadcasting)
 In broadcasting, you cannot call and loop back data.

Slave Address 1-247 in Modbus specification. When master address the slave 250-254,
broadcast toward specific slave address. Slave doesn’t answer back. And this function is
valid for the write command (05h, 06h, 0Fh, 10h)
Slave address
250 (Fah)
251 (FBh)
252 (FCh)
253 (FDh)
254 (FEh)
Broadcast to
Broadcast to Slave address 01to 09
Broadcast to Slave address 10 to 19
Broadcast to Slave address 20 to 29
Broadcast to Slave address 30 to 39
Broadcast to Slave address 40 to 247
B–7
Data:
 A function command is set here.
 The data format used in the WL200 series is corresponding to the Modbus data format
below.
Name of Data
Coil
Holding Register
Description
Binary data that can be referenced and changed ( 1 bit long)
16-bit data that can be referenced and changed
Function code:
Specify a function you want to make the inverter execute. Function codes available to the
WL200 series are listed below.
Function
Code
01h
03h
05h
06h
08h
0Fh
10h
17h
Function
Read Coil Status
Read Holding Resistor
Write in Coil
Write in Holding Register
Loopback Test
Write in Coils
Write in Registers
Read/Write Holding Register
Maximum data size
(bytes available
per message)
4
32
2
2

4
32
32
Maximum number of
data elements available
per message
32 coils (in bits)
16 registers (in bytes)
1 coil (in bits)
1 register (in bytes)

32 coils (in bits)
16 registers (in bytes)
16 registers (in bytes)
Error check:
Modbus-RTU uses CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) for error checking.
 The CRC code is 16-bit data that is generated for 8-bit blocks of arbitrary length.
 The CRC code is generated by a generator polynomial CRC-16 (X16+ X15+ X2+ 1).
Header and trailer (silent interval):
Latency is the time between the reception of a query from the master and transmission of a
response from the inverter.
 3.5 characters (24 bits) are always required for latency time. If the latency time shorter
than 3.5 characters, the inverter returns no response.
 The actual transmission latency time is the sum of silent interval (3.5 characters long) +
C078 (transmission latency time).
B–8
Message Configuration: Response
Transmission time required:
 A time period between reception of a query from the master and transmission of a
response from the inverter is the sum of the silent interval (3.5 characters long) + C078
(transmission latency time).
 The master must provide a time period of the silent interval (3.5 characters long or
longer) before sending another query to an inverter after receiving a response from the
inverter.
Normal response:
 When receiving a query that contains a function code of Loopback (08h), the inverter
returns a response of the same content of the query.
 When receiving a query that contains a function code of Write in Register or Coil (05h,
06h, 0Fh, or 10h), the inverter directly returns the query as a response.
 When receiving a query that contains a function code of Read Register or Coil (01h or
03h), the inverter returns, as a response, the read data together with the same slave
address and function code as those of the query.
Response when an error occurs:
 When finding any error in a query (except for a transmission error), the inverter returns
an exception response without executing anything.
 You can check the error by the function code in the response. The function code of the
exception response is the sum of the function code of the query and 80h.
 The content of the error is known from the exception code.
Field Configuration
Slave address
Function code
Exception code
CRC-16
Exception
Code
01h
02h
03h
21h
22h
23h
Description
The specified function is not supported.
The specified function is not found.
The format of the specified data is not acceptable.
The data to be written in a holding register is outside the inverter.
The specified functions are not available to the inverter.
 Function to change the content of a register that cannot be changed while the
inverter is in service
 Function to submit an ENTER command during running (UV)
 Function to write in a register during tripping (UV)
 Function to change the I/O terminal configuration which is not allowed.
 Function to change active state of RS (reset) terminal
 Function to write in a register during auto-tuning
 Function to write in a register locked by password
The register (or coil) to be written in is read-only
B–9
No response occurs:
In the cases below, the inverter ignores a query and returns no response.
 When receiving a broadcasting query
 When detecting a transmission error in reception of a query
 When the slave address set in the query is not equal to the slave address of the inverter
 When a time interval between data elements constituting a message is shorter than 3.5
characters
 When the data length of the query is invalid
 When broadcast message received.
NOTE: Provide a timer in the master and make the master retransmit the same query when
no response is made within a preset time period after the preceding query was sent.
B–10
Explanation of function codes
Read Coil Status [01h]:
This function reads the status (ON/OFF) of selected coils. An example follows below.
 Read intelligent input terminals [1] to [7] of an inverter having a slave address “8”.
 This example assumes the intelligent input terminals have terminal states listed below.
Item
Data
Intelligent input
terminal
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Coil number
Coil Status
0007h
ON
0008h
OFF
0009h
ON
000Ah
OFF
000Bh
OFF
000Ch
OFF
000Dh
ON
Query:
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Response:
Field Name
Slave address *1
Function code
Coil start address *4
(high order)
Coil start address *4
(low order)
Number of coils
(high order *2)
Number of coils
(low order *2)
CRC-16 (high order)
CRC-16 (low order)
Example
(Hex)
08
01
No.
Field Name
Example
(Hex)
08
01
1
2
Slave address
Function code
00
3
Data size (in bytes)
01
06
4
Coil data *3
45
00
5
CRC-16 (high order)
93
07
6
CRC-16 (low order)
E7
9D
50
Note 1:
Broadcasting is disabled.
Note 2:
When 0 or more than 31 is specified as a number of coils, error code “03h” is
returned.
Note 3:
Data is transferred by the specified number of data bytes (data size).
Note 4:
The PDU Coils are addressed starting at zero. Therefore coils numbered 1-31 are
addressed as 0-30. Coil address value (transmitted on Modbus line) is 1 less than
the Coil Number.
 The data set in the response shows terminal state of coils 0007h to 000Dh.
 Data “45h = 01000101b” indicates the following assuming coil 7 is the LSB.
Item
Coil Number
Coil Status
000Dh
ON
000Ch
OFF
000Bh
OFF
Data
000Ah
OFF
0009h
ON
0008h
OFF
0007h
ON
 When a read coil is outside the defined coils, the final coil data to be transmitted
contains “0“as the status of the coil outside the range.
 When the Read Coil Status command cannot be executed normally, see the exception
response.
B–11
Read Holding Register [03h]:
This function reads the contents of the specified number of consecutive holding registers
(of specified register addresses). An example follows below.
 Reading Trip monitor 1 factor and trip frequency, current, and voltage from an inverter
having a slave address “1”.
 This example assumes the previous three trip factors are as follows:
WL200 Command
Register Number
Trip factor
d081
d081
4
5
6
7
8
d081
0015h
0016h
0017h
9.90Hz
3.00A
284V
(frequency)
0012h
Over-Current
(E03)
0013h
Accelerating (4)
(output current) (DC-bus Voltage)
Response:
No.
3
d081
(inverter status)
Query:
1
2
d081
(factor)
Field Name
Slave address *1
Function code
Register start address *3
(high order)
Register start address *3
(low order)
Number of holding
registers (high order)
Number of holding
registers(low order)
CRC-16 (high order)
CRC-16 (low order)
Example
(Hex)
No.
01
03
1
2
Slave address
Function code
01
03
00
3
Data size (in bytes) *2
0C
11
4
Register data 1 (high order)
00
00
5
Register data 1 (low order)
03
06
6
Register data 2 (high order)
00
95
CD
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Register data 2 (low order)
Register data 3 (high order)
Register data 3 (low order)
Register data 4 (high order)
Register data 4 (low order)
Register data 5 (high order)
Register data 5 (low order)
Register data 6 (high order)
Register data 6 (low order)
CRC-16 (high order)
CRC-16 (low order)
04
00
00
03
DE
01
2C
01
1C
C6
B8
Field Name
Example
(Hex)
Note 1:
Broadcasting is disabled.
Note 2:
Data is transferred by the specified number of data bytes (data size). In this case,
6 bytes are used to return the content of three holding registers.
Note 3:
The PDU Register Number are addressed starting at zero. Therefore register
numbered “0012h” are addressed as “0011h”. Register address value (transmitted
on Modbus line) is 1 less than the Register Number.
B–12
The data set in the response is as follows:
Response Buffer
Register Number
Register Data
Trip data
Response Buffer
Register Number
Register Data
Trip data
4-5
6-7
8-9
12+0
12+0
12+1
12+1
12+2
12+2
(high order) (low order) (high order) (low order) (high order) (low order)
0003h
0004h
00h
00h
Trip factor (E03)
Inverter status (4)
Not used
10-11
12-13
14-15
12+3
12+3
12+4
12+4
12+5
12+5
(high order) (low order) (high order) (low order) (high order) (low order)
03DE
012Ch
011Ch
Frequency (9.90Hz)
Output current (3.00A)
DC-bus voltage (284V)
When the Read Holding Register command cannot be executed normally, refer to the
exception response.
Write in Coil [05h]:
This function writes data in a single coil. Coil status changes are as follows:
Data
Change data (high order)
Change data (low order)
Coil Status
OFF to ON
FFh
00h
ON to OFF
00h
00h
An example follows (note that to command the inverter, set A002=03):
 Sending a RUN command to an inverter having slave address “8”
 This example writes in coil number “1.”
Query:
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Response:
Field Name
Slave address *1
Function code
Coil start address *2
(high order)
Coil start address *2
(low order)
Change data
(high order)
Change data
(low order)
CRC-16 (high order)
CRC-16 (low order)
Example
(Hex)
08
05
No.
1
2
00
3
00
4
FF
5
00
6
8C
A3
7
8
Field Name
Slave address
Function code
Coil start address *2
(high order)
Coil start address *2
(low order)
Change data
(high order)
Change data
(low order)
CRC-16 (high order)
CRC-16 (low order)
Example
(Hex)
08
05
00
00
FF
00
8C
A3
Note 1:
No response is made for a broadcasting query.
Note 2:
The PDU Coils are addressed starting at zero. Therefore coils numbered 1-31 are
addressed as 0-30. Coil address value (transmitted on Modbus line) is 1 less than
the Coil Number.
When writing in a selected coil fails, see the exception response.
B–13
Write in Holding Register [06h]:
This function writes data in a specified holding register. An example follows:
 Write “50.00Hz” as the first Multi-speed 0 (A020) in an inverter having slave address “5”.
 This example uses change data “5000(1388h)” to set “50.00Hz” as the data resolution of
the register “1217h” holding the first Multi-speed 0 (A020) is 0.01Hz
Query:
Response:
No.
Field Name
1
2
Slave address *1
Function code
Register start address *2
(high order)
Register start address *2
(low order)
Change data
(high order)
Change data
(low order)
CRC-16 (high order)
CRC-16 (low order)
3
4
5
6
7
8
Example
(Hex)
No.
Field Name
08
06
1
2
12
3
16
4
13
5
88
6
60
B9
7
8
Slave address
Function code
Register start address *2
(high order)
Register start address *2
(low order)
Change data
(high order)
Change data
(low order)
CRC-16 (high order)
CRC-16 (low order)
Example
(Hex)
08
06
12
16
13
88
60
B9
Note 1:
No response is made for a broadcasting query.
Note 2:
The PDU Register Number are addressed starting at zero. Therefore register
numbered “1217h” are addressed as “1216h”. Register address value (transmitted
on Modbus line) is 1 less than the Register Number.
When writing in a selected holding register fails, see the exception response.
B–14
Loopback Test [08h]:
This function checks a master-slave transmission using any test data. An example follows:
 Send test data to an inverter having slave address “1” and receiving the test data from
the inverter (as a loopback test).
Query:
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Response:
Field Name
Slave address *1
Function code
Test subcode
(high order)
Test subcode
(low order)
Data (high order)
Data (low order)
CRC-16 (high order)
CRC-16 (low order)
Note 1:
Example
(Hex)
01
08
No.
1
2
00
3
00
4
Any
Any
CRC
CRC
5
6
7
8
Field Name
Slave address *1
Function code
Test subcode
(high order)
Test subcode
(low order)
Data (high order)
Data (low order)
CRC-16 (high order)
CRC-16 (low order)
Example
(Hex)
01
08
00
00
Any
Any
CRC
CRC
Broadcasting is disabled.
When test subcode is for echo (00h, 00h) only and not available to the other commands.
B–15
Write in Coils [0Fh]:
This function writes data in consecutive coils. An example follows:
 Change the state of intelligent input terminal [1] to [5] of an inverter having a slave
address “8”.
 This example assumes the intelligent input terminals have terminal states listed below.
Item
Intelligent input
terminal
Coil number
Coil Status
Data
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
0007h
ON
0008h
ON
0009h
ON
000Ah
OFF
000Bh
ON
000Ch
OFF
000Dh
OFF
Query:
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Response:
Field Name
Slave address *1
Function code
Coil start address *3
(high order)
Coil start address *3
(low order)
Number of coils
(high order)
Number of coils
(low order)
Byte number *2
Change data
(high order)
Change data
(low order)
CRC-16 (high order)
CRC-16 (low order)
Example
(Hex)
08
0F
No.
1
2
Field Name
00
3
06
4
00
5
07
6
02
7
Slave address
Function code
Coil start address *3
(high order)
Coil start address *3
(low order)
Number of coils
(high order)
Number of coils
(low order)
CRC-16 (high order)
17
8
CRC-16 (low order)
Example
(Hex)
08
0F
00
06
00
07
F4
91
00
82
52
Note 1:
No response is made for a broadcasting query.
Note 2:
The change data is a set of high-order data and low-order data. So when the size
(in bytes) of data to be changed is an odd start coil number (“7”), add “1” to the
data size (in bytes) to make it an even number.
Note 3:
The PDU Coils are addressed starting at zero. Therefore coils numbered 1-31 are
addressed as 0-30. Coil address value (transmitted on Modbus line) is 1 less than
the Coil Number.
B–16
Write in Holding Registers [10h]:
This function writes data in consecutive holding registers. An example follows:
 Write “3000 seconds” as the first acceleration time 1 (F002) in an inverter having a slave
address “8”.
 This example uses change data “300000(493E0h)” to set “3000 seconds” as the data
resolution of the registers “1103h” and “1104h” holding the first acceleration time 1
(F002) is 0.01 second.
Query:
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Response:
Field Name
Slave address *1
Function code
Start address *3
(high order)
Start address *3
(low order)
Number of holding
registers (high order)
Number of holding
registers (low order)
Byte number *2
Change data 1
(high order)
Change data 1
(low order)
Change data 2
(high order)
Change data 2
(low order)
CRC-16 (high order)
CRC-16 (low order)
Example
(Hex)
08
10
No.
1
2
Field Name
11
3
02
4
00
5
02
6
04
7
Slave address
Function code
Start address *3
(high order)
Start address *3
(low order)
Number of holding
registers (high order)
Number of holding
registers (low order)
CRC-16 (high order)
00
8
CRC-16 (low order)
Example
(Hex)
08
10
11
02
00
02
E5
AD
04
93
E0
B0
03
Note 1:
No response is made for a broadcasting query.
Note 2:
This is not the number of holding registers. Specify the number of bytes of data
to be changed.
Note 3:
The PDU Register Number are addressed starting at zero. Therefore register
numbered “1103h” are addressed as “1102h”. Register address value (transmitted
on Modbus line) is 1 less than the Register Number.
When writing in selected holding registers fails, see the exception response.
B–17
Read/Write Holding Registers [17h]:
This function is to read and write data in consecutive holding registers. An example follows:
 Write “50.00Hz” as the set frequency (F001) in an inverter having a slave address “1” and
then to read out the output frequency (d001).
Query:
Response:
No.
Field Name
1
2
Slave address *1
Function code
Start address to read *3
(high order)
Start address to read *3
(low order)
3
4
Example
(Hex)
01
17
1
2
Slave address
Function code
Example
(Hex)
01
17
10
3
Byte number n
02
01
4
Register Data 1 (high
order)
13
No.
Field Name
5
Number of holding
registers to read (high
order)
00
5
Register Data 1 (low
order)
88
6
Number of holding
registers to read (low
order)
01
6
CRC-16 (high order)
B0
7
Start address to write *3
(high order)
00
7
CRC-16 (low order)
E2
8
Start address to write *3
(low order)
01
9
Number of holding
registers to write (high
order)
00
10
11
12
13
14
15
Number of holding
registers to write (low
order)
Byte number to write*2
Change data 1
(high order)
Change data 1
(low order)
CRC-16 (high order)
CRC-16 (low order)
Note 1:
01
02
13
88
5D
2C
Register address value (transmitted on Modbus line) is 1 less than the Register
Number.
When writing in selected holding registers fails, see the exception response.
B–18
Exception Response:
When sending a query (excluding a broadcasting query) to an inverter, the master always
requests a response from the inverter. Usually, the inverter returns a response according to
the query. However, when finding an error in the query, the inverter returns an exception
response. The exception response consists of the fields shown below.
Field Configuration
Slave address
Function code
Exception code
CRC-16
The content of each field is explained below. The function code of the exception response is
the sum of the function code of the query and 80h. The exception code indicates the factor
of the exception response.
Query
01h
03h
05h
06h
0Fh
10h
Code
01h
02h
03h
21h
22h
23h
Function Code
Exception Response
81h
83h
85h
86h
8Fh
90h
Exception Code
Description
The specified function is not supported.
The specified function is not found.
The format of the specified data is not acceptable.
The data to be written in a holding register is outside the inverter.
The specified functions are not available to the inverter.
 Function to change the content of a register that cannot be changed while the
inverter is in service
 Function to submit an ENTER command during running (UV)
 Function to write in a register during tripping (UV)
 Function to change the I/O terminal configuration which is not allowed.
 Function to change active state of RS (reset) terminal
 Function to write in a register locked by password
The register (or coil) to be written in is read-only
B–19
Store New Register Data (ENTER command)
After being written in a selected holding register by the Write in Holding Register command
(06h) or in selected holding registers by the Write in Holding Registers command (10h),
new data is temporary and still outside the storage element of the inverter. If power to the
inverter is shut off, this new data is lost and the previous data returns. There are following
two methods to store this new data in the storage element of the inverter.
1) ENTER command:
 Write any data in all memory (of a holding register at 0900h) by the Write in Holding
Register command [06h].
NOTE: The ENTER command takes much time to run. You can check its progress by
monitoring the Data Writing signal (of a coil at 0049h).
NOTE: The service life of the storage element of the inverter is limited (to about 100,000
write operations). Frequent use of the ENTER command may shorten its service life.
2) EEPROM write mode:
 Inverter transfers the EEPROM mode write when the data “1” is written into holding
resister of EEPROM write mode (0902h) with the command [06h] to write data to
registers.
 After the inverter transferred the EEPROM write mode, the data changing with the
command [06h] to write data to registers is written into both volatile memory (RAM) and
nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). The EEPROM write mode is removed simultaneously.
 After the inverter transferred the EEPROM write mode, when the inverter receive
exclusive of the command [06h] to write data to registers, the EEPROM write mode is
removed.
* The difference between ENTER command and EEPROM write mode
ENTER command
Master
EEPROM write mode
WL200
Change parameter
Change parameter
Change parameter
ENTER command
900h=1
Master
Write RAM
Write RAM
Write RAM
All data are written
into EEPROM
WL200
EEPROM write
mode is activated
0902h=1
Change parameter
Change parameter
Changed data is
written into both
RAM and EEPROM
Write RAM
The EEPROM write mode is
available only one command
after transferring the
EEPROM write mode
B–20
EzCOM (Peer-to-Peer communication)
 Besides standard Modbus-RTU communication (slave), WJ200 supports Peer-to-Peer
communication between multiple inverters.
 The max. number of inverter in the network is up to 247 (32 without repeater).
 One administrator inverter is necessary in the network, and the other inverters behave as
master or slave.
 Be sure to set station No.1 as an administrator inverter, which controls master inverter
according to user setting. The others will be slave inverters. An admin. inverter is fixed,
but a master inverter always turns by rotation. For this reason, an admin. inverter can be
a master or a slave.
 A master inverter is able to write data to any holding register of designated slave
inverter. The max. number of holding register is up to 5. After writing data completed, a
master inverter will be shift to the next inverter.
 The max. number of master inverter is 8.
Admin. inverter
(1)
Inverter
(2)
Inverter
(3)
Inverter
(4)
Writing data to slaves by a
master (1).
スレーブへデータ送信
Command to change
a master inverter. (Note 1)
Writing data to slaves by a
master (2).
スレーブへデータ送信
Command to change
a master inverter.
Writing data to slaves by a
master (3).
スレーブへデータ送信
Command to change
a master inverter.
Writing data to slaves by a
master (4).
スレーブへデータ送信
: Master inverter
B–21
Note 1:
The command to change a master is issued by an admin. inverter automatically,
which users do not have to take care.
Note 2:
The command to change a master from 01 to 02 is issued after the data is sent
from master inverter 01 to slave and silent interval plus communication wait time
(C078) passed.
Note 3:
Administrative inverter issues the next command to change a master after the
data from master inverters is sent and silent interval plus communication wait
time (C078) passed. In case the data from master inverter cannot be received
within the communication timeout (C077), then the inverter timeouts and the
behaves according to the communication error selection.
Note 4:
Please set the communication timeout as it is valid (C077=0.01 to 99.99). If it is
disabled (C077=0.0), EzCOM function is interrupted in case the data from master
inverter was not received. In case it is interrupted, please turn on/off the power
or reset (reset terminal on/off).
B–22
Func.
code
C072
C076
Name
Modbus address
Selection of the operation after
communication error
C077
Communication timeout limit
C078
Communication wait time
C096
Communication selection
C098
C099
EzCOM start adr. of master
EzCOM end adr. of master
C100
EzCOM starting trigger
P140
P141
P142
P143
P144
P145
P146
P147
P148
P149
P150
P151
P152
P153
P154
P155
C001 to
C007
EzCOM the number of data
EzCOM destination 1 address
EzCOM destination 1 register
EzCOM source 1 register
EzCOM destination 2 address
EzCOM destination 2 register
EzCOM source 2 register
EzCOM destination 3 address
EzCOM destination 3 register
EzCOM source 3 register
EzCOM destination 4 address
EzCOM destination 4 register
EzCOM source 4 register
EzCOM destination 5 address
EzCOM destination 5 register
EzCOM source 5 register
Input terminal function
Data/Range
For
1 to 247
00
ALL
ALL
01
ALL
02
ALL
03
ALL
04
ALL
0.00
0.01 to 99.99
0. to 1000.
00
01
ALL
ALL
ALL
B
02
A
01 to 08
01 to 08
00
01
1 to 5
1 to 247
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
1 to 247
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
1 to 247
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
1 to 247
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
1 to 247
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
A
A
A
A
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
81
A
Description
Network address
tripping
tripping after decelerating
and stopping the motor
ignoring errors
stopping the motor after
free-running
decelerating and stopping
the motor
Disabled
[sec.]
[ms]
Modbus-RTU
EzCOM
EzCOM
< Admin. inverter >
Input terminal
Always
(Note 7)
485: start EzCOM
Which parameters to be set?
ALL : Set all inverters in the network.
A : Set admin. inverter (address=1) only.
B : Set all inverters except admin. inverter.
M : Set master inverters configured in C098 to C099 of admin. inverter.
Note 5:
Address of Administrative inverter is to be set 01 (C072=01).
Note 6:
When selection of operation after communication error is set other than “ignoring errors
(C076=02)”, EzCOM function is interrupted in case of communication timeout on
administrative inverter. In this case, please power off/on or reset (on/off RES terminal) to
recover.
B–23
Note 7:
If EzCOM starting trigger is set as input terminal (C100=00), be sure to configure 81 in
one of input terminals.
Note 8:
If EzCOM starting trigger is set as always (C100=01), administrative inverter starts to send
the data immediately after power on. In case the establishment of the inverter to be
assigned as master of delays and fail to receive the command to change the master, the
data cannot be sent from master and administrative inverter time-outs. When C100=01
selected, please be sure to power up the administrative inverter at last after reconfirming
the establishment of inverters other than administrative inverters.
Note 9:
Although slave addresses are set in a master inverter, data is sent as broadcast address
(00). If a slave inverter receives data to another slave, it will be ignored.
Note 10:
As EzCOM source and destination register, please set the number minus one from the
value listed in the table in “modbus data listing”.
Note 11:
Be sure to avoid to set “08FFh (EEPROM writing)” and “0901h (EEPROM write mode)”
Note 12:
If above parameter is changed, the inverter power must be rebooted in order to activate
new parameters. Instead of rebooting, turning ON/OFF of reset terminal works as same.
Basic function (in case the number of data is 1 (P140=1))
 A master inverter sends data in holding register P143 of the master to a slave inverter of
address P141 and overwrites on holding register P142.
 A master inverter is changed to the next inverter, and repeats same procedure according
to setting of new master inverter.
B–24
Modbus Data Listing
Modbus Coil List
The following tables list the primary coils for the inverter interface to the network. The table
legend is given below.
 Coil Number - The network register address offset for the coil. The coil data is a single
bit (binary) value.
 Item - The functional name of the coil
 R/W - The read-only (R) or read-write (R/W) access permitted to the inverter data
 Setting - The meaning of each of the states of the coils
Coil No.
Item
R/W
Setting
0000h
0001h
0002h
0003h
0004h
0005h
0006h
0007h
0008h
0009h
000Ah
000Bh
000Ch
000Dh
000Eh
000Fh
0010h
0011h
0012h
0013h
0014h
0015h
0016h
0017h
0018h
0019h
001Ah
001Bh
001Ch
001Dh
001Eh
001Fh
0020h
0021h
0022h
0023h
0024h
0025h
0026h
0027h
0028h
0029h
002Ah
002Bh
002Ch
002Dh
(Unused)
Operation command
Rotation direction command
External trip (EXT)
Trip reset (RS)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
Intelligent input terminal [1]
Intelligent input terminal [2]
Intelligent input terminal [3]
Intelligent input terminal [4]
Intelligent input terminal [5]
Intelligent input terminal [6]
Intelligent input terminal [7]
(Reserved)
Operation status
Rotation direction
Inverter ready
(Reserved)
RUN (running)
FA1 (constant-speed reached)
FA2 (set frequency overreached)
OL (overload warning (1))
OD (output deviation for PID control)
AL (alarm signal)
FA3 (set frequency reached)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
UV (under-voltage)
(Reserved)
RNT (operation time over)
ONT (plug-in time over)
THM (thermal alarm signal)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
BRK (brake release)
BER (brake error)
ZS (0 Hz detection signal)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
FA4 (set frequency overreached 2)
FA5 (set frequency reached 2)
OL2 (overload warning (2))
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
(Inaccessible)
1: Run, 0: Stop (valid when A002 = 03)
1: Reverse rotation, 0: Forward rotation (valid when A002 = 03)
1: Trip
1: Reset
1: ON, 0: OFF (*1)
1: ON, 0: OFF (*1)
1: ON, 0: OFF (*1)
1: ON, 0: OFF (*1)
1: ON, 0: OFF (*1)
1: ON, 0: OFF (*1)
1: ON, 0: OFF (*1)
1: Run, 0: Stop (interlocked to "d003")
1: Reverse rotation, 0: Forward rotation (interlocked to "d003")
1: Ready, 0: Not ready
1: Tripping, 0: Normal
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
B–25
Coil No.
002Eh
002Fh
0030h
0031h
0032h
0033h
0034h
0035h
0036h
0037h
0038h
0039h
003Ah
003Bh
003Ch
003Dh
003Eh
003Fh
0040h
0041h
0042h
0043h
0044h
0045h
0046h
0047h
0048h
0049h
004Ah
004Bh
004Ch
004Dh
004Eh
004Fh
0050h
0051h
0052h
0053h
0054h
0055h
0056h
0057h
0058h
0059h-
Item
ODc (Analog O disconnection
detection)
OIDc (Analog OI disconnection
detection)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
FBV (PID feedback comparison)
NDc (communication train
disconnection)
LOG1 (logical operation result 1)
LOG2 (logical operation result 2)
LOG3 (logical operation result 3)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
WAC (capacitor life warning)
WAF (cooling-fan speed drop)
FR (starting contact signal)
OHF (heat sink overheat warning)
LOC (low-current indication signal)
M01 (general output 1)
M02 (general output 2)
M03 (general output 3)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
IRDY (inverter ready)
FWR (forward rotation)
RVR (reverse rotation)
MJA (major failure)
Data writing in progress
CRC error
Overrun
Framing error
Parity error
Sum check error
(Reserved)
WCO (window comparator O)
WCOI (window comparator OI)
(Reserved)
OPDc (option disconnection)
FREF (FQ command source)
REF (RUN command source)
SETM (2nd motor selected)
(Reserved)
EDM (Gate suppress monitor)
(Unused)
R/W
Setting
-
1: ON, 0: OFF
-
1: ON, 0: OFF
R
1: ON, 0: OFF
R
1: ON, 0: OFF
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: Writing in progress, 0: Normal status
1: Error detected, 0: No error (*2)
1: Error detected, 0: No error (*2)
1: Error detected, 0: No error (*2)
1: Error detected, 0: No error (*2)
1: Error detected, 0: No error (*2)
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: Operator, 0: Others
1: Operator, 0: Others
1: 2nd motor selected, 0: 1st motor selected
1: ON, 0: OFF
inaccessible
*1 Normally, this coil is turned on when the corresponding intelligent input terminal on the
control circuit terminal block is turned on or the coil itself is set to on. In this regard, the
operation of the intelligent input terminal has priority over the operation of the coil. If
disconnection of the communication train has disabled the master system from turning off the
coil, turn the corresponding intelligent input terminal on the control circuit block on and off.
This operation turns off the coil.
*2 Communication error data is retained until an error reset command is input. (The data can be
reset during the inverter operation.)
B–26
Modbus Holding Registers
The following tables list the holding registers for the inverter interface to the network. The
table legend is given below.
 Register No. - The network register address offset for the value. Some values have a
high-byte and low-byte address.
 Function name - The standard functional name of the parameter or function for the
inverter
 Function code - The inverter’s reference code for the parameter or function (same as
inverter keypad display)
 R/W - The read-only(R) or read-write access(R/W) permitted to the data in the inverter
 Monitoring and setting items - The numerical range for the network value that is sent
and/or received
TIP: The network values are binary integers. Since these values cannot have an embedded
decimal point, for many parameters it represents the actual value (in engineering units)
multiplied by a factor of 10 or 100. Network communications must use the listed range for
network data. The inverter automatically divides received values by the appropriate factor in
order to establish the decimal point for internal use. Likewise, the network host computer
must apply the same factor when it needs to work in engineering units. However, when
sending data to the inverter, the network host computer must scale values to the integer
range listed for network communications.
 Data resolution - This is the quantity represented by the LSB of the network value, in
engineering units. When the network data range is greater than the inverter’s internal
data range, this 1-bit resolution will be fractional.
List of resistors (frequency setting and status)
Register
No.
0000h
0001h
0002h
Function name
(Unused)
(Reserved)
Frequency setting
Function
code
F001
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
- Inaccessible
R R/W 0 to 40000 (valid when A001 = 03)
0.01 [Hz]
0003h
Inverter status A
-
R
0: Initial status
2: Stopping
3: Running
4: Free-run stop
5: Jogging
0004h
Inverter status B
-
R
0: Stopping, 1: Running, 2: Tripping
-
R
0: --1: Stopping
2: Decelerating
3: Constant-speed
operation
4: Accelerating
5: Forward rotation
-
0005h
Inverter status C
0006h PID feedback
0007h to
(Reserved)
0010h
-
-
R/W 0 to 10000
R
-
6: DC braking
7: Retrying
8: Tripping
9: Under-voltage (UV)
Data
resolution
6: Reverse rotation
7: Switching from fwd.
to rev. rotation,
8: Switching from rev.
to fwd. rotation,
9: Starting fwd.
10: Starting rev.
-
0.01 [%]
-
B–27
Register
No.
Function name
0011h
0012h
0013h
0014h
0015h
0016h
0017h
0018h
0019h
001Ah
001Bh
0012h
0013h
0014h
0015h
0016h
0017h
0018h
0019h
001Ah
001Bh
0012h
0013h
0014h
0015h
0016h
0017h
0018h
0019h
001Ah
001Bh
0012h
0013h
0014h
0015h
0016h
0017h
0018h
0019h
001Ah
001Bh
0012h
0013h
0014h
0015h
0016h
0017h
0018h
0019h
001Ah
001Bh
0012h
0013h
0014h
0015h
0016h
0017h
0018h
0019h
001Ah
001Bh
Trip Counter
Trip info. 1 (factor)
Trip info. 1 (inverter status)
(Reserved)
Trip info. 1 (frequency)
Trip info. 1 (current)
Trip info. 1 (voltage)
Trip info. 1 (running time) (high)
Trip info. 1 (running time) (low)
Trip info. 1 (power-on time) (high)
Trip info. 1 (power-on time) (low)
Trip info. 2 (factor)
Trip info. 2 (inverter status)
(Reserved)
Trip info. 2 (frequency)
Trip info. 2 (current)
Trip info. 2 (voltage)
Trip info. 2(running time) (high)
Trip info. 2 (running time) (low)
Trip info. 2 (power-on time) (high)
Trip info. 2 (power-on time) (low)
Trip info. 3 (factor)
Trip info. 3 (inverter status)
(Reserved)
Trip info. 3 (frequency)
Trip info. 3 (current)
Trip info. 3 (voltage)
Trip info. 3 (running time) (high)
Trip info. 3 (running time) (low)
Trip info. 3 (power-on time) (high)
Trip info. 3 (power-on time) (low)
Trip info. 4 (factor)
Trip info. 4 (inverter status)
(Reserved)
Trip info. 4 (frequency)
Trip info. 4 (current)
Trip info. 4 (voltage)
Trip info. 4 (running time) (high)
Trip info. 4 (running time) (low)
Trip info. 4 (power-on time) (high)
Trip info. 4 (power-on time) (low)
Trip info. 5 (factor)
Trip info. 5 (inverter status)
(Reserved)
Trip info. 5 (frequency)
Trip info. 5 (current)
Trip info. 5 (voltage)
Trip info. 5 (running time) (high)
Trip info. 5 (running time) (low)
Trip info. 5 (power-on time) (high)
Trip info. 5 (power-on time) (low)
Trip info. 6 (factor)
Trip info. 6 (inverter status)
(Reserved)
Trip info. 6 (frequency)
Trip info. 6 (current)
Trip info. 6 (voltage)
Trip info. 6 (running time) (high)
Trip info. 6 (running time) (low)
Trip info. 6 (power-on time) (high)
Trip info. 6 (power-on time) (low)
Function
code
R/W
d080
R
d081
R
d082
d083
d084
d085
d086
R
R
R
R
R
Monitoring and setting items
0 to 65530
See the list of inverter trip factors below
See the list of inverter trip factors below
0 to 40000
Output current at tripping
DC input voltage at tripping
Data
resolution
1 [time]
0.01[Hz]
0.01[A]
1[V]
Cumulative running time at tripping
1[h]
Cumulative power-on time at tripping
1[h]
See the list of inverter trip factors below
See the list of inverter trip factors below
0 to 40000
Output current at tripping
DC input voltage at tripping
0.01[Hz]
0.01[A]
1[V]
Cumulative running time at tripping
1[h]
Cumulative power-on time at tripping
1[h]
See the list of inverter trip factors below
See the list of inverter trip factors below
0 to 40000
Output current at tripping
DC input voltage at tripping
0.01[Hz]
0.01[A]
1[V]
Cumulative running time at tripping
1[h]
Cumulative power-on time at tripping
1[h]
See the list of inverter trip factors below
See the list of inverter trip factors below
0 to 40000
Output current at tripping
DC input voltage at tripping
0.01[Hz]
0.01[A]
1[V]
Cumulative running time at tripping
1[h]
Cumulative power-on time at tripping
1[h]
See the list of inverter trip factors below
See the list of inverter trip factors below
0 to 40000
Output current at tripping
DC input voltage at tripping
0.01[Hz]
0.01[A]
1[V]
Cumulative running time at tripping
1[h]
Cumulative power-on time at tripping
1[h]
See the list of inverter trip factors below
See the list of inverter trip factors below
0 to 40000
Output current at tripping
DC input voltage at tripping
0.01[Hz]
0.01[A]
1[V]
Cumulative running time at tripping
1[h]
Cumulative power-on time at tripping
1[h]
B–28
Register
No.
Function name
004Eh Programming error monitoring
004Fh to
(Reserved)
006Ch
006Dh to
(Reserved)
08Efh
0900h
Writing to EEPROM
0901h (Unused)
0902h EEPROM write mode
0903h to
(Unused)
1000h
Function
code
R/W
d090
R
Warning code
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Monitoring and setting items
-
0: Motor constant recalculation
1: Save all data in EEPROM
W
Other: Motor constant recalculation and save
all data in EEPROM
-
- Inaccessible
W 0 (invalid)
-
-
Data
resolution
-
1 (valid)
Inaccessible
-
Note 1: Assume that the rated current of the inverter is "1000".
Note 2: If a number not less than "1000" (100.0 seconds) is specified, the second value after the
decimal point will be ignored.
Note 3: 0902h setting is referred for one time when following 06H command is executed.
B–29
List of inverter trip factors
Upper part of trip factor code
(indicating the factor)
Name
Lower part of trip factor code
(indicating the inverter status)
Code
Name
Code
No trip factor
Over-current event while at constant speed
0
1
Resetting
Stopping
0
1
Over-current event during deceleration
2
Decelerating
2
Over-current event during acceleration
3
Constant-speed operation
3
Over-current event during other conditions
4
Accelerating
4
Overload protection
5
Operating at zero frequency
5
Braking resistor overload protection
Overvoltage protection
6
7
Starting
DC braking
6
7
EEPROM error
8
Overload restricted
8
Under-voltage protection
9
Current detection error
10
CPU error
11
External trip
USP error
12
13
Ground-fault protection
14
Input overvoltage protection
15
Thermistor thermal protection
19
Inverter thermal trip
21
CPU error
Main circuit error
22
25
Driver error
30
Thermistor error
35
Braking error
36
Safe Stop
37
Low-speed overload protection
Operator connection
38
40
Modbus communication error
41
Easy sequence error (invalid instruction)
43
Easy sequence error (invalid nesting count)
44
Easy sequence execution error 1
Easy sequence user trip 0 to 9
Option error 0 to 9
45
50 to 59
60 to 69
B–30
List of registers (monitoring)
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
Data
resolution
1001h
1002h
1003h
(Reserved)
Output frequency monitor
Output current monitor
d001
d002
R
R
0 to 40000
0 to 65530
1004h
Rotation direction monitoring
d003
R
0: Stopping
1: Forward rotation
1005h
1006h
1007h
Process variable (PV), PID
feedback monitoring
R
0 to 1000000
R
2^0: Terminal 1 to 2^6: Terminal 7
1 bit
1 bit
1008h
1009h
100Ah
100Bh to
1010h
1011h
1012h
1013h
1014h
1015h
1016h
1017h
1018h
1019h
101Ah to
101Ch
101Dh
Intelligent input terminal status
d004 (high)
d004 (low)
d005
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [A]
2: Reverse rotation
0.1 [Hz]
0.1
Intelligent output terminal status
d006
R
2^0: Terminal 11
2^1: Terminal 12
Scaled output frequency monitor
d007 (high)
d007 (low)
R
0 to 399600
-
-
-
d013
d014
d015 (high)
d015 (low)
d016 (high)
d016 (low)
d017 (high)
d017 (low)
d018
R
R
0 to 6000
0 to 1000
R
0 to 9999000
0.1
R
0 to 999900
1 [h]
R
0 to 999900
1 [h]
R
-200 to 1500
0.1 [℃]
-
-
-
d022
R
2^0: Capacitor on main circuit board
2^1: cooling-fan
d023
d024
R
R
0 to 1024
0 to 9999
1
1
-
-
-
-
d102
R
0 to 10000
0.1 [V]
d103
R
0 to 1000
0.1 [%]
d104
R
0 to 1000
0.1 [%]
-
-
-
-
d025(high)
d025(low)
d026(high)
d026(low)
d027(high)
d027(low)
R
R
R
R
R
R
-2147483647 to 2147483647
1
-2147483647 to 2147483647
1
-2147483647 to 2147483647
1
-
-
-
-
(Reserved)
Output voltage monitor
Power monitor
Watt-hour monitor
Elapsed RUN time monitor
Elapsed power-on time monitor
Heat sink temperature monitor
(Reserved)
Life-check monitor
101Eh EzSQ program counter
101Fh EzSQ program number
1020h to
(Reserved)
1025h
DC voltage monitoring
1026h
(across P and N)
1027h BRD load factor monitoring
Electronic thermal overload
1028h
monitoring
1029h to
(Reserved)
102Dh
102Eh
User monitor 1
102Fh
1030h
User monitor 2
1031h
1032h
User monitor 3
1033h
1034h to
(Reserved)
1058h
2^2: Relay Terminal
0.01
0.1 [V]
0.1 [kW]
1 bit
B–31
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
1059h
Frequency source monitor
d062
R
0 (Operator)
1-15 (1-15 Multi-speed)
16 (Jog frequency)
18 (Modbus
communication)
19 (Option)
21 (Potentiometer.
available with
OPE-SR or
OPE-SRmini)
105Ah
Run command source monitor
d063
R
1 (Control terminal)
2 (Operator)
-
-
Inaccessible
-
d130
d131
R
R
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
1
1
-
-
Inaccessible
-
d153(high)
d153(low)
R
R
-999900 to 999900
-
-
Inaccessible
d155(high)
d155(low)
R
R
-999900 to 999900
-
-
Inaccessible
105Bh to
118Dh
108Eh
108Fh
1090h to
10ADh
10AEh
10AFh
10B0h to
10B1h
10B2h
10B3h
10B4h to
1102h
(Unused)
Analog input O monitor
Analog input OI monitor
(Unused)
PID deviation monitor
(Unused)
PID output monitor
(Unused)
23 (Calculate
function output)
24 (EzSQ)
25 ([O] input)
26 ([OI] input)
27 ([O] + [OI] input)
Data
resolution
3 (Modbus network)
4 (Option)
-
-
0.01[%]
0.01[%]
-
B–32
List of registers (function modes)
Parameter group F
Register
No.
1103h
1104h
1105h
1106h
1107h
1108h to
1200h
Function name
Acceleration time (1)
Deceleration time (1)
Keypad Run key routing
(Unused)
Function
code
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
F002 (high)
R/W 0 to 360000
F002 (low)
F003 (high)
R/W 0 to 360000
F003 (low)
F004
R/W 0 (forward rotation)
-
-
Function
code
R/W
Data
resolution
0.01 [sec.]
0.01 [sec.]
1 (reverse rotation)
Inaccessible
-
Parameter group A
Register
No.
Function name
Monitoring and setting items
0 (keypad
potentiometer)
1201h
Frequency source
A001
R/W 1 (control circuit
terminal block)
2 (digital operator)
1202h
Run command source (*)
A002
R/W
1 (control circuit
terminal block)
Data
resolution
3 (Modbus)
4 (option )
7 (easy sequence)
-
10 (operation function
result)
3 (Modbus)
4 (option)
-
2 (digital operator)
1203h
1204h
Base frequency
Maximum frequency
A003
A004
R/W 300 to "maximum frequency"
R/W 300 to 4000(10000)
0.1 [Hz]
0.1 [Hz]
0 (switching between O and OI terminals)
1205h
[AT] selection
A005
R/W
2 (switching between O terminal and keypad
potentiometer)
-
3 (switching between OI terminal and keypad
potentiometer)
1206h to
(Reserved)
120Ah
120Bh (Reserved)
[O] input active range start
120Ch
frequency
120Dh (Reserved)
[O] input active range end
120Eh
frequency
[O] input active range start
120Fh
voltage
[O] input active range end
1210h
voltage
1211h
[O] input start frequency select
A011
-
-
-
-
-
-
R/W 0 to 40000
-
0.01 [Hz]
-
-
A012
R/W 0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
A013
R/W 0 to "[O]-[L] input active range end voltage"
1 [%]
A014
R/W "[O]-[L] input active range start voltage" to 100
1 [%]
A015
R/W 0 (external start frequency)
1 (0 Hz)
1212h
Analog input filter.
A016
1 to 30 or 31 (500 ms filter ±0.1 Hz with
R/W
hysteresis)
1213h
EzSQ selection
A017
R/W
1214h
(Reserved)
-
-
0 (disabling)
1 (PRG terminal)
-
2 (Always)
1
-
(*) After changing the setting, keep the time 40ms or longer before actually give run command
B–33
Register
No.
1215h
1216h
1217h
1218h
1219h
121Ah
121Bh
121Ch
121Dh
121Eh
121Fh
1220h
1221h
1222h
1223h
1224h
1225h
1226h
1227h
1228h
1229h
122Ah
122Bh
122Ch
122Dh
122Eh
122Fh
1230h
1231h
1232h
1233h
1234h
1235h
1236h to
1237h
1238h
1239h
123Ah
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
Multi speed operation selection
A019
R/W 0 (binary)
(Reserved)
Multi-speed freq. 0
(Reserved)
Multi-speed freq. 1
(Reserved)
Multi-speed freq. 2
(Reserved)
Multi-speed freq. 3
(Reserved)
Multi-speed freq. 4
(Reserved)
Multi-speed freq. 5
(Reserved)
Multi-speed freq. 6
(Reserved)
Multi-speed freq. 7
(Reserved)
Multi-speed freq. 8
(Reserved)
Multi-speed freq. 9
(Reserved)
Multi-speed freq. 10
(Reserved)
Multi-speed freq. 11
(Reserved)
Multi-speed freq. 12
(Reserved)
Multi-speed freq. 13
(Reserved)
Multi-speed freq. 14
(Reserved)
Multi-speed freq. 15
A020
A021
A022
A023
A024
A025
A026
A027
A028
A029
A030
A031
A032
A033
A034
A035
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
-
(Reserved)
Jog frequency
Jog stop mode
(Reserved)
A038
A039
-
1 (bit)
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency"
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency"
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency"
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency"
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency"
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency"
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency"
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency"
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency"
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency"
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency"
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency"
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency"
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency"
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency"
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency"
-
-
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
-
R/W 0, "Start frequency" to 999
R/W
Data
resolution
0 (free-running after
jogging stops
[disabled during
operation])
3 (free-running after
jogging stops
[enabled during
operation])
1 (deceleration and
stop after jogging
stops [disabled
during operation])
4 (deceleration and
stop after jogging
stops [enabled
during operation])
2 (DC braking after
jogging stops
[disabled during
operation])
5 (DC braking after
jogging stops
[enabled during
operation])
-
123Bh
Torque boost method selection
A041
0 (manual torque boost)
R/W
1 (automatic torque boost)
123Ch
123Dh
Manual torque boost value
Manual torque boost frequency
A042
A043
R/W 0 to 200
R/W 0 to 500
0.01 [Hz]
-
0.1 [%]
0.1 [%]
B–34
Register
No.
123Eh
123Fh
1240h
1241h
Function name
V/F characteristic curve
selection, 1st motor
V/f gain
Voltage compensation gain
setting for automatic torque
boost, 1st motor
Slippage compensation gain
setting for automatic torque
boost, 1st motor
1242h
(Reserved)
to1244h
Function
code
R/W
A044
R/W
A045
R/W 20 to 100
1 [%]
A046
R/W 0 to 255
1 [%]
A047
R/W 0 to 255
1 [%]
-
-
Monitoring and setting items
0 (VC)
1 (VP)
2 (free V/f)
0 (disabling)
1 (enabling)
Data
resolution
-
2 (output freq < [A052])
1245h
DC braking enable
A051
R/W
1246h
1247h
DC braking frequency
DC braking wait time
DC braking force during
deceleration
DC braking time for deceleration
DC braking/edge or level
detection for [DB] input
DC braking force for starting
DC braking time for starting
DC braking carrier frequency
setting
A052
A053
R/W 0 to 6000
R/W 0 to 50
A054
R/W 0 to 70
1 [%]
A055
R/W 0 to 600
0.1 [sec.]
A056
R/W 0 (edge operation)
A057
A058
R/W 0 to 70
R/W 0 to 600
1 [%]
0.1 [sec.]
A059
R/W 20 to 100
0.1 [kHz]
1248h
1249h
124Ah
124Bh
124Ch
124Dh
124Eh to
(Reserved)
124Fh
-
-
A061
R/W
-
-
0.01 [Hz]
0.1 [sec.]
1 (level operation)
0 or "maximum frequency limit" to "maximum
frequency"
0 or "maximum frequency limit" to "maximum
frequency"
0 to 40000
0 to 1000
0 to 40000
0 to 1000
0 to 40000
0 to 1000
0 to 40000
0 to 600
Frequency upper limit
1251h
(Reserved)
1252h
Frequency lower limit
A062
R/W
1253h
1254h
1255h
1256h
1257h
1258h
1259h
125Ah
125Bh
125Ch
125Dh
125Eh
(Reserved)
Jump freq. (center) 1
Jump freq. width (hysteresis) 1
(Reserved)
Jump freq. (center) 2
Jump freq. width (hysteresis) 2
(Reserved)
Jump freq. (center) 3
Jump freq. width (hysteresis) 3
(Reserved)
Acceleration hold frequency
Acceleration hold time
A063
A064
A065
A066
A067
A068
A069
A070
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
125Fh
PID Function Enable
A071
R/W
0 (disabling)
1 (enabling)
1260h
1261h
1262h
1263h
PID proportional gain
PID integral time constant
PID derivative gain
PV scale conversion
A072
A073
A074
A075
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0 to 2500
0 to 36000
0 to 10000
1 to 9999
3 (pulse train
frequency input)
10 (operation result
output)
1 (enabling)
1264h
PV source
A076
1265h
Reverse PID
A077
R/W 0 (disabling)
1266h
PID output limiter
A078
R/W 0 to 1000
-
-
1250h
0 (input via OI)
1 (input via O)
R/W
2 (external
communication)
-
2 (enabling
inverted-data output)
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.1 [sec.]
0.10
0.1 [sec.]
0.01 [sec.]
0.01
-
0.1 [%]
B–35
Register
No.
Function name
1267h
PID feed forward selection
1268h
(Reserved)
1269h
AVR function select
Function
code
R/W
A079
R/W
-
-
A081
126Ah
AVR voltage select
A082
126Bh
126Ch
AVR filter time constant
AVR deceleration gain
A083
A084
126Dh
Energy-saving operation mode
A085
Energy-saving mode tuning
A086
126Eh
126Fh to
1273h
1274h
1275h
1276h
1277h
1278h
1279h
127Ah
127Bh
127Ch
(Reserved)
Acceleration time (2)
Deceleration time (2)
Select method to switch to
Acc2/Dec2 profile
(Reserved)
Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition
point
(Reserved)
Dec1 to Dec2 frequency
transition point
A092 (high)
A092 (low)
A093 (high)
A093 (low)
A094
A095
-
Monitoring and setting items
0 (disabled)
1 (O input)
2 (OI input)
-
Data
resolution
-
0 (always on)
R/W
1 (always off)
2 (off during
deceleration)
-
200 V class:
0 (200)
1 (215)
R/W 2 (220)
3 (230)
4 (240)
400 V class:
5 (380)
6 (400)
7 (415)
8 (440)
9 (460)
10 (480)
-
R/W 0 to 10000
R/W 50 to 200
0 (normal operation)
R/W
1 (energy-saving operation)
R/W 0 to 1000
-
0.001[sec.]
1[%]
0.1 [%]
-
-
R/W
0 to 360000
R/W
R/W
0 to 360000
R/W
0 (switching by 2CH terminal)
R/W 1 (switching by setting)
2 (Forward and reverse)
- -
0.01 [sec.]
0.01 [sec.]
-
R/W 0 to 40000
-
0.01 [Hz]
-
A096
R/W 0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
127Dh
Acceleration curve selection
A097
R/W
0 (linear)
1 (S curve)
2 (U curve)
3 (inverted-U curve)
-
127Eh
Deceleration curve setting
A098
R/W
0 (linear)
1 (S curve)
2 (U curve)
3 (inverted-U curve)
-
-
-
127Fh to
(Reserved)
1281h
[OI] input active range start
1282h
frequency
1283h (Reserved)
[OI] input active range end
1284h
frequency
[OI] input active range start
1285h
current
[OI] input active range end
1286h
current
1287h [OI] input start frequency select
1288h to
(Reserved)
12A4h
12A5h Acceleration curve constant
12A6h Deceleration curve constant
12A7h to
(Reserved)
12AEh
A101
-
-
-
R/W 0 to 40000
-
0.01 [Hz]
-
-
A102
R/W 0 to 40000
A103
R/W 0 to "[OI]-[L] input active range end current"
1 [%]
A104
R/W "[OI]-[L] input active range start current" to 100
1 [%]
A105
R/W 0 (external start frequency)
A131
A132
-
-
0.01 [Hz]
1 (0 Hz)
-
R/W 1 (smallest swelling) to 10 (largest swelling)
R/W 1 (smallest swelling) to 10 (largest swelling)
-
-
-
B–36
Register
No.
Function name
12AFh
Operation-target frequency
selection 1
12B0h
Operation-target frequency
selection 2
Function
code
A141
A142
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
0 (digital operator)
1 (keypad
R/W
potentiometer)
2 (input via O)
3 (input via OI)
4 (external
communication)
5 (option )
0 (digital operator)
1 (keypad
R/W
potentiometer)
3 (input via OI)
4 (external
communication)
2 (input via O)
12B1h
Operator selection
12B2h to
(Reserved)
12B3
12B4h Frequency to be added
12B5h
12B6h to
12BDh
12BDh
12BFh
12C0h
12C1h
12C2h
Sign of the frequency to be
added
(Reserved)
Deceleration hold frequency
Deceleration hold time
(Reserved)
PID sleep function triggering
level
PID sleep function action delay
time
12C3h to
(Reserved)
12C6h
[VR] input active range start
12C7h
frequency
12C8h (Reserved)
[VR] input active range end
12C9h
frequency
12CAh [VR] input active range start %
12CBh [VR] input active range end %
[VR] input start frequency
12CCh
select
12CDh to
(Unused)
1300h
A143
A145
A146
-
-
R/W 0 to 40000
00 (frequency command + A145)
R/W
01 (frequency command - A145)
-
-
-
5 (option )
0 (addition: A141 + A142)
R/W 1 (subtraction: A141 - A142)
2 (multiplication: A141 x A142)
-
Data
resolution
-
0.01 [Hz]
-
A154
A155
-
R/W 0 to 40000
R/W 0 to 600
- -
0.01 [Hz]
0.1 [sec.]
-
A156
R/W 0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
A157
R/W 0 to 255
0.1 [sec.]
A161
-
-
-
R/W 0 to 40000
-
-
A162
R/W 0 to 40000
A163
A164
R/W 0 to 100
R/W 0 to 100
A165
R/W 0(start frequency A161) / 1(0Hz)
-
-
Inaccessible
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
1 [%]
1 [%]
-
B–37
Parameter group B
Register
No.
1301h
Function name
Restart mode on power failure /
under-voltage trip
Function
code
b001
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
0 (tripping)
1 (starting with 0 Hz)
2 (starting with matching frequency)
R/W
3 (tripping after deceleration and stopping with
matching frequency)
Data
resolution
-
4 (restarting with active matching frequency)
1302h
1303h
Allowable under-voltage power
failure time
Retry wait time before motor
restart
b002
R/W 3 to 250
0.1 [sec.]
b003
R/W 3 to 1000
0.1 [sec.]
1304h
Instantaneous power
failure/under-voltage trip alarm
enable
b004
0 (disabling)
R/W 1 (enabling)
2 (disabling during
stopping and
decelerating to stop)
-
1305h
Number of restarts on power
failure/under-voltage trip events
b005
R/W 0 (16 times)
1 (unlimited)
-
1306h to
(Reserved)
1307h
1307h Restart frequency threshold
1309h
130Ah
Restart mode on over voltage /
over current
-
R/W 0 to 40000
b008
0 (tripping)
1 (starting with 0 Hz)
R/W 2 (starting with
matching
frequency)
130Dh
130Eh
Electronic thermal characteristic
b013
130Fh
(Reserved)
Free setting, electronic thermal
frequency (1)
Free setting, electronic thermal
current (1)
Free setting, electronic thermal
frequency (2)
Free setting, electronic thermal
current (2)
Free setting, electronic thermal
frequency (3)
Free setting, electronic thermal
current (3)
-
130Ch
1310h
1311h
1312h
1313h
1314h
1315h
1316h
1317h
1318h
Overload restriction operation
mode
Overload restriction level
Deceleration rate at overload
restriction
-
b007
(Reserved)
Number of retry on over voltage /
over current
Retry wait time on over voltage /
over current
Level of electronic thermal
130Bh
-
-
-
0.01 [Hz]
3 (tripping after
deceleration and
stopping with
matching frequency)
-
4 (restarting with active
matching frequency)
-
-
b010
R/W 1 to 3
1 [time]
b011
R/W 3 to 1000
b012
R/W 200 to 1000
0 (reduced-torque characteristic)
R/W 1 (constant-torque characteristic)
2 (free setting)
- Inaccessible
0.1 [%]
b015
R/W 0 to 400
1 [Hz]
b016
R/W 0 to Rated current
0.1 [A]
b017
R/W 0 to 400
1 [Hz]
b018
R/W 0 to Rated current
0.1 [A]
b019
R/W 0 to 400
1 [Hz]
b020
R/W 0 to Rated current
0.1 [A]
0.1 [sec.]
-
0 (disabling)
1 (enabling during acceleration and
constant-speed operation)
b021
R/W 2 (enabling during constant-speed operation)
3 (enabling during acceleration and
constant-speed operation [speed increase at
regeneration])
-
b022
R/W 200 to 1500
0.1 [%]
b023
R/W 1 to 30000
0.1 [sec.]
B–38
Register
No.
1319h
131Ah
131Bh
131Ch
131Dh
131Eh
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
Data
resolution
b024
0 (disabling)
1 (enabling during acceleration and
constant-speed operation)
R/W 2 (enabling during constant-speed operation)
3 (enabling during acceleration and
constant-speed operation [speed increase at
regeneration])
Overload restriction level 2
Deceleration rate at overload
restriction (2)
b025
R/W 200 to 1500
0.1 [%]
b026
R/W 1 to 30000
0.1 [sec.]
Overcurrent suppression enable
b027
0 (disabling)
R/W 1 (enabling without voltage reduction)
2 (enabling with voltage reduction)
b028
R/W 100 to 1500
0.1 [%]
b029
R/W 1 to 30000
0.1 [sec.]
Overload restriction operation
mode (2)
Current level of active freq.
matching
Deceleration rate of active freq.
matching
131Fh
Start freq. of active frequency
matching
1320h
Software lock mode selection
1321h
1322h
1323h
1324h
(Reserved)
Motor cable length parameter
Run/power-on warning time
1325h
Rotation direction restriction
1326h
Reduced voltage start selection
0 (frequency at the last shutoff)
R/W 1 (maximum frequency)
2 (set frequency)
0 (disabling change of data other than "b031"
when SFT is on)
1 (disabling change of data other than "b031"
and frequency settings when SFT is on)
b031
R/W
2 (disabling change of data other than "b031")
3 (disabling change of data other than "b031"
and frequency settings)
10 (enabling data changes during operation)
- b033
R/W 5 to 20
b034 (high) R/W 0 to 65535
b034 (low) R/W
0 (Enable for both direction)
b035
R/W 1 (Enable for forward only)
2 (Enable for reverse only)
0 (minimum reduced voltage start time) to 255
b036
R/W
(maximum reduced voltage start time)
b030
-
-
-
1 [10h]
-
1327h
Function code display restriction
b037
0 (full display)
1 (function-specific
R/W
display)
2 (user setting)
1328h
Initial display selection
b038
0 (last displayed)
R/W 1 to 30 (d001 to d030)201 (F001)
202 (B display of LCD operator)
-
1329h
Automatic user parameter
registration
b039
R/W 0 (disabling)
-
132Ah to
(Reserved)
1333h
-
-
3 (data comparison
display)
4 (basic display)
5(monitor display)
-
1 (enabling)
-
1334h
Controlled deceleration on power
loss
b050
0 (disabling)
1 (enabling)
R/W 2 (nonstop operation at momentary power
failure (no restoration))
3 (nonstop operation at momentary power
failure (restoration to be done))
1335h
DC bus voltage trigger level of
ctrl. decel.
b051
R/W 0 to 10000
-
-
-
0.1 [V]
B–39
Register
No.
1336h
Function name
Over-voltage threshold of ctrl.
decel.
1337h
Deceleration time of ctrl. decel.
1338h
1339h Initial freq. drop of ctrl. decel.
133Ah to
(Reserved)
133Eh
Maximum-limit level of window
133Fh
comparators O
Minimum-limit level of window
1340h
comparators O
Hysteresis width of window
1341h
comparators O
Maximum-limit level of window
1342h
comparators OI
Minimum-limit level of window
1343h
comparators OI
Hysteresis width of window
1344h
comparators OI
1345h to
(Reserved)
1348h
Operation level at O
1349h
disconnection
Operation level at OI
134Ah
disconnection
134Bh to
(Reserved)
134Dh
134Eh Ambient temperature
134Fh to
(Reserved)
1350
Cumulative input power data
1351h
clearance
1352h Watt-hour display gain
1353h to
(Reserved)
1354h
1355h Start frequency
1356h Carrier frequency
Function
code
b052
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
R/W 0 to 10000
0.1 [V]
b053 (high) R/W
1 to 360000
b053 (low) R/W
b054
R/W 0 to 1000
-
-
Data
resolution
0.01 [sec.]
0.01 [Hz]
-
-
b060
R/W 0. to 100. (lower limit : b061 + b062 *2) (%)
1 [%]
b061
R/W 0. to 100. (lower limit : b060 - b062*2) (%)
1 [%]
b062
R/W 0. to 10. (lower limit : b061 - b062 / 2) (%)
1 [%]
b063
R/W 0. to 100. (lower limit : b064 + b066 *2) (%)
1 [%]
b064
R/W 0. to 100. (lower limit : b063 - b066 *2) (%)
1 [%]
b065
R/W 0. to 10. (lower limit : b063 - b064 / 2) (%)
1 [%]
-
-
-
-
b070
R/W 0 to 100 (%) or 255 (no)
1 [%]
b071
R/W 0 to 100 (%) or 255 (no)
1 [%]
b075
-
-
-
-
R/W -10 to 50
-
1 [℃]
-
-
b078
R/W Clearance by setting "1"
-
b079
R/W 1 to 1000
1
-
-
-
-
b082
b083
R/W 1 to 999
R/W 20 to 100
0.01 [Hz]
0.1 [kHz]
-
-
1357h
Initialization mode (parameters or
trip history)
b084
0 (initialization
3 (clearing the trip
disabled)
history and
initializing the data)
1 (clearing the trip
R/W
history)
4 (clearing the trip
history and
2 (initializing the data)
initializing the data
and EzSQ program)
1358h
Country code for initialization
b085
R/W 0 (area A)
1359h
Frequency scaling conversion
factor
b086
R/W 1 to 9999
135Ah
STOP key enable
b087
R/W
135Bh
Restart mode after FRS
b088
0 (starting with 0 Hz)
R/W 1 (starting with matching frequency)
2 (starting with active matching frequency)
-
135Ch
Automatic carrier frequency
reduction
b089
0 (disabling)
R/W 1 (enabling ( output current controlled))
2 (enabling ( fin temperature controlled))
-
135Dh
Dynamic braking usage ratio
b090
R/W 0 to 1000
0 (enabling)
1 (disabling)
1 (area B)
0.01
2 (disabling only stop)
-
0.1 [%]
B–40
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
0 (deceleration until stop)
1 (free-run stop)
Data
resolution
135Eh
Stop mode selection
b091
R/W
135Fh
Cooling fan control
b092
0 (always operating the fan)
R/W 1 (during inverter operation)
2 (control by temperature)
-
1360h
Clear elapsed time of cooling fan
b093
R/W 0 (count)
-
1361h
Initialization target data
b094
R/W 0 to 3
-
Dynamic braking control
b095
0 (disabling)
1 (enabling [disabling while the motor is
stopped])
R/W
2 (enabling [enabling also while the motor is
stopped])
-
Dynamic braking activation level
BRD resistor value
b096
b097
R/W 330 to 380, 660 to 760
R/W Minimum resistance to 6000
1362h
1363h
1364h
1365h to
1366h
1367h
1368h
1369h
136Ah
136Bh
136Ch
136Dh
136Eh
136Fh
1370h
1371h
1372h
1373h
1374h
1375h to
137Ah
(Reserved)
Free-setting V/f frequency (1)
Free-setting V/f voltage (1)
Free-setting V/f frequency (2)
Free-setting V/f voltage (2)
Free-setting V/f frequency (3)
Free-setting V/f voltage (3)
Free-setting V/f frequency (4)
Free-setting V/f voltage (4)
Free-setting V/f frequency (5)
Free-setting V/f voltage (5)
Free-setting V/f frequency (6)
Free-setting V/f voltage (6)
Free-setting V/f frequency (7)
Free-setting V/f voltage (7)
(Reserved)
-
-
b100
b101
b102
b103
b104
b105
b106
b107
b108
b109
b110
b111
b112
b113
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
-
-
1 (clear)
1. [V]
0.1[Ω]
-
-
0. to "free-setting V/f frequency (2)"
0. to 8000
0. to "free-setting V/f frequency (3)"
0. to 8000
0. to "free-setting V/f frequency (4)"
0. to 8000
0. to "free-setting V/f frequency (5)"
0. to 8000
0. to "free-setting V/f frequency (6)"
0. to 8000
0. to "free-setting V/f frequency (7)"
0. to 8000
0. to 400.
0. to 8000
-
1 [Hz]
0.1 [V]
1 [Hz]
0.1 [V]
1 [Hz]
0.1 [V]
1 [Hz]
0.1 [V]
1 [Hz]
0.1 [V]
1 [Hz]
0.1 [V]
1 [Hz]
0.1 [V]
-
137Bh
Brake Control Enable
b120
R/W 0 (disabling)
137Ch
137Dh
137Eh
137Fh
1380h
1381h
1382h
1383h
1384h
Brake Wait Time for Release
Brake Wait Time for Acceleration
Brake Wait Time for Stopping
Brake Wait Time for Confirmation
Brake Release Frequency
Brake Release Current
Braking frequency
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
b121
b122
b123
b124
b125
b126
b127
-
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
0 to 500
0 to 500
0 to 500
0 to 500
0 to 40000
0 to 1500
0 to 40000
-
1385h
Deceleration overvoltage
suppression enable
b130
R/W
0 (disabling)
1 (enabling)
1386h
Decel. overvolt. suppress level
b131
R/W
1387h
Decel. overvolt. suppress const.
Decel. overvolt. suppress
proportional gain
Decel. overvolt. suppress Integral
time
b132
200 V class: 330 to 390 (V)
400 V class: 660 to 780 (V)
R/W 10 to 3000
b133
R/W 0 to 500
0.01
b134
R/W 0 to 1500
0.1 [sec.]
1388h
1389h
138Ah to
(Reserved)
1393h
-
-
-
1 (enabling)
2 (enabling)
0.01 [sec.]
0.01 [sec.]
0.01 [sec.]
0.01 [sec.]
0.01 [Hz]
0.1 [%]
0.01 [Hz]
-
2 (enabling with
acceleration)
1 [V]
0.01 [sec.]
-
B–41
Register
No.
1394h
Function name
GS input mode
1395h to
(Reserved)
1399h
139Ah Display ex.operator connected
139Bh to
(Reserved)
13A2h
1st parameter of Dual
13A3h
Monitor
2nd parameter of Dual
13A4h
Monitor
13A5h (Reserved)
Function
code
b145
b150
-
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
R/W 0 (no Trip)
-
1 (Trip)
Data
resolution
-
-
-
R/W 1 to 50
-
-
-
b160
R/W 1 to 27
-
b161
R/W 1 to 27
-
-
-
-
-
-
13A6h
Freq. set in monitoring
b163
R/W 0 (disabling)
1 (enabling)
-
13A7h
Automatic return to the initial
display
b164
R/W 0 (disabling)
1 (enabling)
-
13A8h
Ex. operator com. loss action
b165
0 (tripping)
3 (stopping the motor
after free-running)
1 (tripping after
R/W
decelerating and
4 (decelerating and
stopping the motor)
stopping the motor)
-
2 (ignoring errors)
13A9h
Data Read/Write select
13AAh to
(Reserved)
13B6h
13B7h
Initialization trigger
13B8h to
(Unused)
13C5h
13C6h
13C7h
13C8h
13C9h
13CAh
13CBh
13CCh to
1400h
Electronic thermal subtraction
function selection
Thermal subtraction time
Thermal subtraction time
constant
Thermal accumulation gain
(Unused)
b166
b180
-
b910
b911(high)
b911(low)
b912(high)
b912(low)
b913
-
R/W 0 (Read/Write OK)
-
-
R/W 0 (disabling)
-
R/W
10 to 10000000
R/W
R/W
10 to 10000000
R/W
R/W 10 to 2000
Inaccessible
-
1 (enabling)
Inaccessible
0 (OFF)
1 (Linear subtraction:
R/W
pre-fixed ratio)
-
1 (Protected)
-
2 (Linear subtraction:
ratio set in b911)
3 (Subtraction with
first-order lag filter:
ratio set in b912)
-
0.01 [sec.]
0.01 [sec.]
0.1[%]
-
B–42
Parameter group C
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
1401h
Input [1] function
C001
1402h
Input [2] function
C002
1403h
Input [3] function
C003
1404h
Input [4] function
C004
1405h
Input [5] function
C005
1406h
Input [6] function
C006
1407h
Input [7] function
C007
1408h to
(Reserved)
140Ah
-
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
0 (FW)
R/W 1 (RV)
2 (CF1)
3 (CF2)
R/W
4 (CF3)
5 (CF4)
R/W 6 (JG)
7 (DB)
8 (SET)
R/W 9 (2CH)
11 (FRS)
12 (EXT)
R/W
13 (USP)
14 (CS)
R/W 15 (SFT)
16 (AT)
18 (RS)
R/W 20 (STA)
21 (STP)
-
22 (F/R)
23 (PID)
24 (PIDC
27 (UP)
28 (DWN)
29 (UDC)
31 (OPE)
32 (SF1)
33 (SF2)
34 (SF3)
35 (SF4)
36 (SF5)
37 (SF6)
38 (SF7)
39 (OLR)
44 (BOK)
46 (LAC)
50 (ADD)
51 (F-TM)
53 (KHC)
56 (MI1)
57 (MI2)
58 (MI3)
59 (MI4)
60 (MI5)
61 (MI6)
62 (MI7)
65 (AHD)
77 (GS1)
78 (GS2)
81 (485)
82 (PRG)
83 (HLD)
84 (ROK)
86 (DISP)
255 (no)
Inaccessible
Data
resolution
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
140Bh
Input [1] active state
C011
R/W 0 (NO)
1 (NC)
-
140Ch
Input [2] active state
C012
R/W 0 (NO)
1 (NC)
-
140Dh
Input [3] active state
C013
R/W 0 (NO)
1 (NC)
-
140Eh
Input [4] active state
C014
R/W 0 (NO)
1 (NC)
-
140Fh
Input [5] active state
C015
R/W 0 (NO)
1 (NC)
-
1410h
Input [6] active state
C016
R/W 0 (NO)
1 (NC)
-
1411h
Input [7] active state
C017
R/W 0 (NO)
1 (NC)
-
1412h to
(Reserved)
1414h
-
1415h
Output [11]
function
C021
1416h
Output [12] function
C022
1421h to
(Reserved)
1423h
141Ah Alarm relay function
C026
-
Inaccessible
0 (RUN)
1 (FA1)
2 (FA2)
R/W 3 (OL)
4 (OD)
5 (AL)
6 (FA3)
9 (UV)
11 (RNT)
12 (ONT)
13 (THM)
R/W 19 (BRK)
20 (BER)
21 (ZS)
24 (FA4)
-
25 (FA5)
26 (OL2)
27 (Odc)
28(OIDc)
31 (FBV)
32 (NDc)
33 (LOG1)
34 (LOG2)
35 (LOG3)
39 (WAC)
40 (WAF)
41 (FR)
42 (OHF)
43 (LOC)
44 (M01)
45 (M02)
46 (M03)
50 (IRDY)
51 (FWR)
52 (RVR)
53 (MJA)
54 (WCO)
55 (WCO)
58 (FREF)
59 (REF)
60 (SETM)
62 (EDM)
63 (OPO)
255 (no)
-
R/W Same as the settings of C021 and C022
-
-
-
B–43
Register
No.
141Bh
141Ch
141Dh
141Eh
Function name
[EO] terminal selection
[AM] terminal selection
(Reserved)
Digital current monitor reference
value
Function
code
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
C027
0 (output frequency)
1 (output current)
3 (digital output
frequency)
R/W
4 (output voltage)
5 (input power)
6 (electronic thermal
overload)
7 (LAD frequency)
8 (digital current
monitoring)
10 (heat sink
temperature)
12 (general-purpose
output YA0)
16 (option)
7 (LAD frequency)
10 (heat sink
temperature)
C028
0 (output frequency)
1 (output current)
4 (output voltage)
R/W
5 (input power)
6 (electronic thermal
overload)
-
-
13 (general-purpose
output YA1)
R/W 200 to 1500
-
-
16 (option)
-
C030
Data
resolution
0.1 [%]
141Fh
Output [11] active state
C031
R/W 0 (NO)
1 (NC)
-
1420h
Output [12] active state
C032
R/W 0 (NO)
1 (NC)
-
1421h to
(Reserved)
1423h
1424h
Alarm relay active state
1425h
(Reserved)
C036
-
-
-
R/W 0 (NO)
-
1 (NC)
0 (output during acceleration/deceleration and
constant-speed operation)
1426h
Output mode of low current
detection
C038
R/W
1427h
Low current detection level
C039
R/W 0 to 1500
1 (output only during constant-speed
operation)
0.1 [%]
1428h
Overload signal output mode
C040
0 (output during acceleration/deceleration and
constant-speed operation)
R/W
1 (output only during constant-speed
operation)
1429h
142Ah
Overload warning level
(Reserved)
Frequency arrival setting for
accel.
(Reserved)
Frequency arrival setting for
decel.
PID deviation level
(Reserved)
Frequency arrival setting 2 for
accel.
(Reserved)
Frequency arrival setting 2 for
decel.
C041
-
R/W 0 to 1500
- -
0.1 [%]
-
C042
R/W 0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
142Bh
142Ch
142Dh
142Eh
142Fh
1430h
1431h
1432h
1433h to
1437h
1438h
1439h
143Ah to
1440h
1441h
1442h
1443h
(Reserved)
Maximum PID feedback data
Minimum PID feedback data
(Reserved)
Electronic thermal warning level
(Reserved)
Zero speed detection level
-
-
-
-
-
C043
R/W 0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
C044
-
R/W 0 to 1000
- -
0.1 [%]
-
C045
R/W 0 to 40000
0.01 [Hz]
C046
C052
C053
C061
C063
-
-
R/W 0 to 40000
-
-
R/W 0 to 1000
R/W 0 to 1000
-
-
R/W 0 to 100
- R/W 0 to 10000
0.01 [Hz]
0.1 [%]
0.1 [%]
1 [%]
0.01 [Hz]
B–44
Register
No.
Function name
1444h Heat sink overheat warning level
1445h to
(Reserved)
144Ah
Function
code
C064
-
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
R/W 0 to 110
-
144Bh
Communication speed
C071
144Ch
144Dh
Modbus address
(Reserved)
C072
-
R/W 1. to 247.
- -
144Eh
Communication parity
C074
R/W
144Fh
Communication stop bit
C075
R/W 1 (1 bit)
1450h
Selection of the operation after
communication error
C076
Communication timeout limit
Communication wait time
C077
C078
1 [℃]
-
3 (2400bps)
4 (4800bps)
R/W
5 (9600bps)
6 (19.2kbps)
0 (no parity)
1 (even parity)
Data
resolution
7 (38.4kbps)
8 (57.6kbps)
9 (76.8kbps)
10 (115.2kbps)
-
2 (odd parity)
2 (2 bits)
0 (tripping)
3 (stopping the motor
after free-running)
1 (tripping after
R/W
decelerating and
4 (decelerating and
stopping the motor)
stopping the motor)
-
-
2 (ignoring errors)
1451h
1452h
1453h to
1454h
1455h
1456h
1457h to
1458h
1459h
145Ah to
145Eh
145Fh
1460h to
1463h
(Reserved)
[O] input span calibration
[OI] input span calibration
(Reserved)
Thermistor input tuning
(Reserved)
Debug mode enable
(Reserved)
C081
C082
C085
R/W 0 to 9999
R/W 0 to 1000
-
0.01 [sec.]
1 [msec.]
-
-
R/W 0 to 2000
R/W 0 to 2000
-
0.1
0.1
-
-
R/W 0 to 2000
0.1
-
-
-
-
C091
R
0/1
-
-
-
-
-
0 (Modbus-RTU)
1 (EzCOM)
2 (EzCOM
<administrator>)
1464h
Communication selection
C096
R/W
1465h
1466h
1467h
(Reserved)
EzCOM start adr. of master
EzCOM end adr. of master
C098
C099
- R/W 1 to 8
R/W 1 to 8
1468h
EzCOM starting trigger
C100
R/W 0(Input terminal)
1(Always)
-
1469h
Up/Down memory mode
selection
C101
0 (not storing the frequency data)
R/W
1 (storing the frequency data)
-
146Ah
Reset mode selection
C102
1
1
0 (resetting the trip when RS is on)
1 (resetting the trip when RS is off)
R/W 2 (enabling resetting only upon tripping
[resetting when RS is on])
-
3 (resetting only trip)
146Bh
Restart mode after reset
C103
0 (starting with 0 Hz)
R/W 1 (starting with matching frequency)
2 (restarting with active matching frequency)
146Ch
UP/DWN clear mode
C104
R/W 0 (0Hz)
146Dh
146Eh
146Fh
1471h
1472h
FM gain adjustment
AM gain adjustment
(Reserved)
AM bias adjustment
(Reserved)
C105
C106
C109
-
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
50 to 200
50 to 200
Inaccessible
0 to 100
-
1 (EEPROM data)
1 [%]
1 [%]
1 [%]
1 [%]
1 [%]
B–45
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
1473h
1474h to
1485h
1486h
1487h
1488h
1489h
148Ah to
148F
1490h
1491h
Overload warning level 2
Output RY on-delay time
Output RY off-delay time
C140
C141
1492h
Logic output 1 operand A
C142
1493h
Logic output 1 operand B
C143
1494h
Logical output 1 operator
C144
R/W
1495h
Logic output 2 operand A
C145
R/W
1496h
Logic output 2 operand B
C146
1497h
Logical output 2 operator
C147
R/W
1498h
Logic output 3 operand A
C148
R/W
1499h
Logic output 3 operand B
C149
149Ah
Logical output 3 operator
C150
R/W
-
-
C160
C161
C162
C163
C164
C165
C166
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
-
149Bh to
14A3h
14A4h
14A5h
14A6h
14A7h
14A8h
14A9h
14AAh
14ABh to
14ACh
14ADh
(Reserved)
Output [11] on-delay time
Output [11] off-delay time
Output [12] on-delay time
Output [12] off-delay time
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
Input [1] response time
Input [2] response time
Input [3] response time
Input [4] response time
Input [5] response time
Input [6] response time
Input [7] response time
(Reserved)
Multistage speed determination
time
14AEh to
(Unused)
14CCh
Overload warning processing
14CDh
cycle select
Overload warning filter time
14CEh
constant
14CFh Overload warning hysteresis
14D0h to
(Unused)
1502h
C111
R/W
R/W 0 to 1500
-
-
C130
C131
C132
C133
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
-
C169
-
Monitoring and setting items
0.1 [%]
-
-
0 to 1000
0 to 1000
0 to 1000
0 to 1000
0.1 [sec.]
0.1 [sec.]
0.1 [sec.]
0.1 [sec.]
-
-
R/W 0 to 1000
R/W 0 to 1000
Same as the settings of C021 to C026 (except
R/W
those of LOG1 to LOG6, OPO, no)
Same as the settings of C021 to C026 (except
R/W
those of LOG1 to LOG6, OPO, no)
0 (AND)
1 (OR)
2 (XOR)
Same as the settings of C021 to C026 (except
those of LOG1 to LOG6, OPO, no)
Same as the settings of C021 to C026 (except
R/W
those of LOG1 to LOG6, OPO, no)
0 (AND)
1 (OR)
2 (XOR)
Same as the settings of C021 to C026 (except
those of LOG1 to LOG6, OPO, no)
Same as the settings of C021 to C026 (except
R/W
those of LOG1 to LOG6, OPO, no)
0 (AND)
1 (OR)
2 (XOR)
0.1 [sec.]
0.1 [sec.]
-
-
-
0 to 200
0 to 200
0 to 200
0 to 200
0 to 200
0 to 200
0 to 200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
-
R/W 0 to 200
-
Data
resolution
1
Inaccessible
-
C901
R/W 0 (40ms)
C902
R/W 0 to 9999
1 [msec.]
C903
R/W 0 to 5000
0.01 [%]
-
-
Inaccessible
1 (2ms)
-
-
B–46
Parameter group H
Register
No.
1503h
1504h
Function name
Motor capacity, 1st motor
Motor poles setting, 1st motor
1505h to
(Reserved)
1506h
Motor stabilization constant, 1st
1507h
motor
1508h to
(Unused)
1600h
Function
code
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
Data
resolution
H003
0 (0.1kW)
1 (0.2kW)
2 (0.4kW)
3 (0.55kW)
R/W
4 (0.75kW)
5 (1.1kW)
6 (1.5kW)
7 (2.2kW)
8 (3.0kW)
9 (3.7kW)
10 (4.0kW)
11 (5.5kW)
12 (7.5kW)
13 (11.0kW)
14 (15.0kW)
15 (18.5kW)
-
H004
0 (2 poles)
1 (4 poles)
2 (6 poles)
3 (8 poles)
4 (10 poles)
5 (12 poles)
R/W
6 (14 poles)
7 (16 poles),
8 (18 poles)
9 (20 poles)
10 (22 poles)
11 (24 poles),
12 (26 poles)
13 (28 poles)
14 (30 poles)
15 (32 poles),
16 (34 poles)
17 (36 poles)
18 (38 poles)
19 (40 poles),
20 (42 poles)
21 (44 poles)
22 (46 poles)
23 (48 poles)
-
H006
-
-
-
R/W 0 to 255
-
Inaccessible
1
-
B–47
Parameter group P
Register
No.
1601h
Function name
Operation mode on expansion
card error
1602h to
(Reserved)
161Eh
161Fh
Accel/decel time input selection
1620h to
(Reserved)
162Dh
Communication watchdog timer
162Eh
162Fh
1630h
1631h
1632h
1633h
1634h to
1665h
1666h
1667h
1668h
1669h
166Ah
166Bh
166Ch
166Dh
166Eh
166Fh
1670h
1671h
1672h
1673h
1674h
1675h
Inverter action on communication
error
DeviceNet polled I/O: Output
instance number
(Reserved)
Inverter action on communication
idle mode
Motor poles setting for RPM
(Reserved)
EzSQ user parameter U (00)
EzSQ user parameter U (01)
EzSQ user parameter U (02)
EzSQ user parameter U (03)
EzSQ user parameter U (04)
EzSQ user parameter U (05)
EzSQ user parameter U (06)
EzSQ user parameter U (07)
EzSQ user parameter U (08)
EzSQ user parameter U (09)
EzSQ user parameter U (10)
EzSQ user parameter U (11)
EzSQ user parameter U (12)
EzSQ user parameter U (13)
EzSQ user parameter U (14)
EzSQ user parameter U (15)
Function
code
R/W
P001
R/W
-
-
P031
-
Monitoring and setting items
0 (tripping)
1 (continuing operation)
-
-
-
R/W 0 (digital operator)
-
Data
resolution
3 (easy sequence)
-
-
P044
R/W 0 to 9999
P045
0 (tripping)
3 (stopping the motor
after free-running)
1 (tripping after
R/W
4 (decelerating and
decelerating and
stopping the motor)
stopping the motor)
2 (ignoring errors)
-
P046
R/W 0 to 20
-
-
-
0.01 [sec.]
-
-
P048
0 (tripping)
3 (stopping the motor
after free-running)
1 (tripping after
R/W
4 (decelerating and
decelerating and
stopping the motor)
stopping the motor)
2 (ignoring errors)
-
P049
0 (0 pole)
1 (2 poles)
2 (4 poles),
3 (6 poles)
4 (8 poles)
5 (10 poles)
R/W 6 (12 poles)
7 (14 poles)
8 (16 poles),
9 (18 poles)
10 (20 poles)
11 (22 poles)
12 (24 poles)
-
-
-
P100
P101
P102
P103
P104
P105
P106
P107
P108
P109
P110
P111
P112
P113
P114
P115
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
13 (26 poles)
14 (28 poles)
15 (30 poles)
16 (32 poles)
17 (34 poles)
18 (36 poles)
19 (38 poles)
20 (40 poles),
21 (42 poles)
22 (44 poles)
23 (46 poles)
24 (48 poles)
-
-
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
B–48
Register
No.
1676h
1677h
1678h
1679h
167Ah
167Bh
167Ch
167Dh
167Eh
167Fh
1680h
1681h
1682h
1683h
1684h
1685h
1686h to
168Dh
168Eh
168Fh
1690h
1691h
1692h
1693h
1694h
1695h
1696h
1697h
1698h
1699h
169Ah
169Bh
169Ch
169Dh
169Eh to
16A1h
16A2h
16A3h
16A4h
16A5h
16A6h
16A7h
16A8h
16A9h
16AAh
Function name
EzSQ user parameter U (16)
EzSQ user parameter U (17)
EzSQ user parameter U (18)
EzSQ user parameter U (19)
EzSQ user parameter U (20)
EzSQ user parameter U (21)
EzSQ user parameter U (22)
EzSQ user parameter U (23)
EzSQ user parameter U (24)
EzSQ user parameter U (25)
EzSQ user parameter U (26)
EzSQ user parameter U (27)
EzSQ user parameter U (28)
EzSQ user parameter U (29)
EzSQ user parameter U (30)
EzSQ user parameter U (31)
(Reserved)
EzCOM number of data
EzCOM destination 1 address
EzCOM destination 1 register
EzCOM source 1 register
EzCOM destination 2 address
EzCOM destination 2 register
EzCOM source 2 register
EzCOM destination 3 address
EzCOM destination 3 register
EzCOM source 3 register
EzCOM destination 4 address
EzCOM destination 4 register
EzCOM source 4 register
EzCOM destination 5 address
EzCOM destination 5 register
EzCOM source 5 register
(Reserved)
Option I/F command register to
write 1
Option I/F command register to
write 2
Option I/F command register to
write 3
Option I/F command register to
write 4
Option I/F command register to
write 5
Option I/F command register to
write 6
Option I/F command register to
write 7
Option I/F command register to
write 8
Option I/F command register to
write 9
Function
code
R/W
P116
P117
P118
P119
P120
P121
P122
P123
P124
P125
P126
P127
P128
P129
P130
P131
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
-
P140
P141
P142
P143
P144
P145
P146
P147
P148
P149
P150
P151
P152
P153
P154
P155
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
-
Monitoring and setting items
Data
resolution
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
0 to 65530
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
-
1 to 5
1 to 247
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
1 to 247
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
1 to 247
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
1 to 247
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
1 to 247
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
-
-
P160
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P161
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P162
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P163
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P164
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P165
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P166
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P167
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P168
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
B–49
Register
No.
Function name
16B6h
Option I/F command register to
write 10
Option I/F command register to
read 1
Option I/F command register to
read 2
Option I/F command register to
read 3
Option I/F command register to
read 4
Option I/F command register to
read 5
Option I/F command register to
read 6
Option I/F command register to
read 7
Option I/F command register to
read 8
Option I/F command register to
read 9
Option I/F command register to
read 10
Profibus Node address
16B7h
Profibus Clear Node address
16ABh
16ACh
16ADh
16AEh
16AFh
16B0h
16B1h
16B2h
16B3h
16B4h
16B5h
16B8h
Profibus Map selection
16B9h to
(Reserved)
16C1h
16C2h DeviceNet MAC ID
16C3h to
(Unused)
1E00h
Function
code
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
Data
resolution
P169
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P170
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P171
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P172
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P173
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P174
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P175
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P176
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P177
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P178
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P179
R/W 0000 to FFFF
-
P180
R/W 0 to 125
P181
R/W 0 (clear)
1 (not clear)
-
P182
0 (PPO)
R/W
1 (conventional)
2 (flexible mode format
selection)
-
P192
-
-
-
-
-
R/W 0 to 63
-
-
Inaccessible
-
1
2 : coil number 0010h to
215: coil number 001Fh
21: coil number 0020h to
215: coil number 002Fh
21: coil number 0030h to
215: coil number 003Fh
21: coil number 0040h to
215: coil number 004Fh
21: coil number 0050h to
215: coil number 005Fh
1E01h
Coil data 1
-
R/W
1E02h
Coil data 2
-
R/W
1E03h
Coil data 3
-
R/W
1E04h
Coil data 4
-
R/W
1E05h
Coil data 5
-
R/W
-
-
-
-
-
Inaccessible
1E06h to
(Reserved)
1F18h
1E19h to
(Unused)
1F00h
-
1
1F01h
Coil data 0
1F02h to
(Reserved)
1F1Dh
1F1Eh to
(Unused)
2102h
2 : coil number 0001h to
215: coil number 000Fh
-
-
(note: 2)
-
-
Inaccessible
-
-
R/W
-
Note 1: above registers (coil data 0 to 5) are consisted with 16 coil data. EzCOM communication
(inverter to inverter) doesn’t support coil, but only register is supported, in case of need
to access coil, please use above registers.
Note 2: Be sure not to write into above 1F02h to 1F1Dh.
B–50
List of registers (2nd control settings)
Register
No.
2103h
2104h
2105h
2106h
2107h to
2200h
Function name
Acceleration time (1),
2nd motor
Deceleration time (1),
2nd motor
(Unused)
Function
code
F202 (high)
F202 (low)
F203 (high)
F203 (low)
-
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
R/W
0 to 360000
R/W
R/W
0 to 360000
R/W
-
Data
resolution
0.01 [sec.]
0.01 [sec.]
Inaccessible
-
List of registers (function modes for the 2nd control settings)
Register
No.
Function name
Function
code
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
0 (keypad
potentiometer)
2201h
Frequency source, 2nd motor
A201
R/W 1 (control circuit
terminal block)
2 (digital operator)
2202h
Frequency source, 2nd motor
A202
R/W
1 (control circuit
terminal block)
Data
resolution
3 (Modbus)
4 (option )
7 (easy sequence)
-
10 (operation function
result)
3 (Modbus)
4 (option)
-
2 (digital operator)
2203h
2204h
Base frequency, 2nd motor
Maximum frequency,
2nd motor
2205h to
(Reserved)
2216h
Multispeed frequency setting,
2217h
2nd motor
2218h to
(Reserved)
223Ah
223Bh
223Ch
223Dh
223Eh
223Fh
2240h
2241h
Torque boost method selection,
2nd motor
Manual torque boost value, 2nd
motor
Manual torque boost frequency,
2nd motor
V/F characteristic curve
selection, 2nd motor
V/f gain, 2nd motor
Voltage compensation gain
setting for automatic torque
boost, 2nd motor
Slippage compensation gain
setting for automatic torque
boost, 2nd motor
2242h to
(Reserved)
224Fh
Frequency upper limit,
2250h
2nd motor
2251h (Reserved)
Frequency lower limit,
2252h
2nd motor
2253h to
(Reserved)
2268h
2269h
AVR function select, 2nd motor
A203
R/W 300 to "maximum frequency, 2nd motor"
0.1 [Hz]
A204
R/W 300 to 4000
0.1 [Hz]
-
-
A220
R/W
-
-
A241
R/W
A242
R/W 20 to 200
1 [%]
A243
R/W 0 to 255
1 [%]
A244
R/W
A245
R/W 20 to 100
1 [%]
A246
R/W 0 to 255
1
A247
R/W 0 to 255
1
-
-
A261
R/W
-
-
A262
-
-
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency,
2nd motor"
Inaccessible
-
0 (manual torque boost)
1 (automatic torque boost)
-
0 (VC)
1 (VP)
2 (free V/f)
-
-
A281
R/W
0 or "2nd minimum frequency limit" to
"maximum frequency, 2nd motor"
-
0.01 [Hz]
-
0 (always on)
1 (always off)
-
-
0 or "start frequency" to "maximum frequency,
R/W
2nd motor limit"
-
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
-
2 (off during
deceleration)
-
B–51
Register
No.
226Ah
226Bh to
226Eh
226Fh
2270h
2271h
2272h
2273h
2274h
2275h
2276h
2277h
Function name
AVR voltage select, 2nd motor
(Reserved)
Acceleration time (2),
2nd motor
Deceleration time (2),
2nd motor
Select method to switch to
Acc2/Dec2, 2nd motor
(Reserved)
Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition
point, 2nd motor
(Reserved)
Dec1 to Dec2 frequency
transition point, 2nd motor
2278h to
(Reserved)
230Bh
Level of electronic thermal,
230Ch
2nd motor
230Dh
Electronic thermal characteristic,
2nd motor
230Eh to
(Reserved)
2315h
2316h
2317h
2318h
Overload restriction operation
mode, 2nd motor
Overload restriction level, 2nd
motor
Deceleration rate at overload
restriction, 2nd motor
2319h to
(Unused)
2428h
Overload warning level 2,
2429h
2nd motor
242Ah to
(Unused)
2502h
Function
code
A282
A292 (high)
A292 (low)
A293 (high)
A293 (low)
A294
A295
A296
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
200 V class:
0 (200)
1 (215)
R/W 2 (220)
3 (230)
4 (240)
-
400 V class:
5 (380)
6 (400)
7 (415)
8 (440)
9 (460)
10 (480)
-
R/W
1 to 360000
R/W
R/W
1 to 360000
R/W
0 (switching by 2CH terminal)
R/W 1 (switching by setting)
2 (Forward and reverse)
- R/W 0 to 40000
-
-
R/W 0 to 40000
-
-
b212
R/W
b213
0 (reduced-torque characteristic)
R/W 1 (constant-torque characteristic)
2 (free setting)
-
-
Data
resolution
200 to 1000
-
0.01 [sec.]
0.01 [sec.]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.1 [%]
-
0 (disabling)
1 (enabling during acceleration and
constant-speed operation)
-
b221
R/W 2 (enabling during constant-speed operation)
3 (enabling during acceleration and
constant-speed operation [speed increase at
regeneration])
b222
R/W 100 to 1500
0.1 [%]
b223
R/W 1 to 30000
0.1 [sec.]
C241
-
-
Inaccessible
R/W 0 to 1500
-
Inaccessible
0.1 [%]
-
B–52
Register
No.
2503h
2504h
Function name
Motor capacity, 2nd motor
Motor poles setting, 2nd motor
2505h to
(Reserved)
2506h
Motor stabilization constant, 2nd
2507h
motor
2508h- (Unused)
Function
code
R/W
Monitoring and setting items
Data
resolution
H203
0 (0.1kW)
1 (0.2kW)
2 (0.4kW)
3 (0.55kW)
R/W
4 (0.75kW)
5 (1.1kW)
6 (1.5kW)
7 (2.2kW)
8 (3.0kW)
9 (3.7kW)
10 (4.0kW)
11 (5.5kW)
12 (7.5kW)
13 (11.0kW)
14 (15.0kW)
15 (18.5kW)
-
H204
0 (2 poles)
1 (4 poles)
2 (6 poles)
3 (8 poles)
4 (10 poles)
5 (12 poles)
R/W
6 (14 poles)
7 (16 poles),
8 (18 poles)
9 (20 poles)
10 (22 poles)
11 (24 poles),
12 (26 poles)
13 (28 poles)
14 (30 poles)
15 (32 poles),
16 (34 poles)
17 (36 poles)
18 (38 poles)
19 (40 poles),
20 (42 poles)
21 (44 poles)
22 (46 poles)
23 (48 poles)
-
H206
-
-
-
R/W 0 to 255
-
Inaccessible
1
-
C–1
Appendix C :
Drive Parameter
Setting Tables
In This Appendix…
C
page
-
Introduction .......................................................................................C–2
-
Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry .............................................C–2
-
List of Parameters .............................................................................C–3
C–2
Introduction
This appendix lists the user-programmable parameters for the WL200 series inverters and
the default values for European and U.S. product types. The right-most column of the tables
is blank, so you can record values you have changed from the default. This involves just a
few parameters for most applications. This appendix presents the parameters in a format
oriented toward the keypad on the inverter.
Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry
WL200 series inverters provide many functions and parameters that can be configured by
the user. We recommend that you record all parameters that have been edited, in order to
help in troubleshooting or recovery from a loss of parameter data.
Inverter model
MFG. No.
WL200
This information is printed
on the specification label
located on the right side
of the inverter
C–3
List of Parameters
Monitoring functions
NOTE: Parameters marked with "" in A column are accessible even in inverter running.
Parameters marked with "" in B column are accessible even in inverter running when
in the high level access mode, which means that b031 is set to "10".
* Please change from" (Basic display)" to " (Full display)" in parameter  (Function
code display restriction), in case some parameters cannot be displayed.
IMPORTANT
Please be sure to set the motor nameplate data into the appropriate parameters to ensure
proper operation and protection of the motor:
 b012 is the motor overload protection value
 A082 is the motor voltage selection
 H003 is the motor kW capacity
 H004 is the number of motor poles
Please refer to the appropriate pages in this guide and the Instruction Manual for further
details.
Func.
Code
Name
Description
A
B
Units
 Output frequency monitor
Real time display of output frequency to
motor from
0.0 to 400.0Hz
If  is set 01, output frequency () can
be changed by up/down key with 
monitoring.
 
Hz
 Output current monitor
Filtered display of output current to motor,
range is
0 to 655.3 ampere


A
 Rotation direction monitor
Three different indications:
“”Forward
“”Stop
“”Reverse



Displays the scaled PID process variable
(feedback) value ( is scale factor),
0.00 to 9999.00


% times
constant



Process variable (PV),
 PID feedback monitor
3–5
Displays the state of the intelligent input
terminals:

ON
Intelligent input
terminal status
7
6 5 4
3
2
Terminal numbers
Page
1 OFF
C–4
Func.
Code
Name
Description
A
B
Units



Page
Displays the state of the intelligent output
terminals:
Intelligent output
ON
 terminal status
OFF
Relay

Scaled output frequency
monitor
 Output voltage monitor
12 11
Displays the output frequency scaled by the
constant in .
Decimal point indicates range:
0 to 3999
Voltage of output to motor,
Range is 0.0 to 600.0V
Displays the input power, range is 0 to 999.9
kW
3–5
 
Hz times
constant


V


KW
 Watt-hour monitor
Displays watt-hour of the inverter, range is
0.0 to 999.9/ 1000. to 9999./
1000 to 9999 (10,000 to 99,900)/
100 to 999 (10,0000 to 999,9000)


 Elapsed RUN time monitor
Displays total time the inverter has been in
RUN mode in hours.
Range is 0. to 9999./
1000 to 9999 (10,000 to 99,900)/
100 to 999 (10,0000 to 99,9000)


hours
Displays total time the inverter has been
powered up in hours.
Range is 0. to 9999./
1000 to 9999 (10,000 to 99,900)/
100 to 999 (10,0000 to 99,9000)


hours
Temperature of the cooling fin, range is -20
to 150


C
 Input power monitor

Elapsed power-on time
monitor
Heat sink temperature
 monitor
Displays the state of lifetime of electrolytic
capacitors on the PWB and cooling fan.
Lifetime expired
 Life check monitor



Range is 0 to 1024



Range is 0 to 9999















Normal
Cooling fan
Program counter monitor
 [EzSQ]
Program number monitor
 [EzSQ]
User monitor 0
 [EzSQ]
User monitor 1
 [EzSQ]
User monitor 2
 [EzSQ]
 Dual monitor
3–6
Electrolytic caps
Result of EzSQ execution, range is
–2147483647 to 2147483647
Result of EzSQ execution, range is
–2147483647 to 2147483647
Result of EzSQ execution, range is
–2147483647 to 2147483647
Displays two different data configured in
 and .
C–5
Func.
Code
Name
A
B
Units
Displays the frequency source
Operator
 to Multi-speed freq. 1 to 15
Jog frequency
Modbus network
Option
Potentiometer
Calculate function output
EzSQ
[O] input
[OI] input
[O] + [OI]



 Run source monitor
Terminal
Operator
Modbus network
Option



 Trip counter
Number of trip events,
Range is 0. to 65530


events























V


%


%







% times
 constant


 Frequency source monitor
Description
 Trip monitor 1
 Trip monitor 2
 Trip monitor 3
 Trip monitor 4
 Trip monitor 5
Displays trip event information:
 Error code
 Output frequency at trip point
 Motor current at trip point
 DC bus voltage at trip point
 Cumulative inverter operation time at trip
point
 Cumulative power-ON time at trip point
 Trip monitor 6
 Warning monitor
 DC bus voltage monitor
 BRD load ratio monitor
 Electronic thermal monitor
 Analog input [O] monitor
 Analog input [OI] monitor
 PID deviation monitor
 PID output monitor
Displays the warning code
Voltage of inverter internal DC bus,
range is 0.0 to 999.9
Usage ratio of integrated brake chopper,
range is 0.0 to 100.0%
Accumulated value of electronic thermal
detection, range is from 0.0 to 100.0%
Displays [O] input value,
range is 0 to 1023
Displays [OI] input value,
range is 0 to 1023
Displays the scaled PID deviation ( is
scale factor),
range is -9999.00 to 9999.00
Displays PID output, range is -100.00 to
100.00%
Page
3–6
%
3–8
3–7
C–6
Main Profile Parameters
NOTE:. Parameters marked with "" in A column are accessible even in inverter
running.
Parameters marked with "" in B column are accessible even in inverter running when
in the high level access mode, which means that b031 is set to "10".
Func.
Code
Name
 Output frequency setting
 Acceleration time (1)
Acceleration time (1),
 2nd motor
 Deceleration time (1)
Deceleration time (1),
 2nd motor
 Keypad RUN key routing
Description
Standard default target frequency
that determines constant motor
speed, range is 0.00 / start
frequency to maximum frequency
()
Standard default acceleration,
range is 0.00 to 3600.00 sec.
Standard default deceleration,
range is 0.00 to 3600.00 sec.
Two options; select codes:
Forward
Reverse
Initial
data
Units
 
0.00
Hz
 
10.00
sec.
 
10.00
sec.
 
10.00
sec.
 
10.00
sec.

00

A
B
Page
3–10
C–7
Standard Functions
NOTE:. Parameters marked with "" in A column are accessible even in inverter
running.
Parameters marked with "" in B column are accessible even in inverter running when
in the high level access mode, which means that b031 is set to "10".
Func.
Code
Initial
data
Units

01


01


01


01


50.0
Hz

50.0
Hz

50.0
Hz

50.0
Hz
Three options; select codes:
Select between [O] and [OI] at
[AT] (ON=OI, OFF=O)
Select between [O] and
external POT at [AT]
(ON=POT, OFF=O)
Select between [OI] and
external POT at [AT]
(ON=POT, OFF=OI)

00


[O] input active range start
frequency
The output frequency
corresponding to the analog input
range starting point,
range is 0.00 to 400.00
 
0.00
Hz

[O] input active range end
frequency
The output frequency
corresponding to the analog input
range ending point,
range is 0.00 to 400.00
 
0.00
Hz
The starting point (offset) for the
active analog input range,
range is 0. to 100.
 
0.
%
The ending point (offset) for the
active analog input range,
range is 0. to 100.
 
100.
%
Name
 Frequency source
Frequency source,
 2nd motor
 Run command source
Run command source,
 2nd motor
 Base frequency
Base frequency,
 2nd motor
 Maximum frequency
Maximum frequency,
 2nd motor
 [AT] selection
[O] input active range start
 voltage
[O] input active range end
 voltage
Description
Eight options; select codes:
POT on ext. operator
Control terminal
Function F001 setting
Modbus network input
Option
via EzSQ
Calculate function output
Four options; select codes:
Control terminal
Run key on keypad,
or digital operator
Modbus network input
Option
Settable from 30.0 Hz to the
maximum frequency()
nd
Settable from 30.0 Hz to the 2
maximum frequency()
Settable from the base
frequency to 400.0 Hz
nd
Settable from the 2 base
frequency to 400.0 Hz
A
B
Page
3–11
3–14
3–15
C–8
Func.
Code
Name
Description
B
Initial
data
 
01
A
Units
 enable
Two options; select codes:
Use offset ( value)
Use 0Hz
 Analog input filter
Range n = 1 to 31,
1 to 30 : ×2ms filter
31: 500ms fixed filter with ±0.1kHz
hys.
 
8.
Spl.
 EzSQ function select
Select codes:
Disable
Activate by PRG terminal
Activate always
 
00

Select codes:
Binary operation
(16 speeds selectable
with 4 terminals)
Bit operation
(8 speeds selectable
with 7 terminals)

00

 
6.00
Hz
 
6.00
Hz
Defines 15 more speeds,
range is 0.00 / start frequency to
400.00Hz.
=Speed 1 to =Speed15
 
0.00
Hz
 Jog frequency
Defines limited speed for jog,
range is from start frequency to
9.99 Hz
 
6.00
Hz
 Jog stop mode
Define how end of jog stops the
motor; six options:
Free-run stop (invalid during
run)
Controlled deceleration
(invalid during run)
DC braking to stop(invalid
during run)
Free-run stop (valid during
run)
Controlled deceleration (valid
during run)
DC braking to stop(valid
during run)
[O] input start frequency
Multi-speed operation
 selection
 Multi-speed freq. 0
Defines the first speed of a
multi-speed profile, range is 0.00 /
start frequency to 400.00Hz
Multi-speed freq. 0,
 2nd motor
 Multi-speed freq. 1 to 15
to

(for both motors)
 Torque boost select
Torque boost select, 2
nd
 motor
 Manual torque boost value
Manual torque boost value,
 2nd motor
Manual torque boost
 frequency
Manual torque boost
 frequency, 2nd motor
Page

3–15
3–17
3–18
3–18
 
04

Two options:
Manual torque boost
Automatic torque boost

00


00

Can boost starting torque between
0 and 20% above normal V/f curve,
range is 0.0 to 20.0%
 
1.0
%
 
1.0
%
Sets the frequency of the V/f
breakpoint A in graph (top of
previous page) for torque boost,
range is 0.0 to 50.0%
 
5.0
%
 
5.0
%
3–21
C–9
Func.
Code
Name
 V/f characteristic curve
Description
Four available V/f curves;
Constant torque
Reduced torque (1.7)
Free V/F
A
B
Initial
data
Units

00


00

 
100.
%
 
100.
%
 
100.

 
100.

 
100.

 
100.

Three options; select codes:
Disable
Enable during stop
Frequency detection
 
00

 DC braking frequency
The frequency at which DC braking
begins,
range is from the start frequency
() to 60.00Hz
 
0.50
Hz
 DC braking wait time
The delay from the end of
controlled deceleration to start of
DC braking (motor free runs until
DC braking begins),
range is 0.0 to 5.0 sec.
 
0.0
sec.
Level of DC braking force, settable
from 0 to 70%
 
50.
%
Sets the duration for DC braking,
range is from 0.0 to 60.0 seconds
 
0.5
sec.
 detection for [DB] input
Two options; select codes:
Edge detection
Level detection
 
01

 DC braking force at start
Level of DC braking force at start,
settable from 0 to 70%
 
0.
%
 DC braking time at start
Sets the duration for DC braking,
range is from 0.0 to 60.0 seconds
 
0.0
sec.
Carrier frequency of DC braking
performance, range is from 2.0 to
10.0kHz
 
2.0
kHz
V/f characteristic curve,
 2nd motor
 V/f gain
 V/f gain, 2nd motor
Sets voltage gain of the inverter,
range is 20. to 100.%
Voltage compensation gain
 for automatic torque boost
Voltage compensation gain
 for automatic torque boost,
Sets voltage compensation gain
under automatic torque boost,
range is 0. to 255.
nd

2 motor
Slip compensation gain for
automatic torque boost
Slip compensation gain for
nd
 automatic torque boost, 2
Sets slip compensation gain under
automatic torque boost, range is 0.
to 255.
motor

DC braking enable
DC braking force for
 deceleration
DC braking time for
 deceleration
DC braking / edge or level
Carrier frequency during DC
 braking
Page
3–21
3–25
C–10
Func.
Code

Name
Frequency upper limit
Frequency upper limit,
 2nd motor
 Frequency lower limit
Frequency lower limit,
 2nd motor
Description
Sets a limit on output frequency
less than the maximum frequency
(/).
Range is from frequency lower
limit (/) to maximum
frequency (/).
0.00 setting is disabled
>0.00 setting is enabled
Sets a limit on output frequency
greater than zero.
Range is start frequency () to
frequency upper limit (/)
0.00 setting is disabled
>0.00 setting is enabled
Initial
data
Units
 
0.00
Hz
 
0.00
Hz
A
B
3–27
 
0.00
Hz
 
0.00
Hz
0.00
Hz

 Jump freq. (center) 1 to 3

Up to 3 output frequencies can be
defined for the output to jump
past to avoid motor resonances
(center frequency)
Range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz
 

Jump freq. width
 (hysteresis) 1 to 3

Defines the distance from the
center frequency at which the jump
around occurs
Range is 0.00 to 10.00 Hz
 
0.50
Hz
 
0.00
Hz
 Acceleration hold time
Sets the duration of acceleration
hold, range is 0.0 to 60.0 seconds
 
0.0
sec.
 PID enable
Enables PID function,
three option codes:
PID Disable
PID Enable
PID Enable with reverse
output
 
00

 
1.00

 
1.0
sec.
 
0.00
sec.
 
1.00

 PV source
Selects source of Process Variable
(PV), option codes:
[OI] terminal (current in)
[O] terminal (voltage in)
Modbus network
Calculate function output
 
00

 Reverse PID action
Two option codes:
PID input = SP-PV
PID input = -(SP-PV)
 
00

 PID output limit
Sets the limit of PID output as
percent of full scale,
range is 0.0 to 100.0%
 
0.0
%
Sets the frequency to hold
 Acceleration hold frequency acceleration, range is 0.00 to
400.00Hz
 PID proportional gain
 PID integral time constant
 PID derivative time constant
 PV scale conversion
Proportional gain has a range of
0.00 to 25.00
Integral time constant has a range
of 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds
Derivative time constant has a
range of 0.00 to 100.00 seconds
Process Variable (PV), scale factor
(multiplier), range of 0.01 to 99.99
Page
3–28
3–29
3–30
C–11
Func.
Code
Name
 PID feed forward selection
 AVR function select
AVR function select,
 2nd motor
 AVR voltage select
AVR voltage select,
 2nd motor
Description
Selects source of feed forward
gain, option codes:
Disabled
[O] terminal (voltage in)
[OI] terminal (current in)
Automatic (output) voltage
regulation, selects from three type
of AVR functions, three option
codes:
AVR enabled
AVR disabled
AVR enabled except during
deceleration
200V class inverter settings:
200/215/220/230/240
400V class inverter settings:
380/400/415/440/460/480
B
Initial
data
 
Units
Page
00

3–30

02


02

A

230/
400
230/
400

V
V
 AVR filter time constant
Define the time constant of the
AVR filter, range is 0.000 to 10.000
sec.
 
0.300
sec.
 AVR deceleration gain
Gain adjustment of the braking
performance, range is 50 to 200%
 
100.
%
 mode
Two option codes:
Normal operation
Energy-saving operation

00

 Energy-saving mode tuning
Range is 0.0 to 100 %.
 
50.0
%
 Acceleration time (2)
Duration of 2 segment of
acceleration, range is:
0.00 to 3600.00 sec.
 
10.00
sec.
 
10.00
sec.
 
10.00
sec.
 
10.00
sec.
 Acc2/Dec2 profile

00



00

Output frequency at which Accel1
switches to Accel2, range is 0.00 to
400.00 Hz

0.00
Hz

0.00
Hz
Output frequency at which Decel1
switches to Decel2, range is 0.00 to
400.00 Hz

0.00
Hz

0.00
Hz

01

Energy-saving operation
Acceleration time (2),
 2nd motor
 Deceleration time (2)
Deceleration time (2),
 2nd motor
nd
nd
Duration of 2 segment of
deceleration, range is:
0.00 to 3600.00 sec.
Three options for switching from
1st to 2nd accel/decel:
2CH input from terminal
Select method to switch to
Transition frequency
nd
Acc2/Dec2 profile, 2 motor Forward and reverse
Select method to switch to
Acc1 to Acc2 frequency
 transition point
Acc1 to Acc2 frequency
 transition point, 2nd motor
Dec1 to Dec2 frequency
 transition point
Dec1 to Dec2 frequency
 transition point, 2nd motor
 Acceleration curve selection
Set the characteristic curve of Acc1
and Acc2, five options:
linear
S-curve
U-curve
Inverse U-curve
3–34
3–35
3–36
3–37
C–12
Func.
Code
Name
Description
Set the characteristic curve of Dec1
 Deceleration curve selection and Dec2, options are same as
above ()
Initial
data
Units
Page

01

3–37
A
B

[OI] input active range start
frequency
The output frequency
corresponding to the analog input
range starting point,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz
 
0.00
Hz

[OI] input active range end
frequency
The output frequency
corresponding to the current input
range ending point,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz
 
0.00
Hz
The starting point (offset) for the
current input range,
range is 0. to 100.%
 
20.
%
The ending point (offset) for the
current input range,
range is 0. to 100.%
 
100.
%
 select
Two options; select codes:
Use offset ( value)
Use 0Hz
 
00

 Acceleration curve constant
Range is 01 to 10.
 
02

 Deceleration curve constant
Range is 01 to 10.
 
02

 
02

 
03

[OI] input active range start
 current
[OI] input active range end
 current
[OI] input start frequency
A input select for calculate
 function
B input select for calculate
 function
Six options:
Operator
VR
Terminal [O] input
Terminal [OI] input
RS485
Option
3–37
3–40
 Calculation symbol
Calculates a value based on the A
input source ( selects) and B
input source ( selects).
Three options:
ADD (A input + B input)
SUB (A input - B input)
MUL (A input * B input)
 
00

 ADD frequency
An offset value that is applied to
the output frequency when the
[ADD] terminal is ON.
Range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz
 
0.00
Hz
 ADD direction select
Two options:
Plus (adds  value to the
output frequency setting)
Minus (subtracts  value
from the output frequency
setting)
 
00

 frequency
Sets the frequency to hold
deceleration, range is 0.00 to
400.00Hz
 
0.00
Hz
 Deceleration hold time
Sets the duration of deceleration
hold, range is 0.0 to 60.0 seconds
 
0.0
Deceleration hold
3–39
3–41
3–29
sec.
C–13
Func.
Code
Name
PID sleep function action
 threshold
PID sleep function action
 delay time
Description
Sets the threshold for the action,
set range 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
Sets the delay time for the action,
set range 0.0 to 25.5 sec
Initial
data
Units
 
0.00
Hz
 
0.0
sec.
A
B

[VR] input active range start
frequency
The output frequency
corresponding to the analog input
range starting point,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz
 
0.00
Hz

[VR] input active range end
frequency
The output frequency
corresponding to the current input
range ending point,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz
 
0.00
Hz
The starting point (offset) for the
current input range,
range is 0. to 100.%
 
0.
%
The ending point (offset) for the
current input range,
range is 0. to 100.%
 
100.
%
Two options; select codes:
Use offset ( value)
Use 0Hz
 
01

[VR] input active range
 start %
[VR] input active range
 end %
[VR] input start frequency
 select
Page
3–30
3–42
C–14
Fine Tuning Functions
Func.
Code
B
Initial
data
Select inverter restart method,
Five option codes:
Alarm output after trip, no
automatic restart
Restart at 0Hz
Resume operation after
frequency matching
Resume previous freq. after
freq. matching, then
decelerate to stop and display
trip info
Resume operation after active
freq. matching
 
00

The amount of time a power input
under-voltage can occur without
tripping the power failure alarm.
Range is 0.3 to 25 sec. If
under-voltage exists longer than
this time, the inverter trips, even if
the restart mode is selected.
 
1.0
sec.

Retry wait time before
motor restart
Time delay after under-voltage
condition goes away, before the
inverter runs motor again.
Range is 0.3 to 100.0 seconds.
 
1.0
sec.

Instantaneous power failure
/ under-voltage trip alarm
enable
Three option codes:
Disable
Enable
Disable during stop and
decelerates to a stop
 
00

 power failure /
Two option codes:
Restart 16 times
Always restart
 
00

 Restart frequency threshold
Restart the motor from 0Hz if the
frequency becomes less than this
set value during the motor is
coasting, range is 0.00 to 400.00Hz
 
0.00
Hz
Select inverter restart method,
Five option codes:
Alarm output after trip, no
automatic restart
Restart at 0Hz
Resume operation after
frequency matching
Resume previous freq. after
active freq. matching, then
decelerate to stop and display
trip info
Resume operation after active
freq. matching
 
00

Range is 1 to 3 times
 
3
times
Range is 0.3 to 100.0 sec.
 
1.0
sec.
Name
Restart mode on power
 failure / under-voltage trip
Allowable under-voltage
 power failure time
Number of restarts on
under-voltage trip events
Restart mode on over
 voltage / over current trip
Number of retry on over
 voltage / over current trip
Retry wait time on over
 voltage / over current trip
Description
A
Units
Page
3–43
C–15
Func.
Code
Name
 Level of electronic thermal
Level of electronic thermal,
 2nd motor
Electronic thermal
 characteristic
Electronic thermal
 characteristic, 2nd motor
Free setting electronic
 thermal ~freq.1





Free setting electronic
thermal ~current1
Free setting electronic
thermal ~freq.2
Free setting electronic
thermal ~current2
Free setting electronic
thermal ~freq.3
Free setting electronic
thermal ~current3
Overload restriction
 operation mode
Overload restriction
 operation mode, 2nd motor
 Overload restriction level
Overload restriction level,
 2nd motor


Deceleration rate at
overload restriction
Deceleration rate at
nd
overload restriction, 2
motor
Overload restriction
 operation mode 2
Description
A
B
Initial
data
Units
 
Rated
current
Rated
current
A
 
01

 
01

Range is 0 to 400Hz
 
0.
Hz
Range is 0 to inverter rated current
Amps
 
0.00
A
Range is 0 to 400Hz
 
0.
Hz
Range is 0 to inverter rated current
Amps
 
0.00
A
Range is 0 to 400Hz
 
0.
Hz
Range is 0 to inverter rated current
Amps
 
0.00
A
 
01

 
01

 
Rated
current
x 1.2
A
 
Rated
current
x 1.2
A
 
1.0
sec.
 
1.0
sec.
 
01

Set a level between 20% and 100%
for the rated inverter current.
Select from three curves, option
codes:
Reduced torque
Constant torque
Free setting
Select the operation mode during
overload conditions, four options,
option codes:
Disabled
Enabled for acceleration and
constant speed
Enabled for constant speed
only
Enabled for acceleration and
constant speed, increase
speed at regen.
Sets the level of overload
restriction, between 20% and 150%
of the rated current of the inverter,
setting resolution is 1% of rated
current
Sets the deceleration rate when
inverter detects overload, range is
0.1 to 3000.0, resolution 0.1
Select the operation mode during
overload conditions, four options,
option codes:
Disabled
Enabled for acceleration and
constant speed
Enabled for constant speed
only
Enabled for acceleration and
constant speed, increase
speed at regen.
 
Page
A
3–46
3–52
C–16
Func.
Code
B
Initial
data
Units
Sets the level of overload
restriction, between 20% and 150%
of the rated current of the inverter,
setting resolution is 1% of rated
current
 
Rated
current
x 1.2
A
 overload restriction
Sets the deceleration rate when
inverter detects overload, range is
0.1 to 3000.0, resolution 0.1
 
1.0
sec.
 OC suppression selection
Three option codes:
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled with voltage
reduction
 
00

Sets the current level of active freq.
matching restart, range is
0.2*inverter rated current to
1.5*inverter rated current,
resolution 0.1
 
Rated
current
A
Sets the deceleration rate when
active freq. matching restart, range
is 0.1 to 3000.0, resolution 0.1
 
0.5
sec.
Three option codes:
freq at previous shutoff
start from max. Hz
start from set frequency
 
00

 
01

3–54
Set range is 5 to 20.
 
10.

3–55
Range is,
.:Warning disabled
. to .:
10 to 99,990 hrs (unit: 10)
 to :
100,000 to 655,350 hrs
(unit: 100)
 
0.
hours
3–56
Name
 Overload restriction level 2
Deceleration rate 2 at
Current level of active freq.
 matching
Deceleration rate of active
 freq. matching

Start freq. of active freq.
matching
Software lock mode
 selection
Description
Prevents parameter changes, in
five options, option codes:
all parameters except  are
locked when [SFT] terminal is
ON
all parameters except 
and output frequency 
are locked when [SFT]
terminal is ON
all parameters except  are
locked
all parameters except 
and output frequency 
are locked
High level access including

A
Page
3–52
3–45
See the row “A” and “B” for the
accessible parameters in this mode.
Motor cable length
 parameter
Run/power ON warning
 time
C–17
Func.
Code
Name
Description
A
B
Initial
data
Units
Page
Three option codes:
No restriction
Reverse rotation is restricted
Forward rotation is restricted

00

3–56
Set range,  (disabling the
function),  (approx. 6ms) to 
(approx. 1.5s)
 
2

3–57
 restriction
Six option codes:
Full display
Function-specific display
User setting (and )
Data comparison display
Basic display
Monitor display only
 
00

3–58
 Initial display selection
Func. code that SET key
pressed last displayed.(*)
 to  to  displayed
 displayed
B display of LCD operator
 
001

3–60
Two option codes:
Disable
Enable
 
00

3–62
Four option codes:
Trips
Decelerates to a stop
Decelerates to a stop with DC
bus voltage controlled
Decelerates to a stop with DC
bus voltage controlled, then
restart

00

Setting of DC bus voltage to start
controlled decel. operation. Range
is 0.0 to 1000.0

220.0/
440.0
V
Setting the OV-LAD stop level of
controlled decel. operation. Range
is 0.0 to 1000.0

360.0/
720.0
V
Range is 0.01 to 3600.00

1.00
sec.
Setting of initial freq. drop.
Range is 0.0 to 10.0 Hz

0.0
Hz
Set range, {Min.-limit level () +
hysteresis width ()x2} to 100 %
(Minimum of 0%)
 
100.
%
Set range, 0 to {Max.-limit level
() - hysteresis width
()x2} % (Maximum of 0%)
 
0.
%
Set range, 0 to {Max.-limit level
() - Min.-limit level ()}/2 %
(Maximum of 10%)
 
0.
%
Set range, {Min.-limit level ( +
hysteresis width ()x2} to 100 %
(Minimum of 0%)
 
100.
%
Set range, 0 to {Max.-limit level
() - hysteresis width
()x2} % (Maximum of 0%)
 
0.
%

Rotation direction
restriction
Reduced voltage start
 selection
Function code display
Automatic user parameter
 registration
Controlled deceleration on
 power loss
DC bus voltage trigger level
 of ctrl. decel.
Over-voltage threshold of
 ctrl. decel.
Deceleration time of ctrl.
 decel.
Initial freq. drop of ctrl.
 decel.
Maximum-limit level of
 window comparator (O)
Minimum-limit level of
 window comparator (O)
Hysteresis width of window
 comparator (O)
Maximum-limit level of
 window comparator (OI)
Minimum-limit level of
 window comparator (OI)
3–63
3–65
C–18
Func.
Code
Initial
data
Units
 
0.
%
 
no

 
no

 
40
C
Two option codes:
OFF
ON (press STR then clear)
 
00

Set range is,
1. to 1000.
 
1.

 Start frequency
Sets the starting frequency for the
inverter output, range is 0.01 to
9.99 Hz
 
0.50
Hz
3–68
 Carrier frequency
Sets the PWM carrier (internal
switching frequency), range is 2.0
to 10.0 kHz
 
2.0
kHz
3–67
Select initialized data, five option
codes:
Initialization disabled
Clears Trip history
Initializes all Parameters
Clears Trip history and
initializes all parameters
Clears Trip history and
initializes all parameters and
EzSQ program

00

Select default parameter values for
country on initialization, two
option codes:
area A
area B

01

 conversion factor
Specify a constant to scale the
displayed frequency for 
monitor, range is 0.01 to 99.99
 
1.00

3–60
 STOP key enable
Select whether the STOP key on
the keypad is enabled, three option
codes:
Enabled
Disabled always
Disabled for stop
 
00

3–68
 Restart mode after FRS
Selects how the inverter resumes
operation when free-run stop (FRS)
is cancelled, three options:
Restart from 0Hz
Restart from frequency
detected from real speed of
motor (freq. matching)
Restart from frequency
detected from real speed of
motor (active freq. matching)
 
00

3–70
Name
Hysteresis width of window
 comparator (OI)
Operation level at O
 disconnection
Operation level at OI
 disconnection
Ambient temperature
 setting
 Watt-hour clearance

Watt-hour display gain
Initialization mode
 (parameters or trip history)
 Country for initialization
Frequency scaling
Description
Set range, 0 to {Max.-limit level
() - Min.-limit level ()}/2 %
(Maximum of 10%)
Set range, 0 to 100%, or “no”
(ignore)
Set range, 0 to 100%, or “no”
(ignore)
Set range is,
-10 to 50 C
A
B
Page
3–65
3–66
3–66
6–14
C–19
Func.
Code
Name
Description
A
B
Initial
data
Units
Page
Three option codes:
Disabled
Enabled, depending on the
output current
Enabled, depending on the
heat-sink temperature

01

3–67
 ratio
Selects the rate of use (in %) of the
regenerative braking resistor per
100 sec. intervals, range is 0.0 to
the value calculated by the value of
.
If the connected resister’s
allowable range is narrower then
above range, the resister’s range is
prior.
0%: Function disabled
>0%: Enabled, per value
 
0.0
%
3–68
 Stop mode selection
Select how the inverter stops the
motor, two option codes:
DEC (decelerate to stop)
FRS (free-run to stop)
 
00

3–70
Selects when the fan is ON during
inverter operation, three options:
Fan is always ON
Fan is ON during run, OFF
during stop (5 minute delay
from ON to OFF)
Fan is temperature controlled
 
01

 cooling fan (NOTE 1)
Two option codes:
Count
Clear

00

 Initialization target data
Select initialized parameters, four
option codes:
All parameters
All parameters except
in/output terminals and
communication.
Only registered parameters in
xxx.
All parameters except
registered parameters in xxx
and .

00

Three option codes:
Disable
Enable during run only
Enable always
 
00

 BRD activation level
Range is:
330 to 380V (200V class)
660 to 760V (400V class)
 
360/
720
V
 BRD resistor
Set the value of the resistor
connected to the inverter. By this
setting, upper limit of  as the
inverter hardware is calculated
automatically.
Range is minimum connectable
resistor Rbmin to 600.0Ω
 
Min.
resistance
Ω
Automatic carrier frequency
 reduction
Dynamic braking usage
Cooling fan control
 (NOTE 1)
Clear elapsed time of

Dynamic braking control
(BRD) selection
3–68
6–14
3–68
C–20
Func.
Code
Name
Description
A
B
Initial
data
Units
 Free V/F setting, freq.1
Set range, 0 to value of 

0.
Hz
 Free V/F setting, voltage.1
Set range, 0.0 to 800.0V

0.0
V
 Free V/F setting, freq.2
Set range, value of  to 

0.
Hz
 Free V/F setting, voltage.2
Set range, 0.0 to 800.0V

0.0
V
 Free V/F setting, freq.3
Set range, value of  to 

0.
Hz
 Free V/F setting, voltage.3
Set range, 0.0 to 800.0V

0.0
V
 Free V/F setting, freq.4
Set range, value of  to 

0.
Hz
 Free V/F setting, voltage.4
Set range, 0.0 to 800.0V

0.0
V
 Free V/F setting, freq.5
Set range, value of  to 

0.
Hz
 Free V/F setting, voltage.5
Set range, 0.0 to 800.0V

0.0
V
 Free V/F setting, freq.6
Set range, value of  to 

0.
Hz
 Free V/F setting, voltage.6
Set range, 0.0 to 800.0V

0.0
V
 Free V/F setting, freq.7
Set range,  to 400

0.
Hz
 Free V/F setting, voltage.7
Set range, 0.0 to 800.0V

0.0
V
 Brake control enable
Two option codes:
Disable
Enable
Enable (same as )
 
00

 Brake Wait Time for Release
Set range: 0.00 to 5.00 sec
 
0.00
sec.
Set range: 0.00 to 5.00 sec
 
0.00
sec.
Set range: 0.00 to 5.00 sec
 
0.00
sec.
 Confirmation
Set range: 0.00 to 5.00 sec
 
0.00
sec.
 Brake release freq.
Set range: 0 to 400Hz
 
0.00
sec.
 Brake release current
Set range: 0 to 150% of inverter
rated current
 
Rated
current
A
 Braking freq. setting
Set range: 0 to 400Hz
 
0.00
Hz
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled with accel.
 
00

 
380
/760
Brake Wait Time for
 Acceleration
Brake Wait Time for
 Stopping
Brake Wait Time for
Deceleration overvoltage
 suppression enable

Decel. overvoltage.
suppress level
DC bus voltage of suppression.
Range is:
200V class330 to 395
400V class660 to 790
Page
3–72
3–73
3–75
V
C–21
Func.
Code
Initial
data
Units
 
1.00
sec.
 
0.20

 
1.0
sec.
Two option codes:
No trip (Hardware shutoff
only)
E37 trip
E98/E99 trip/ display .
With external fault detection
E99 trip/ display .
Without external fault
detection
Display . With external
fault detection
Display input status. Without
external fault detection
Display input status. With
external fault detection
 
00

When an external operator is
connected via RS-422 port, the
built-in display is locked and shows
only one "d" parameter configured
in:
 to 
 
001

 
001

 
002

 
00

10 min. after the last key operation,
display returns to the initial
parameter set by . Two option
codes:
Disable
Enable
 
00

 action
Five option codes:
Trip
Trip after deceleration to a
stop
Ignore
Coasting (FRS)
Decelerates to a stop
 
02

 Data Read/Write selection
Two option codes:
Read/Write enable
both Read, Write disable
 
00

3–76
 Initialization trigger
This is to perform initialization by
parameter input with , 
and . Two option codes:
Initialization disable
Perform initialization

00

6–14
Name
Decel. overvoltage.
 suppress const.
Decel. overvoltage.
 suppress proportional gain
Decel. overvoltage.
 suppress integral time
 GS input mode
Display ex.operator
 connected
1st parameter of Dual
 Monitor
2nd parameter of Dual
 Monitor
Description
Accel. rate when b130=02.
Set range: 0.10 to 30.00 sec.
Proportional gain when b130=01.
Range is: 0.00 to 5.00
Integration time when b130=01.
Range is: 0.00 to 150.0
Set any two "d" parameters in 
and , then they can be
monitored in . The two
parameters are switched by
up/down keys.
Set range:  to 
Two option codes:
 Frequency set in monitoring Freq. set disabled
Freq. set enabled
Automatic return to the
 initial display
Ex. operator com. loss
A
B
Page
3–75
3–76
3–60
C–22
Func.
Code
Name
Description
A
B
Initial
data
Units
 Password Settings A
0000(Invalid Password)
0001-FFFF(Password)

0000

 Password authentication A
0000-FFFF

0000

 Password Settings B
0000(Invalid Password)
0001-FFFF(Password)

0000

 Password authentication B
0000-FFFF

0000

Four option codes:
OFF
Linear subtraction: pre-fixed
ratio
Linear subtraction: ratio set in

Subtraction with first-order
lag filter: ratio set in 
 
00

 
600.00
sec.
Electronic thermal
 subtraction function select
 Thermal subtraction time
This function is valid when
=
Range is 0.10 to 100000.00 s
3–77
3–48
Out of warranty when setting
less than initial value (600.00[s])
Thermal subtraction time
 constant
This function is valid when
=
Range is 0.10 to 100000.00 s
 
120.00
sec.
 
100.0
%
Out of warranty when setting
less than initial value (120.00[s])
Range is 1.0 to 200.0 %
 Thermal accumulation gain
Out of warranty when setting
less than initial value (100.0[%])
(NOTE 1) Invalid for the models without cooling fan.
Page
C–23
Intelligent Terminal Functions
Func.
Code
 Input [6] function
 
 Input [7] function
 
Initial
data
00
[FW]
01
[RV]
12
[EXT]
18
[RS]
02
[CF1]
03
[CF2]
06
[JG]
 Input [1] active state
 
00

 Input [2] active state
 
00

 
00

 
00

 
00

 Input [6] active state
 
00

 Input [7] active state
 
00

Name
Description
A
B
 Input [1] function
 
 Input [2] function
 



Input [3] function
[GS1 assignable]
Input [4] function
[GS2 assignable]
Input [5] function
[PTC assignable]
 Input [3] active state
 Input [4] active state
 Input [5] active state

Output [11] function
[EDM assignable]
 Output [12] function
 Alarm relay function
[EO] terminal selection
 (Pulse/PWM output)
Select input terminal function, 56
options (see “Intelligent Inputs” on
page 4–10)
 
 
 
Select logic conversion, two option
codes:
normally open [NO]
normally closed [NC]
44 programmable functions
available for logic (discrete)
outputs (see “Intelligent Outputs”
on page 4–11)
11 programmable functions:
Output frequency (PWM)
Output current (PWM)
Output frequency (Pulse train)
Output voltage (PWM)
Input power (PWM)
Electronic thermal load ratio
(PWM)
LAD frequency (PWM)
Output current (Pulse train)
Heat sink temperature (PWM)
General output (PWM)
Option(PWM)
 
 
 
00
[RUN]
01
[FA1]
05
[AL]
Units
Page







3–79



3–84
 
07

C–24
Func.
Code
B
Initial
data
Units
 
07
[LAD]

 
Rated
current
A
 
00

 
00

 
01

Two option codes:
During acceleration,
deceleration and constant
speed
During constant speed only
 
01

Set the level of low load detection,
range is 0.0 to 1.5*inverter rated
current
 
Rated
current
A
Two option codes:
During accel., decel. and
constant speed
During constant speed only
 
01

 
Rated
current
x 1.15
A
 
Rated
current
x 1.15
A
Sets the frequency arrival setting
threshold for the output frequency
during acceleration,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz
 
0.00
Hz
 deceleration
Sets the frequency arrival setting
threshold for the output frequency
during deceleration,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz
 
0.00
Hz
 PID deviation level
Sets the allowable PID loop error
magnitude (absolute value), SP-PV,
range is 0.0 to 100%
 
3.0
%
3–91
Sets the frequency arrival setting
threshold for [FA4]/[FA5] during
acceleration,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz
 
0.00
Hz
3–91
Name
Description
9 programmable functions:
Output frequency
Output current
Output voltage
Input power
Electronic thermal load ratio
LAD frequency
Heat sink temperature
General output
Option
[AM] terminal selection
 (Analog voltage output
0...10V)

Current with digital current
monitor output at 1,440Hz
Range is 20% to 150% of rated
current
Digital current monitor
reference value
 Output [11] active state
Select logic conversion, two option
codes:
normally open [NO]
normally closed [NC]
 Output [12] active state
 Alarm relay active state
Output mode of low current
 detection
 Low current detection level

Output mode of overload
warning
 Overload warning level
Overload warning level, 2
 motor

nd
Frequency arrival setting for
acceleration
Frequency arrival setting for

Frequency arrival setting 2
for acceleration
Sets the overload warning signal
level between 0% and 200% (from
0 to two time the rated current of
the inverter)
Sets the overload warning signal
level between 0% and 200% (from
0 to two time the rated current of
the inverter)
A
Page
3–84
3–89
3–90
3–91
C–25
Func.
Code
Name
Description
A
B
Initial
data
Units
Page
3–91
Sets the frequency arrival setting
threshold for [FA4]/[FA5] during
deceleration,
range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz
 
0.00
Hz
 PID FBV output high limit
When the PV exceeds this value,
the PID loop turns OFF the PID
second stage output,
range is 0.0 to 100 %
 
100.0
%
 PID FBV output low limit
When the PV goes below this
value, the PID loop turns ON the
PID second stage output,
range is 0.0 to 100 %
 
0.0
%
 level
Set range is 0 to 100%
Setting 0 means disabled.
 
90.
%
3–92
 Zero speed detection level
Set range is 0.00 to 100.00Hz
 
0.00
Hz
3–92
 Heat sink overheat warning
Set range is 0 to 110 C
 
100.
C
3–92
 Communication speed
Eight option codes:
2,400 bps
4,800 bps
9,600 bps
19,200 bps
38,400 bps
57,600 bps
76,800 bps
115,200 bps
 
05
baud
 Modbus address
Set the address of the inverter on
the network. Range is 1 to 247
 
1.

 Communication parity
Three option codes:
No parity
Even parity
Odd parity
 
00

 Communication stop bit
Two option codes:
1 bit
2 bit
 
1
bit
 Communication error select
Selects inverter response to
communications error.
Five options:
Trip
Decelerate to a stop and trip
Disable
Free run stop (coasting)
Decelerates to a stop
 
02

Sets the communications
watchdog timer period.
Range is 0.00 to 99.99 sec
0.0 = disabled
 
0.00
sec.
Time the inverter waits after
receiving a message before it
transmits.
Range is 0. to 1000. ms
 
0.
msec.

Frequency arrival setting 2
for deceleration
Electronic thermal warning

Communication error
time-out
 Communication wait time
4–61
3–93
C–26
Func.
Code
Name
Description
B
Initial
data
Units
 
100.0
%
A
Page
 O input span calibration
Scale factor between the external
frequency command on terminals
L–O (voltage input) and the
frequency output,
range is 0.0 to 200.0%
 OI input span calibration
Scale factor between the external
frequency command on terminals
L–OI (voltage input) and the
frequency output,
range is 0.0 to 200.0%
 
100.0
%
 calibration
Scale factor of PTC input.
Range is 0.0 to 200.0%
 
100.0
%
 Debug mode enable
Displays debug parameters.
Two option codes:
Disable
Enable <Do not set>
(for factory use)
 
00

3–95
Three option codes;
Modbus-RTU
EzCOM
EzCOM<Administrator>

00

3–93
 EzCOM start adr. of master
1 to 8

1.

 EzCOM end adr. of master
1 to 8

1.

 EzCOM starting trigger
Input terminal
Always

00

 selection
Controls speed setpoint for the
inverter after power cycle.
Two option codes:
Clear last frequency (return to
default frequency )
Keep last frequency adjusted
by UP/DWN
 
00

 Reset selection
Determines response to Reset
input [RS].
Four option codes:
Cancel trip state at input
signal ON transition, stops
inverter if in Run Mode
Cancel trip state at signal OFF
transition, stops inverter if in
Run Mode
Cancel trip state at input ON
transition, no effect if in Run
Mode
Clear the memories only
related to trip status
 
00

 Restart mode after reset
Determines the restart mode after
reset is given, three option codes:
Start with 0 Hz
Start with freq. matching
Start with active freq.
matching
 
00
-
Thermistor input (PTC) span

Communication selection
Up/Down memory mode
3–94
B–20
3–95
C–27
Func.
Code
Name
Description
A
B
Initial
data
Units
Page
3–95
 UP/DWN clear mode
Freq. set value when UDC signal is
given to the input terminal, two
option codes:
0 Hz
Original setting (in the
EEPROM memory at power
on)
 
00
-
 EO gain adjustment
Set range is 50 to 200%
 
100.
%
 AM gain adjustment
Set range is 50 to 200%
 
100.
%
 AM bias adjustment
Set range is 0 to 100%
 
0.
%
 Overload warning level 2
Sets the overload warning signal 2
level between 0% and 200% (from
0 to two time the rated current of
the inverter)
 
Rated
current
x 1.15
A
 Output [11] on delay
 
0.0
Sec.
 Output [11] off delay
 
0.0
Sec.
 
0.0
Sec.
 Output [12] off delay
 
0.0
Sec.
 Relay output on delay
 
0.0
Sec.
 Relay output off delay
 
0.0
Sec.
 
00

 
00

 
00

 
00

 
00

 
00

 
00

 
00

 Output [12] on delay
 Logic output 1 operand A
 Logic output 1 operand B
 Logic output 1 operator
 Logic output 2 operand A
 Logic output 2 operand B
 Logic output 2 operator
 Logic output 3 operand A
 Logic output 3 operand B
Set range is 0.0 to 100.0 sec.
All the programmable functions
available for logic (discrete)
outputs except LOG1 to LOG3,
OPO, no
Applies a logic function to
calculate [LOG] output state,
Three options:
[LOG] = A AND B
[LOG] = A OR B
[LOG] = A XOR B
All the programmable functions
available for logic (discrete)
outputs except LOG1 to LOG3,
OPO, no
Applies a logic function to
calculate [LOG] output state,
Three options:
[LOG] = A AND B
[LOG] = A OR B
[LOG] = A XOR B
All the programmable functions
available for logic (discrete)
outputs except LOG1 to LOG3,
OPO, no
3–96
3–90
3–84
3–97
C–28
Func.
Code
B
Initial
data
 
 Input [1] response time
 Input [2] response time
Name
Units
Page
00

3–97
 
1.

 
1.

 
1.

 
1.

 
1.

 Input [6] response time
 
1.

 Input [7] response time
 
1.

Set range is 0. to 200. (x 10ms)
 
0.
msec.
Two option codes:
40ms
2ms
 
00

Set the filter time constant for
output current detection used for
judgement of overload warning.
Range is 0 to 9999 ms
 
0
msec.
Set the hysteresis for overload
warning signal.
Range is 0 to 50% of the rated
current of the inverter
 
10.00
%
 Logic output 3 operator
 Input [3] response time
 Input [4] response time
 Input [5] response time
Multistage speed/position
 determination time
Overload warning
 processing cycle select

Overload warning filter time
constant
 Overload warning hysteresis
Description
Applies a logic function to
calculate [LOG] output state,
Three options:
[LOG] = A AND B
[LOG] = A OR B
[LOG] = A XOR B
Sets response time of each input
terminal, set range:
(x 2 [ms]) to (x 2 [ms])
(0 to 400 [ms])
A
3–79
3–98
3–90
C–29
Motor Constants Functions
Func.
Code
Name
 Motor capacity
Motor capacity,
 2nd motor
 Motor poles setting
Motor poles setting,
 2nd motor
Description
Motor stabilization
B
Initial
data
Specified
Twelve selections:
0.1/0.2/0.4/0.75/1.5/2.2/3.7/
5.5/7.5/11/15/18.5
Twenty four selections:
2 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 10 / 12 / 14 / 16 / 18 /
20 / 22 / 24 / 26 / 28 / 30 / 32 / 34 /
36 / 38 / 40 / 42 / 44 / 46 / 48
 Motor stabilization constant Motor constant (factory set),
 constant, 2nd motor
A
range is 0 to 255
Units
  by the
kW

kW
capacity of
each
inverter
model

4
poles

4
poles
 
100.

 
100.

Page
3–99
C–30
Expansion Card Functions
Func.
Code
Name
Description
A
B
Initial
data
Units
Page
Two option codes:
Inverter trips
Ignores the error (Inverter
continues operation)
 
00

3–100
Via operator
Via EzSQ

00

3–10
Set range is 0.00 to 99.99s

1.00
Sec.
Tripping
Tripping after decelerating
and stopping the motor
Ignoring errors
Stopping the motor after
free-running
Decelerating and stopping the
motor

00

0 to 20

01

Tripping
Tripping after decelerating
and stopping the motor
Ignoring errors
Stopping the motor after
free-running
Decelerating and stopping the
motor

00

 RPM
0/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/22/
24/26/28/30/32/34/36/38/40/42/
44/46/48

0
poles
 EzSQ user parameter
to
U(00) to U(31)

Each set range is 0 to 65535
 
0.

 EzCOM number of data
1 to 5
 
5.

destination 1
 EzCOM
address
1 to 247
 
1.

 register
0000 to FFFF
 
0000

 EzCOM source 1 register
0000 to FFFF
 
0000

destination 2
 EzCOM
address
1 to 247
 
2.

 register
0000 to FFFF
 
0000

 EzCOM source 2 register
0000 to FFFF
 
0000

1 to 247
 
3.

0000 to FFFF
 
0000


Reaction when option card
error occurs
Acceleration/Deceleration
 setting source selection
Communication watchdog
 timer (for option)
Inverter action on
 communication error
(for option)
DeviceNet polled I/O:
 Output instance number
Inverter action on
 communication idle mode
Motor poles setting for
EzCOM destination 1
EzCOM destination 2
EzCOM destination 3
 address
EzCOM destination 3
 register
3–100
C–31
Func.
Code
Name


B
Initial
data
Units
Page
0000 to FFFF
 
0000

destination 4
 EzCOM
address
1 to 247
 
4.

 register
0000 to FFFF
 
0000

 EzCOM source 4 register
0000 to FFFF
 
0000

destination 5
 EzCOM
address
1 to 247
 
5.

 register
0000 to FFFF
 
0000

 EzCOM source 5 register
0000 to FFFF
 
0000

0000h to FFFFh
 
0000

0000h to FFFFh
 
0000

 Profibus Node address
0. to 125.

0.

Clear Node
 Profibus
address
…Clear
…Hold previous time value

00

…PPO type
…Conventional
…Flexible Mode Format
Selection

00

0 to 63

63

Initial
data
Units
Page
no

3–62
EzCOM destination 5

A
 EzCOM source 3 register
EzCOM destination 4

Description
 Option I/F command
to
register to write 1 to 10

 Option I/F command
to
register to read 1 to 10



Profibus Map selection
 DeviceNet MAC ID
3–100
User setting parameters
Func.
Code

to

Name
User parameters 1 to 32
Description
Set range,
“", to 
A
B
 
D–1
Appendix D :
CE-EMC Installation
Guidelines
In This Appendix…
D
page
-
CE-EMC Installation Guidelines ...................................................... D–2
-
Hitachi EMC Recommendations ..................................................... D–6
D–2
CE-EMC Installation Guidelines
You are required to satisfy the EMC directive (2004/108/EC) when using a WL200 inverter in an EU
country.
To satisfy the EMC directive and to comply with standard, you need to use a dedicated EMC filter
suitable for each model, and follow the guidelines in this section. Following table shows the
compliance condition for reference.
Table 1. Condition for the compliance
Model
Cat.
Carrier f
Motor cable
All WL200 series
C1
2kHz
20m (Shielded)
Table 2. Applicable EMC filter
Inverter model Filter model (Schaffner)
WL200-002SFE
WL200-004SFE FS24828-8-07
1-ph. 200V class WL200-007SFE
WL200-015SFE
FS24828-27-07
WL200-022SFE
WL200-004HFE
WL200-007HFE FS24830-6-07
WL200-015HFE
WL200-022HFE
WL200-030HFE FS24830-12-07
3-ph. 400V class WL200-040HFE
WL200-055HFE FS24830-15-07
WL200-075HFE
FS24830-29-07
WL200-110HFE
WL200-150HFE
FS24830-48-07
WL200-185HFE
WL200-185H needs to be installed in a metal cabinet and add ferrite core at the input
cable to meet category C1. Unless otherwise category C2.
Input class
D–3
Important notes
1. Input choke or other equipment is required if necessary to comply with EMC directive
from the harmonic distortion point of view (IEC 61000-3-2 and 4).
2. If the motor cable length exceeds 20m, use output choke to avoid unexpected problem
due to the leakage current from the motor cable (such as malfunction of the thermal
relay, vibration of the motor, etc..).
3. As user you must ensure that the HF (high frequency) impedance between adjustable
frequency inverter, filter, and ground is as small as possible.
 Ensure that the connections are metallic and have the largest possible contact areas
(zinc-plated mounting plates).
4. Avoid conductor loops that act like antennas, especially loops that encompass large
areas.
 Avoid unnecessary conductor loops.
 Avoid parallel arrangement of low-level signal wiring and power-carrying or
noise-prone conductors.
5. Use shielded wiring for the motor cable and all analog and digital control lines.
 Allow the effective shield area of these lines to remain as large as possible; i.e., do
not strip away the shield (screen) further away from the cable end than absolutely
necessary.
 With integrated systems (for example, when the adjustable frequency inverter is
communicating with some type of supervisory controller or host computer in the
same control cabinet and they are connected at the same protective ground),
connect the shields of the control lines to protective ground at both ends. With
distributed systems (for example the communicating supervisory controller or host
computer is not in the same control cabinet and there is a distance between the
systems), we recommend connecting the shield of the control lines only at the end
connecting to the adjustable frequency inverter. If possible, route the other end of
the control lines directly to the cable entry section of the supervisory controller or
host computer. The shield conductor of the motor cables always must be connected
to protective ground at both ends.
 To achieve a large area contact between shield and protective ground, use a PG
screw with a metallic shell, or use a metallic mounting clip.
 Use only cable with braided, tinned copper mesh shield (type “CY”) with 85%
coverage.
 The shielding continuity should not be broken at any point in the cable. If the use of
reactors, contactors, terminals, or safety switches in the motor output is necessary,
the unshielded section should be kept as short as possible.
 Some motors have a rubber gasket between terminal box and motor housing. Very
often, the terminal boxes, and particularly the threads for the metal PG screw
connections, are painted. Make sure there is always a good metallic connection
between the shielding of the motor cable, the metal PG screw connection, the
terminal box, and the motor housing. If necessary, carefully remove paint between
conducting surfaces.
D–4
6. Take measures to minimize interference that is frequently coupled in through
installation cables.
 Separate interfering cables with 0.25m minimum from cables susceptible to
interference. A particularly critical point is laying parallel cables over longer
distances. If two cables intersect (one crosses over the other), the interference is
smallest if they intersect at an angle of 90°. Cables susceptible to interference
should therefore only intersect motor cables, intermediate circuit cables, or the
wiring of a rheostat at right angles and never be laid parallel to them over longer
distances.
7. Minimize the distance between an interference source and an interference sink
(interference- threatened device), thereby decreasing the effect of the emitted
interference on the interference sink.
 You should use only interference-free devices and maintain a minimum distance of
0.25 m from the adjustable frequency inverter.
8. Follow safety measures in the filter installation.
 If using external EMC filter, ensure that the ground terminal (PE) of the filter is
properly connected to the ground terminal of the adjustable frequency inverter. An
HF ground connection via metal contact between the housings of the filter and the
adjustable frequency inverter, or solely via cable shield, is not permitted as a
protective conductor connection. The filter must be solidly and permanently
connected with the ground potential so as to preclude the danger of electric shock
upon touching the filter if a fault occurs.
To achieve a protective ground connection for the filter:
2
 Ground the filter with a conductor of at least 10 mm cross-sectional area.
 Connect a second grounding conductor, using a separate grounding terminal
parallel to the protective conductor. (The cross section of each single protective
conductor terminal must be sized for the required nominal load.)
D–5
Installation for WL200 series (example of SFE models)
Model HFx (3-ph. 400V class) is the same concept for the installation.
Power supply
1-ph. 200V
Metal plate (earth)
The filter is a footprint type, so it is located
between the inverter and the metal plate.
Remove the insulation material coating of the
earth contact portions so to obtain good
grounding condition.
PE
EMC filter
(Foot-print)
L1,N
U,V,W
Cable clamp *
Earth line is connected to the
heatsink of the inverter
(or PE terminal for bigger models)
Shielded cable
Metal plate (earth)
Cable clamp *
M
*) Both earth portions of the shielded cable must be connected to the earth point by cable clamps.
Input choke or equipment to reduce harmonic current is necessary for CE marking (IEC
61000-3-2 and IEC61000-3-4) from the harmonic current point of view, even conducted
emission and radiated emission passed without the input choke.
D–6
Hitachi EMC Recommendations
WARNING: This equipment should be installed, adjusted, and serviced by qualified
personal familiar with construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards
involved. Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury.
Use the following checklist to ensure the inverter is within proper operating ranges and
conditions.
1. The power supply to WL200 inverters must meet these specifications:
 Voltage fluctuation ±10% or less
 Voltage imbalance ±3% or less
 Frequency variation ±4% or less
 Voltage distortion THD = 10% or less
2. Installation measure:
 Use a filter designed for WL200 inverter. Refer to the instruction of the applicable
external EMC filter.
3. Wiring:
 Shielded wire (screened cable) is required for motor wiring, and the length must be
20 meter or less.
 If the motor cable length exceeds the value shown above, use output choke to
avoid unexpected problem due to the leakage current from the motor cable.
 The carrier frequency setting must be 2 kHz to satisfy EMC requirements.
 Separate the power input and motor wiring from the signal/process circuit wiring.
4. Environmental conditions—when using a filter, follow these guidelines:
 Ambient temperature: –10 to 40 °C (Derating is required)
 Humidity: 20 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
 Vibration: 5.9 m/sec2 (0.6 G) 10 to 55Hz
 Location: 1000 meters or less altitude, indoors (no corrosive gas or dust)
E–1
Appendix E:
Safety
(ISO13849-1)
E
*Be available in future
In This Appendix…
page
-
Introduction ....................................................................................... E–2
-
Stop Category defined in EN60204-1 ............................................. E–2
-
How it works ...................................................................................... E–2
-
Activation ........................................................................................... E–2
-
Installation ......................................................................................... E–3
-
Wiring example ................................................................................. E–4
-
Components to be combined .......................................................... E–6
-
Periodical check (proof test) ............................................................ E–6
-
Precautions ........................................................................................ E–7
E–2
Introduction
The Gate Suppress function can be utilized to perform a safe stop according to the
EN60204-1, stop category 0 (Uncontrolled stop by power removal) (as STO function of
IEC/EN61800-5-2). It is designed to meet the requirements of the ISO13849-1 Cat.3 PLd,
IEC61508 SIL2 and IEC/EN61800-5-2 SIL2 only in a system in which EDM signal is monitored
by an “External Device Monitor”.
Stop Category defined in EN60204-1
Category 0: Uncontrolled stop by immediate (< 200 ms) shut-down of the power supply to
the actuators.
(as STO function of IEC/EN61800-5-2)
Category 1: Controlled stop by interrupting the power supply to the actuator level if, for
example, the hazardous movement has been brought to a standstill
(time-delayed shut-down of the power supply).
(as SS1 function of IEC/EN61800-5-2)
Category 2: Controlled stop. The power supply to the drive element is not interrupted.
Additional measures to EN 1037 (protection from unexpected restart) are
necessary.
(as SS2 function of IEC/EN61800-5-2)
How it works
Interrupting the current to GS1 or GS2, for
example removing the link between either GS1 or
GS2 and PLC or both GS1/GS2 and PLC disables
the drive output, i.e. the power supply to the
motor is cut by stopping the switching of the
output transistors in a safe way. EDM output is
activated when GS1 and GS2 are given to the
drive.
Always use both inputs to disable the drive. EDM
output conducts when both GS1 and GS2 circuits
are working properly. If for any reason only one
channel is opened, the drive output is stopped
but the EDM output is not activated. In this case
the Safe Disable input wiring must be checked.
Activation
Safety function
switch
OFF
ON
EDM function
switch
OFF
(normal)
ON
(EDM)
Turning on the safety switch automatically assign
the GS1 input and GS2 input automatically.
To assign EDM (External Device Monitor) output,
please turn the EDM function switch on. EDM
output is automatically assigned on intelligent
output terminal 11.
(When safety switch or EDM switch is turned off,
the intelligent input and output terminal assigned
on will be set as "no" function, and contact will remain normally off.)
Always use both inputs to disable the drive. If for any reason only one channel is opened,
the drive output is stopped but the EDM output is not activated. In this case the Safe Disable
input wiring must be checked.
E–3
Installation
According to the safety standard listed above, please install referring to the example. Please
be sure to use the both GS1 and GS2, and construct the system that GS1 andGS2 are both
turned off when safety input is given to the inverter. Be sure to carry out the proof test when
installation is ready before operation.
When the Gate Suppress function is utilized, connect the drive to a safety certified
interrupting device utilizing EDM output signal to reconfirm both safety inputs GS1 and GS2.
Output [11] function
Output [11] active state
Function
code
C003
C004
C013
C014
C021
C031
GS input mode
b145
item
Input [3] and [4] function
Input [3] and [4] active state
data
description
77
78
01
01
62
00
00
GS1: Safety input 1 (note 1)
GS2:Safety input 2 (note 1)
NC: Normally Closed (note 1)
NC: Normally Closed (note 1)
EDM:External Device Monitor (note2)
NO: Normally Open (note 2)
Output is shut off by hardware. No trip.
Output is shut off by hardware, and
then, trip. (note3) (note4)
01
Note 1) They are automatically set when safety switch is turned ON, cannot be changed.
Note 2) Those are automatically assigned when EDM switch is turned ON, cannot be changed.
Note 3) Inverter trips with "E37". When competing with external trip (E12), E37 has priority.
Note 4) While the drive is the trip status "E037" and either GS1 or GS2 is activated, on the safety by is
not guaranteed.
E–4
Wiring example
When the Gate Suppress function is utilized, connect the drive to a safety certified
interrupting device utilizing EDM output signal to reconfirm both safety inputs GS1 and GS2.
Fuse*
*
Reset
Switch
-
Safety input
Safety Switch
(Example: emergency
push button)
EDM
(feedback) input
+24V
T11 T31- T32 T33
A1
T12
-
+24V
A2
G9SX-GS226-T15-R
Safety output
S14
C
T21
T22
S24
KM1
CM
2
GS
1
GS
2
Safety Unit
※Standard
(IEC61508,ISO13849)
certified
PLC
L
WL200
M
(*) Specification of the fuse:
The arch extinguishing fuse with rated voltage AC250V, rated current 100mA complies to either
IEC6127 -2/-3/-4
example)
SOC EQ series AC250V, 100Ma (UL, SEMKO, BSI)
Little 216 series AC250V, 100mA (CCC, UL, CSA, SEMKO, CE, VDE)
Any external signal voltage connected to the WL200 must be from a SELV Power Supply.
By pressing the emergency stop button, the current to GS1 and GS2 is shut off, and the
inverter output is shut off. By this, motor is free-running. This behavior is according to the
stop category 0 defined in EN60204.
Note 1: Above is the example to use the intelligent input terminal with source logic. When it is used
with sink logic, the wiring is to be modified.
Note 2: The wire for safety relay and emergency input signal are to be shielded coaxial cable for
example RS174/U (produced by LAPP) by MIL-C17, or KX2B by NF C 93-550 with diameter
2.9mm with less than 2 meters. Please be sure to ground the shielding.
Note 3: All the inductance related parts such as relay and contactor are required to contain the
over-voltage protection circuit.
E–5
Inverter doesn’t block the current flowing into itself when it is not powered. This may cause
the closed circuit when two or more inverters are connected to common I/O wiring as
shown below to result in unexpected turning the on the input. This may lead to dangerous
situation. To avoid this closed circuit, please put the diode (rated:50V/0.1A) in the path as
described below.
IF the protection diodes used when the units are in wired parallel are only single diodes then
their condition would be checked as part of the proof test.
By having ability inverter doesn’t block the current flowing into itself when it is not powered.
This may cause the closed circuit when two or more inverters are connected to common I/O
wiring as shown below to result in unexpected turning the on the input. To avoid this closed
circuit, please put the diode (rated:50V/0.1A) in the path as described below.
In case of Sink logic
In case of Source logic
Power ON
Power ON
Jumper
wire
P24
P24
PLC
PLC
L
L
Power ON
Power ON
Jumper
wire P24
PLC
P24
PLC
L
L
wire
1
Input
ON
Inserting
1
Input
OFF
1
Input
ON
diode
Jumper Power OFF
wire P24
Power OFF
P24
wire PLC
L
PLC
1
Switch
OFF
The current loop cause
turn the input ON even
the switch is off when
diode is not inserted.
Inserting
1
Power OFF
P24
Jumper Power OFF
wire P24
PLC
L
PLC
L
L
1
1
1
Switch
OFF
The current loop is to be
prevented by inserting
diode instead of short
bar.
Input
OFF
diode
Switch
OFF
Switch
The current loop cause
turn the input ON even the
switch is off when diode is
not inserted.
The current loop is to be
prevented by inserting diode
instead of short bar.
OFF
E–6
Components to be combined
Followings are the example of the safety devices to be combined.
Series
Model
Norms to comply
reference certificate
GS9A
G9SX
NE1A
301
GS226-T15-RC
SCPU01-V1
ISO13849-2 cat4, SIL3
IEC61508 SIL1-3
IEC61508 SIL3
06.06.2007
04.11.2004
27.09.2006
The configuration of and components used in any circuit other than an appropriately pre
approved safety module that interfaces with the WL200 GS1/GS2 and EDM ports MUST be
at least equivalent to Cat. 3 PLd under ISO 13849-1:2006 in order to be able to claim an
overall Cat. 3 PLd for the WL200 and external circuit combination.
The EMI level that the external module has been assessed to must be at least equivalent to
that of Annex E in IEC 62061.
Periodical check (proof test)
Proof test is essential to be able to reveal any dangerous undetected failures after a period
of time, in this case 1 year. Carrying out this proof test at least one a year is the condition to
comply the ISO13849-1 PLd.
Terminal
GS1
GS2
EDM
(output)
current OFF
current OFF
conducted
forbidden
Status
current ON
current OFF
current OFF
current ON
not conducted
not conducted
forbidden
forbidden
current ON
current ON
not conducted
Allowed
- To activate (give current to) GS1 and GS2 simultaneously and separately to see output is
allowed and EDM is conducting - To activate (give current to) both GS1 and GS2 to see
output is allowed and EDM is not conducting
- To activate (give current to) GS1, not to activate GS2 and see output is forbidden and EDM
is not conducting
- To activate (give current to) GS2, not to activate GS1 and see output is forbidden and EDM
is not conducting
- To deactivate (interrupt current to) both GS1 and GS2 to see output is forbidden and EDM
is conducting
Be sure to carry out the proof test when installation is ready before operation.
IF the protection diodes used when the units are in wired parallel are only single diodes then
their condition would be checked as part of the proof test. Check to reconfirm the diodes
are not damaged when proof test is done.
E–7
Precautions
1. To assure, that the Safe Disable function appropriately fulfills the safety requirements of
the application, a throughout risk assessment for the whole safety system has to be
carried out.
2. The Safe Disable function does not cut the power supply to the drive and does not
provide electrical isolation. Before any installation or maintenance work is done, the
drives power supply must be switched off and place a tag/lock-out.
3. The wiring distance for the Safe Disable inputs should be shorter than 30 m.
4. The time from opening the Safe Disable input until the drive output is switched off is
less than 10 ms.To assure, that the Safe Disable function appropriately fulfills the safety
requirements of the application, a throughout risk assessment for the whole safety
system has to be carried out.
Index–1
Index
2
B
2CH .............................................................. 4–22
A
A Group parameters ................................. 3–11
AC reactors ................................................... 5–3
Acceleration ................................... 1–19 , 3–10
characteristic curves ........................... 3–37
second function.................................... 3–36
stop ......................................................... 3–29
two stage ............................................... 4–22
Accessories ................................................... 5–2
Active frequency matching restart ....... 3–45
ADD .............................................................. 4–39
Add frequency ........................................... 3–41
enable ..................................................... 4–39
AHD .............................................................. 4–42
AL ................................................................. 4–53
Alarm signal .................................... 4–46, 4–53
Algorithm torque control .............. 3–4, 3–99
Ambient temperature ...................... 2–8 , A–2
setting .................................................... 3–66
Analog
command hold ...................................... 4–42
current input disconnect detect ....... 4–60
disconnect detect ................................ 4–60
voltage input disconnect detect ...... 4–60
Analog input
adjusting characteristics .................... 3–15
calibration settings .............................. 3–94
current .................................................... 4–77
operation ............................................... 4–77
range settings ............................ 3–39, 3–42
settings ........................................ 3–15, 3–39
voltage .................................................... 4–77
voltage/current select ......................... 4–28
Analog output
calibration related function ............... 3–96
operation ............................................... 4–79
Arrival frequency ........................................ A–2
AT ................................................................. 4–28
Automatic
restart mode ......................................... 3–43
user parameter registration .............. 3–62
Automatic voltage regulation ..... 2–30, 3–34
B Group parameters ................................ 3–43
Base frequency................................. 2–30, A–2
setting .................................................... 3–14
BER ............................................................... 4–58
Bibliography ................................................ A–8
BOK .............................................................. 4–37
Brake
conf irmation ......................................... 4–37
control function related ..................... 3–73
error signal............................................ 4–58
release signal ........................................ 4–58
Braking........................................................ 1–18
dynamic .................................................... 5–5
resistor ..................................................... A–2
settings .................................................. 3–25
Break-away torque ..................................... A–2
BRK .............................................................. 4–58
Index–2
Deceleration .................................. 1–19 , 3–10
characteristic curves ........................... 3–37
second function ................................... 3–36
stop ......................................................... 3–29
two stage ............................................... 4–22
Default settings
listing ....................................................... C–3
restoring ................................................ 6–14
Delay function output circuits .............. 4–47
Digital operator ................................ 2–24, 3–3
Dimensions
inverter ..................................................... 2–9
terminals ................................................ 2–16
Diode............................................................. A–3
Disconnect defect analog input ........... 4–60
DISP ............................................................. 4–44
Display
limitation ............................................... 4–44
related paramerters ............................ 3–58
Duty cycle .................................................... A–3
DWN ............................................................ 4–34
Dynamic braking ............................. 1–18, A–3
related function ................................... 3–68
C
C Group parameters ................................. 3–79
Calcurate function .................................... 3–40
Capacitor life
curve ....................................................... 6–21
warning signal ...................................... 4–66
Carrier frequency ........................................ A–2
(PWM)related ........................................ 3–67
adjustment............................................. 3–67
automatic reduction ............................ 3–67
Cautions
general ......................................................... xi
index to ........................................................ iv
inverter mounting .................................. 2–7
operating procedures ........................... 4–2
CE approval .................................................. A–2
CE-EMC guidelines ..................................... D–2
CF1 ............................................................... 4–17
CF2 ............................................................... 4–17
CF3 ............................................................... 4–17
CF4 ............................................................... 4–17
Choke .......................................... 2–4, 5–3, A–2
Clear watt-hour data ................................ 4–40
Commercial power source switchover . 4–26
Communication signal disconnect
detection .................................................... 4–64
Components to be combined .................. E–6
Constant
torque ..................................................... 3–21
voltage/hertz operation ..................... 1–16
Contact Information ..................................... xxi
Control algorithms ................................... 3–21
Controlled stop operation at
power loss .................................................. 3–63
Cooling fan warning signal .................... 4–66
CS ................................................................. 4–26
Current
input ........................................................ 4–77
limitation related functions ............... 3–52
overload ...................................... 2–31, 3–46
Current/voltage input select .................. 4–28
D
D Group parameters .................................. 3–5
Data Read/Write selection ...................... 3–76
DB ................................................................. 4–20
DC braking ........................................ 3–25, A–2
(DB)settings ........................................... 3–25
frequency detection ............................ 3–25
DC Braking ................................................. 4–20
DC Bus AVR ................................................ 3–75
Deadband ..................................................... A–2
E
Edit mode ................................................... 2–34
Editing parameters ....................... 2–24, 2–28
EDM .................................................... 4–76, A–3
EEPROM write mode ................................ B–19
Electronic thermal
characteristic ........................................ 3–47
characteristic curve ............................. 3–47
subtraction ............................................ 3–48
warning output ......................... 3–48, 4–57
warring output ..................................... 3–92
EMC
f ilter ............................................................ xiii
installation guidelines .......................... D–2
installation recommendations ............ D–6
EMI ................................................................. A–3
Energy savings mode .............................. 3–35
ENTER command ...................................... B–19
Environmentl
specs .......................................................... 1–7
Executing EzSQ program ........................ 4–43
EXT ............................................................... 4–24
External
DC braking ............................................ 4–20
frequency f ilter time constant .......... 3–16
trip .......................................................... 4–24
EzCOM ........................................................ B–20
EzSQ related parameter settings ........ 3–101
Index–3
HLD .............................................................. 4–43
Horsepower ................................................. A–4
How to connect? ......................................... 4–9
F
F Group parameters ................................. 3–10
F/R ................................................................ 4–31
FA1 to FA5 .................................................. 4–49
Factory default settings restoring ........ 6–14
Fan control ................................................. 3–68
Fan outlet ..................................................... 2–8
FAQ .............................................................. 1–20
FBV ............................................................... 4–63
Features ............................................... 1–2, 2–2
Feedback value check .............................. 4–63
Ferrule ........................................................... 4–9
Filters noise suppressions ........................ 5–2
Fine-tuning functions .............................. 3–43
Force
operation from digital operator ....... 4–35
terminal mode ...................................... 4–40
Forward
reverse .................................................... 4–31
rotation .................................................. 4–71
run/stop ................................................. 4–16
Four-quadrant operation .......................... A–3
FR ................................................................. 4–67
Free-run stop .................................... 4–23, A–3
Free-V/F settings related ............. 3–22, 3–72
FREF ............................................................. 4–74
Frequency
command source .................................. 4–74
limits ....................................................... 3–27
setting ...................................................... A–3
source setting ....................................... 3–11
Frequency arrival
output ..................................................... 3–91
signals..................................................... 4–49
Frequently asked questions ................... 1–20
FRS ............................................................... 4–23
F-TM ............................................................ 4–40
Fuse size .............................................. xvi, 2–15
FW ................................................................ 4–16
FWR .............................................................. 4–71
G
General input(1) to (3) ............................. 4–69
General purpose input(1) to (7) ............. 4–41
Glossary of terms ........................................ A–2
H
H Group parameters ................................ 3–99
Harmonics .................................................... A–4
Heat sink overheat warring .................... 4–68
Heat sink overheat warring output ...... 3–92
Histor y of trip events ................................. 3–8
I
IGBT ................................................... 1–15 , A–4
measurements techniques ................. 6–20
procedures ............................................ 6–15
test method .......................................... 6–17
unpacking ................................................. 2–2
Inertia ........................................................... A–4
Initialization .............................................. 6–14
codes ...................................................... 3–68
related .................................................... 3–68
Input
circuits ............................................ 4–5, 4–12
function summar y table ..................... 3–81
terminal conf iguration ....................... 3–79
Inspection electrical measurements .... 6–18
Installation
for WL200 series .................................... D–5
instructions .............................................. 2–6
Insulation test ........................................... 6–16
Integral gain .............................................. 3–30
Intelligent input ........................................ 4–10
overview ................................................ 3–80
terminals ..................................... 3–79, 4–12
Intelligent output ..................................... 4–11
terminals ..................................... 3–84, 4–45
Intelligent terminals
def inition ................................................. A–4
functions ................................................ 3–79
index ....................................................... 4–10
Inverter .............................................. 1–15, A–4
dimensions ............................................... 2–9
programming ........................................... 3–2
ready signal .......................................... 4–70
IRDY ............................................................. 4–70
Isolation transformer ................................ A–4
J
JG ................................................................. 4–19
Jog frequency ............................................ 3–20
settings .................................................. 3–18
Jogging ....................................................... 4–19
Jogging operation...................................... A–4
Jump frequencies ............................ 3–28, A–4
Index–4
K
Keypad.................................................. 2–2 , 3–2
connected ................................................ 3–9
features ......................................... 2–24, 3–3
navigation .............................................. 2–25
navigation trip events ........................... 6–8
KHC .............................................................. 4–40
L
LAC ............................................................... 4–38
LAD cancellation ....................................... 4–38
LEDs ......................................... 2–24, 2–25, 3–3
Line reactor .................................................. A–4
Linear accel/decel ..................................... 3–37
LOC............................................................... 4–69
LOG1 to LOG3 ............................................ 4–65
Logic output
function ....................................... 3–97, 4–65
terminals ....................................... 3–84, 4–6
Low load detection ................................... 4–69
output ..................................................... 3–89
M
Main prof ile parameters ......................... 3–10
Maintenance procedures ........................ 6–15
Major failure signal .................................. 4–72
Manual torque boost ............................... 3–23
Maximum frequency setting .................. 3–14
Megger test ............................................... 6–16
MI1 to MI7.................................................. 4–41
MJA .............................................................. 4–72
MO1 to MO3 .............................................. 4–69
Modbus
coil list .................................................... B–24
data listing ............................................ B–24
exception response ............................. B–18
explanation of function codes .......... B–10
introduction ............................................ B–2
massage configuration query ............. B–6
massage configuration response ....... B–8
protocol reference ................................. B–5
store new register data ...................... B–19
Modbus holding registers ...................... B–26
Model number
convention ............................................... 1–3
on nameplate .......................................... 1–3
Model-specs table ...................................... 1–4
Momentum ................................................... A–4
Monitor mode ......................... 2–25, 3–4, 6–8
Monitoring
function .................................................... 3–5
parameters............................................. 2–33
Motor
cable length paramerter .................... 3–55
constants ............................................... 3–99
load ........................................................... A–5
poles ................................. 1–21, 2–32, 3–99
speed ...................................................... 2–35
wiring ..................................................... 2–21
Mounting
clearance for ventilation ....................... 2–8
dimensions ............................................... 2–9
location ..................................................... 2–7
Multi-speed
binary operation .................................. 4–17
bit operation......................................... 4–36
operation ................................................. A–5
prof iles ................................................... 1–19
settings .................................................. 3–18
N
Nameplate .................................................... 1–3
Navigation
map ......................................................... 2–25
Navigational
trip events ............................................. 6–13
NDc .............................................................. 4–64
NEC ................................................................ A–5
NEMA def inition ......................................... A–5
Network commnucations
error code.............................................. 6–10
Network communications ............. 1–20 , B–2
Modbus data listing ............................ B–24
parameter settings .................................B–4
protocol reference ..................................B–5
settings .................................................. 3–93
termination resistor ...............................B–3
Index–5
O
OD ................................................................ 4–52
ODc .............................................................. 4–60
OHF .............................................................. 4–68
OIDc ............................................................. 4–60
OL ................................................................. 4–51
OL2 ............................................................... 4–51
OLR .............................................................. 4–37
ONT .............................................................. 4–56
OPE .............................................................. 4–35
Open collector outputs .................. 4–45, A–5
Operational
components............................................. 2–7
modes ....................................................... 3–4
precautions ............................................ 2–23
Operational components .......................... 1–2
Orientation ................................................... 2–2
Other
analog input related topics ............... 4–78
functions ................................................ 3–98
Output
adjustment paramerters ..................... 3–89
circuits ...................................................... 4–5
curcuits ................................................... 4–45
deray function ...................................... 4–47
deviation for PID control ................... 4–52
frequency .............................................. 2–33
function summar y table ..................... 3–86
logic and timing ................................... 3–97
motor ...................................................... 1–17
overload ................................................. 3–46
setting ..................................................... 3–10
terminal conf iguration ....................... 3–84
Over-current trip ....................................... 3–43
error code ................................................ 6–8
suppression ........................................... 3–52
Overload
conf iguration ........................................ 3–46
error code ................................................ 6–8
restriction .............................................. 3–52
restriction source changeover .......... 4–37
warning output ..................................... 4–51
warring output...................................... 3–90
Override source settings ......................... 3–12
Over-voltage trip ...................................... 3–43
error code ................................................ 6–8
P
P Group parameters ............................... 3–100
Parameter editing .......................... 2–24, 2–28
listing ........................................................ C–3
setting ......................................... 1–18, 2–25
Password function .................................... 3–77
Periodical check ........................................... E–6
Permission
of run command .................................. 4–44
PID ............................................................... 4–32
clear ........................................................ 4–32
control .................................................... 3–30
deviation output .................................. 3–33
disable .................................................... 4–32
error ............................................... 4–52, A–3
error inversion ...................................... 3–32
feedback comparison output ............ 3–33
loop ............................................... 1–22, A–5
loop conf iguration .............................. 3–32
output limit ........................................... 3–32
scalling ................................................... 3–33
second stage output ........................... 4–61
settings .................................................. 3–30
sleep function ...................................... 3–33
PIDC ............................................................. 4–32
PLC connecting ............................................ 4–4
Poles of motor .................... 1–21, 2–32, 3–99
Potentiomerter.......................................... 3–11
Potentiometer ........................................... 2–28
Power
factor ........................................................ A–5
on time expiration signal .................. 4–56
Power test observations
acceleration and deceleration .......... 2–35
error codes ............................................ 2–35
interpreting the display ..................... 2–35
inverter at stop .................................... 2–35
monitor/program modes ................... 2–35
run/stop vs monitor/program
modes ..................................................... 2–35
speed (RPM) ......................................... 2–35
Powering the inverter.............................. 2–23
Powerup fail............................................... 3–43
Powerup test ............................................. 2–22
Powerup test observations .................... 2–35
Powerup unattended start ..................... 4–25
error code................................................. 6–9
Pre-test ....................................................... 2–23
Preventative maintenance ...................... 6–15
PRG .............................................................. 4–43
Process variable .......................................... A–5
Program
mode ......................................................... 3–4
Program mode ............................... 2–25, 2–33
Programming device .................................. 3–2
Proof test ..................................................... A–5
Proportional gain ..................................... 3–30
PTC ............................................................... 4–30
PV source settting .................................... 3–30
PWM .............................................................. A–5
Index–6
R
Ratings label ................................................ 1–3
Reactance ..................................................... A–6
Recommended ferrule ............................... 4–9
Rectif ier ........................................................ A–6
Reduced torque ......................................... 3–21
Reduced voltage start ............................. 3–57
REF ............................................................... 4–74
Regenerative braking ................................. A–6
Regulation .................................................... A–6
Relay
alarm signal contacts .......................... 4–53
as intelligent output ........................... 4–46
Remote control ......................................... 4–33
data clear ............................................... 4–34
down function....................................... 4–34
up function ............................................ 4–34
Reset
inverter ................................................... 4–29
Restart mode conf iguration ................... 3–70
Retain output frequency ......................... 4–43
Reverse
rotation .................................................. 4–71
run/stop ................................................. 4–16
torque ....................................................... A–6
Revision Histor y ............................................. xx
RF noise f ilter .............................................. 5–4
RNT .............................................................. 4–56
ROK .............................................................. 4–44
Rotation
direction restriction ............................. 3–56
restriction related paramerter .......... 3–56
Rotor .............................................................. A–6
RPM .............................................................. 2–35
RS ................................................................. 4–29
Run
command source .................................. 4–74
command source
setting .............................. 2–29, 3–12, 4–35
mode .............................................. 2–33, 3–4
signal ........................................... 4–46, 4–48
time expiration signal ......................... 4–56
RUN .............................................................. 4–48
Run mode edit ....................... 3–4, 3–54, 4–27
Running the motor ................................... 2–33
RV ................................................................. 4–16
RVR............................................................... 4–71
S
Safety
how it works ............................................ E–2
installation ............................................... E–3
message ......................................................... i
precaution ................................................ E–7
related signals ...................................... 4–43
wiring example ........................................ E–4
Saturation voltage ..................................... A–6
Scaling ........................................................ 3–60
S-curve accel/decel ................................. 3–37
Second
accel and decel .................................... 3–36
motor ...................................................... 4–21
motor selection .................................... 4–75
stage output ......................................... 4–61
Sensorless vector control ......................... A–6
Service warranty ....................................... 6–22
SET ............................................................... 4–21
Set (select)2nd motor data .................... 4–21
SETM ........................................................... 4–75
Setpoint ........................................................ A–6
SF1 to SF7 .................................................. 4–36
SFT ............................................................... 4–27
Single-phase power ................................... A–6
Sink/source input conf iguration .......... 4–12
Slip
compensation gain.............................. 3–24
def inition ................................................. A–6
Software lock......................... 3–4 , 3–54, 4–27
Specifications
control logic signals ..................... 1–8, 4–6
general ...................................................... 1–6
inverter ..................................................... 1–4
inverter label ........................................... 1–3
Speed
command .............................................. 2–28
control .............................. 1–15, 1–19, 4–17
Squirrel cage ............................................... A–7
STA ............................................................... 4–31
Standard functions ................................... 3–11
Start
contact signal ....................................... 4–67
frequency adjustment ........................ 3–68
motor ...................................................... 4–31
Stator ............................................................ A–7
STO(Safe Torque Off)
performance monitor ......................... 4–76
setting .................................................... 3–76
STO1 ............................................................ 4–43
STO2 ............................................................ 4–43
Stop
enable function .................................... 3–68
mode conf iguration ............................ 3–70
motor ...................................................... 4–31
STP ............................................................... 4–31
Supply wiring ............................................ 2–15
Symbol def initions ........................................... i
System description ..................................... 2–4
Index–7
UP ................................................................ 4–34
Up/down function .................................... 4–33
User parameter registration .................. 3–62
USP ...................................................... 4–25, 6–9
UV ................................................................ 4–55
T
Tachometer ................................................... A–7
technical support .......................................... xxi
Term definition ............................................ A–2
Terminal/program source
conf iguration ............................................. 3–13
Terminals
listing ...................................................... 4–10
torque specs.................................... xv, 2–16
Termination resistor network ................... B–3
Thermal
switch ........................................................ A–7
trip error code ........................................ 6–9
Thermistor
def inition ................................................. A–7
error code ................................................ 6–9
thermal protection ............................... 4–30
THM ............................................................. 4–57
Three-phase power
def inition ................................................. A–7
motor phase connections .................. 1–16
wiring precautions ............................... 2–14
Three-wire interface operation ............. 4–31
Torque ............................................... 1–16 , A–7
boost ....................................................... 3–23
control algorithm ............. 3–4, 3–21, 3–99
specs terminals ............................... xv, 2–16
Transistor ...................................................... A–7
Transmission procedure ............................ B–5
Trip alarm ................................................... 4–54
Trip events .................................................. 4–29
clearing .................................................... 6–8
def inition ................................................. A–8
histor y .................................................... 6–13
Trip evevnts .................................................. 3–8
monitoring ............................................... 6–8
Trip/power loss alarm .............................. 4–54
Troubleshooting tips .................................. 6–3
Two-stage acceleration and
deceleration ............................................... 4–22
V
V/f control ................................................. 3–21
Variable frequency drives introductio n1–15
Variable torque ......................................... 3–21
Velocity prof iles ........................................ 1–19
Ventilation .................................................... 2–8
Voltage compensation gain ................... 3–24
Voltage gain .............................................. 3–23
Voltage input .................................. 3–15, 4–77
W
WAC ............................................................. 4–66
WAF ............................................................. 4–66
Warning
codes ...................................................... 6–11
general ......................................................... xi
index to ........................................................ iv
operating procedures ............................ 4–3
troubleshooting ...................................... 6–2
Warranty ..................................................... 6–22
Watt hour related ..................................... 3–66
Watt loss ...................................................... A–8
WCO ............................................................ 4–73
WCOI ........................................................... 4–73
W indow comparator analog
disconnection ............................................ 3–65
W indow comparator for analog
current input ......................................... 4–73
voltage input ........................................ 4–73
W ire size control relay terminals ............. 4–8
W iring
analog inputs ........................................ 4–77
gauge ............................................... xv, 2–15
inverter output ..................................... 2–21
logic connectors .......................... 2–21, 4–7
power input .......................................... 2–17
precautions ........................................... 2–14
relay contacts .......................................... 4–7
sample control logic terminal ............. 4–7
system diagram ....................................... 4–5
U
UDC .............................................................. 4–34
UL instructions .............................................. xiv
Unattended start protection .................. 4–25
error code ................................................ 6–9
Uncover the inverter vents ..................... 2–22
Under-voltage
error code ................................................ 6–8
signal ...................................................... 4–55
trip ........................................................... 3–43
Unpacking .................................................... 2–2
Z
Zero Hz speed detection signal ............ 4–59
Zero speed detection output ................ 3–92
Zero-phase reactor ..................................... 5–4
ZS ................................................................. 4–59
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising